TIA Service Training 1 S PDF

SN3lA1315 •A•usnpu!
Joj saamsuy
NIVHIIS
u!u!eii apvueS-V11
LS DIPANIS
suo s Tinsnpui pup

uolletuomv Joj buluIpiLL
1. The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS 2. Training Units and Addressing
Information and Training 3. Installation/Maintenance of the

Programmable Logic Controller
Automation and Drives
4. The SIMATIC Manager
5. Symbols
SIMATIC S7 6. Hardware Configuration
TIA-Service Training 1 7. Hardware Commissioning
8. Block Architecture and Block Editor
ST-SERV1 Course
AL: N ECCN: 5D992 9. Binary Operations
10. Digital Operations

Export Regulations
AL Number of European resp. German export list.
Goods with labels not equal to "N" are subject to export authorization.
ECCN Number of US export list. (Export Control Classification Number). Goods 11. Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP
with labels not equal to "N" are subject to re-export authorization for
export to certain countries.
Indication Goods labeled with "AL not equal to N" (here: technical documentations)
are subject to European or German export authorization when being
exported out of the EU.
Goods labeled with "ECCN not equal to N" (here: technical
12. Rewiring a User Program
documentations) are subject to US re-export authorization.
Even without a label, or with label "AL:N" or "ECCN:N", authorization may
be required due to the final whereabouts and purpose for which the
goods are to be used (here: technical documentations).
Decisive are the export labels stated on order acknowledgements,
delivery notes and invoices.
13. Introduction to Micromaster
This document was produced for training purpose.

SIEMENS assumes no responsibility for its contents. 14. Documenting, Saving, Archiving
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted
without express written authority. Offenders will be liable to damages. All rights,
including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are
reserved.
15. Closing Exercise
(--) SIEMENS AG 2009
16. Solutions
Name:
17. Training and Support
Course: from to
Instructor:
18.
Infoline Tel: 01805 23 56 11

Fax: 01805 23 56 12 19.
Internet: http://www.siemens.com/sitrain
Version V5.9.1 20.

(for STEP? V5.4 SP3. WinCC flexible 2008. Starter V4.0)
1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 2.1 SITRAIN Training for

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.1 qtr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
The SIMATIC S7 System Family ...... 2
Objectives 3
SIMATIC S7 Overview ................................................................................................................... 4
What does "Totally Integrated Automation" Mean ...... 5
The SIMATIC S7/C7 and WinAC Controllers ...... 6
S7-200 ........................................................................................................................................... 7
S7-200 Micro Controller 8
S7-200: Modules / Expansion Modules (EM) ...... 9
S7 - 300 Automation System .......................................................................................................... 10
S7-300: Modules ............................................................................................................................ 11
S7-300: CPU Design ...................................................................................................................... 12
S7-400 Automation System ............................................................................................................ 13
S7-400: Modules ............................................................................................................................ 14
S7-400: CPU Design ...................................................................................................................... 15
SIMATIC Embedded Automation - Overview .................................................................................. 16
Device Spectrum of SIMATIC Embedded Automation .................................................................... 17
An Application Example for PC-based Automation ........................................................................ 18
SIMATIC Microbox 427-B RTX "Embedded PC" ............................................................................ 19
SIMATIC S7- mEC (Modular Embedded Controller) ........................................................................ 20
PG/PC Requirements for Installing STEP 7 ..................................................................................... 21
Installing the STEP 7 Basic Package .............................................................................................. 22
STEP 7 Tools ................................................................................................................................. 23
STEP 7 Software Packages (Examples) ......................................................................................... 24
If You Want to Know More about the Topic "TIA" ............................................................................ 25
More Information ............................................................................................................................ 26
SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 The SIMATIC S7 System Family
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009

V,
SITRAIN Training for
Automation and Industnal Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.2
Contents Page
Programming Sequence Control Systems with S7- GRAPH ............................................................ 27
The State Diagram Method S7- HiGraph ......................................................................................... 28
Programming in the High Level Language S7- SCL ......................................................................... 29
CFC - Tool for Graphic Interconnection of Si Blocks ....................................................................... 30
Process Diagnosis with S7- PDIAG ................................................................................................. 31
Testing User Programs with S7- PLCSIM ........................................................................................ 32
Runtime Software for Closed-loop Control Engineering Tasks ......................................................... 33
Communicating with SIMATIC NET ................................................................................................. 34
Operator Control and Process Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI .......................................................... 35
Process Visualization and Operator Control with WinCC ................................................................. 36
Process Automation with SIMATIC PCS 7 ....................................................................................... 37
DRIVES Technology ....................................................................................................................... 38
The SINAMICS Family .................................................................................................................... 39

1
SIEMENS
Objectives
Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ...
have an overview of the SIMATIC S7 system family
be familiar with the S7-300 and S7-400 automation systems
have an overview of the modules available for these automation

systems
understand the concept of "Totally Integrated Automation" (T.I.A.)
be familiar with the programming devices
be familiar with the PC requirements for working with STEP7
be familiar with the tools of the STEP7 basic programming package
have an overview of the most important tools used in the T.I.A.

concept
SIMATIC S7 li SITRAIN Training for

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved.
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.3 vi Automation and Industrial Solutions

•
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Overview
SIMATIC PG SIMATIC Software

SIMATIC HMI
SIMATIC PC
k:
kr:
kt tail.
,
111
YYYYYYYYiY
MPI Network
SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet
PROFIBUS
aI
SIMATIC
Controller
A e
PROFIBUS DP
AS-Interface O 0
iy
O 0
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 SITRAIN Training for

1
File: SERV1_01E.4 47. Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction For the operation of machines, equipment and processes in almost all areas of
manufacturing you require control elements in addition to energy supply. It must
be possible to initiate, control, monitor and end the operation of any given
machine or process.
Hard-wired In the hard-wired controllers of the past, the program logic was governed by
Controllers -> PLC the task-specific wiring of contactors and relays.
Today, programmable logic controllers are used to solve automation tasks. The
logic stored in the program memory of an automation system does not depend on
equipment design and wiring and can be modified at any time with the help of a
programming device.
Totally Integrated Production processes are no longer seen as individual partial processes, but
Automation rather as integral components of an entire production process.
The total integration of the entire automation environment is today achieved with
the help of:
• one common software environment that integrates all components and tasks
into one uniform easy to use system
• a common data management (central database)
• a common communication between all participating automation components.

SIEMENS
What does "Totally Integrated Automation" Mean
WinCC PCS7
/
/
w
w
D) SIMATIC S7
LE]
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 111 SITRAIN Training for

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.5 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Totally Integrated The new SIMATIC family unifies all devices and systems, such as hardware
Automation and software, into a uniform, powerful system platform.
In this platform existing barriers between computer, PLC, and process control
have been overcome. Operator control and monitoring are improved.
Advantages This totally integrated automation offers you, among other things, the following
advantages:
• A scalable hardware platform. The optimal (price/performance)
functionality (PLC or computer) can be chosen for the task to be solved.
• An open totally integrated automation environment. An existing
system can be easily extended, or future automation solutions can be
integrated.
Existing investments retain their value. The transition from an existing
SIMATIC, TELEPERM or TI environment can be carried out very easily.
• Powerful software increases the productivity in the implementation of a
project reducing the engineering and life cycle costs. In addition, expenses for
commissioning, maintenance and service are reduced.
• SIMATIC is based on Windows standards and can thus easily use their
applications (standard software) and communication mechanisms.

SIEMENS
The SIMATIC S7/C7 and WinAC Controllers
modular
Upper and
middle forrirru
r rrr11
performance
range
inir1.11
SIMATIC S7 - 400
Lower and complete

middle modular
—TV l•willF■PimIll
performance
range
=LED
SIMATIC S7 - 300 SIMATIC C7 — 6xx
Micro PLC
corn act
SIMATIC S7 - 200 Logo

G
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 _ SITRAIN Training for
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.6 gler Automation and Industrial Solutions
SIMATIC S7 The programmable logic controller family consists of the Micro PLC (S7-200)
performance range, the lower/middle performance range (S7-300) and the
middle/upper performance range (S7-400).
SIMATIC 07 This complete system is the combination of a PLC (S7-300) and an operator
panel of the HMI operator control and process monitoring system. The integration
of programmable logic controller and operator panel in one device makes
complete machine controls in the smallest space and at an economical price
possible.
WinAC WinAC is a PC-based solution. It is used when various automation tasks (control,
visualization, data processing) are to be solved with a PC.

SIEMENS
S7-200
S7-22x
S7-21x
!
SIEMENS SF 10.0 11.0 Q0..01
.40 IQ
Q 11 ,0 CPI . 214
RUN 10.1 11.1
STOP 10.2 11.2 Q0.2
10.3 11.3 Q0.3
10.4 11.4 Q0.4
10.5 11.5 Q0.5
10.6 Q0.6
M.7 Q07
SIMATIC
0'7-200

File: SERV1_018.7 lir Automation and Industrial Solutions
Features • Modular small control system for the low-end performance range,
• Performance-graded range of CPUs,
• Extensive selection of modules,
• Expandable design with up to 7 modules,
• Backplane bus integrated in the modules,
• Can be networked with
- RS 485 communications interface or
- PROFIBUS or
- connected with Industrial Ethernet,
• Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules,
• No slot rules for peripheral modules,
• Own software,
• "Complete package" with power supply, CPU, I/O in one device,
• "Micro PLC" with integrated functions.

SIEMENS
S7-200 Micro Controller
Status Indicators
Status Indicators
lk for Integrated DO
SIEMENS
SINAlIC
ST-200
SF
RUN
STOP
- Potentiometer
- Memory Card
- Mode Selector
PPI Connection
.1, -I, ..5...6„.2 .0 4
11 irirliqjak 214-'RD22-0Y130
Status Indicators
for Integrated DI

iv-
Automation and Industrial Solutions
Mode Selector For manual mode selection of the CPU:

STOP = Stop mode, the program is not executed.
TERM = Program execution, read/write access possible from PG.
RUN = Program execution, read-only access possible from PG.
Status Indicators SF = Group error; internal CPU fault; red
(LEDs) RUN = Run mode; green
STOP = Stop mode; yellow
DP = PROFIBUS-DP (only CPU 215)
Memory Card Slot for memory card. A memory card saves the program contents in the event of
a power outage without the need for a battery.
PPI Connection The programming device / text display or another CPU is connected here.
This enables you to access several controllers from a PG or text display. As well,
the S7-200 CPUs use the Network Read (NETR) and Network Write (NETW)
instructions to read and write to each other (peer-to-peer communication).

SIEMENS
S7-200: Modules / Expansion Modules (EM)
i i s #1drerla ,
i rd 'Afrawdrifir artr010:4:00:ffir
0
40191111ftliffilpr
I / 0 Modules Function Modules (FM) Communications

Processors (CP)

File: SERV1_01E.9 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Expansion • Digital input modules:

Modules (EM) - 24VDC
- 120/230VAC
• Digital output modules:
- 24VDC
- Relay
• Analog input modules:
- Voltage
- Current
- Resistance
- Thermocouple
• Analog output modules:
- Voltage
- Current
Communications Using the CP 242-2, the S7-200 can be connected to an AS-Interface as the
Processors (CP) master. In that way, 31 AS-Interface slaves can control up to 248 binary
elements. This greatly increases the number of inputs/outputs of the S7-200.
Other communications modules are the modem and PROFIBUS-DP expansion
modules. The SIMATIC NET CP 243-1 can be used to connect to Industrial
Ethernet.
Accessories Bus connector

SIEMENS

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.10 4F Automation and Industrial Solutions
Features • Modular small control system for the lower and middle performance range
• Performance-graded range of CPUs
• Extensive selection of modules
• Expandable design with up to 32 modules
• Backplane bus integrated in the modules
• Can be networked with
- Multipoint Interface (MPI),
- PROFIBUS or
- Industrial Ethernet or
- PROFINET
• Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules
• No slot rules for peripheral modules,
• Configuration and parameter setting with the help of the "Hardware
Configuration" tool

SIEMENS
S7-300: Modules
Q V Q Q Q Q CP:
PS CPU IM SM: SM: SM: SM: FM:
(optional) (optional) DI DO Al AO - Counting - Point-to Point
- Positioning - PROFIBUS
- Closed-loop - Industrial Ethernet
control

gr. Automation and Industrial Solutions
Signal Modules • Digital input modules: 24VDC, 120/230VAC

(SM) • Digital output modules: 24VDC, Relay
• Analog input modules: Voltage, Current,
Resistance, Thermocouple
• Analog output modules: Voltage, Current
Interface Modules The IM360/1M361 and 1M365 make multi-tier configurations possible.
(IM) The interface modules loop the bus from one tier to the next.
Dummy Modules The DM 370 dummy module reserves a slot for a signal module whose
(DM) parameters have not yet been assigned. A dummy module can also be used to
reserve a slot for installation of an interface module at a later date.
Function Modules Perform "special functions":

(FM) • Counting
• Positioning
• Closed-loop control.
Communications Provide the following networking facilities:

Processors (CP) • Point-to-Point connections
• PROFIBUS
• Industrial Ethernet
• PROFINET.
Accessories Bus connectors and front connectors

SIEMENS
S7-300: CPU Design
CPU 315-2DP until Oct. 2002 CPU 315-2DP after Oct. 2002

Mode Selector MRES = Memory reset function (Module Reset)

STOP = Stop mode, the program is not executed.
RUN-P = Program execution, read/write access possible from PG.
Status Indicators SF Group error; internal CPU fault or fault in module with diagnostics
(LEDs) capability.
BATF = Battery fault; battery empty or non-existent.
DC5V = Internal 5 VDC voltage indicator.
FRCE = FORCE; indicates that at least one input or output is forced.
RUN = Flashes when the CPU is starting up, then a steady light in Run
mode.
STOP = Shows a steady light in Stop mode.
Flashes slowly for a memory reset request,
Flashes quickly when a memory reset is being carried out,
Flashes slowly when a memory reset is necessary because a
memory card has been inserted.
Memory Card A slot is provided for a memory card. The memory card saves the program
contents in the event of a power outage without the need for a battery.
For CPUs after Oct. 2002, a Micro Memory Card is always necessary for
operation. It also provides the backup in the event of a power outage.
Battery Compartment For CPUs up until Oct. 2002, there is a receptacle for a lithium battery under the
cover. The battery provides backup power to save the contents of the RAM in
the event of a power outage. For CPUs after Oct. 2002, no battery is necessary.
MPI Connection Connection for a programming device or other device with an MPI interface.
DP Interface Interface for direct connection of distributed I/Os to the CPU.
SITRAIN Training for ' ST-SERV1

SIEMENS

114
Features • The power PLC for the mid to upper performance range,
• Performance-graded range of CPUs
• Extensive selection of modules
• Expandable design to over 300 modules
• Backplane bus integrated in the modules
• Can be networked with - Multipoint interface (MPI),
- PROFIBUS or
- Industrial Ethernet or
- PROFINET
• Central PG/PC connection with access to all modules
• No slot restrictions
• Configuration and parameter setting with the help of the "Hardware
Configuration" tool
• Multicomputing (up to four CPUs can be used in the central rack).

SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 A SITRAIN

v„ Training for
Signal Modules • Digital input modules: 24VDC, 120/230VAC

(SM) • Digital output modules: 24VDC, Relay
• Analog input modules: Voltage, Current, Resistance, Thermocouple
• Analog output modules: Voltage, Current.
Interface Modules The IM460, IM461, IM463, IM467 interface modules provide the connection
(IM) between various racks:
• UR1 (Universal Rack) with up to 18 modules
• UR2 (Universal Rack) with up to 9 modules
• ER1 (Expansion Rack) with up to 18 modules
• ER2 (Expansion Rack) with up to 9 modules.
Function Modules Perform "special functions":

(FM) • Counting
• Positioning
• Closed-loop control.
Communications Provide the following networking facilities:

Processors (CP) • Point-to-Point connections
• PROFIBUS
• Industrial Ethernet
• PROFINET.

SIEMENS
S7-400: CPU Design
Error LEDs
Slot for Memory

Card
Mode Selector
MPI/DP
Interface
DP Interface
External
Battery Supply

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.15 tr
Il
Fault LEDs LEDs for the CPU's statuses and faults, both internal and external
Memory Cards With the S7-400 CPUs you can, depending on your requirements, insert RAM
or flash EPROM cards as external load memory:
• RAM cards are available with a capacity of:
64KByte, 256KByte, 1MByte, 2MByte.
The CPU battery backs up the contents.
• Flash EPROM cards are available with a capacity of:
64KByte, 256KByte, 1MByte, 2MByte, 4MByte, 8MByte, 16MByte.
The contents are backed-up on the integrated EEPROMs.
Mode Selector MRES = Memory reset function (Module RESet)

STOP = STOP mode, that is, no program execution and output disabled
("OD" mode = Output Disabled).
RUN-P = Program execution, read/write access possible from PG.
MPI / DP
Interface MPI / DP interface (parameter-assignable in HW-Config) for
• establishing the online connection to the programming device
• connecting to distributed peripherals (DP)
• data exchange with other stations (S7 Communication)
DP Interface For connecting to distributed peripherals (DP, only for CPUs with 2 interfaces)
EXT-BATT Additional external battery socket for a 5 VDC to 15 VDC source to back up the
RAM when the power supply is being replaced.

SIEMENS
SIMATIC Embedded Automation - Overview
Modular Controller Open + Standard PC
SIMATIC S7 S7-mEC RTX IPC
• Highest ruggedness • Highest ruggedness ▪ Rugged (embedded)

• Modularity 111• Modularity • Commissioning requires
• Scalable • Scalable PC know-how
a Commissioning through • Commissioning through
"Automators" "Automators"
▪ H / F functionality • SIMATIC Soft-PLC and HMI • SIMATIC Soft-PLC and HMI

• 10 year replacement options options
parts availability • Standard PC operating system • Standard PC operating system
• Long-term availability and interfaces and interfaces
• Data-secure • Openness (HW + SW) • Openness (HW + SW)
• State-of-the-art PC technolog • Stat-of-the-art PC technology
The Best of Both Worlds

Automation T
anrai'i
d lnlfsotrial
r
Solutions
PC-based Control SIMATIC Embedded Automation is the implementation of various automation

tasks (PLC programming, visualization, data processing, HMI services) on one
common PC and software platform.
Today, three fundamental directions can be derived from this:
• Modular Controllers: field-proven S7-300 and S7-400 controllers with their
different versions and performance characteristics
• Embedded Controllers such as SIMATIC S7-mEC and SIMATIC Microbox
427B
• SIMATIC Panel PCs with Win AC MP and Industrial PCs
For this purpose, Siemens offers the System PC based Automation as a block out
of the area of "SIMATIC Totally Integrated Automation".
Configuration, programming and parameter-assignment is handled by the familiar
engineering tool STEP 7 as of Version V5.4 SP4. The WinCC flexible software
package makes the HMI configuration possible.
The existing WinAC RTX 2005 software is being replaced by the 2008 version.
The most significant expansion is the PROFINET functionality with PN 10 and
CBA (Component Based Automation). Included in this, among other things, is the
high performance operation of PROFINET 10 as well as the open communication
via "Open User Communication".

SIEMENS
Device Spectrum of SIMATIC Embedded Automation
.........
• • • • -
SIMATIC Microbox 427B- RTX SIMATIC Panel MP 177/277/377 +

SIMATIC Microbox 427B- HMI/RTX WinAC MP
SIMATIC Panel PC 477B- HMI SIMATIC S7-mEC
SIMATIC Panel PC 477B- HMI/RTX SIMATIC WinAC 2008 RTX
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 • SITRAIN Training for

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.17 ▪ Automation and Industrial Solutions
Device Spectrum The slide shows an overview of the most important device components that are
available for SIMATIC Embedded Automation.

SIEMENS
An Application Example for PC-based Automation
WinCC flexible Data server

Thin Client PG/PC HMI
Windows
System / Cell network Ethernet
interface
169.254...
111
11 3rd party
laasamanss-sw j .=
device 111111tall sammurnequivirn WINAC RTX
1111U1 , SI
f ••••■
PROFINET
OUC
interface
192.168...
I
Main application case for PC-based

Automation:
PROFINET 10 local "behind" CPU to avoid
dependancy on system configuration
PLC HMI Field device Drive (independent assignment of IP addresses).

I
File: SERV1_01E.18 hr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Application Example The application example above shows a possible structure for the use of a
SIMATIC Microbox 427-B in an automation solution. The connection of local PN
10 slaves takes place behind the CPU to avoid dependencies on the system
configuration. PROFINET 10 RT services can be used in parallel with CBA
functions on the same line. Third party devices can be addressed via the open T
communication (Open user communication) (T-send and T-receive).
WinAC RTX 2008 SIMATIC WinAC RTX 2008 makes use of a PROFINET 10 Controller Interface for
operating distributed PROFINET peripherals. Thereby, the RT and IRT operating
modes are supported. Moreover, two different interface types can be operated
with WinAC RTX 2008:
• the Standard Ethernet (LAN-Interface) of the SIMATIC PC
• the CP1616/1604, integrated PROFINET interface of the S7-mEC and the
SIMATIC PC
The interface integration in WinAC RTX 2008 and in the familiar STEP 7
configuration takes place similar to the PROFIBUS interfaces as submodules that
are used today. They behave like the integrated PN interface of the SIMATIC S7-
CPUs. Basically, the following types of data transmission are available (Standard
Ethernet LAN operating mode):
• PROFINET 10 RT with up to 128 PROFINET 10 devices
• PROFINET Component Based Automation (CBA)
• Open User Communication (T-communication)
• S7 communication and routing
Realtime Core WinAC RTX 2008 simplifies the installation of the Ardence RTX realtime core.
Effective immediately, this is completely integrated in the setup of WinAC RTX
and no longer has to be installed separately.

SIEMENS
SIMATIC Microbox 427-B RTX "Embedded PC"
Imo"=1712s1
System Fault RUN/STOP Qatei cPU tijIfe
SIEMENS 1
PS
ON
• BATF
CPU
IT! INTF IRUN Oi
O EXTF STOP
BUSE-I
• BUSF2
BUSF3
BUSF4 M RE S
'Ili FR CE
I RUN
STOP
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 _211

ItT
' SITRAIN Training for
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.19 and Industrial Solutions
Microbox 427B... The SIMATIC Microbox 427B-HMI/RTX is an "embedded solution" for combined
controller and operator control and visualization tasks. The ready-to-go Microbox
provides the WinAC RTX, WinCC flexible RT and Windows XPe software pre-
installed. Special properties with regards to retentive storing of SIMATIC WinAC
RTX user data exist.
Configuration and programming is done as usual with STEP 7. Industrial Ethernet
and PROFIBUS interfaces are available for download activities and data
communication. Furthermore, USB interfaces, connection possibilities for flat
screens (DVINGA), as well as a serial RS232 interface and up to three PC/104-
Plus cards are available.
SIMATIC WinAC RTX makes the use of an "Open Development Kit" for
implementing application-specific functions in the PLC program possible.

SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7- mEC (Modular Embedded Controller)
USB connection Remote Desktop

for mouse etc. Protocol (RDP) for
—0.11••■•••■■••.are.
access to all S7-mEC
," •
programs
• r
Thin
Client STEP 7 for
parameterization +
diagnosis (RTX)
EM PC EM PCI-104 EC31 RTX
2x USB Connection of S7
1x IE/PN standard peripherals
1x serial
1x DVI-I
lx serial Up to 3 PCI cards
1x CF slot

File: SERV1_01E.20 =_ Automation and Industrial Solutions
Embedded Controller The new high-performance SIMATIC S7-mEC "modular embedded controller"
completes the product portfolio in the area of the SIMATIC Controller. The
benefits of a Standard S7 Controller are combined with those of a PC-based
solution.
Different automation solution tasks can be implemented on one hardware p:atform
with the S7-mEC. The hardware basis consists of current PC technology with an
Intel Core Duo 1.2 GHz processor, a 2GB Flash Disk and 1 GB main memory.
SIMATIC WinAC RTX 2008 is used as the application program, Windows XPe
functions as the operating system. Remote services, such as, remote monitoring
via TCP/IP services are available. The S7-mEC also has a Multimedia Card Slot
(MMC).
The design without fan and hard drive is well-suited for the industrial environment.
Three Industrial Ethernet ports and up to two additional USB interfaces enable the
problem-free integration in existing automation scenarios.
The S7-mEC "modular embedded controller" is installed and configured like an
S7-300 PLC.
SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.4 SP4 with additional hardware patch is used as the
engineering tool (RTX version on the S7-mEC necessary).
WinCC flexible can be used as an additional option for operator control and
monitoring. The new SIMATIC Thin Client and other Windows XPe applications
can also be used.

1
SIEMENS
PG/PC Requirements for Installing STEP 7
Operating Systems: Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional

Microsoft Windows XP Professional
Microsoft Windows Vista
Memory on the
Hard Drive: Depending on the installation, between 400 MB and 800 MB
Mouse: Yes
Interfaces: • CP5611 (PCI) or

• CP5512 (PCMCIA) or
• PC adapter (USB)
• Industrial Ethernet Interface (NIC)
• Programming interface for Memory Card (optional)
/
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_010.21 A SITRAIN Training for
Requirements SIMATIC Programming devices (PG) provide the optimum basis for using the
STEP 7 software.
You can, however, also use a PC that fulfills the above-listed requirements. So
that you can make the necessary online connection between the automation
system (PLC) and the PC, the PC must be equipped with one of the interfaces
listed in the slide above.
If user programs are to be loaded on memory cards outside of the CPU, the PC
must also be equipped with the appropriate programming interface.

SIEMENS
Installing the STEP 7 Basic Package

About
6,01 SIMATIC Manager

[c) STEP 7 S7/M7/C7
•
Double-click on icon verswi V5.4 • SF%
SIMATIC IcOUre MM., L Wank[
Revisi n Level: K5.4.4.0
Manager 51,7 Converting 55 Files
PI LAD, STL, FBD - Programming 57 Blocks
Memory Card Parameter Assignment
Communication
rks
tt Office Applications
Activate signment
through
• Utilities
Start menu State Graphs
Documentation on figuring ocess Diagnostics
SIMATIC
Information S7-PLCSIM Simulating Modules
Business Appkations License Mona Setting the PG-PC Interface
OPC-XML B a STARTER
Programs ProSave MI TI 405-S7 Converting TI Files
f STEP 7 TI 5135-57 Converting TI Files
Documents
WinCC flexible 2008
Settings WinCC flexible Runtime 2008

'
111 Drive Monitor
Search SIMATIC Manager
ProTsol Pro CS
• Help and Support
0
r Run...
Log Off se3997...
43Shut Down...
d Start

%T Automation and Industrial Solutions
Installation 1. Activate "Setup.exe" on the Installation CD or use the automatic Setup routine
activation
2. Choose options
3. Choose language(s)
4. Insert authorization disk when prompted.
5. Re-boot when prompted
Software Protection The STEP 7 software is copy-protected and can only be used on one
programming device at a time.
When you have installed the software, you cannot start using it until you have
transferred the authorization to the hard disk drive from the authorization disk.
Notes • Be sure to read the notes in the README.TXT file on the authorization disk. If
you do not observe these instructions, you risk losing your authorization.
• For emergency operation, the STEP 7 basic package can also be used without
authorization. As well, there is also a 14 day limited authorization available in
addition to the unlimited (in time) authorization.
Hot fixes STEP7 software updates can be downloaded from the Internet.
Result The main tool in STEP 7 is the SIMATIC Manager. There are two ways in which
to activate it:
1. through the Task bar 4 Start - SIMATIC SIMATIC Manager or through
2. the icon "SIMATIC Manager" on the Windows Desktop.

SIEMENS
STEP 7 Tools
NCM 57
CFC - Interconnect blocks
Configure SIMATIC Workspace
5+7 Converting 55 Files

LAD, STL, FBD - Programming 57 Blocks
Memory Card Parameter Assignment
Qp NetPro - Configuring Networks
PID Control Parameter Assignment
57 SCL - Programming 57 Blocks
57-GRAPH - Programming Sequential Control Systems
57-PDIAG - Configuring Process Diagnostics
57-PLCSIM Simulating Modules
Setting the PG-PC Interface
TI 405-57 Converting TI Files
TI 505-57 Converting TI Files
57-HiGraph - Programming State Graphs
STARTER

File: SERV1_01E.23
41
°' Automation and Industrial Solutions
SIMATIC Manager The SIMATIC Manager manages the STEP 7 projects. It is the main program and
also appears on the WINDOWS desktop.
Notes "STEP 7 - Readme" provides detailed information about the version, installation
procedure, etc.
LAD, STL, FBD Tool for writing STEP 7 user programs in the "Ladder Diagram", "Statement List"
or "Function Block Diagram" programming languages.
Memory Card You can save your user programs on EPROM cards by either using the
Parameter programming device or an external prommer.
Assignment. Different drivers are required, depending on the application.
Configuring Network configuration with the "NetPro" tool which belongs to the STEP 7 basic
Networks package.
Setting the PG-PC This tool is used for setting the local node address, the transmission speed
Interface and the highest node address in the MPI network.
PID Control The basic STEP 7 software package also includes blocks for solving PID
Parameter (closed-loop) control problems. You choose "PID Control Parameter Assignment"
Assignment to start the program for assigning parameters to the closed-loop control blocks.
Converting S5 Files STEP5 programs can be converted into the corresponding STEP 7 programs with
the help of the S5/S7 converter.
Configure SIMATIC This option provides facilities for configuring multi-user systems.
Workspace
Converting TI Files SIMATIC TI programs can be converted into the corresponding STEP 7 program
with the help of the TI/S7 converter.

SIEMENS
STEP 7 Software Packages (Examples)
Which PLC? Necessary Options

SIMATIC S7-200 STEP 7
Micro/WIN
SIMATIC S7-300
STEP 7 Lite Tele Service S7- PLCSIM
;11
SIMATIC S7-300
STEP 7 S7- SCL S7- GRAPH
Standard PID
S7- HiGraph Fuzzy Control
Control
SIMATIC 57-400
Modular PID
DOCPRO TeleService
Control
PRODAVE
S7- PDIAG S7- PLCSIM
MPI
11111
STEP 7 Professional STEP 7 S7- SCL S7- PLCSIM S7- GRAPH
A SITRAIN Training for

SIMATIC S7
MP
Date: 18.09.2009 111P.
U. Automation and Industrial Solutions
STEP 7 STEP 7 is the basic package for configuring SIMATIC S7-300 or S7-400 systems.
With STEP 7 you can:
• configure hardware and assign parameters to it;
• configure communication;
• program;
• test and debug;
• document and archive;
• carry out diagnosis.
STEP 7 Lite STEP 7 Lite can be used to program the SIMATIC S7-300 (also the compact
CPUs). Programs that were created with STEP 7 Lite can also be exported to
STEP 7.
It is not possible to carry out a PROFIBUS (DP) or ETHERNET configuration!
ET200S or ET200X configuration (standalone) is possible.
PLCSIM and Teleservice can be used as option packages.
STEP 7 Micro STEP 7 Micro is suitable exclusively for configuring the S7-200.
License With the exception of STEP Micro/Win, a license is required for each package.
STEP 7 Professional STEP 7 Professional is a Software Package that contains all IEC languages:
STEP 7 Basic, S7-SCL, S7-GRAPH and the simulation package S7-PLCSIM.
STEP 7 Professional is available as an upgrade package (Powerpack) for STEP7.
Prerequisite for acquiring the powerpack is a valid STEP 7 license.

SIEMENS
If You Want to Know More about the Topic "TIA"

File: SERV1_01E.25 ‘r Automation and Industrial Solutions
Note The following pages contain either further information or are for reference to
complete a topic.
For more indepth study we offer advanced courses and self-learning mediums.

SIEMENS
SIEMENS Download
More Information
C Acrobat t to..-pler / "ILICI_Baugnypendatempdf]
f2abi learbeken Dgkment &wise tone. 50. ,_aff_j_Lj
r
511.119115
mikbaltscR5ck.iTo■ ► ■I • • ; 17I ei 64 Gig j4
57.300 ano to17 309 Lese.e.A
Programmable Controller.: Siemens Katalog CA 01 10/2002 D
Ma k* Somatc.mams Ealaks learbeilen 2uc4reri Ausieehililen JiAres lesezeichen Internet 3
§ e
EF-0 2 Zerk4b4K4UpPen- Neu. Neu CPU 315: J bbereicht I 6nmndungsbereiCh AAP. I Eunkrrord 'ochry Oaten I Bosteildalen i ZikeNinBeuelicleien
R-0 3 s Interaktivet Ketalog Siemens AID
Er-04 A 11 Antriebstechnik Produkte
D5 211 Automatisierungssysteme
El- 0 6 S 0 Industie-Autometnerungssys
Ei-0 s D Steuerungen ZenlFelbdugruppe 1 - Neu- N u CPU 315-2 DP
Set rArmS 8 s O H/F-Technik
FDA A O SIMATIC 505
E-Da O SIMATIC 05 Die CPU 315-2 DP verfugi
&stomata, & UV.:
AD C A SIMATIC 57 • Mikroprozeseor.
.‘..... DD O 07-200 der Prozessor erreicht eine Bearbeitungszeit von ca 100 ns je einaranweisung und 4 us le
-.
.n g E13--0 E 57-300/S7-300F/5 • 128 KByte Arbedsspeicher (entspncht Owe 43 KAnweisungen):
51F1.41FRIG
DF Li EMI-6111,N Der umfangreiche Arbeitsspeicher fOr ablaufrelevante Programmteile bietetAnwenderprog
DG E Zentralbaugrupi Cards (may 8 MByte) als Ladespetcner fur Programm ermoglichen zusatiich die Projektat
Di E CPU 312C Kommentaren) in der CPU und kOnnen zur Datenarchivierung und Rezepturverwaltung yew
1E CPU 313C • Flexible Ausbaubarkeit;
S I (OAT E CPU 313C-2_ max. 32 Baugruppen (Izeiliger Aufbau)
El CPU 313C-2 • Mehrpunkffehige Schnittstelle
E CPU 3140-2 Die integrierle Schnittstelle MPI kann max_ 16 Verbindungen gleichzeitig zu 07-3001400 ode
E CPU 314C-2 Von den Verbindungen ist jeweils eine kir PG und eine (Or OP fest reserwert. Mit der MPI ist
• Neu . CPU 3 Datenkommunikation" eine einfache Vernetzung mit max. 16 CPUs aufzubauen
• Neu CPU 3
• PROFIBUS DP-Schnittstelle
• =ME Die CPU 315-2 DP mit PROFIBUS DP-MastertSlave-Schnittstelle ermeglicht einen dezentri
p CPU 313 Geschwindigkeit und einfacher Handhabung. Die dezentrale Periphene wird aus Anwende
CPU 314 (gieiche Projeldierung, Adressierung und Programmierung).
E CPU 315 Es wird die PROFIBUS DP V1-Norm vollstandig unterstutzt. Dies ermbglichtverbesserte Di
•I El CPU 315-21 V1-Normslaves.
E CPU 316-21
• Passwortschutz,
E CPU 318-21 Ein Passwortkonzept das Anwenderprogramm vor unberechtigtem Zugriff
2 CPU 312 1Ft
DI CPU 3141Ff • Diagnose-Puffer;
E CPU 314 CIL Die letzten 100 Fehler- und Unterbrechungsereignisse werden zu Diagnosezwecken in ein
E CPU 315E • Wartungsfrete Datensicherung;

SIMATIC S7 Date: 1 8.09.2009
Ur Automation and Industrial Solutions
Information You will find more information on the SIMATIC systems in the items below.
Manual The manuals give detailed information on the hardware and software. In addition
to the paper version, you can also use the electronic manuals. They are, in part,
included in the installation or STEP 7.
You can download the most recent SIMATIC manuals free of charge from the
Internet.
A collection of electronic SIMATIC manuals (HW, SW, Engineering, HMI, NET,
PG) can be ordered under the order number 6ES7 998-8XC01-8YE0.
Catalog The ST 70 catalog contains all SIMATIC components with their performance and
order data.
Electronic Catalog In addition to the paper version, the (CA01) catalog is also available as a CD. This
information is also available on the Internet (www.siemens.de/Simatic).
Siemens Partner Of course, your Siemens partner is also available for further information.

SIEMENS
Programming Sequence Control Systems with S7- GRAPH
❑ S7-GRAPH: The tool for

programming sequence cascades
o Compatible with DIN EN 6.1131-3 S1
o Designed for the requirements of
production engineering
o Graphic division of the process
— T1 — T4
into steps and transitions
o Steps contain actions
o Transitions check the conditions S2 S5 S6
for switching to the next step
ij The following phases of T2 — T5

automation can be
optimized with S7-GRAPH:
o Planning, Configuring S4
o Programming
o Debugging
o Commissioning — T3
o Maintenance, Diagnostics
0
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 2/1 SITRAIN Training for

Siemens AG 2008. AU rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.27 ittr Automation and Industrial Solutions
S7-GRAPH With the S7-GRAPH programming language, you can clearly and quickly
configure and program sequential sequences that you wish to control with an S7
PLC system.
The process is thus split into single steps with their own function scope. The
sequence is graphically displayed and can be documented with picture and text.
The actions to be performed and the transitions, which control the conditions for
switching to the next step, are determined in the individual steps. Their definitions,
interlocking or monitoring are determined by a subset of the
STEP 7 programming language LAD (ladder diagram).
S7-GRAPH for S7-300/400 is compatible with the sequence language established
in the DIN EN 61131-3 standard.
Functionality The following functions are offered:

• Several sequencers in the same S7-GRAPH function block
• Free number assignment of the steps and transitions
• Simultaneous branches and alternative branches
• Jumps (also to other sequence cascades)
• Starting/Stopping of sequence cascades as well as activating/holding of
steps.
Test Functions • Display of active steps or faulty steps

• Status display and Modify Variable
• Switching between the operating modes: manual, automatic and jogging
mode
User Interface • Overview, Single Page and Single-step display

• Graphic separation of locking controls and monitoring conditions.

SIEMENS
The State Diagram Method S7- HiGraph

Position
❑ S7-HiGraph: The tool for Cam-operated Index out
programming using switch
State Diagrams
o Division of the machine into 111771=1
functional units
o Creating state diagrams
for every function unit
Motor Index in
o States contain actions Counterbearing
lock/release
o State diagrams communicate Index
Motor yt, Counterbearing
using messages
❑ The following phases of
automation can be
Coordinator
optimized with S7-HiGraph:
o Planning, Configuring
o Programming and Debugging
o Commissioning
o Maintenance, Diagnostics
o Supports reusability

Overview S7-Higraph allows the asynchronous processes to be described using state

diagrams. The machine or system to be automated is looked upon as a
combination of independent elements, the function units.
Function Units The function units are the smallest mechanical units of a machine or system.
As a rule, a function unit is made up of mechanical and electrical basic
elements. In programming, a state diagram is assigned to every function unit.
In it, the functional, that is, the mechanical and electrical properties of the
function unit are mapped.
State Diagram The state diagram describes the dynamic behavior of a function unit. It
describes the states that a function unit can have, as well as the state
transitions. State diagrams can be used more than once. State diagrams that
were created once for a specific function unit, can be reused in other program
locations.
Diagram Groups By combining parallel running state diagrams, you can describe the complete
and Instances functionality of a machine or system.
Advantages This "object-oriented" method of S7-HiGraph is well suited for:

• the machine and system manufacturer (mechanical engineering)
• the automation specialist (electrical engineering) as common means of
description
• the commissioning engineer and the maintenance specialist

SIEMENS
Programming in the High Level Language S7- SCL

FUNCTION BLOCK Integrator
o S7-SCL: High level language for VAR INPUT
creating PLC programs !nit : BOOL; // Reset output value
x : REAL; // Input value
o Compatible with DIN EN 6.1131-3 Ta : TIME; // Sampling interval in ms
(ST=Structured Text)) Ti : TIME; // Integration time in ms
o Certified according to "PLC open" olim : REAL; // Output value upper limit
Base Level ulim : REAL; // Output value lower limit
END_VAR
o Contains all the typical elements of
a high level language, such as VAR_OUTPUT
operands, terms, control statements y : REAL:. 0.0; // Initialize output value with 0
END_VAR
o PLC specifics are integrated,
such as I/O access, timers, BEGIN
counters...) IF TIME_TO_DINT(Ti) = 0 THEN // Division by ?
OK := FALSE;
Advantages: y := 0.0;
o Well structured, easy to understand RETURN;
END_IF;
program IF Init THEN
o For those knowledgeable in high y:= 0.0;
level languages ELSE
y := y+TIME_TO_DINT(Ta)*x/TIME_TO_DINT(Ti);
o For complex algorithms IF y > olim THEN y := olim; END_IF;
IF y < ulim THEN y := ulim; END_IF;
END_IF;
END_FUNCTION_BLOCK

ittr
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E29
Overview S7-SCL (Structured Control Language) is a PASCAL-similar high level text

language for S7 - 300/400 and C7 and simplifies the programming in control
technology for mathematical algorithms, data management and organization
tasks.
S7-SCL has the PLC open Base Level certificate and is in accordance with the
DIN EN 61131-3 (Structured Text) standard.
With S7-SCL, you can formulate time-saving and economical solutions for
automation tasks.
Functionality SCL offers the functional scope of a high level language such as:
• loops
• alternatives
• branch distributors, etc.
combined with control-specific functions such as:
• bit accesses to the I/O, bit memories, timers, counters etc.
• access to the symbol table
• STEP7 block accesses
Advantages of SCL • simple to learn programming language especially for beginners

• easy to read (understandable) programs are generated.
• simpler programming of complex algorithms and processing of complex data
structures
• integral debugger for symbolic debugging of the source code (single-step,
breakpoints, etc.)
• system integration in S7 languages such as STL and LAD.

SIEMENS
CFC - Tool for Graphic Interconnection of S7 Blocks
❑ CFC (Continuous Function Chart): •

lo
••
•
Tool for graphic creation •
•
rato,f7
.
of PLC programs
CRMII
• •CIA!
• • ,T7T-P
• •SK.Z.L.
o Blocks are placed on •

• lb
function charts
and interconnected Eta: CFC - [PC57Demo_extlSIMATIC 400-Slo ACP1.14111 OF' I.■AS V,F I
gi Ben bate. gritipan &WPM jai !nem fere fee*
o Interconnection is Etta! 11
---1.411412c1
possible:
Oevat
- between I/O fields Fa.
- also to blocks in
other charts
011.1 CC 017 SO
o Sources and destinations 1,1 RIC CO C7•001111

SO /74
.11.001141 PO
OM ON BO
— CO CIN SC CU BB LI TIC.. CC
are managed in the OM,* CO
CUM
margins CPO. CO
CIO CO
RV SC
❑ Advantages ria
CCM
o Program creation for

technologists 0-1110 S Er•T•
S Lt. SO
.1.0.11 I
o quick creation, testing ST 171 014
and commissioning times

Automation T
arra
di nI n
indgufsot
r
rial Solutions
Overview With the engineering tool CFC (Continuous Function Chart), you can create
automation tasks by drawing a technology plan - similar to a Function Block
Diagram in PLC programming.
In this graphic programming method, blocks are positioned in a type of drawing
sheet and are graphically interconnected with one another. You can quickly and
easily convert technological aspects into complete executable automation
programs with CFC.
Scope The following is supplied with CFC:

• CFC Editor
• Code Generator
• Debugger
• Standard block libraries
Note The CFC product, as an option package, is smoothly integrated in the STEP 7
architecture with a unified Look & Feel and with common data management. CFC
is easy to use, easy to learn and provides consistent data management.
The CFC tool plays an important role in the configuration of the PCS 7 process
control system. Prerequisite is a previously installed SCL option package.

SIEMENS
Process Diagnosis with S7- PDIAG

❑ Process diagnosis: Detection of
faults occurring outside the PLC
o Sensor/actuator defective, movement faulty,
❑ S7- PDIAG: Tool for configuring

■ •u• •■•
the fault definition in STL, LAD, FBD •
•
■ sea .***
• ass •"•
S ■
o Integrated in the development environment MAU
a Ve
o Simple formulation of fault monitoring and
message texts (during and after the
program session)
o Fault detection and criteria analysis are
conducted automatically
o Comprehensive information for the operator
on:
• type of fault
• location of fault
• cause of fault I 1.0 Q1.0
❑ Reduction of down-time C)
SIMATIC S7 SITRAIN Training for

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.31 %;. Automation and Industrial Solutions
Process Diagnosis Diagnosis is important in the operating phase of a plant or machine. Diagnosis is
usually initiated when a fault leads to standstill or malfunction of the plant or
machine.
Programmable logic controllers are widely used in many areas. Field experience
has proven that over 98% of faults occur in the peripherals (such as magnet
valves and end switches). The distribution of fault occurrences makes it
meaningful for the diagnosis to focus on process faults, since missing messages
or faulty functions lead to down-times and the resulting costs.
Process diagnosis diagnoses exactly these external components (such as
sensors and actuators) or sequences in the process of a plant or machine.
S7-PDIAG The S7-PDIAG software package enables a uniform configuration of the process
diagnosis for the SIMATIC S7-300/400 controllers in the LAD, FBD and STL
programming languages.
You can already define signal monitoring routines including first-up signal
acquisition and criteria analysis and input the associated message texts while or
after creating the user program in the LAD, FBD or STL programming languages.
PDIAG automatically generates monitoring blocks which you must call in your
user program.
At every call, the fault conditions are checked and in case of an error, the relevant
process values are acquired and sent to the display device for the criteria
analysis.
For the configuration of the operator panel, S7-PDIAG stores the process
diagnosis data in a shared database. This data can then be accessed by the OP
configuration software WinCC flexible with the option package ProAgent and be
made available for display on the operator panel.

SIEMENS
Testing User Programs with S7- PLCSIM

S7-PLCSIM - SimViewl MCI Ell
Fie Edit View Insert ELC Elecute Tools Window Help
❑ S7-PLCSIM: Simulation software
for offline testing of PLC programs -
Aim 61 -
in -in IIJ 11
o Functional program test uCPU 300/400 ell PI8 0 [ EE
• on a simulated CPU sop P RUN-P
SF IPIB Q 'Bits zi
E
DC r RUN 76 54 3210
• with display/modify I/O RUN
STOP r STOP MRES I rrr r rrrr
o Testing of user blocks in
Pres Fl to get Help. =2
• LAD, FBD, STL, S7-SCL,
• S7-GRAPH, S7-HiGraph, CFC
• S7-PDIAG, WinCC
0 Advantages
o Faults can be detected early and eliminated
o Many tests are already possible in the office
without the final hardware

S7 - PLCSIM The SIMATIC S7-PLCSIM engineering tool (option package) emulates a complete
S7-CPU including addresses and I/O on a PG/PC.
S7-PLCSIM thus enables you to test a program offline on the PG/PC. All STEP 7
programming languages (STL, LAD, FBD, S7-Graph, S7-HiGraph, S7-SCL and
CFC) can be used.
S7-PLCSIM allows you to check the functionality of user programs on the PC/PG,
regardless of whether the final hardware is available or not.
Functionality S7-PLCSIM offers the following functions for running a program on a simulated
PLC:
• An icon in the SIMATIC Manager 's toolbar switches the Simulation on or off.
If the simulation is turned on, every new connection is automatically made to
the simulated PLC.
If the simulation is turned off, then every new connection is made to the
"
real" PLC.
• You can create view objects that allow you to access memory areas, accu-
mulators and tabs of the simulated CPU. You can modify and display all the
data in these view objects.
• You can change the CPU 's operating mode (STOP, RUN and RUN-P) just
as with a "real" CPU. The simulation also provides a "Pause" function that
allows you to halt the program execution without affecting the state of the
program.
Advantages With S7-PLCSIM, you can detect faults early in the development phase and
eliminate them. The quality of the user programs is greatly improved and the
commissioning costs are lowered.

SIEMENS
Runtime Software for Closed-loop Control Engineering Tasks
Confi- Basic SW
gura- or
Overview tion option
tool package
PID Controller No Basic SW
Basic SW PID Control Yes Basic SW
Standard PID Control Yes Option
Modular PID Control Yes Option
Fuzzy Control Yes Option
Neuro Systems Yes Option
Closed-loop control m. Yes
S7-200 S7-300 C7

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.33 1
Closed-loop In a closed-loop control system process variables are controlled in such a way
Control Engineering that they reach their new preset values as quickly as possible and that they
maintain these in spite of the effect of disturbances.
Basic Software The STEP 7 basic package already contains a series of function blocks for
PID Control solving simple control engineering tasks.
Standard This additional package contains blocks and a parameter assignment tool with
PID Control integrated control setting for standard tasks such as temperature controllers,
flow rate regulators, pressure regulators etc.
Modular Through the interconnection of supplied standard function blocks, you can
PID Control implement just about every closed-loop control engineering structure, even in
the upper performance range of process engineering.
The package contains 27 FBs and a commissioning tool.
Fuzzy Control Fuzzy Systems are used when the mathematic description of a process is
difficult or even impossible, when a process behavior is not consistent, when
non-linearities occur, but, on the other hand, experience with the process
exists.
NeuroSystems Neuronal Systems are used with those problems, whose structure and solution
are only partly known. NeuroSystems can be used in all automation levels,
from the individual closed-loop controller to the optimization of a plant.

SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 111

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_01E.34 4T Automation and Industrial Solutions
SIMATIC NET SIMATIC NET is the name of an entire family of networks.

• Industrial Ethernet according to IEEE 802.3 - the international standard for
the networking of areas and cells
• PROFIBUS according to EN 50170 - the international standard for the field
area and the cell network with a limited number of nodes
• AS-Interface - for communication with sensors and actuators.
Industrial Ethernet The Industrial Ethernet network is a cell level network according to the inter-
national standard IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) and is designed for industrial use.
Extensive open network solutions are possible. A high transmission rate is
guaranteed with various transmission media. Industrial Ethernet is an industry
standard, world-wide tested and accepted.
PROFINET PROFINET as the standard for communication applications in the field level
enables the interfacing of distributed field devices through Industrial Ethernet with
the TCP/IP protocol.
PROFIBUS PROFIBUS is the bus system for cell networks with a limited number of nodes. It
is based on the European standard EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS. Since the
requirements according to EN 50170 are fulfilled, PROFIBUS guarantees
openness for the connection of components from other manufacturers that
conform to standards. The PROFIBUS accessing procedure functions according
to the "Token Passing with subordinate Master-Slave" procedure. As a result, a
distinction is made between active and passive network participants.
AS - Interface The AS-Interface is a networking system for binary sensors and actuators in the
field area. With AS-Interface, binary actuators and sensors become capable of
communication, for which a direct field bus connection was not technically
possible up until now or was not economical.

SIEMENS
Operator Control and Process Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI
Process visualization Process visualization

system system
SIMATIC WinCC SIMATIC WinCC flexible
SIMATIC PG, PC SIMATIC Panels, PGs, PCs
oft
,
1 mat ,....: l E.,.
--- .
10
4
-41E00101616W, E F;':tql: .,
ing...aim s'
wiliom—idAZ -Er&

File: SERV1_01E.35 41
1
Overview For the SIMATIC S7, there is a field-proven HMI system for user-friendly process
control and monitoring available, the SIMATIC HMI. It ranges from the simple text
display to the process visualization system.
SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI are completely harmonized and integrated. This
simplifies the use of the human-machine interface system SIMATIC HMI
considerably.
• SIMATIC S7 has already integrated HMI services. The HMI system
requests process data from the SIMATIC S7. Data transmission between
SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI is carried out by the two operating systems
and does not have to be taken into account in the user program.
SIMATIC HMI systems can be connected directly to PPI (S7-200) and
MPI or PROFIBUS (S7-300 and S7-400). Operation using PROFIBUS makes
process control and monitoring even over greater distances possible.
• Numerous features from the uniform database and symbols up to the same
user-friendly Windows-oriented user interfaces simplify the use of HMI
systems.

SIEMENS
Process Visualization and Operator Control with WinCC
/ Alarm Logging / Programming

(Message System) Interfaces
Process visualization
Tag Logging / Standard

/ (Archiving) Interfaces
/ Report Designer / PLC

(Report System) Communication

WinCC SIMATIC WinCC (Windows Control Center) is the open process visualization
system from Siemens. It can be integrated problem free in a new or already
existing PLC system.
Function Modules The heart of SIMATIC WinCC is an industry and technology independent basic
system with all the important functions for operator control and monitoring, such
as:
• Pixel graphic display
• Measured value acquisition (archiving functions, data compression,
minimum and maximum values etc.)
• Message display, archiving and reporting
• Process communication to different PLC systems
• Standard interlaces, for example, Microsoft programs
• Documentation of machine and process sequences with individual reports.
Basis of WinCC WinCC is based on the 32-bit standard operating systems Windows 2000/XP
from Mircrosoft. This platform gives WinCC the following functionality:
• Use of the Windows operating equipment (such as printer and driver)
• Data exchange with other Windows applications via DDE, ODBC, SQL,
OLE, ActiveX and OPC.
• API programming interlace
• use of hardware available in the market

1
SIEMENS
Process Automation with SIMATIC PCS 7
Engineering System Process terminal 1 Process terminal 2 Process terminal 3
WA WI !Oi
l _Pli
„„
1 Terminal bus
Pi W inCC OS ICWinCC OS-Server

-----r 7=:1
17_- ..._
_ -:* .
System bus
I 41 4
S7-400as
central unit
ET 200M
~r 41 G
Field devices

Introduction SIMATIC PCS 7 represents the new control system generation in SIEMENS. It is
the consistent, further development and summary of experiences with systems
that are based on TELEPERM M, SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC S5. As a result, it is
tailored to the process control system tasks in all industries.
Engineering The Engineering System can be designed as its own station in the system. It
System can however also be loaded as a software package in the OS components at the
same time.
The Engineering System has the following components:
• STEP 7 with the SIMATIC Manager, the central database, and with HW
Config for configuring hardware and networks. It also contains the servers,
that facilitate consistent configuration between PLC and OS.
• SCL (Structured Control Language) as PASCAL-similar higher level
programming language for block generation
• CFC (Continuous Function Chart) for graphic configuration of the basic
automation functions
• SFC (Sequential Function Chart) for graphic configuration of production
sequences
• Expansion of the SIMATIC Manager with "Technological Hierarchy”
• WinCC (Windows Control Center) for OS configuration
• DOCPRO for documenting configuration data
Import/Export wizard for bi-directional data exchange with other CAE
systems
These components are supplemented by libraries that provide pre-defined blocks
for PLC and OS.

SIEMENS
DRIVES Technology
Consistent drives spectrum for all applications

❑ From standard drives with 100 W
up to large drives with 50 MW
❑ Motion and vector control
❑ Technology-specific closed-loop
controllers

Overview You have the following drives spectrum:

• Low voltage motors are the first High Performance AC for machine and
systems - the solution for the future: maintenance free, dynamic and
powerful.
• SIMOVERT MASTERDRIVES frequency converters. They control the speed
of AC motors extremely exact. This series was designed for world-wide
use. It is suitable for all supply voltages from 230 to 690 volt and is certified
world-wide.
• MICROMASTER and MICRO/MIDIMASTER Vector standard converters are
frequency converters in the 120 watt to 75 kW performance range. Because
of their compact form, they can be installed in the smallest space. The
sensorless vector control allows it to be used in the medium performance
range even for demanding applications.
COMBIMASTER are compact units consisting of three-phase low voltage
motors and frequency converters.
MICROMASTER Integrated are frequency converters (IP 65) that are applied
directly to three-phase low voltage motors of different manufacturers.
MICRO/MIDIMASTER Eco are frequency converters specially designed for
the requirements of the heating, ventilation and air conditioning industry.
• SIMOREG converter equipment are fully digital compact units for three-
phase operation and are used for armature and field supply of variable speed
DC drives. The range of rated direct current of the devices is from 15 to
2000 A and can be increased by parallel connection of SIMOREG devices.
The most familiar applications include hoisting gear, ski lifts, elevators,
cranes, and other reversing drives.

SIEMENS
The SINAMICS Family

Frequency Converter for Standard Applications
SINAMICS G110 SINAMICS G120 SINAMICS G150

(single drive) (single drive) (single drive)
Frequency Converter for Motion-Contol Applications
SINAMICS S120 SINAMICS S120 SINAMICS S120

Chassis Cabinet Module
Block size Book size

(single drive) (modular)

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_01E.39 V Automation and Industrial Solutions
Standard Drives with limited to medium demands on the control dynamics and
Applications functionality. Energy feedback into the network is not required as a rule
(such as, pumps, fans, compressors, conveyor technology, door drives,
mixers, kneaders, mills).
Motion Control Drives with high demands on the control dynamics and functionality.
Applications Energy feedback into the network is possible (for example, single drives
such as elevators, extruders, conveyor technology, multimotor systems
with modular design such as paper machines, rolling mill lines, plastic film
machines, synthetic fiber systems, crane systems, packaging machines,
printing machines, handling (robots), machine tools)
Benefits The new drives family offers a handling as uniform as possible of planning,
commissioning and parameter assignment.
This is made possible through:
• SIZER Configuration and Calculation Software
• STARTER Commissioning Software
• Uniform parameter structure
• Uniform hardware design
Other Versions In addition to the display above of the most important family members,
there is:
- SINAMICS G120D for decentralized configuration outside of the cabinet
- Frequency converters in the design of the SIMATIC ET200S and
ET200pro
- SINAMICS G130, the G150 without cabinet for the individual installation
- SINAMICS S150, the feedback-capable version of the G150
- SINAMICS medium voltage drives (> 1000V) for large power ratings.

SIEMENS
Training Units and Addressing 2

ihr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Training Area Setup with S7 - 300 ...... 2
Configuration of the S7 - 300 Training Unit ...... 3
The Simulator ...... 4
The Conveyor Model ...................................................................................................................... 5
Complete Symbol List 6
If You Want to Know More .............................................................................................................. 8
Training Area Setup with S7- 400 ...... 9
Configuration of the S7-400 Training Unit ....................................................................................... 10

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Training Units and Addressing
SIEMENS

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV102E.2
S7 - 300 Training Area The training area consists of the following components:
• An S7-300 programmable logic controller with the CPU 315-2 DP
• Digital input and output modules, analog module
• Simulator with digital and analog sections
• Conveyor model
• ET 200S distributed peripheral
• MM420 Micromaster with PROFIBUS module
• TP170B Touchpanel
• Programming device or PC

SIEMENS
Configuration of the S7 - 300 Training Unit 2
Module --> PS CPU DI 32 DO 32 D18/D08 Al 2
Slot No. --> 2 4 5 6 7
I/O Address --> 0 4 8 304
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
Configuration The programmable controller is configured with the following modules:
Slot 1: Power Supply 24V/5A

Slot 2: CPU 315-2 DP
Slot 4: Digital input 32x24V Inputs from the simulator
and thumbwheel buttons
Slot 5: Digital output 32x24V/0.5A Outputs from the simulator
and digital display
Slot 6: Digital input and output Conveyor model
module 8X24V/ 8x24V 0.5A
Slot 7: Analog input 2 Al Analog section from the simulator
Addresses You can set the starting addresses of the modules by parameter assignment
(freely).

SIEMENS
The Simulator
Potentiometers for
setting the
BCD Digital Display analog values
"
"
QW_DigDisp" (QW 6) PIW_All " (PIW 304)
DI DO
.0 ND • .0
1 ND 11111111
• .1 . 7 s•
.2 ND • .2 / 1
— 1 I /
.3 ND • .3 1 / I I
s. :-
4 ND • 4 AIMMIIIMIEL 7
.5 No * .5
.6 ND • .6 -15V...*15V -15V...+15V
AI2 0.01A02
‘
.7 0 0 .7
All
)9 • .0 Ill •
.1 All
'
• •
OV Al2
ND • 2
.3 19 • .3 = mi im ••
ND • A 0 8 1 5 o o o o
.5 \„, •
• All Al2 A01 A02
.6 Ng • .6
mt Imi = NE 0 0
.7 \D 0 .7
Switches LEDs Thumbwheel Buttons

/ Momentary Contact Switches (QW 4) "IW_Thumbw" (IW 2)
(IW 0)

Design Two cables connect the simulator to the S7-300 or S7-400 training unit. The
simulator is divided into the following three sections:
• Binary section with 16 switches / momentary contact switches and 16 LEDs
• Digital section with 4 thumbwheel buttons and a digital display. The

thumbwheel and digital (BCD) display use BCD values,
• Analog section with two potentiometers for specifying or simulating analog

input signals and a voltmeter that — selectable per switch — displays the
voltage output set on the potentiometers or from the two output channels of
the analog output module (as far as it exists).
Addressing You use the following addresses to address the inputs and outputs in your user
program:
Sensor / Actuator (D132, D032)
Switch / Mom.Con IW 0
LEDs QW 4
Thumb. buttons IW 2
Digital display QW 6
Analog channels PIW 304/306

SIEMENS
The Conveyor Model 2

.Z.
"K_Conv_RIGHT" (Q 8.5) "BAY1" "BAY2" "BAY3" "LB" Ell "Horn"
"K_Conv_LEFT" (Q 8.6) (I 8.5) (I 8.6) (I 8.7) (I 8.0) ......... (Q 8.7)
/ I 1t I I
I
1
/' "T—Bay1" "T Bay2" I "T_Bay3" I "T_Bay-LB"
l
(I 8.1) ; (I 8.2) : (I 8.3) i (I 8.4)
"L_Bay1" "L_Bay2" "L_Bay3" "L_Bay-LB"
(Q 8.1) (Q 8.2) (Q 8.3) (Q 8.4)

W.— Automation and Industrial Solutions
Design The slide above shows the conveyor model with its sensors and actuators as
well as the assigned I/O addresses.

Complete Symbol List
Symbol Address / Data type Comment

1 C_Conv_Fault C 17 COUNTER Counter Conveyor faults
2 C_Parts C 18 COUNTER Counter transported parts
3 DB_Instance_F620_Fault2 DB 2 FB 20 Instance DB for FB20, Evaluation of Fault 2
4 DB_Instance_F620_Fault3 DB 3 FB 20 Instance DB for F620, Evaluation of Fault 3
5 DB_Parts DB 19 DB 19 DB with parts data
6 FB_FaultEvaluation FB 20 FB 20 FB for evaluating faults
7 FC_Signal FC 14 FC 14 FC Indicator lights + Horn
8 FC_Mode FC 15 FC 15 FC Set operating modes
9 FC_ConvMotor FC 16 FC 16 FC Control of conveyor motor
10 FC_Fault FC 17 FC 17 FC Fault evaluation
11 FC_Count FC 18 FC 18 FC Count parts
12 FC_Count Add FC 19 FC 19 FC Count parts using addition
13 FC_FaultEvaluation FC 20 FC 20 FC for evaluating faults
14 FC_MM420 FC 42 FC 42 FC Control MM420
15 T_System_ON I 0.0 BOOL Momentary contact System ON
16 T_System_OFF I 0.1 BOOL Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact)
17 T_Jog_RIGHT I 0.2 BOOL Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact
18 T_Jog_LEFT I 0.3 BOOL Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact
19 S_M/A_ModeSelect I 0.4 BOOL Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MAN, I '=AUTO
20 T_M/A_Accept I 0.5 BOOL Momentary contact, confirm operating mode
21 T_Ackn_Fault I 1.0 BOOL Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement
22 S_Fault1 I 1.1 BOOL Simulate Fault 1, 0=OFF/1 =ON
25 LB I 8.0 BOOL Light barrier
26 T_Bay1 I 8.1 BOOL Momentary contact Bay 1
29 T_Bay-LB I 8.4 BOOL Momentary contact Light barrier bay
30 BAY1 I 8.5 BOOL Proximity sensor Bay 1
33 IW_Thumbw WV 2 WORD BCD thumbwheel
34 IVV_State_MM420 WV 42 WORD State word of MM420
35 IVV_Act_MM420 NV 44 INT Actual speed of MM420
36 M_Flash_2Hz M 10.3 BOOL Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz
37 M_Flash_1Hz M 10.5 BOOL Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz
38 M_Aux_System_ON M 15.1 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON
39 M_Aux_Man_ON M 15.2 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON
40 M_Aux_Auto_ON M 15.3 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON
41 M_Aux_C17 M 15.7 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Counter-Conveyor faults
42 M_Aux_LB M 16.0 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier
43 M_Jog_RIGHT M 16.2 BOOL Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT
44 M_Auto_RIGHT M 16.4 BOOL Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT
45 M_Conv_Fault M 17.0 BOOL Memory bit Conveyor fault
46 M_Faultl M 17.1 BOOL Memory bit for storing Fault 1
47 M_Aux_Fault1 M 17.2 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Fault 1
48 M_Fault2 M 17.3 BOOL Memory bit for storing Fault 2
50 M_Aux_Auto M 18.0 BOOL Auxiliary memory bit Edge AUTO on
51 M Aux_Count M 19.0 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier
52 M System_ON_HMI M 30.0 BOOL Memory bit System ON (HMI)
53 M_System_OFF_HMI M 30.1 BOOL Memory bit System OFF (HMI)
54 M_Conv Jog_RIGHT_HMI M 30.2 BOOL Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI)

Complete Symbol List 2
55 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M 30.3 ' BOOL Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI)
56 11/1_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI M 30.4 BOOL Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, '1'...
57 IA M/A Accept_HMI M 30.5 BOOL Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI)
58 hil Ackn_Fault HMI M 31 .0 BOOL Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (HMI)
59 M_Bays_occup_HMI M 33.0 BOOL all Bays 1 to 3 occupied
60 kil Conv_Fault_HMI M 33.1 BOOL Memory bit Conveyor fault
61 114 MM420_0n_HMI M 40.0 BOOL Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI)
62 M MM420_Jog_RIGHT HhAl M 40.2 BOOL Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (HMI)
63 M MM420_Jog_LEFT HMI M 40.3 BOOL Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (HMI)
64 M SlaveFailure M 86.0 BOOL Memory bit DP Slave has failed
65 MB SlaveAddress MB 87 BYTE DP address of failed slave
66 MW ACT MW 20 INT Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
67 MW SETP MW 22 INT Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp.
68 OB Cycle OB 1 OB 1 OB for cyclic program
69 OB_SlaveFailure OB 86 OB 86 Error OB for slave failure
70 OB VVarmRestart OB 100 OB 100 Warm restart OB
71 L SYSTEM Q 4.1 BOOL Indicator light System ON
72 L_MAN Q 4.2 BOOL Indicator light MAN mode
73 L_AUTO Q 4.3 BOOL Indicator light Automatic mode
74 L Restart man Q 4.5 BOOL Indicator light for manual warm restart
75 L Restart aut Q 4.6 BOOL Indicator light for automatic warm restart
76 L Cony Fault Q 5.0 BOOL Indicator light Conveyor fault
77 L_Fault1 Q 5.1 BOOL Indicator light Fault 1
80 L Bay1 Q 8.1 BOOL Indicator light Bay 1
81 L_Bay2 Q 8.2 BOOL Indicator light Bay 2
83 L_Bay-LB Q 8.4 BOOL Indicator light Light barrier bay
84 K_Conv_RIGHT Q 8.5 BOOL Run conveyor RIGHT
85 K_Conv_LEFT Q 8.6 BOOL Run conveyor LEFT
86 Horn Q 8.7 BOOL Horn
87 QW_DigDisp QW 6 WORD BCD digital display
88 QW Control MM420 QW 42 WORD Control word for MM420
89 QW Setp_MM420 QW 44 INT Setpoint speed for MM420
90 OD_Conv_Monitoring T 17 TIMER Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode
91 VAT 1/0-Conveyor VAT 1
92 VAT_Numberformats VAT 2

SIEMENS

RIP Automation and Industrial Solutions
complete a topic.

SIEMENS
2

File: SERV1_02E.9 Mr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents of the The training area consists of the following components:

Training Area • An S7-400 programmable logic controller with a CPU 412 or CPU 413-2 DP
• Digital input and output modules, analog module
• Simulator with digital and analog section
• Conveyor model
• ET 200S distributed peripheral
• MM420 Micromaster with PROFIBUS module
• TP170B Touchpanel
• Programming device or PC

SIEMENS
Configuration of the S7-400 Training Unit
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 S iTRAlN Traini

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_02E.10 Automation and lnTufsotinal Solutions
Design You can see the design of the S7-400 training unit in the slide above.
Configuration The UR 1 rack is configured with the following modules:

Slot 1: Power Supply 24V and 5V/20A
Slot 2:
Slot 3:
Slot 4: CPU 412 or other
Slot 5: vacant (when the CPU only has a single width)
Slot 6: vacant
Slot 7: vacant
Slot 8: Digital input 32x24V (from simulator)
Slot 9: Digital input 32x24V (from conveyor model)
Slot 10: Digital output 32x24V 0.5A (to simulator)
Slot 11: Digital output 32x24V 0.5A (to conveyor model)
Slot 12: Analog input 8x13 Bit (from potentiometer on simulator)
Slot 13: vacant
Slot 14: vacant
Slot 15: vacant
Slot 16: vacant
Slot 17: vacant
Slot 18: vacant
Addressing As long as no configuration or parameter settings have been made, the system
works with default addresses.

SIEMENS
Installation / Maintenance of the

SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.1 4 1 SITRAIN Training for
Contents Page
Objectives ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Components for Configuring an S7-300 ...... 3
Mounting Positions for an S7-300 Configuration ...... 4
Expansion Capabilities for an S7-300 ...... 5
Installation Rules ...... 6
Installation Aids ...... 7
Installation Checklist 8
Installing the Rail (Part 1) 9
Installing the Rail (Part 2) .... 10
Checklist for Electrical Configuration .............................................................................................. 11
Wiring the Front Connector ............................................................................................................. 12
Preparing for Operation 13
Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-300 ................................................................................... 14
Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-300 ......................................................................................... 15
Changing the Fuse in Digital Output Modules of the S7-300 .......................................................... 16
Using the Electronic Manuals 17
Exercise 1: Using the S7-300 Manuals 18
Exercise 2: Wiring the Signal Modules 19
Installation/Maintenance of the S7-400 Programmable Logic Controller ......................................... 20ff

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Installation and Maintenance of a PLC
SIEMENS
Objectives
Upon completion of this chapter the participant will ...

be familiar with the basic components for configuring a SIMATIC
S7-300/400
understand the function of these basic components
know the installation and expansion possibilities of an S7-300/400
know the installation aids for a PLC
be able to use the electronic S7 manuals
be able to wire digital input and output modules
be able to change a backup battery


SIEMENS
Components for Configuring an S7-300
Component Function
Rail ... is the rack for an S7-300
Power Supply ... converts the supply voltage (120/230 V) to 24 VDC operation
(PS) voltage to supply the S7-300
Central Processing Unit ... executes the user program

(CPU) accessories: memory module, backup battery
Interface Modules ... connect the bus between the racks (tiers)
(IM)
Signal Modules (SM) ... adapt various process levels to the S7-300.
(Digital/Analog) accessories: bus connector, front connector
make functions available, such as for positioning,

Function Modules (FM) ... closed-loop control
Communication ... for communications between programmable logic controllers.

Processors (CP) accessories: cable, software, interface modules
SIMATIC S7 Date 18.09.2009

IC
Rail You snap the power supply, CPU, IM, and up to eight signal modules onto the rail.
Power Supply The power supply is available in 2A, 5A, and 10A output current at 24V. The
output voltage is isolated, short-circuit proof and stable at no load. An LED lights
up for error-free operation. The LED flashes when there is an output voltage
overload.
You use a selection switch to change the primary voltage between 120V and 230V.
Central Processing The CPU has the following elements on its front side:
Unit (CPU) • Status and error LEDs,
• Operating mode selector, removable key with four switch settings,
• Connection for 24V supply voltage,
• Multipoint interface, MPI, for the programming device or connecting to
an additional programmable logic controller,
• Battery compartment, (not on Compact_CPUs and CPUs after October, 2002)
• Compartment for a memory module (not on the CPU 31X IFM).
Interface Modules Interface modules make it possible to have a multi-tier configuration.
Signal Modules These modules are selected according to their voltage range or output voltage. A
bus connector is included with each module, which together make up the
backplane bus. The process signals are connected to a plug-on front connector.
Interconnecting You need a PG/PC cable to connect a programming device directly.

Cables PROFIBUS cables and cable connectors are also needed to network several
programmable logic controllers.
CP A communication processor for the PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet, and other bus
systems.

SIEMENS
Mounting Positions for an S7-300 Configuration
1.01:133
1111111111111111111
1111111111111111111
1111111111111111111
1111111111111111111
1111111111111111111
•
U
E ■
SIMATIC S7 • SITRAIN Training for
V Automation and Industrial Solutions
Date: 18.092009
Mounting Position The slide above shows the possible horizontal or vertical mounting positions.
Temperature Depending on the mounting position, you can have the following ambient
temperatures for operating the programmable logic controller:
• 0-60°C for a horizontal configuration

• 0-40°C for a vertical configuration.

SIEMENS
Expansion Capabilities of an S7-300
SIMATIC S7 Date. 18.09.2009

Ale: SERV1_03E.5 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Maximum Expansion The slide above shows the maximum expansion for an S7-300/CPU314/315.
The total expansion permits up to 32 modules, with up to eight modules per rack
(tier). There are no slot rules for signal modules, function modules, and
communications processors. That is, they can be used on any slot.
Interface Interface modules (IM 360/361) are used to loop the bus between the racks.
Module (IM) The IMS interface represents the sender, and the IMR interface represents the
receiver. The interface modules must be used in their specified slots.
If needed, an additional power supply can be provided in the expansion rack.
There is the hard-wired IM 365 interface module as an economical variation for
the two-tier configuration. (No additional power supply is needed; no CP can be
connected).
Local Segment Certain function modules, such as the FM NC, can have their own I/O assigned
to them. This provides an FM module with its own I/O area, which can be
accessed very quickly. This I/O area is referred to as a local segment.
One local segment can be configured per rack. During running operation, the
CPU can no longer access this I/O.
Slot Number Slots 1 to 3 (= permanent assignment):

Slot 1: PS (power supply), if present
Slot 2: CPU (central processing unit), if present
Slot 3: IM (interface module), if present
Slots 4 to 11 (free assignment):
SM, FM, CP can be plugged in any slot
Distance The following cable lengths are available between the tiers:
Two-tier configuration with IM 365: maximum 1m
Multi-tier configuration with IM 360/361: maximum 10m

SIEMENS
Installation Rules
❑ For a horizontal configuration, the CPU and power supply must be

arranged on the left. For a vertical configuration, the CPU and power
supply must be arranged at the bottom
❑ The following minimum clearances must be maintained:

o 20 mm to the right and left of the rack
o 40 mm above and below for a single-tier configuration and at least
80 mm between two racks
❑ The interface module always occupies the space next to the CPU
❑ There may be a maximum of eight I/O modules (signal modules,

function modules, communication processors) inserted in a rack
❑ A multi-tier configuration is possible for the CPU 314/315/316/317/318

and 319
❑ Please ensure that there is a low resistance connection, such as

through contact washers, between the rail and the substructure.
C) .1

Rules The most important rules for the mechanical configuration are listed in the slide
above.
(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and

Installation" manual).

SIEMENS

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV103E.7
Manuals For installation, you need the following manuals:

• "S7-300 Automation System, Hardware and Installation"
• "S7-300 Programmable Controller Module Specifications"
• "S7-300 Automation System, CPU Specifications: CPU 31XC and CPU 31X"
These manuals are also available electronically.
Parts List This list specifies the modules of the PLC and where they are configured. The
system designer must create this list.
Checklist Displays the procedure for installation. A suggestion for the sequence is
presented on the next page.

SIEMENS
Installation Checklist
• Are all the components available ? (see parts list)
• Install the rail !
• Install the power supply !
• Snap a bus connector onto the CPU and install the module !
•
• Snap a bus connector onto each of the I/O modules and install
the modules !
• Plug on the front connectors and insert the labeling strips and
the slot number !
• Wire the modules (power supply, CPU and I/O modules)

•

Checklist The checklist provides only the sequence for the individual activities. The
following pages and the manuals contain the exact procedure.


SIEMENS
Installing the Rail (Part 1)

•
• Use M6 screws to screw the rail to the substructure!
• • Connect the protective ground conductor to the

rail (protective ground screw) .
Note: Minimum cross section of the cable = 10mm2.
Approx. AWG 7.5.
Protective Ground Connection
57.2mml
9
466 mm
500 mm
800 mm 482 mm
530 mm
830 mm
A
41 A
SulT
toR
mAatilo
Nn Training
ni g
in f or
ndustrial Solutions
Mounting Holes The measurement specifications for the mounting holes are indicated in the
following table.
Rail Length (mm) L1(mm) L2(mm) L3(mm)

482.6mm 32.5 57.2 466
530 mm 32.5 57.2 500
830 mm 32.5 57.2 800
Lt
-CO
L2
L3
Screws You can select from the following screw types to secure the rail:
• M6 machine screw according to ISO 1207/ISO 1580 (DIN 84/DIN 85)

• M6 hexagon head cap screw according to ISO 4017 (DIN 4017).
The screw length depends on the substructure.

You also need 6.4mm washers according to ISO 7092 (DIN 433)

SIEMENS

Bus Connector A bus connector is included with every module. You snap the bus connector
onto the module before you install it.
Note: Begin with the CPU. No bus connector is snapped onto the last module.
Modules Hook the modules on the top of the rail in succession. Module sequence:
• Power supply
• CPU
• Modules.
You then swing down the modules and secure them with the hold-down screw.
Front Connector A front connector is then plugged onto the signal modules to connect the
process signals. A mechanical coding between the module and front connector
is provided to avoid interchanging the front connectors at a later time.
Slot Number Labeling strips for the slot number are included with the CPU. You can use
these strips to label the module's slot location. The slot number is needed later
to configure and assign parameters to the module.

SIEMENS
Checklist for Electrical Configuration
•
1. Are analog signals or bus signals
used?
2. Do cables with > 60V exist?

3 Are inductances switched by additional
3.
•
contacts in the output circuit or
independently of the programmable
logic controller?
4. Will cables be laid outside of buildings?
A
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_03E.11 •
Point 1 Shielded cables must be used for analog signals or bus signals (PROFIBUS).
Point 2 When cables are laid with signals > 60 V, you must lay the cables in separate
bundles or cable ducts. For signals >400V, you must lay the cables outside of
cabinets with a minimum clearance of 10cm.
Point 3 You must connect inductances to an overvoltage protective device.

You connect D.C.-controlled coils with diodes or Zener diodes. You connect
A.C.-controlled coils with varistors or RC elements.
Point 4 Special lightning protective measures are required here, such as laying cables
in metal conduits grounded on both sides.



•
SIEMENS
Wiring the Front Connector

,•■••■..
INV
Open the front door of the signal modules !

•
o Bring the front connector into wiring position !
❑ Thread the strain reliever in the front connector !
o Strip the insulation from the wires (6 mm length) !
o Connect the wires !
•
a Tighten the strain relief for the cable loom !
a Position the front connector in the operating position !
o Close the front door !
❑ Fill out the labeling strip and insert it in the front door !
•
a Attach the slot number to the front door !

Cables Use flexible cables with a cross section of 0.25 to 1.5 mm2.
Core end sleeves are not required. If you want to use them, then use only ones
without an insulating collar according to DIN 46228 Form A.
Wiring Position Press the reset button on the top side of the module and drag the front
connector to the front until it latches. The front connector has no connection to
the module in this position. Wiring is also made easier, because you can more
readily access the terminals.
Connection Refer to the section about signal modules in the instruction manual.
Assignment As a rule, M is connected to terminal 20, and L+ is connected to terminal 2 or 1.
Optical Isolation The digital input modules and output modules are optically isolated. Either eight
or 16 inputs or outputs have a common ground or return (M connection).
Cable Length A cable length of up to 600 m is permitted with unshielded cables (exception:
analog modules). The maximum cable length is 1000 m for shielded cables.
Laying Cables To implement a correct EMC configuration, use the notes in the section on
configuring the electrical structure for an S7-300 in the instruction manual.
Separate bundles or cable ducts are required when signal cables and heavy
current cables (>60 V) are laid together.
Tool You will require a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.

SIEMENS
Preparing for Operation
• ❑ Insert the key in the mode selector on the CPU (for

CPUs until Oct. 2002)!
❑ Install the backup battery (for CPUs until Oct. 2002)!
o If the user program is not installed in a non-volatile
memory module
o If larger memory areas must remain retentive
during a power failure
•
❑ For CPUs until Oct. 2002 insert the memory module
if required !
o So that the user program and the data are retained during
Power OFF and without a backup battery
o To have a larger "load memory" available.
•
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.092009

Keyswitch The keyswitch is used to select the operating mode (STOP, RUN, and memory
reset). This keyswitch also provides protection for the user program. If the
switch is removed in the RUN position, it is possible to read out the user
program, but it is not possible to make changes.
Backup Battery Open the front door of the CPU.

Insert the battery connector, with the notch on the left side, into the receptacle in
the battery compartment.
Push the backup battery into the battery compartment.
Close the front door of the CPU.
Memory Module Before you insert the memory module, you must switch the CPU to the STOP
state, or you must switch off the supply voltage.
CPU Memory Reset A CPU memory reset must be done:

• during the initial startup
• before a new and complete user program is downloaded
• if the CPU requests a memory reset (the STOP LED flashes).
Using the keyswitch to perform a memory reset (points 1 to 4)

1. Turn the power supply on.
2. Turn the keyswitch to the STOP position.
3. Turn the keyswitch to the MRES (Memory Reset) position and hold this
position until the STOP LED flashes twice slowly (about 3 seconds).
4. Turn the keyswitch back to STOP and then within one second turn it back to
MRES. The STOP LED flashes rapidly to indicate that the memory reset is
being done.
Note: You can also use a PG/PC to perform a memory reset.

SIEMENS
Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-300
Battery only exists in CPUs that were delivered until Oct. 2002

Procedure for the 1. Open the front door of the CPU

S7-300TM 2. Use a screwdriver to pull the backup battery out of the battery compartment
3. Insert the battery connector, with the notch on the left side, into the
receptacle and push the battery into the battery compartment
4. Close the front door of the CPU.
Change Frequency You should change the battery after one year.
Notes Only CPU's that were delivered until Oct. 2002 have a backup battery.
Change the backup battery during POWER ON only, otherwise the data in the
user memory will be lost.


SIEMENS
Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-300
• u Switch the CPU to Stop !

u Switch the load voltage off !
O Open the front door !
O Release the front connector and take it out !
• u Loosen the hold-down screw on the module !
u Swing the module up and off the rack !
o Remove the upper portion of the front connector coding key on
the new modules !
0 Insert the new module and screw it down tightly !
•
O Connect the front connector and bring it into operating
position!
Li Close the front door !
u Switch the load voltage on again !
o Perform a complete restart on the CPU !
SIMATIC S7 11SITRAIN Training for

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.15 4 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Warning You are not to exchange modules while there is data traffic via the MPI. If the
CPU is not in the STOP mode, there could still be data traffic on the
communication bus (MPI). This situation would lead to a system fault. If you are
not certain, pull out the connector to the CPU's MPI interface.

Tool You will require a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.

SIEMENS
Changing the Fuse in Digital Output Modules of the S7-300
— — ■
,.n..k
• 0 Switch the CPU to Stop !
0 Switch the load voltage off !
o Remove the front connector !

• o Loosen the hold-down screw on the module !
o Swing the module out !
D Screw the fuse support out of the module !
0 Change the fuse !
• CI Screw the fuse support down tightly again !

0 Install the module !
0 Insert the front connector !
o Switch the load voltage on again !
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 111 SITRAIN Trammg for

File SERV1_03E.16 Automation and lndustnal Solutions
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved .
Which Modules The following digital output modules have fuses:
• SM 322, 16 x AC120V
• SM 322, 8 x AC 120/230V
Fuses You can use the following fuses of the 8A/250V type:
• Wickmann 19 194-8A
• Schurter SP001.013
• Littlefuse 217.008


SIEMENS
Using the Electronic Manuals

ffj Acrobat Reader - [S7,300_1H8x_e.pdf]. . FIR ilm
ri fie Edit Qocurnent View Window Help .._
.ilu
p 2ci
'6 a 51A oli -, MI II I ■ H 1! + + 1101l00% - ® 1 D NI Is EI 1 7:

.i 1 1-' - r
1] Se j
6
0.- Bookmark .. ■I1
1 D Back to home ." Find CI 1
.5 D Title
Find What: j flattery Find A gain
a5 ElEMI
D 1 Preface 1"" Match Whole Word Only Cancel 0
. D 2 Guide to the S7-330 documentati
D3 Installation Order
r Match Case IllI
r Find Backwards n
n D 4 S7-300 modules
I— Ignore Asian Character Width
7,k' 5 Configuring Fl
f+-[216 Installation
- ,- 5 Config uring
E 0 7 Wiring
5.1 Summary of the Content
.•=--D 8 Addressing 52 Bast Principles of Planning
l-E-.0 9 Commissionin g 5.3 Component dimensions ..
,--- 5.4 Arranging modules on a single rack
D 10 Maintenance 5.5 Arranging modules on mukiple racks
,--D 11 Testing functions, Dia gnostics a - 5.6 Selection and installation of cabinets.
5.7 Example: Selecting a cabinet.
+= --012 Appendix 5.5 Elm tical assembly, protective rileOW= Mid gl.ding.
D13 Glossary 5.8.1 Grounding concept and overall structure.
5.8.2 Installing an S7-300 web grounded reference potential . 5-
i.' -C1 Index 5.8.3 histalling an S7-300 with ungrounded reference potential
(not CPU 312 IFM or CPU 314)....
5.8.4 bolded or non-lsolated modules?
5.8.5 Grounding.
5.8.6 Overview. Grounding
5.9 Selecting the load powersupply unit . 5
5.10 Planning subnets
, . . ,
--- 1
.2_1 1. II I 3 of 256 e H 8,5 x 11 in 0 : 1=1 IN 1

Siemens AG 2008. An rights reserved.
El. Manuals When you install the STEP 7 software, you can also install the electronic
manuals for STEP 7.
You will need the Acrobat Reader software to read the manuals. It can also be
found on the STEP 7 CD.
The menu options Simatic - Documentation - English take you to a list of
existing manuals.
Manual Collection AllSIMATIC manuals (Automation Systems, SW, HMI, Networks) can be
ordered as a CD collection.
Download You can download the most recent electronic SIMATIC manuals free of charge
from the Internet. Visit the Product Support Homepage
(www.siemens.de/Simatic).
Search To quickly find information, use either the detailed table of contents. You can
directly open the pages marked in green with a mouse click.
Or, alternatively, you can use the Search function to search for a term, such as,
"Battery". As a result, all locations where the term can be found are displayed.
Again, you can jump directly to the locations that are marked in green.

Chapter 3 Exercisel: Using the S7-300 Manuals
1. How many racks with how many modules each can be installed in the
S7-300?
max. ............. racks with ............. modules each
2. The PS 307 power supply module, 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0 (5A output) is
designed for an input voltage of .................. VAC or ......................VAC
3. An S7-300 and its various modules rated at 24 VDC have a voltage
Tolerance Range of .................... VDC to ................... VDC
4. How many digital inputs and outputs can the CPU 314 address and how
large is the process-image input table (PII) and the process-image output
table (PIQ)?
Process-image input table: ........... bytes = .............. digital inputs
Process-image output table: .......... bytes = .............. digital outputs
5. At which voltage levels does the digital input module SM321; D132/24V
deliver
signal state '0' . ............... V to ........... V
signal state 1 '. ......... V to ........... V
6. What is the maximum output current that the digital output module SM322;
D032; DC24V/0.5A delivers at
signal state '0' . ............... mA (residual current)
signal state '1' ......... A
7. What is the maximum operating frequency of this output module ?

for resistive load: ......Hz
for inductive load: ...... Hz
8. Is the output module short-circuit proof?

SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Wiring the Signal Modules
M.C.Sw 1 M.C.Sw 2 LED Power supply
L+ L-
8 17- 13
20 16
DI/
DO
323
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Task The following sensors and actuators are to be connected to the digital input and
output module 6ES7 323-1BEIxx-OAA0 at Slot 6 :
• momentary-contact switch 1 at input I 8.0
• momentary-contact switch 2 at input I 8.5
• LED at output Q 8.0
What to Do In the picture complete the necessary wiring. Also consider the power supply of
the sensors, actuators and the module.
Note Use the manual for the terminal assignment or use the wiring diagram on the
inside of the digital module's front door.

SIEMENS
Installation / Maintenance of the S7-400

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 g SITRAIN Training for

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_038.20 la Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Components for Configuring an S7-400 ............................................................................................ 21

Racks and Connection Possibilities 22
Installation Rules 23
Installation Checklist 24
Installing Racks 25
Installing Modules 26
Wiring the Power Supply 27
Wiring the Front Connector .............................................................................................................. 28
Preparing for Operation ..................................................................................................................... 29
Changing the Backup Battery .......................................................................................................... 30
Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-400 ....................................................................................... 31

SIEMENS
Components for Configuring an S7-400
Component Function
for receiving and establishing an electrical

Rack
connection to the modules
Power Supply converts the supply voltage to 5 VDC and 24 VDC

(PS) to supply the modules
Central Processing Unit executes the user program

(CPU) accessories: Memory Card
Signal Modules (SM) adapt various process signals to the S7-400

(Digital/Analog) accessories: front connector
Interface Modules connect the racks with one another

(IM) accessories: connector cables, terminators
make functions available, such as for positioning and

Function Modules (FM)
closed-loop control
Communication for communications between programmable logic controllers

Processors (CP) accessories: cable, software, interface modules

41 SITRAIN Training for
6
46
SERV1_03E.21 ,, Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction You need the components specified in the slide above to configure an S7-400.
Accessories The specified accessories must be ordered separately. Refer to the ST 70

catalog.

SIEMENS
Racks and Connection Possibilities
Usable as
Type of Rack
Central i Expansion
rack : rack
1
UR1 / UR2
(Universal Rack) P Bus
Yes Yes
K Bus
i
CR2
(Central Rack) P Bus, Segment 1 P Bus, Segment 2
Yes No
K Bus
ER1 / ER2
(Expansion Rack) P Bus
No Yes
/1
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_03E.22 VIZ Automation and Industrial Solutions
UR1/UR2 Racks that can be used as central and as expansion racks. The UR1 rack has
18 slots and the UR2 has 9 slots for S7-400 modules.
CR2/CR3 Rack used as a central rack. The I/O bus (Peripheral bus) is divided into two
segments with 10 and 8 slots. The communication bus is continuous.
The CR3 rack with only four slots is designed for distributed automation
solutions.
ER1/ER2 Racks used as expansion racks. ER1 has 18 slots and ER2 has 9 slots. The I/O
bus has the following restrictions:
• no interrupt processing
• no 24V supply for the modules
• no backup of the modules.
Connecting CR/ER You need interface modules (IM) to connect expansion racks (ER) to the central
rack (CR). You can insert one or more send IMs in the central rack. The send IM
has 2 interfaces. You can connect 4 expansion racks to each interface.
The IM modules make a distinction between local and remote ranges.
• Local range: Distance up to 3m with the 460-0/461-0 interfaces.

The 5V is not transmitted with these interfaces, however the K bus is.
Distance up to 1.5m with the 460-1/461-1 interfaces.
The 5V is transmitted with these interfaces, however the K bus is not.
• Remote range: Maximum distance of 100m with the 460-3/461-3 interfaces.

SIEMENS
Installation Rules
o You must maintain the following minimum clearances:

o 20 mm to the right and left of the rack
o 40 mm above and 22 mm below the rack
o 110 mm between two racks
0 The power supply must be inserted on the far left (slot 1) and
the receive IM must be inserted on the far right
D Please ensure that there is a low-resistance connection
between the rack and substructure, such as through contact
washers
LI Connect the rack to building ground with at least 10 mm2 cable
o Remove the slot covers before you install the modules
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.23
7'SITRAIN
lit:
Training for
Rules The most important rules for installing an S7-400 are given in the slide above.
w
(Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller,
Hardware and Installation" manual).

SIEMENS
Installation Checklist
ANY
■Nis,
■
• Are all components available ? (see parts list)
• Install the rack !
• Install the power supply !
• Remove the slot covers and install the modules !
• Connect the front connectors and insert the

labeling strips!
• Wire the modules (power supply and I/O modules) !

•
SIMATIC S7
Date
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_03E.24
4' SITRAIN Training for
Checklist The checklist provides only the sequence for the individual activities. The
following pages and the manuals contain the exact procedure.
w (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller,


SIEMENS
Installing Racks
•
❑ Screw the rack to the substructure (M6 machine
screws) !
• ❑ Connect the rack to building ground. A stud bolt is

provided on the lower left for this purpose. The
minimum cross section of the cable is 10 mm2 !
❑ Install additional racks with a minimum clearance of

110 mm !

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_038.25
Introduction The racks are designed for installation on walls and installation in frames and
cabinets.
Mounting The rack has four cutouts on the side for mounting. The cutouts are suitable for
19 inch frames.
You can use the following screws:
• M6 Machine screw according to ISO 1207/ISO 1580 (DIN 84/85)

• M6 Hexagon head cap screw according to ISO 4017 (DIN 4017)
You also need 6.4 mm washers according to ISO 7092 (DIN 433).

SIEMENS
Installing Modules
MID
•
❑ Remove the slot covers.
Grasp the cover at the indicated locations and pull the
cover forward to remove it !
• ❑ Hang on the first module and swing it down !
❑ Screw the module tight on the top and the bottom.

Triple-width modules and the power supply each have
• two screws on the top and on the bottom !
❑ Install the other modules as before !
A
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. File: SERV1_03E.26
Layout The power supply must be inserted on the far left (slot 1). The receive interface
module (receive IM), if used, must be inserted in the extreme right slot of the
rack it's in.
Tool You need a screw driver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width.

SIEMENS
Wiring the Power Supply

01.
• ❑ Open the power supply cover !

❑ Adjust the voltage selector switch to the correct supply voltage I
❑ Use a screwdriver as a lever to loosen the power plug !
❑ Pull out the power plug !
❑ Shorten the hot and neutral wires (not the ground) by 10 mm !
•
❑ Strip the insulation to a length of 7 mm !
❑ Open the power plug (screw in the cover) and the strain relief
device !
❑ Connect the wires and tighten the strain relief device !
❑ Close the power plug cover !
• ❑ Push the power plug to a dead stop in the guide notch on the
power supply !

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. SERV1_03E.27 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Cables You can use the following cables:
• rigid: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2

• flexible: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2
• core end sleeve: 0.75 to 2.5 mm2 without an insulating collar according to
DIN 46228, Form A
Tool You need a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width.


SIEMENS
Wiring the Front Connector
❑ Use a lever motion on the lower part of the front connector

cover to loosen it. Open the cover and pull it up to remove it !
❑ Strip the insulation from the wires !
• ❑ Connect the wires !
❑ Install the strain relief device on the lower side of the front
connector !
❑ Fill out the labeling strip and insert it in the front connector !
• ❑ Place the cover on the front connector !
❑ Latch the front connector onto the module's coding key !
❑ Swing the front connector up !
❑ Screw the front connector tightly in place !

Front Connector There are three different types of front connector:
• crimp connection
• screw-type terminal
• spring connection
You can insert the front connector only if the module is installed and screwed
down tightly.
Note The front connectors have a jumper that is needed by some modules. Do not
remove this jumper.
Cables You can use the following cables:
• flexible: 0.75 to 1.5 mm2 for a crimp connection

0.75 to 2.5 mm2 for screw-type or spring connection
Tool You need a screwdriver with a 3.5 mm (1/4") blade width.


SIEMENS
Preparing for Operation
•
O Insert the key in the mode selector switch!
O Insert the backup battery (or batteries) !
o Adjust the BATT INDIC switch for monitoring the
battery on the power supply !
• 0 Insert the memory card in the CPU .
O Connect the racks using the correct connector

cables !
D Set the rack number (1 to 21) on the coding key of
• every receive IM !
O Connect a terminator to the last receive IM of every
coupling phase !
o Perform a CPU memory reset !
D Connect the programming device !
SITRAIN
gip Automation and Industrial Solutions
Training for
Keyswitch The keyswitch is used to select the operating mode (STOP, RUN, and Memory
Reset).
This keyswitch also provides protection for the user program. If the keyswitch is
removed in the RUN position, it is possible to read out the user program, but it is
not possible to make changes.
Backup Battery Depending on the power supply, you can install one or two backup batteries to
buffer the user program and the retentive bit memories, timers, counters and
data blocks. You can also connect an external battery to the EXT.-BATT.
receptacle on the CPU.
Memory Module Before you insert the memory module, the CPU must be switched to STOP.
There are two types of memory cards:
• RAM cards for extending the internal load memory

• Flash Cards for storing the user program in a power failure-proof way
CPU Memory Reset A CPU memory reset must be done:
• during the initial startup

• before a new and complete user program is downloaded
• upon CPU request of a memory reset (the STOP LED flashes).
Using the keyswitch to perform a memory reset (points 1 to 4)

1. Turn the power supply on.
2. Turn the keyswitch to the STOP position.
3. Turn the keyswitch to the MRES (Memory Reset) position and hold this
position until the STOP LED flashes twice slowly (about 3 seconds).
4. Turn the keyswitch back to STOP and then within one second turn it to
MRES until the STOP LED flashes rapidly. You can also use a PG/PC to
perform a memory reset.

SIEMENS
Changing the Backup Battery in the S7-400
Open the power supply cover !
CI Use the ribbon loop to pull the battery (batteries) out of the battery
compartment !
• J Insert the new battery and pay attention to the polarity !
Set the BATTINDIC switch for battery monitoring:
) BAT position for a single-width power supply
) 1BAT position for a double or triple-width PS and one battery
2BAT position for a double or triple-width PS and two batteries
• Use the FMR acknowledgement pushbutton to reset the fault

indicator !
❑ Close the cover to the power supply !
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 SrRAlN T rain

Autom ation a nd In
l Iar
strial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved File: SERV1_03E.30
Change Frequency You should change the battery after one year.
Note Change the backup battery during POWER ON only or with a connected
external supply. Otherwise, the data in the user memory will be lost.
ICI (Refer to the "SIMATIC S7-400 and M7-400 Programmable Controller,

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exchanging Signal Modules in the S7-400
• J Switch the CPU to STOP or make sure that the user program permits
modules to be exchanged in the RUN state !
0 Loosen the hold-down screws of the front connector and remove the
front connector !
•
_.i Loosen the hold-down screws on the module and swing the module out
0 Hang in the new module of the same type and swing it down !
0 Use both screws to screw the module down tightly !

•
3 Remove the front part of the coding key from the module !
0 Connect the wired front connector and tighten it !
i Switch the CPU to RUN . (if it was switched to STOP)
110 /
SIMATIC S7 Date' 18.09.2009

4,1
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved File: SERV1_03E.31


SIEMENS
The SIMATIC Manager
SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project DAS7_Courses\My_Proje]

a Fie Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help
'1= 1; g? ei i re' fas rth < No Filter >
O Fr; My_Project
Si '
in 67_300 Station
-
I E. 11 CPU 315-2 DP S7_300_Sle TP170B_Colot Ch07_Er1OF WIN) PROFIBUS[1)
Ch6 Analog
—
CO Sources
iA Blocks
MICROMASTER_42C
TP170B_Color
WinCC flexible RT
IEFQ Ch07 Error
Sources
Blocks
Press Fl to get Help. ICP5611(PROFIBLIS)

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 I
le' Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Objectives 2
From Process to Project 3
STEP 7 Project Structure 4
Interesting Facts about Multiprojects 5
Creating an S7 Project 6
Inserting an S7 Program 7
Standard Library ............................ 8
STEP 7 Help System .................... 9
Context-Sensitive Help in STEP 7 10
Setting the PG/PC Interface .... 11
Project: OFFLINE / ONLINE View 12
"Accessible Nodes": ONLINE View (project-independent) 13
Erasing a Memory Card (Memory or MMC Card) ........ 14
Exercise 1: Setting the PG Interface to MPI ........ 15
Exercise 2: Performing a CPU Memory Reset and a Warm Restart ........ 16
Exercise 3: Retrieving a Project and Saving It as "My_Project" 17
If You Want to Know More ........ 18
SIMATIC Manager Customizing Options 19

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 The SIMATIC Manager
SIEMENS
Objectives
understand the project structure in the SIMATIC Manager
understand the function "accessible nodes"
be familiar with the offline / online view in the SIMATIC Manager
be familiar with the STEP7 Standard Libraries
be familiar with the STEP7 help system
be able to create and manage a project with the SIMATIC Manager
be able to set the PG's interface
be able to erase an MMC
be able to perform an S7 CPU memory reset
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.2 gor SITRAIN Training for
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
From Process to Project
Project Management
SIMATIC Manager
<
Hardware
Communication
FB21
OB1
11.0 I1 1 Q4.0
H ) Software 4—

%...T Automation and Industrial Solutions
Process When you take a closer look at a process you want to automate, you will find
that it is made up of a multitude of smaller sections and sub-processes, which
are all interlinked and dependent on one another.
The first, most important task is to break down the automation process as a
whole into separate sub-tasks.
Hardware and Each sub-task defines certain hardware and software requirements which the
Software the automation system must fulfill:
Hardware:
- Number and type of inputs and outputs
- Number and type of modules
- Number of racks
- Capacity and type of CPU
- HMI systems
- Communication structures
• Software:
Program structure
Data management for the automation process
Configuration data and parameter assignment data
- Communication data
Program and project documentation
Project In SIMATIC S7 all the hardware and software requirements of an automation

process are managed within a project.
A project includes the necessary hardware (+ configuration), networking
(+ configuration), all the programs, and the entire data management for an
automation solution.

SIEMENS
STEP 7 Project Structure
SIMA I IC Manager [ My Project DAS 7 ProjektelMein_Pro ]

Fie Edit Insert PLC New Options Window Help - x
D 1r III ! 0 FiE < No Filter > Z.IY, la* 17%Eir
7
HI Fr
SIMATIC 300(1)
CPU 315-2 DP SIMATIC Touchpenel Chap14_Faults MF1(1) PR0FIBUS(1)
[11 ChapOttfigital_Op 300(1)
al Sources
{ Blocks
,T i MICRONIASTER SIMATIC Manager [My Pro ject -- D:157-Pro jekteWein Pro ]
Touchpanel i
1993 Edit Insert PLC New Options W dow He
E d Chap14_Faults
Drii:I PINIX
a
Sweet Rai pH © ft I < No Fits >
la Blocks , My_ Project
E SIMATIC 30011) 4E+ ID. cf
H III CPU 315-2 DP System data OB1 FC14 FC15 FC16
rr Chap09_cicitl_Op
al Sources
Cd Enla
rF j MICROMASTER_420
Touchpanel FC17 FC18 FC19 VAT_Numbe_
:, a Chap14_Faults
Sources
Blocks
A
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_04E.4 Mr'
, Automation and Industrial Solutions
Project Structure Data is stored in a project in the form of objects. The objects in a project are
arranged in a tree structure (project hierarchy). The tree structure displayed in
the project window is similar to that in the Windows Explorer. Only the icons for
the objects are different.
Project Hierarchy 1st. Level: The first level contains the project icon. Each project represents a
database where all the relevant project data are stored.
2nd. Level: • Stations (such as the S7-300 station) are where information
about the hardware configuration and parameter assignment
data of modules is stored.
Stations are the starting point for configuring the hardware.
• S7 Program folders are the starting point for creating (writing)
programs. All the software for a parameter-assignable
module from the S7 range is stored in an S7 Program
folder. This folder contains further folders for the program
blocks and sources.
• Subnets (MPI, PROFIBUS, Industrial Ethernet) are part of an
overall network.
3rd. and subsequent levels: Depends on the object type of the next-higher
level.
ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for The SIMATIC Manager
Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 4
SIEMENS
Interesting Facts about Multiprojects

IcSIMATIC Manager - [PROI_SOL -- \ Sl_Courses PRO3_Loe \PRE13 Joe] ,LEAAI
sa File Edit Insert KC View Options Widow He JslxJ
4
lbelltIlra-liii74:rErainli < No Filter > .7-1 -G I T5 M It?
-
IE 6g PRO1 SOL
E g Ethernet 111
E GE , I_ SIMATIC SIMATIC Message_L Message_R MPI(1)
E SIMATIC 300-LEFT 300_LEFT 300_RIGHT
E III CPU 315-2 DP_MPI 4
-
1:1 S7-Communication
al Sources
i2 Blocks
• SIMATIC 300_RIGHT
E 9 Message_L
g
▪ Message_R
S7-Sokitions
E SFC_Correnunicatim
EE SIMATIC 300-LEFT
E SIMATIC 300_RIGHT
E MeldeRezept_L
• Melde_Rezept_R
Press Fl b3 get Help. 1 1035611(PROFIBUS)
A
SIMATIC S7 ji SITRAIN
Training for
Date: 18.09.2009
Multiproject A multiproject folder is a folder for all projects and libraries of an automation
solution that contains one or more STEP 7 projects and, optionally, also
libraries. The projects within the multiproject can contain objects with cross-
project interrelations (such as cross-project S7 connections).
Benefits When projects are a component of a multiproject, their scope can be smaller
and easier to follow.
With the help of the multiproject you can, for example, create a project for every
operator for distributed editing and divide the stations according to their
operator between the projects.
Cross-project functions make sure that you can almost handle a multiproject
like one single project.
Examples of cross-project functions
• Cross-project functions in STEP 7 (basic package):
• Save As (save multiproject with all projects in another location)
• Archiving (multiproject with all projects)
• Adjustment of cross-project networking (such as, bringing together subnets)
• Updating the view (all projects of a multiproject)

SIEMENS
Creating an S7 Project
File PLC View Options Window Help

Ctrl+N
New Project' Wizard...
Open... Ctr1+0 User projects I Libraries Multiproiects
57 Memory Card
Memory Card File a Ethernet 121:157_Courses \PR 0 3_Loe \Ethernet
GD-Communication DAS7_Courses5PRO3_Loe GD-Kommu
Delete... Et) Lueftunglnitialserung D:157_Couises1LueftunglnitialisierungsT est
Reorganize... amy_pro,ect D:157_Kurse SERVl_L
Manage... a 57-Solutions D: \97_Courses \PR 03_Loe1S7-Loesu
SERV1_A D: S7_Couises \SERVLA
Archive...
ENcrovi c \c7 1-',.....-.ACCP1/1 I
Retrieve.,.
Page Setup... r Add to current multiproject

1 PRO1_50L (Multiproject) DA57_Courses \PRO3_Loe \PRO3_Loe
*
.17.••.
N Type:
2 SER92_B (Project) -- DA57_Courses SIERV2_B 1My_Project I %Oct
rF
3 SERV/2_5 (Project) -- DA57_Courses \SERY2_1. .• ....... **
r Library
Exit Alt+F4 5jareSPADcalin
t1DAS7_Courses Browse..
Creates a new project or a new library.

OK
care' I Heo
SIMATIC S7 Date. 18.09.2009 SITRAIN Training for

File: SERV1_048 6 qt. Automation and Industrial Solutions
SIMATIC Manager The SIMATIC Manager is normally started by double-clicking on the "SIMATIC
Manager" icon which appears on the Windows desktop after the STEP 7 Basic
Package has been installed.
Creating a Project Select the menu options File 9 New or the icon in the toolbar to open the
"New" dialog box for creating a new project or a new library.
Enter the project name in the "Name" box and click the "OK" button to confirm.
Notes 1. The "Storage location (path)" displays the path that was preset in the
SIMATIC Manager under Options -> Customize.
2. You can also use the "New Project" Wizard to help you create a new
project. Select File 9 New project and follow prompts.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Inserting an S7 Program
..141z.1
Fie Edt rjreat PLC View Options Window Help
D fa; Raba,
I [i
21,
R Ill I a II<NoFilta> ail ra MI I it?
Subnet
I 57 PT
2 M7 Program
S7 Software
3 Program
57 Sock
4 Drive
I'17 Software
5 51NAMIC5
Symbol Table
Text Library
External Source,..
WinCC flexible PT
WVICC Object
Parameter
External parameters...
Z17My_Projer I - Di 57_Courses My_Proje ..1412..1
c
.pew)
-
2 Global labeling held
Inserts 57 Program at the cursor position. %
SIMATIC S7 S TRAIN Training for

.619.
1
Date: 18.09.2009
SERV1_04E 7 -.T. Automation and Industrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File:
Inserting a Program Select the Insert - Program - S7 Program menu to insert a new program into
the current project.
When you insert an object, the system automatically gives it a relevant name,
such as "S7 Program(1)". You can then change this name if you like.
Note You use the method described above to create a hardware-independent

program.
Programs assigned to particular hardware are described in the "Hardware
Configuration" chapter.

SIEMENS
Standard Library

User projects Libraries I Sawn projects I Multiprojects I
S7 Memory Card Name SIC4 • • • ■

Memory Card Fie es PDIAGUB CAPrograrn Fies1Siemens1StepTS71/
Delete...
es PROF1NET System-Lbary CAProgram FienSiemenatep71S7ft
Reorganize... tik Redundant 10 (VI j CAPromarn Files1SiernenatepTS7k
es Redundant 10 CGP CAProgram Fies1Siemens1StepTS71/
tek SIMATIC_NET CP CAPrcgram Fie:VS iemens1StepTS7R
ArcNve... 4
Retrieve... 611823MMIIMERIZEI■
,...
we stdlibs (V2) CAProgram Files1Siemens1Step7 \ S71117
Page Setup.,.
2-1—
1 My_Project (Project) - DA57_Courses/MyProje
2 PROI_SOL (Mull:Project) - DAS7_CousesIP1103_LoekPRO3_Loe Selected
3 SERV28 (Project) - DA57_Coursest.SERV23 Use Projects:
4 SERV2_5 (Project) - D1,57Couses 5ERV2J. Lbaries:
Ext At+F4 Sample Projects:
Multiprojects: Browse...
OK Cancel l Help
,
,Standard Library -- C:'" Program Files' ,.Siernens Step7 571ibs stdlib30
—11:11.2s1
Opens a project to be selected or a t 7.WIMI1111101 Comm cation Blocks
-' zv
d IEC Function Blocks
Id Miscellaneous Blocks d Organization Blocks
PID Coned Blocks a S5-S7 Convertng Block:
AD System Function Blocks TI-S7 Convertng Block:
A
Introduction Libraries are used to store reusable blocks. The blocks can be copied into a
library from existing projects or they can be created directly in the library
independent of projects.
Standard A Standard Library is installed when you install STEP 7. You can access this
Library standard library from the SIMATIC Manager (File 4 Open 4 Libraries) or from
the Block Editor ( Overviews 4 Libraries). The library contains the following S7
programs :
Communication Blocks:
Functions (FC) for communication between the CPU and the distributed I/O
via communication processors.
Organization Blocks: Organization Blocks (OBs).
S5-S7 Converting Blocks:
Blocks that emulate STEP 5 standard function blocks and that are necessary
for converting STEP 5 programs.
TI-S7 Converting Blocks:
Generally usable standard functions such as analog value scaling.
IEC Function Blocks:
Blocks for IEC functions (IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission), such
as for processing time and date information, for string processing and for
selecting maximum and minimum.
PID Control Blocks: Function blocks (FBs) for PID closed-loop controls.
System Function Blocks:
System Functions (SFCs) and System Function Blocks (SFBs).
Miscellaneous Blocks:
FCs and FBs for switching between daylight savings time and standard time
(summer and winter times).
Note Additional libraries are added when optional software is installed.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
STEP 7 Help System

Manager .1212.1
c
He PLC View Options window I Help
DUM?1,1,101 Contents 11
Introduction
Getting Started
Press Hot-key Fl
Using He
About
Project Object
The project represents the entirety of all the data and programs in an automation solution, and is
Provides various waysto ea
located at the top of an object hierarchy .
Position in the Project View
a Project Proiect Object

Station Object
Station
Programmable Module Obied
I Progr. Module S7147 Program Object

Source File Folder Object
.1.1;11 S7 Program Block Folder Object

.;J Source F il es
Blocks
Example
A
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 .
nradi nin
Automation T
ingufsor
tri
al Solutions
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. File: SERV1_04E.9 d
Obtaining Help There are various ways of obtaining help:

1. You use the Help Contents menu to activate the general help.
2. You use the Fl hot-key or the icon in the toolbar to start the context-
sensitive help.
Tabs • "Contents": Displays a list of help topics under general headings.

• "Index": Allows you to access the help information by displaying a list
of available terms in alphabetical order.
• "Search": Enables you to look for certain words or expressions in the
help topics.
"Hot words" Certain words are highlighted in green and are underlined with a broken line in
the help texts (called "Hot words"). A mouse click on these "Hot words" leads to
a further help text with detailed information.

SIEMENS
Context Sensitive Help in STEP 7
r„,,,MA I IF manager - [St andard t diraity -- 1: ",Program Files >, Siernens Step] \ stdlib90] .J.01LI
c
• Pie Eh Wert PLC New Optia-ss Virdow Help
..1212g
ll ou;11?1,1J6 Fire >
•
u•anisaia Luray
Coarrxxxcaoon Blocks
111
==11=2!!!!=11111111i11 1110111111111=1111111111117Amml
ivi ,J IEC Function Blocks
STL
±rI Misceleneous Blocks
SFC2
p SFC3
SET_RTM
CT RL_R TM OIL
••• System fu •
System Iwiction 1.0
Press Hot-key Fl
± Organcation Blocks
p SFC4
• IA PID Control Blocks
2 SFCS
• S5-S 7 Converting Blocks
SFC6 Fie Edit Bookmark Options Help
- System Function Blocks
S0 SFC7 2 I Help on STEP 7[ I
a Blocks LWent. I Ind" I I E" I Sc I ' Glossary
p SFC9
• al TI 07 Converting Blocks
7 SFC10 Reading the Time with SFC 1 "READ_CLK"
p SFC11
p SFC12
p SFC13 Description
p SEC14
S:/ S FC1 5 With SFC 1 'READ_CLK" (read system clock), you read the current date or current time of the system clock of the
CPU
t;i• SFC17
PararnelN Declaration kignmAtil Ennakiti011

Press Fl to get Help.
RET_VAL OUTPUT 1NT 1, 0, M. D. L 7 an error occurs during the execution of the
function, the return value contains an error
code
CDT OUTPUT DT D,L The current date and current time are output
at
the CDT output.
Error Information
See Chapter Evaluatina Errors with the Output Parameter RET VAL
See also:
Etrarnole of an SFC 0 (SET Cl..14.1/ SFC 1 (READ CLK1- task

‘0111 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Context-Sensitive With the context-sensitive help, you can find information directly connected to
Help ... the selected object. As the slide shows, the object can be a system function or
it can be an STL instruction in a block, for example.
... Activating You can activate the context-sensitive help from any tool by selecting the
relevant object and then pressing the Fl function key.
Use the "Help on STEP 7" button to jump from the context-sensitive help to the
general help.
Note You can find additional information on STEP 7 in the electronic manuals.
Choose the following menu options to open the electronic manuals:
Start - Simatic - Documentation
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Setting the PG/PC Interface

Access Point
STEP 7 of the Application: Access Path 1
S7ONLINE Access Pont of **Application
IS7ONLINE (STEP 71 -> CP5611(MPI)
(Standard for STEP 7)
Interface Parameter Assignment Used:

ICP5611(MPI) Properties
Diagnostic
cP5si t impo
CP5611(PPI)
CP5611PROFIBUS DP Slave)
I Copy._
Zj CP56111PROFIB U S I <Active>
._
Properties - CP5611(MPI) 2sJ
Parameter assign MPI
communications
MPI network)
- Station Parameters
- Interlaces --
Add/Remove.
r PG /PC is the only master on the bus
Address: 10
Interface Parameter
CP5611 Assignment Used: OK
Timeout. II s
CP5611 (MPI)
Network Parameters
Transmission Rate: 1187.5 Kbps
Highest Station Address: 1 31
CPU
OK Default I Cancel I Help

V
I
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File' SERV1_04E.11
General You use the "Set PG/PC Interface" tool to define the connection between an
application such as STEP 7 and a module such as CP 5611. The tool is
activated with Start - Settings 9 Control Panel .
Access Point Other examples of access points are:

• CP_H1_1 for SIMATIC NET (Ethernet)
• CP_L2_1 for SIMATIC NET (PROFIBUS)
• DPSONLINE for ProTool/Pro DP-Slave
• Micro/Win for the S7-200 software
• MPI (WinCC) for the WinCC Software
Interface Parameter Here, enter the module used, such as, CP5611 and the interface used, such
Assignment Used as, MPI. If you connect the PG to the PROFIBUS, use the setting CP5611
(PROFIBUS). To save a switch-over of the PG/PC interface, you can also use
the setting CP5611 (Auto). The bus parameters are then automatically
determined. With this setting, however, the connection takes longer.
Properties In this tab, you adapt the parameters of the interface. For "Address", enter the
MPI address of the PG. This must be unique in the network.
To make communication possible, the "Transmission Rate" and "Highest Node
Address" parameters must be the same for all nodes (stations).
The "PG/PC is the only master on the bus" setting is only activated if only
slaves are connected to the PG.
Diagnostics With this, you can check whether a connection can be made.

SIEMENS
Project: OFFLINE / ONLINE View

File Edit Insert PLC View g3tions Window Help
JJJ
I II<No Filter > 1.1 '9 I I/ gl 1 riAi
l'..:MyProject D: \ Courses \MyProject
-=J
a
MyPropect Project
E S7_300_Station
▪ II CPU 315-2 DP
0- ' ....... Q ..... 0- OFFLINE
Systemdaten 061 FC1 FC14 FC15 .. 7E16 ..... ". • .s.

S7program ........
j:j Sources
[CT—
Plod - •
▪ MICROMASTER_420 0 e
Touchpanel FC17 FC18 FC19 VAT I/O-Co... VAT_Numbe..
Press Fl to get Help. ICP5611(PROFIBUS)
VSIMATIC Manager - MyProject

File Edit Insert PLC itelW gAtions Window Help
L1,11101% F
..
a 0.
774 myProlect ...•••
Project S7,30Intation CF 0-
0- 0-
ONLINE ...rill CPU 315-2 DP Systemdaten 061 FC1 FC14 FC15 FC16
••• j E1 1:j S7program
..•
a •
MICROMASTER_420
0- 0- CF
5 g Touchpanel
FC17 FC18 FC19
Press F1 beet Help. 'Filtered ja5611(PRCCEIUS)
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.12
Offline View In the project window of the SIMATIC Manager, the offline view displays the
project structure stored on the hard disk of the programming device.
• The "S7 Program” folder contains the "Sources" and "Blocks" objects.
• The "Blocks" folder contains the system data created with the HWConfig
tool and the blocks created with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor.
Online View The online view shows the offline project structure in the left window and in the
right window it shows the blocks stored online in the selected CPU.
As a result, the "S7 Program" seen in the online view only contains the "Blocks"
folder which contains the following objects:
• System data (SDB)
• User blocks (OB, FC, FB)
• System blocks (SFC, SFB).
The title bar in the online window is highlighted in color.
Changing Views Changing between offline and online view takes place:
• through the View - Offline or View - Online menu items
or
with the corresponding icon in the toolbar:
- Online
- Offline
Note You can arrange the "ONLINE" and "OFFLINE" views next to each other (as in
the slide) or under each other with Window - Arrange - vertical
(horizontal)
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
"Accessible Nodes": ONLINE View (project-independent)
r--1 1-711X
Insert PLC View Options Window He - 151 X
e File Ed/
..... ar
4
I < No Fier> J'Ytt
ea - , .11 as rth M=1
iiSystem data 0 0131 0 0835 0FB1
= in Accleisible Nodes
= (73 PROFIBUS - 2 0 FB2 0 FB3 gFB4 0. FB 30
0. FB31 0 F899 0 FC31 0 FC42
aPROFIBUS - 4 (passive) gFC50 gFC105 a. DB10 0. DB20
0. DB30 gDB31 0. DB32 g01333
0 DB40 0 DB99 0 08112 a. DB123
gSFBO 0.SFEI1 0. SFB2 0. SFB3
a. SFB4 0 SFB5 10 SFB32 0. SFB52
gSFB53 0. SFB54 gSFB75 0.SF1381
0. SFCO 0 SFC1 0 SFC2 0 SFC3
a. SFC4 0 SFC5 0 SFCS 0. SFC7
0. SFC11 0. SFC12 0. SFC13 0. SFC14
0. SFC15 0. SFC17 a. SFC18 0. SFC19
0. SFC20 0. SFC21 0. SFC22 0 SFC23
a. SFC24 0. SFC28 0. SFC29 0. SFC30
0. SFC31 gSFC32 0. SFC33 0. SFC34
A
SERV1_04E.13
gr Automation and Industrial Solutions
File:
Area of Use This type of connection provides you with quick access, such as for service
purposes. You can access all accessible programmable modules (CPUs, FMs,
CPs) in the network. You choose this method when you don't have any project
data about the target systems on your PG.
What to Do You can activate the "Accessible Nodes" window with the menu options PLC 9
Display Accessible Nodes. In the "Accessible Nodes" object, all accessible
programmable blocks in the network are displayed with their address.
Note Nodes (stations) that are not programmable with STEP 7 can also be displayed
(such as programming devices or operator panels). On the CPU to which the
PG is connected, the addition (directly) is displayed. In the slide, the CPU with
the MPI address =2.

SIEMENS
Erasing a Memory Card (Memory or MMC Card)
Memory card is inserted in the CPU:
FIe Egt..Insert PLC View Options Window He o x
D QUIT 111ft .
X lib rt II < No Fitter >
Accessible Nodes System data 081 OB35 A
Etiji
r PROFIBUS = 2 FB1 la FB2 FB3
to Blocks rat FB 4
• Ea PROFIBUS = 4 (passive)
fa FB30 CZt FB31
. z FB99 ta FC31 la+ FC42

t •
FC50 FC105 0811 Open Object ctri+Alt+o

• • •••• DB20 DB30 DB3
Cut Ctrl+X
"•-. Copy Ctrl+C
.................
..-• right •-.
mouse button Delete Del
Memory card is inserted in the PG: .••
Compare Blocks...
SIMATIC Manager [S7 memory card] 1
lr.J11-_1
" 01'1
J File Edit livert PLC View Options Window
❑ M,)it,w6hf O a
I s No Piker
i Lit 57 rn8frori) card
, r+ System data # 081 # 0835
Ca. FB1 0 FB2 a FB3
..•—"•...•••••• 0. FB4 sp FB30 0. FB31
co. FB99 a. FC31 ta. FC42
Fc5o a. FC105 tg. D B1 0
DB.? DB30 SI. IB 1
••„ ,••

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_04E.14 gr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Reason During a CPU memory reset, only the RAM work memory of the CPU is reset,
not the memory of the possibly inserted memory or MMC card. That means
that the user program stored on the inserted memory card is retained.
Erasing the memory card can oe done in the following ways:
Memory Card is The memory card can be erased online directly on the CPU using the function
Inserted in the CPU "Accessible Nodes":
SIMATIC Manager -4 PLC 9 Display Accessible Nodes
then select all blocks .9 Delete
Memory Card The memory card can be erased using a programming device with a suitable
interface. For this, the memory card must be inserted in the module slot and a
IT] new window has to be opened that displays the contents of the memory card.
SIMATIC Manager 9 File 9 S7 Memory Card 9 Delete...
Note The data format of SIMATIC MMCs does not correspond to the data format that
is used by MS Windows. Accordingly, SIMATIC MMCs can not be read, written
or erased with the Windows Explorer!
Caution If SIMATIC MMCs are formatted in MS Windows, then they can no longer be
used in a SIMATIC S7!
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Setting the PG Interface to MPI

SIMATIC Manager
Options
Access Path I
Access Poitt of the Application

I S7ONLINE (STEP 7) CP5611(MPI I
(Standard tot STEP 7)
Interface Patameter Magmata Used:

CP5611(MPI) Properties..
Diagnostics.
11112=1 —
CP5611IPPI)
CP5611(PROFIBUS - DP Slave] _J Copy..
"itgl CP5611 (PR Fl BUS) <Active) MPI
41 JJ 1
— Station Parameters
Parameter assignment of your
communications processor CP5611 for an PG/PC is the only master on the bus
MPI network]
Address: 1°
[Interfaces
Add/Remove: Select._ [ Timeout _-_J
— Network Parameters
OK Cancel I He
Transmission Rate: 1187. 5 Kbps
Highest Station Address: 1 31
OK Default Cancel Help

21SITRAIN Training for
g= Automation and Industrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserves. Files SERV1_04E.15
Task The PG's interface is to be switched to MPI so that an online connection to the
CPU can be established.
What to Do 1. Activate the "Set PG/PC Interface" function

SIMATIC Manager Options 9 Set PG/PC Interface
2. In the Properties dialog, change the properties so that they appear as those
shown in the slide

SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Performing a CPU Memory Reset and a Warm Restart

Until Oct 2002
RUN-P
RUN 1. Set the mode selector switch to STOP
STOP V!
MRES
RUN-P
2. Hold (Press) the mode selector switch in the MRES
RUN position until the STOP LED has flashed twice slowly.
Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to
STOP CID the STOP position.
MRES
RUN-P 4 ,within 1 sec
3. Turn (press) the mode selector switch to the MRES posi-

RUN RUN
-tion once more until the STOP LED begins to flash quickly
STOP
STOP Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to MRES
the STOP position.
MRES
RUN-P
RUN RUN
4. Set the mode selector switch to the RUN-P (RUN)
STOP
STOP CI)
position. (A warm restart is carried out in the transition
MRES
from STOP to RUN/RUN-P)
MRES

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_04E.16 - Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task You are to perform a CPU memory reset and check whether the memory reset
was successful.
What to Do 1. If a CPU with MMC is used at your training area, the MMC must first be
explicitly erased.
For example, SIMATIC Manager - Accessible Nodes - in the Blocks
folder select all blocks 4 Delete
2. Carry out the memory reset according to the steps in the slide above
(manually and from the PG).
3. Check if the memory reset was successful. It was successful if only system
blocks (SDBs, SFCs, SFBs) are left in the CPU
SIMATIC Manager 4 Accessible Nodes - Double-click on MPI=2
- Click on Blocks
Notes To make sure that no "old" blocks are left in the CPU, a memory reset of the
CPU should be performed. The following steps are carried out during a
memory reset:
• All user data is deleted (Exception: MPI parameter assignments and the
contents of the diagnostic buffer are retained).
• Hardware test and initialization
• If an Eprom memory card or a Micro Memory Card (MMC) is installed, the
CPU copies all data on the cards that is relevant for execution back into the
internal RAM after the memory reset.
• If no memory card or Micro Memory Card is installed, the preset MPI
address on the CPU is retained. If, however, a memory card is installed, the
MPI address stored on it is loaded.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Retrieving a Project and Saving It as "My_Project"

oc===•■••■•=tr:..121211
Fie PLC View Options Window NM)
Ctr1-1-N
New Project' Wttard...
57 Yancey Card Desktop

Memory Card Mb E Arbeitsplat2
• Sinalic Shell
E My Documents
Li Servl_b.zp E Gemeinseene Dokunente
E 314-Diskette (Al
E Cell SYSTEM (C:)
ariali DATA (1):)
Heirnarbeit
Page Setup...
ER Archive
1 My_Project (Project) — DAS' E. Image_D1
2 Accessible Nodes — E9
3 51ZPVI _5 (Project) — DA57_ S7_Kurse
Let Dateiname: IS ervl _a. zip DVD-RW.Laufwerk (R:)
Netzweikunoebuna
Gets object Nom the arcNve. Dateityp: PKZip 4.0-Archive ('. zip) Abbrecher
OK I Cancel
Retrieve (3020:58)
The retrieved data have been stored in the project

directory D:1S7_Courses \ SE RV1_A:.
1 Do not display this message again.
OK

File: SERV1_04E.17
I
lltr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task You are to retrieve a project and save it under the name "My_Project".
What to Do 1. Start the SIMATIC Manager

2. Delete — should they exist — the old projects "My_Project", "SERV1_A" and
"SERV1_B"
File 9 Delete... 4 User Projects 9 select the projects from the list 4
confirm
3. Retrieve the project "SERV1_A.zip"
File 9 Retrieve... 4 Suchen in [Look In]: <Drive>:IS7 CoursesiSelect an
archive and choose "SERV' _A.ZIP" from the list 4 acknowledge with "OK"
4. Save the project under the name "My_Project"
File 4 Save As... 4 User projects 4 enter "My Project" as the file name 4
as the Storage Path choose <Drive>:1S7 Courses 4 confirm

SIEMENS
If You Want to Know More

complete a topic.

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
SIMATIC Manager Customizing Options

Fie PLC View I Options Window Help
❑ g? ustorritze arl+Alt+E
Simulate Modules
Set PG/PC Interface...
Customize
Columns
Language Genetal
Message numbers
I Date and Time of Day 13=111■11=111=11116F
Columns Message numbers I Archiving
Mnemonics
national Language
Example 1
Language General I Date and Time of Day I View I
German U El .0 - Storage location lot projectsimultiproiects
! ID: SLcourses Browse...
(1" Eng4h A 11 C
Storage location lot jibraies
ID:197_courses Browse...
E Qpen new object automatically
I— Archive automatically on opening project or library

save window arrangement and contents at end of session
l Offhne window I— Online window
Deactivated system messages:
OK Ca
OK Cancel I Help
SIMATIC S7 Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_04E.19
Re Automation and Industrial Solutions
"Language" Tab • National Language: You can select the language you want to use for the
SIMATIC Manager, menus, dialog boxes, help, etc. (Only the languages that have
been installed appear in the list.)
• Mnemonics: You can select the mnemonics you want to use for programming the
S7 blocks
"General" Tab Basic settings for editing projects and libraries:

• Storage location for prolects/multiproiects is where you specify the directory in
which you want to store your user projects.
• Storage location for libraries is where you specify the directory in which you want to
store your user libraries.
• Further options for inserting objects, opening projects and for window arrangement
will be dealt with later.
• Deactivated system messages
By pressing the button "Activate" you can reactivate all system messages that were
switched-off in a window when the option "Always display this message...." was
chosen.
"Date and Here you specify how you want to represent the date and time, for example, in the
Time of Day" Tab Diagnostic Buffer.
"View" Tab This is where you specify how project objects are to be displayed on the screen.
"Columns" Tab This is where you specify which columns are to be displayed when the Detail view is
switched-on (see "Help").
"Message numbers" This is where you specify the type of message number assignment.
Tab
"Archiving" Tab Here you specify the default program that is to be used to archive and retrieve files, as
well as the associated directories.

SIEMENS

Contents Page
Objectives ...................................................................................................................................... 2
Hardware Configuration and Parameter Assignment ...... 3
Inserting a Station 4
Starting the Hardware Configuration Editor ...... 5
Generating a Hardware Setpoint Configuration ...... 6
Addressing S7-300 Modules 7
DI/DO Addressing in Multi-Tier Configurations ...... 8
Module Address Overview ....... 9
Variable Addressing 10
Edit Symbols, Monitor/Modify Variables 11
CPU Properties: Cycle/Clock Memory 12
CPU Properties: General (amongst others MPI Address) ............................................................... 13
Saving Station Names in the CPU 14
Saving the Setpoint Configuration and Downloading it in Modules ................................................. 15
Uploading the Actual Configuration to the PG ................................................................................ 16
Exercise 1: Adapting the Setpoint Configuration 17
Exercise 2: Assigning Parameters to the CPU Clock Memory and Testing It 18
If You Want to Know More ............................................................................................................. 19
CPU Properties 20
CPU Properties: Startup 21
CPU Properties: Retentive Memory ............................................................................................... 22
CPU Properties: Protection 23
CPU Properties: Diagnostics/Clock ............................................................................................... 24
CPU Properties: Communication 25
Further Processing of Hardware Stations in the CA01 Electronic Catalog ..................................... 26
Exporting a Hardware Station ........................................................................................................ 27
CA01: Selection Assistant for SIMATIC ......................................................................................... 28
Parts List and Description 29

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
Objectives
be able to create a setpoint configuration and assign parameters to it
be able to read out an actual configuration and assign parameters to it
be familiar with the addressing of S7-300 input and output modules
be able to adapt a given hardware configuration to an existing

hardware
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Hardware Configuration and Parameter Assignment
Configuration Assignment of racks, cards, blocks and

distributed I/O in the station window of the
Hardware Configuration tool.
You can select the components from a
hardware catalog.
Parameter assignment Specifying the behavior of parameter

assignable modules such as startup behavior,
retentive areas, etc.
Planned hardware configuration and

Setpoint configuration parameter assignment using the Hardware
configuration tool.
Actual configuration Actual configuration and parameter assignment

of existing hardware.

HW Configuration The modules are supplied from the factory with preset parameters. If these
default settings are OK, a hardware configuration is not necessary.
A configuration is necessary:
• if you want to modify preset parameters or addresses of a module (such as
to enable the hardware interrupt of a module)
• if you want to configure communication connections
• with stations that have distributed peripherals (PROFIBUS-DP)
• with S7-400 stations that have several CPUs (multicomputing) or
expansion racks
• with fault-tolerant programmable logic controllers (option package).
Setpoint When you configure a system, a setpoint configuration is created. It contains a

Configuration hardware station with the planned modules and the associated parameters. The
PLC system is assembled according to the setpoint configuration. During
commissioning, the setpoint configuration is downloaded to the CPU.
Actual Configuration In an assembled system, the actual existing configuration and parameter
assignment of the modules can be uploaded from the CPU. This creates a new
HW station in the project.
A configuration upload is necessary, for example, if the project structure does
not exist locally at the PG. After the actual configuration is read out, you can set
parameters and add part numbers.
Notes With the S7-400, the CPU can be assigned parameters in such a way, that when
there are differences between the setpoint configuration and the actual
configuration, the CPU startup is interrupted.
To call the HW Config tool, there must be a hardware station in the SIMATIC
Manager.

SIEMENS
Inserting a Station
VSIMATIC Manager - My_Prtgett
=_Llalx]
He Edit Insert PLC Options ldow Help
Ion Subriet
I SOMATIC 400 Station
SOMATIC 300 Station
<No Fit. > ml,liesemlysemik?
Program 3 SOMATIC H Ration
4 SIMATIC PC Raton
5 SOMATIC HMI Staten
57 Block
6 Other station
M7 Software
7 SOMATIC 55
Symbol Table 8 PG/PC
Text Library 9 SOMATIC OP
Este:mai Source... A SIMATIC 200 Staten
WinCC flexible PT
Pena Oblea
Zr, y _Pro pect 13. Cl_Course4 My_Proje
My Program YMP1(1) MPI

a Global labeling held Global labeling field
Hy-P.17= 57 Program
Inserts SOMATIC 300 Ration at the cuss postan.

File: SERV1_05E A gir Automation and Industrial Solutions
Insert Station
You insert a new station in the current project by selecting the menu options
Insert 4 Station 4 SIMATIC 300 Station or SIMATIC 400 Station.
You can then change the name that is automatically given to this station -
"SIMATIC 300 (1)" - to one of your choice.
ST-SERV1
Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
Starting the Hardware Configuration Editor

...11:112cJ
m17/ 1 41® ▪ ?
'Z:tly_Proiert ID:iSlCourses .1y_Prrge End ntI AjI
Ilif!: 1•112n1
2:1
My_Ropret
SIMATIC301:(1) = Doris: !Standard
rir My Rogam
PROFIBUS DP
ttw [ unfit, ISPIAT IC 305(1)(Configuration)-- Ply_Project] PROFIBUS-PA
ei Station EAt tread PLC View OP8.76 Wnamv nab 11 PROF1NET 10
D u 91i & f SIMATIC 300
M1d MMII :la C7
Alba FEI .0 CP-300
Taber Ba.-12:1 CPU-300
w Stabs Bar 03-al FM-300
LINA. PS Ett.C3 Gateway
Auto AMMO IM-300
$•C3 M7-EXTENSION
1 B3-0 PS-300
41 RACK-300
♦ I *I SIMATIC 300(1)
mei
p-1=1 S14-300
we Pl toga Help.
SIMATIC 400
51 -11
SIMATIC HMI Station
• SIMATIC PC Based Contrd 300/400
O SIMATIC PC Station
6ES7 3901 7770416A0

vaiable m various lengths
Displays catalog lon(off). IA

ger Automation and Industrial Solutions
Hardware Config. This tool helps you configure, assign parameters to and diagnose the hardware.
Starting HW Config To start the Hardware Configuration tool:

• Select a hardware station in the SIMATIC Manager and choose the
Edit 4 Open Object menu options or by
• Double-clicking on the Hardware icon.
"Configuring" This is a window in the "Hardware Configuration" application you use for
inserting components from the "Hardware Catalog" window.
The title bar of this window contains the name of the project and the station
name.
Hardware Catalog To open the catalog:

• Select the View 4 Catalog menu options or by
• Clicking on the icon in the toolbar.
If "Standard" is selected as the catalog profile, all racks, modules and interface
modules are available in the "Hardware Catalog" window.
You can create your own catalog profiles containing frequently used elements
by selecting the menu Options 4 Edit Catalog Profiles.
You can add PROFIBUS slaves that do not exist in the catalog later on. To add
slaves, you use GSE files that are provided by the manufacturer of the slave
device. The GSE file contains a complete description of the device according to
PROFIBUS / PROFINET conventions.
To include the slave in the hardware catalog, use the Options 4 Install New
GSE Files menu and then Options 4 Update Catalog.

SIEMENS
Generating a Hardware Setpoint Configuration
Zr;...HW Conlin - [SIMATIC 300( I ) (Configuration) — fly_Project]

Mt Ration Edt Insert PLC %ow Worts Winnow Help
JJJ
5
t1 ES likelliberillil01 5131110
End
Proas: I tandad
SM 321 0116a4C120V
SM 321 0116a4C1213/
SM 321 0116,0C24V
SM 321 01164)C24V
SM 321 0116pDC24V
SM 321 0116NDC2W
SM 321 13116a0C24V
1
41.1 J (0) UR SM 321 0116NDC24V
SM 321 01164)C24V
Slot Module Order number Finevare MPI a.. I add... O... Cont.. SM 321 011 6NDC241/. In
1 PS 3075A 6E57 3074E400-0AM SM 321 0116eDC24V, In
2 CPU 315-2 DP 6E57 315-2AF03-0A80 V1.1 2 SM 321 011 6,0C2iN, In
,12 DP ..
Urri SM 321 Dll EoDC48-1 25
3 SM 321 D116KNAMUR
4 r D132iDC24V 6E07 321-113L00-0AA0 0 3 SM 321 13116eUC21/484--
5 SM 321 0132x4C120V
6 SM 321 DI3243C24V
7 SM 321 0132,0[24V
8 SM 321 DI4KNAMUR,E:
9 SM 321 DI6i,AC1213/230
3: j
10
11
6E67 321.1BL00-06A0
DOA input module 013224V.
invPing 32; also avoid:kr as SIPLUS
module with order number EAG1
Press F1 to get Help.

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_05E.6 '11%• Automation and Industrial Solutions
Generating a This means specifying how the modules are to be arranged in the rack. This
Setpoint configuration, specified by you, is referred to as the setpoint configuration.
Configuration
Rack For example, you open a SIMATIC 300 station in the Hardware Catalog.
Opening the "RACK-300" folder shows the icon for a DIN rail. You can insert this
in the "Hardware Configuration" window by double-clicking on it (or using drag &
drop).
Two rack component lists then appear in the two-part window: a plain list in the
top part and a detailed view with order numbers, MPI addresses and I/O
addresses in the bottom part.
Power Supply If a load current power supply is required double click or use drag & drop to
insert the appropriate "PS-300" module from the catalog in slot no.1 in the list.
CPU You select the CPU from the "CPU-300" folder, for example, and insert it in slot
no. 2.
Slot No. 3 Slot no. 3 is reserved as the logical address for an interface module (for multi-
tier configurations). If this position is to be reserved in the actual configuration
for the later installation of an IM, you must insert a dummy module DM370
(DUMMY).
Modules From slot no. 4 onwards, you can "insert" a choice of up to 8 signal modules
(SM), communications processors (CP) or function modules (FM) from the
"Hardware Catalog" using drag & drop or with a double-click. The slots on which
the selected module can be inserted are automatically highlighted in green.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Addressing S7 - 300 Modules

Slot No.: 1 2 4 5 6 7
Module: PS CPU DI 32 DO 32 DI8/D08 Al 2
I 0.0 I 2.0 Q 4.0 ED Q6.0

191 0
IB 0
MI
IB 2 QB 4 QB 6 IB 8
111
Byte and I 0.7 I 2.7 Q4.7 Q6.7 1 8.7

bit addresses: I 1.0
101
1 3.0 Q5.0 07.0 Q8.0
101
IB 1 1113 0 IB 3 QB 5 101 QB 7 1.73 QB 8

0 0
11.7 0 I 3.7 05.7 07.7 Q8.7

Slots With the S7-300, the slots are logical not physical slots since the rack or the DIN
rail does not have any slots or interfaces. Still, the slots are numbered and each
logical slot has a default address assigned to it which is automatically used
when the system is not parameterized.
Slot 1 This is reserved for the power supply module. With the S7-300, a power supply
module is not necessarily required.
The S7-300 can also be operated with 24V from another power source.
Slot 2 This is the slot for the CPU.
Slot 3 This is solely reserved for an interface module (IM) for multi-tier configurations
using expansion racks. If no IM module is installed, the logical slot remains free
even though physically there is no space.
If the slot is also to be reserved physically (such as, for installing an IM module
at a later date), you can insert a DM370 dummy module.
Slots 4-11 These are the slots for I/O modules, communications processors (CP) or
function modules (FM).
Bit and Byte On slots 4 to 11, each module is assigned a so-called "module address"
Addresses that is always the same as the address of the first input or output byte of the
module. The addresses of the other I/O bytes then follow consecutively.
When you use default addresses, you lose 2 address bytes per slot when 16-
channel DI/DO modules are used!

SIEMENS
DI/DA Addressing in Multi-Tier Configurations
PS IM 96.0 100.0 104.0 108.0 112.0 116.0 120.0 124.0

° Rack
3 (Receive) to to to to to to to to
99.7 103.7 107.7 111.7 115.7 119.7 123.7 127.7
?
6
PS IM 64.0 68.0 72.0 76.0 80.0 84.0
o 88.0 92.0
Rack (Receive) to to to to to to to to
2 67.7 70.7 75.7 79.7 83.7 87.7 91.7 95.7
f
e
PS
IM 32.0 36.0 40.0 44.0 48.0 52.0 56.0 60.0
Rack to to to to to to to
(Receive) to
c) 1 35.7 39.7 43.7 47.7 51.7 55.7 59.7 63.7
?
•
PS 4.0 8.0 12.0 16.0 20.0
CPU IM • 0.0 24.0 28.0
Rack (Send) to to to to to to to to
cj 0 3.7 7.7 11.7 15.7 19.7 23.7 27.7 31.7
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Multi-Tier The individual slots also have default addresses in a multi-tier configuration.
Configurations
Examples:
• Q7.7 is the last bit of a 32-channel DO module plugged into slot 5 of rack 0.
• IB105 is the second byte of a DI module in slot 6 of rack 3.
• QW60 is the first two bytes of a DO module in slot 11 of rack 1.
• ID80 is all four bytes of a 32-channel DI module in slot 8 in rack 2.
ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for Hardware Configuration
SIEMENS
Module Address Overview

EiHW Config - [SOMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My Project]
Station Edit Insert PLC view Options Window He
D car.. ik ea a Catalog Ctrl+K
PS 307 SA
Met "Address Overview"
II CPU 315-2 DP .4 Isobar
II DP 4, Status Bar
0
Ir Pdate F5
D032x0C24V/0 5A kit° Arrange F4
11" 7
Ir 018/D08,424V/0 54
7 Ir 41202811
Addresses from
Address area horn: 0 to 1023
1111111■11111= Available addr assign Yes
7
Rack/ 0/2
~J 101 UR slot
Slot Mackie Order nu Filter Inputs P Outputs r Address gaps

1 PS 307 54 6E57 307
Type I Add horn I Adds to I Module I PIP I DPI PN I RJ 5 IF
CPU 315-2 DP 66 57 31
DP 8 8 DIEI/00esr24V/0.54 061 PI 0
3 304 307 Al2n1281 0 7
4 D132KDC24V 6E S7321 I' 1023 1023 DP 2 1
5 D032xDC24V/0.54 6E57 322 0 4 7 D032,0624V/0 54 081 PI 0 5
6E57 323 0 8 8 1218/008x24V/0 54 081 PI 0 6
6 018/D08,424V/0.54
7 A.12x128it 6E57 331
8
9
10
11
Dose Help
Shows the address overview of the current static

gr.
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File SERV1_05E.9
Address Overview The I/O addresses can be displayed via the menu option View Address
Overview ...
Abbreviations • R Rack number

• S Slot number of the relevant module
• DP Relevant only when Distributed Peripherals (I/O) are used
IF Interface module ID when programming the M7 system (in C++).
• PIP Process Image Part

SIEMENS
Variable Addressing
I— -
r HW Conlin - (SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration)
A Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Wir
j g gtt e I l
(0) UR
M
Properties - D132xDC249 - (RO/S4)
r Ps 307 5A
IF CPU 315-2 DP General Addresses
II DP — Inputs -
4 r DI32xDC24V 2x Start: Process image

r D 032xD C24V/0.5A End: 15 10E1 PI LI
r System Default
OK Cancel 1 Help

Addressing The modules are assigned fixed slot-dependent addresses with the S7-300
(CPUs without DP interface) and S7-400 (without hardware configuration).
Variable With the S7-300 (CPUs with integrated DP interface) and with the S7-400,
Addressing you can assign parameters to the starting addresses of the modules.
When you double-click a digital or an analog module, the parameter assignment

screen is opened. After you choose the "Addresses" tab, you can cancel
"System selection". You can now define the starting address in the "Start" box. If
the address is already used, an error message is triggered.
Part process images can be defined only in the S7-400. That way, specific
inputs and outputs (such as time-critical signals) can be combined into one
group. A system function triggers the updating of a part process image in the
user program.
Note If the system data is not stored on a memory card, all module parameters and
therefore also the modules' assigned addresses are lost after a CPU memory
reset. Without the memory card this means that the original slot-dependent
addresses of the S7-300 and the default addresses of the S7-400 become valid
once more.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Edit Symbols, Monitor/Modify Variables

EI!FIW Confg - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Pro•
COPY COI+C
Station Edit Insert PLC view Options WInclow Heb
Paste I+ ll
! ❑ clot 1- 51 6
t; a lb r 6611E00
Replace Object...
'Er." (13IUR d
Ad Master System
PS 307 54 Disconnect Master System
2 CPU 315-2 DP Insert PROFINET 10 System
X2 DP
Disconnect PROFINET 10 System
3
PROFINET IO Domain Management...
D13243C24V
rD 24'1;0 Ev-, lx right ROFINET 10 Topology...
r D18/D08 24V/0 5A Isochrone Mode
Al2.1213
Specify Module...
Delete Del
Go To
•e
elpj
. (0) UR Monitor y
Slot Vickie Order numbs

Edt Symbols—
1 PS 307 5A 6E57 307-1E
Object Properties... Ak+Return
l
2 CPU 315-2 DP 6ES7 315-2A 00
OpenObject With... Ctrl+tAlt+0
t PP
3
Grine via assigned CPU services
Address I Symbol I Date type Content Path IMy_Prolect SIMATIC 300(11\CPU 315-2 DP
mitum. L_vveight_invidid BOOL Indicator 141- weiptt trveltl
,d Address) Symbol I Dispel Status velue I Modify °Wel 1
Indicator 1511 System ON . •_
2 0 4.1 L_SYSTEM BOOL
3 0 42 L_MAN BOX Muter ligit MAN mode
,
in1, 0 4.0 1__Weight_invele BOOL LI true
4 0 43 L AUTO BOOL IndiCela 1511 Automatic mode 0 41 'L SYSTEM' BOOL 11:. false
0 1 41 0 4.2 -L_MAN" BOOt. (J ean true

0 43 1. 11.1i0'
0 14
8001 ri; false
BOOL tk lease
I 1
in • n 4 Om* man. 14,11 git 1....
SIMATIC S7
Siemens AG 2008. All lights reserved.
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.11
win SITRAIN Training for
Symbols You can directly access the symbol table from the "Hardware Configuration"
tool. This allows you to assign symbolic names to the inputs and outputs during
hardware configuration or at a later date when you can make supplements or
changes.
You open the symbol table with a right mouse click on the module. Select Edit
Symbols in the follow-up box. A section of the symbol table with the relevant
addresses is then opened.
Monitor/Modify You can monitor or modify the addresses of the configured modules directly
Variables from the Hardware Configuration tool. The signals of the input modules can be
"checked" and the signals of the output modules can be "controlled" using the
Monitor/Modify (Variables) function.
Product Support Directly from the Internet, you can fetch information on modules or components
from the Product Support pages. As well, it is also possible to update HW Config
by incorporating individual components such as new CPUs or new DP devices
into the current STEP 7 version.
Requirements:
The PG/PC has an Internet connection, a browser for displaying Internet pages,
and the function is enabled in the Hardware Configuration Settings along with
the specification of the Internet address.
Note "Symbolic Addressing" and the editing of symbol tables is dealt with in depth in
the "Symbols" chapter.

SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Cycle/Clock Memory

la:HW Config - [51MAI It 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Projecti _Lai>:j
Ration Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help 1 5j, _xj
D cai; .- o tiu I ED I I e I I Ifk I IED "

-
1
1 F PS 307 54 •4 Time-of-Clay Interrupts I Cynic Interrupts I Diegnoslics/C3ock I Rotection I Communication I
2 r CPU 315.2 DP General I Stare* Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory 1 Interrupts I

F DP Double-click
-
3 Cycle
4 1
01324)C24 / F Update 061 process image cyclically
5 1)032xDC24V/0.54
6 DIEVD0844V/0.54
Soon cycle roxitocing tinie Ina 150
7 Al2s1213i
8 Minimum scan cycle time Ems)
- mi Scan cycle load heel cannier

-aeon rtl 1 20
41 Size of the process image I L

,
41111ijpi UR 0885 - cal Lp at I/0 access actor I No 0885 call up
Slot Module Order number

1 PS 307 SA 6657 3137-1EA00-04A0
2 CPU 315-2 DP 6E67 315-2AF03-0AB 0 -Dock Memory
DP
3 F Clock memory
I
4 0132,d)C24V 6E67 321.1BL00-0
5 D032sEiC24V/0 54 6E57 322-181_00-
6 018/D08s24V/0 54 6E57 323-1BH 00-134.40
Al2s1 288 US7 1313T am .riestn
8
Cancel Help
9 Clock Memory Bit 7 1 6 1 5 1 4 3 1 2 1 1 1 0
10
11 Frequency (Hz) 10.5 10.621 1 11.251 2 1 2.5 1 5 1 10

Period (s) 1 2 11.6 1 1 1 0.8 10.5 1 0.4 1 0.2 1 0.1

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_05E.12 lift■ Automation and Industrial Solutions
Cycle "Scan Cycle Monitoring Time (ms):"

If this time is exceeded, the CPU goes into the STOP mode.
Possible causes why this time is exceeded: communications
processes, accumulation of interrupt events, errors in the CPU
program.
If you have programmed an error OB 80, the scan cycle time is
doubled. After that, the CPU also goes into the STOP mode.
"Scan Cycle Load from Communication (%):"
Communication (such as data transmission to another CPU through
MPI, or test functions that were triggered by PG/PC) is restricted to
the specified percentage of the current scan cycle time.
Restricting the cycle load can slow down communication between the
CPU and PG.
Without additional asynchronous events, the OB 1 cycle time is prolonged by a
factor which can be calculated according to the following formula:
Cycle time (real) = cycle time x 100 / (100 - "cycle load (%)")
Clock Memory Clock memories are bit memories that change their binary value periodically
(pulse-to-pause ratio 1:1). Each bit in the clock memory byte is assigned a
particular period/frequency.
Example of a flashing light with a flashing frequency of 2Hz:
111 . 3 Q8 .7
)

SIEMENS
CPU Properties: General (amongst others MPI Address)
Tine-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication

General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts I
Short Description: CPU 315-2 DP

164 KB work memory; 0.3 ms/1000 instructions; MPt. DP comection (DP
Imaster or DP slave); multi-tier configure Properties - MPI intefface CPU 315-2 OP (ROM) ;
Receive capabity for lateral communic
routing, firmware V1.1
General Parameters I
Order No / firmware 6E57 315-24F0313680 / V1.1
Name. ICPU 315-2 DPI
Address:
-
12 -7-1
Highest address. 31
7 Interface
Transmission rate. 187.5 Kbps
Type MPI
Address: 2 Subnet
Networked: Yes Properties... not networked -- New...

131011 11.111.11MEIMET E
Properties
Comment
Delete
OK
OK Cancel I Help
/1
"General" Tab The "General" tab page provides information about the type of module, its
location and, in the case of programmable modules, the MPI address.
MPI Address If you want to network several PLCs using the MPI interface, you must assign a
different MPI address to each CPU.
Click the "Properties..." button to open the "Properties - MPI Interface" dialog
window, which contains the "General" and "Parameters" tabs.

SIEMENS
Saving Station Names in the CPU
I— Display object properties automatic* whie inserting
P Enable exchange of modules and racks

P Confirm deletion of objects
- Display of configuration tables
Display Size: !Standard
—
Auto Menge
Packing density of the slaves ItiiednAm
R Save object names in the PLC
[D a My_Project rff Save window arrangement on exit
My_Station
7
1.
. Update hardware diagnostics cyclic*
Update Cycle 10 s
p sr S7-Program - Product support information

r Deactivated a Via Internet Default
al Sources Internet addass for product support information
tU Blocks:* Ihttp://wowsiemens.com/autornabon/stepThwconfig1
A My_MM420
1:11 My_TP170B OK Cancel I Help
SIMATIC S7 rd SITRAIN Training for

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.14 wi Automation and Industrial Solutions
Area of Use When the checkbox is activated (check marked), the identifier of modules, DP
slaves, racks and stations are also included in the system data and are loaded into
the modules together with the system data. You enter the identifier in the
"General" tab of the objects.
This has the benefit that when you download the station !nto the PG (without
having the configuration information for the station), the object names are
contained in the station configuration.
Handling Activate the "Hardware Config" tool and select the Options -> Settings menu
options.
Note This function makes the loaded or diagnosed stations more transparent, however
also increases the load memory requirements!
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Saving the Setpoint Configuration and Downloading it in Modules
HW Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project] JJ jc

el Station Edit Insert PLC View °Mons Window Help j2s1
Ctd+N
C
C81+0
Open ONLINE
nose
Save
= Ctr1+5
Consistency Check C131+Alt+IC

Cher 1. Compatibility Ctrl+Alt+F
004+P
Print Preview...
Page Setup... Fanwee MPI a.. I add... Q... Commit
1 My Project\SIMATIC 300(1) D 2
2 LusftungInitialsierung‘57_300 Ration Download
3 My_Project1,S7_300 Statim (only when CPU is
4 SE.118‘2_,RS7 31309tabon 0...3 in STOP mode)
• Exit Alt+F4
8 8
7 11 Al2x1213it SES 7 331.M601-n48o 304...307
8 ■..
Saves and creates al system data in the current station.
nv
` S TRAIN
I
Training for
ISI Automation and Industrial Solutions
Save You select the Station Save menu to save the current configuration in the
current project (without generating system data blocks).
Save and Compile When you select the Station - Save and Compile menu or click the icon in the
toolbar, the configuration and parameter assignment data are also saved in
system data blocks.
Consistency Check You select the Station 4 Consistency Check menu to check whether it is
possible to generate configuration data from the entries made.
Download in Module You select the PLC 4 Download menu or click the icon in the toolbar to
download the selected configuration to the PLC. The PLC must be in "STOP"
mode!
System Data The system data blocks (SDBs) are generated and modified when you configure
the hardware and compile the hardware configuration. SDBs contain
configuration data and module parameters. When a system data block is
downloaded, it is stored in the CPU's work memory.
This makes it easier to replace modules, because the parameter assignment
data is downloaded to the new module from the system data blocks on startup.
The PLC must be in "STOP" mode!
In the programming device, the system data blocks are saved under: Project \
Station \ CPU \ S7_program \ Blocks \ System_data.
You double-click the System data briefcase icon to see the list of system data
blocks.

SIEMENS
Uploading the Actual Configuration to the PG

I II Manager /My Protect D:. /_Lourses My_Proie]
aj PM Olt Insert IPZ Wow Osten, Widow He
1o I rr IP 1 AccmRchts
Download CtrvL Which module do you want to reach?
El ( J My_Plogen Configure... CH-4-E
SOteCee Compile and Download Objects...
Blocks Upload to PG
Rack
Copy RAM to ROM...
Slot
Download User Program to Memory Ca,
Save to Memory Card..,

Retrievefrom Memory Card-. Target Station: a Local
Manage M7 System... r Can be reached by means of gateway

Drive
Enter connection to target station:
Display Accent* Nodes
MPI address I Module type I Station name I Module name I Mark designation
Change Module IdentficatIon- 2 CPU 315-...
CPU Messages...
Display Force Values
Montor/Modify Variables Accessible Nodes
Diagrestic/Seeke INIM=1:21E1111
PROMO
Edlt Diernet
Assign PG/PC
Camel PG/PC Asogriment
Update Firmware
pleats the °pedalo System...
Save Service Data...
Up date
1.1
uploads the current station cafroureen to the creadan system (conflpealesn and wow,
Cancel I Help I

Introduction A configuration is necessary only in the following cases:

• if you want to modify the basic module settings
• for stations with distributed I/O
• for S7-400 with several CPUs or with expansion racks
You can read out the actual configuration from the CPU and look at the set
parameters in an existing system.
Actual Configuration During startup, the CPU generates an actual configuration. That is, the CPU
saves the arrangement of the modules and allocates the addresses in
accordance with a fixed algorithm. If no parameters have been assigned, the
default parameters defined at the factory are used.
The system stores this actual configuration in system data blocks.
Uploading to PG/PC There are two ways of uploading the actual configuration to the PG/PC:
1. In the SIMATIC Manager:
select the PLC 4 Upload Station to PG... menu.
2. In the HW Config tool:
select the PLC 4 Upload menu or click the icon.
Storage on PG/PC The actual configuration read from the hardware is inserted as a new station in
the selected project on the PG/PC.
Note When you read out the actual configuration, the order numbers of the modules
cannot be completely identified. For this reason, you should check the
configuration. If required, insert the exact module type of the existing modules.
To do so, choose the module, and then select the Options -> Specify Module
menu.

SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Adapting the Setpoint Configuration
a:HW Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project]

Station Edt Insert PLC View Options Window He
0 2-, st.i dif I 1 Ral 1111 * el I IIL73 I

133981111111111111111111111•1 9.111
1 PS 307 54
fird
2 CPU 315-2 DP
X2 DP frolic I S tandem!
4 D1323d)C24V PR OF1BUS DP
5 D032rDC24V/0.54 PROFIBUS-PA
6 D18/D08x24V/0.5A E PROFINET 10
7 Al2x129it E
R E SIMATIC 400
71 p-- SIMATIC HMI Station
E 1111SIMATIC PC Based Control 300/400
4.141 (0) UR E a SIMATIC PC Station
sia i Module Order number Rimers M... I ... Q... Comment

1 PS 30754 6ES7 3074 EA00-06A0 ..
2 B CPU 315-2 DP 6ES7 315-2AF03-0ABO V1.1 2
..1/4.." DP /au
3
4 D132)0C24V 13ES 7 321-1BLOO-OAA0 0...3
5 D032sDC24V/0.54 6ES7 322-113L00416A0 4...7
6 D18/D0EN24V/0.54 6ES7 3231 BH00-06A0 8 8
7 Al2x12130 6ES7 331.710301-N30
8 SIMATIC S7-300147-300 and C7 modules
9 central rack)
10 ml
Press Ft to get Help.

Task Since different training units and CPUs are used for the courses, the CPU
available has to be integrated into the setpoint configuration.
What to Do 1. Open the given HW Station with the HW-Config tool

SIMATIC Manager (Offline view) -> select the HW-Station "S7 300 Station"
9 double-click on the "Hardware" object
2. Click on the icon (see left) to have the Hardware Catalog appear.
3. In the Hardware Catalog, select the CPU used in the training unit and bring it
to Slot 2 using drag and drop.
5. Acknowledge the message "Do you want to exchange the component with
the order number .......... for the component with the order number ..........
4. Also check all other modules.
6. Save and compile the configuration with the icon.
7. Download the modified hardware configuration into the CPU.
8. Exit the HW-Config tool.

SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Assigning Parameters to the CPU Clock Memory and Testing It

,
a:HW Conlin - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) -- My_Project] =1Q.121
gation Edit Insert EEC View Qptions Window Help ...„11
51X
51 I i
D t: a II tll
Timepl.Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts 1 Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication I
01111IIMIN=11•111■ Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I
ms*
General I Startup Interrupts
PS 307 50
2 r- CPU 315-2 DP Cycle
DP
Update OBI process image cyclically
4 II DI32xDC24V
Scan cycle monitoring time [ms1: 50
5 II D032xDC24V/0.54
6 II D18./D08ex24V/0.5A Minimum scan cycle -
7 II Al2x1213it Scan cycle bedlam communication [511 Fr
Size of the process image
11_1
11 2d
E (0) UR 0885 call up at I/O access error: I No 0B85 call up
Slot f Module Order number

S7 307-1EA00-0AA0
6E S 7 315-2AF03-0ABO r Clock Memory
1.7 Clock memory
Memory Byte: 10
6ES 7 321-1 BL00-0440
5
6
D°:
D18.
tar - 49
EL tables 1; ,_1171.
12Si
7 Al2, tl
Table Edit Insert PLC Variable View Options Window Help
Cancel I Help
8
9 DI-1611 Iffiblel -I-I 11 F;J_I kl_?1 cY_F
fe •1
10
4 Address Symbol Displa Status value I Modify value'
1
Arrangement of
2
My_Project SIMATIC 300(1) 0111111111-1At.;.
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 iv SITRAIN Training for

Task Assign parameters to the CPU in such a way that the clock memory byte is
available on memory byte MB 10.
Then check the success of your parameter assignment with the "Monitor/Modify
Variable" function.
What to Do: 1. Start the HW-Config tool

SIMATIC Manager (Offline view) -> select the HW-Station "S7 300 Station"
- double-click on the "Hardware" object
2. Parameterize the MB10 memory byte as the CPU clock memory byte
HW Config - double-click on CPU 9 Cycle / Clock Memory
3. Save and compile the modified configuration
Station 4 Save and Compile
4. Download the modified configuration into the CPU
PLC 4 Download
5. Exit the HW Config tool
6. Use the function "Monitor/Modify Variable" to monitor the MB10 memory byte
in the "binary" display format to be able to see the individual bits with the
flashing frequencies
In the SIMATIC Manager, select the CPU of the HW Station 4 PLC 4
Monitor/Modify Variable 4 enter MB 10 in the Variable Table address field
4 using a right mouse-click, set the display format to "binary" 4 activate the
function using the Glasses icon

SIEMENS

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_05E.19 lir Automation and Industrial Solutions
complete a topic.

SIEMENS
CPU Properties
EL:11W Config - [SIMATIC 300(1) (Configuration) — My_Project]
011 Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Wildow Help I
Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/S2) _xj
JCicirt-e
Time-of-Day Interrupts Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication
CIE101111111111=r - General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts I
1 1 PS 307 5A N,
2 1- CPU 31:2bi. 2x Short Description: CPU 315-2 DP
Xl I- DP
3 64 KB work memory; 0.3 ms/1000 instructions; MP1+ DP connection (D pz-J
I
4 DI32xDC24V master or DP slave); multi-tier configuration up to 32 modules, Send and
Receive capability for lateral communication, constant bus cycle time,
5 D032x0C24V/0.5A
routing, firmware V1.1
6 DI8/D0EQ4V/0 54
7 412x1280 Order No./ firmware 6ES7 315-2AF03-64130 / V1.1
;1
Name: ICPU 315-2 DP
412141
.±.1 (0) UR
r Interface
Type: MPI
Slot Module Order number
Address: 2
1 PS 30754 6E57 3071 EA004440
2 CPU 315-2 DP 6ES7 315-2AF03-OADO Networked: Yes
X? DP
3 Comment:
4 DI32xDC24V 6ES7 321-1BLOO.OAAO
5 D032xDC24V/0.54 6E57 322-113L00-0AA0
6 IDI8/D08x24V/0.54 6ES7 323-113H00-04A0
7 .412x1284 6ES7 331-7K801-0030
8
9
10 OK Cancel I Help
Press Fl to get Help. /41

Assigning You assign parameters to the modules to adapt them to the requirements of
Parameters the process.
What to do 1. Select a module in the station window.

2. Double-click the selected module to open the "Properties" dialog window.
3. This dialog window contains ten tabs in which you can assign parameters
for the various CPU characteristics (see next pages).

SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Startup

Properties - CPU 315-2 DP - (R0/52)
Time-of-Day Interrupts I
Cyclic Interrupts 1 Diagnostics/Clock 1 Protection 1 Communication
General Startup Cycle/Clock Memory 1 Retentive Memory 1 Interrupts 1
▪ Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration
• Reset outputs at hot restart
P Disable hot restart by operator (for example, from PG)

or communication job (for example, from MPI stations).
— Startup after Power On
H ot restart a Warm restart r Cold restart
—Monitoring Time for
"Finished' message from modules [100 ms] 1650
Transfer of parameters to modules [100 ms] 1100
Hot restart [100 ms):
OK I Cancel I Help

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_05E.21 Automation and industrial Solutions
Startup The S7-300 and S7-400 CPUs have different startup characteristics.
Characteristics Only with CPUs with integrated DP interface (and S7-400) can you use the
"Startup if preset configuration does not match actual configuration" checkbox to
decide whether the CPU should start up if the setpoint configuration is not the
same as the actual configuration (number and type of modules installed).
The other S7300 CPUs go into RUN when the setpoint configuration is not the
same as the actual configuration.
Warm Restart The S7-300 only recognizes the "Warm restart" startup. Newer S7-CPUs also
recognize "Cold restart". All non-retentive addresses (PII, PIQ, non-retentive bit
memories, timers, counters) are reset (overwritten by 0) and the cyclic program
execution starts at the beginning.
Cold Restart Cold restart behaves the same as Warm restart, except that ALL - even the
retentive memory areas - are reset.
Hot Restart All - even the non-retentive - memory areas retain their contents and program
execution restarts where it stopped.
Monitoring Times • "Finished" message from modules (x100ms):

Maximum time for all modules to issue a Finished message after power
ON. If the modules do not send a Finished message to the CPU within this
time, the actual configuration is not equal to the setpoint configuration.
• Transfer of parameters to modules (x100ms):
Maximum time for "distributing" the parameters to the parameter-
assignable modules (timing begins after "Finished message from modules").
If, after the monitoring time has run out, all modules have not been assigned
parameters, then the actual configuration is not equal to the setpoint
configuration.

SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Retentive Memory

Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock 1 Protection Communication

General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory Retentive Memory Interrupts
Retentivity
Number of memory bytes starting with MBO: 16
Number of S7 timers starting with TO:
Number of S7 counters starting with CO:
–Areas
DB No. Byte Address Number of Bytes
Retentive Area 1:
Retentive Area 2: [C7—

—
Retentive Area 3: [7
Relevant only for CPUs lU
until Oct. 2002 that Retentive Area 4: rc7--

have no backup Retentive Area 5: ib---
battery
R etentive Area 6:
Retentive Area 7: I7— Io ra---
Retentive Area 8: FT
OK Cancel Help

lik; Automation and Industrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. An rights reserved. File: SERV1_05E.22
Retentive Memory The "Retentive Memory" tab page is used for specifying the memory areas to be
retained after a power failure or during the transition from STOP to RUN.
A "warm restart" is performed in both cases on the S7-300.
Warm Restart with On warm restart, tne blocks stored in the battery-backed RAM (OB, FC, FB,
Backup Battery DB) as well as the bit memories, timers and counters defined as retentive
are retained. Only the non-retentive bit memories, timers and counters are reset.
Warm Restart If the RAM is not battery-backed, the information in it is lost. Only the bit
without memories, timers and counters defined as retentive and the retentive data
Backup Battery block areas are saved in the non-volatile RAM area.
After a warm restart (without battery backup), the program must be downloaded
again:
• from the memory card (if inserted) or
• from the PG/PC (if no memory card exists).
Note For CPUs delivered after Oct. 2002, a backup battery is no longer necessary.
All retentive data is saved on the MMC card in case of a power failure.

SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Protection
General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts

Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts Diagnostics/Clock Protection I Communication
Protection level Mode

6.1: Keyswitch setting
Process mode
I— Removable with password
Permissible cycle increase via
• 2: Write-protection test functions:
• 3: Write-/read protection
Password: ( Test mode
Enter again:
OK I __:_l
Car ocel Help

Siemens AG 2008_ All rights reserved. File: SERV1_05E.23 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Default Setting Default setting (protection level 1; no password assigned):

The keyswitch position on the CPU determines the protection level:
• Keyswitch in RUN-P or STOP position: no restrictions
• Keyswitch in RUN position: read-only access possible!
Password If a protection level was assigned with a password (only valid until a memory
reset), a "person who knows the password" has reading and writing access.
"The person who doesn't know the password" has the following restrictions:
• protection level 1: corresponds to the default setting
• protection level 2: read-only access possible, irregardless of the
keyswitch setting
• protection level 3: neither reading nor writing access possible,
regardless of the keyswitch setting.
Characteristics of a Password-Protected Module in Operation
Example: if you want to execute the "Modify Variable" function, you must enter
the password for a module that has been assigned the protection level 2
parameter.
Access Rights You can also enter the password for a protected module in the SIMATIC
Manager:
1. Select the protected module or its S7 program
2. Enter the password when you select the PLC Access Rights menu.
The access rights, after a password has been entered, is only valid until
the last S7 application is completed.
Mode The cycle load for test functions depends on which of the following modes you
select.
In Process Mode, test functions such as "Monitor" or "Monitor/Modify Variable"
are restricted so that the allowable scan cycle time that has been set can not be
exceeded. Testing with breakpoints and single-step (program execution) cannot
be performed.
In Test Mode, all test functions through the PG/PC can be used without
restrictions, even if the scan cycle time is greatly increased.

SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Diagnostics/Clock

General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts

Time-of-Day Interrupts ICyclic Interrupts Diagnostics/Clock I Protection I Communication I
— System Diagnostics
r Extended functions
17 Report caused STOP
r Acknowledgment-triggered reporting of SFB33-35
Clock
Synchterization Synchronization Type Time Interval
In the PLC: INone J INone 2, j
On MPI: INone 1
.1 INone 1-1
On MFI: I l one LI INone —II
Correction factor: ID ms
OK I Cancel I Help
A
System Diagnostics If the "Report cause of STOP" checkbox is deactivated (not checked), no
message is sent to the PG/PC or OP when the CPU goes into Stop mode ("CPU
Messages").
The cause of the stop is still entered in the diagnostic buffer.
Clock With networked stations, it is possible to synchronize clocks. Thus, for example,
a WinCC flexible station can synchronize all remote S7 stations to its own time
of day in a selectable time interval.
It is, however, also possible to automatically reset the clock by a specific
correction value in stand-alone devices.
Correction Factor The correction factor compensates for a loss or gain in the clock time within a
24 hour period.
Positive or negative millisecond values can be specified.
Example: If the clock is 3 seconds fast after 24 hours, this inaccuracy can be corrected
with the "-3000ms" factor.
Note The "Interrupts", "Time-Of-Day Interrupts" and "Cyclic Interrupt" tabs are
discussed in the "Organization Blocks" chapter.

SIEMENS
CPU Properties: Communication

General I Startup I Cycle/Clock Memory I Retentive Memory I Interrupts I

Time-of-Day Interrupts I Cyclic Interrupts I Diagnostics/Clock I Protection Communication
Connection Resources Reserved for
PG Communication:
OP Communication:
S7 Basic Communication:
S7 Communication: 0 (already configured)
Maximum number of connection resources: 12
OK I Cancel I Help
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 17-

Communication Every communication connection occupies a connection resource on the S7-

CPU. Depending on the technical specifications, a specific number of possible
connection resources are available to every S7 - CPU which are occupied by
various communication services (PG/OP communication, S7 communication or
S7 standard communication).
When communication services log on, the connection resources are occupied in
the sequence of the log on.
So that the occupation of these resources is not dependent only on the
sequence of the log on of the various communication services, you can also
reserve communication resources for the following services:
• PG communication
• OP communication
• S7 standard communication
At least one connection resource each is reserved for the PG/PC and OP
communication. Smaller values are not possible.
Other communication services, such as S7 Communication with PUT/GET
functions, cannot occupy these connection resources even if the services make
their connection first.
Instead, still available connection resources are occupied that were not
specifically reserved for a service.

-
SIEMENS
Further Processing of Hardware Stations

in the CA01 Electronic Catalog
Export function
Import function
[Hardware
CA01 S7 Hardware
Electronic Catalog Station
Order lists
E-mail dispatch
Further processing
with text editors
SIMATIC S7 ,1 SITRAIN Training for

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_05E.26 41 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Importing and Exporting a Configuration
Introduction As of STEP 7 V5, it is possible to handle station configurations not only together
with the entire project (such as, save or open), but also to resave them
independent of the project in a text file (ASCII file).
Applications - can be distributed through electronic media (such as e-mail)

configuration of order data in the electronic catalog CA01 (Export)
- generation of hardware configuration data from the CA01 (Import)
- can be read into future STEP 7 versions
the Export file can be printed out with text processor systems or can be
further processed for documentation purposes

SIEMENS
Exporting a Hardware Station
aa7HW Config - [S7_300_Station (Configuration) — SERVI_S[

Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Windo Help
Ctrl+N op iv?
Ctrl+O
Open ONLINE 111111111111111111111111
7 Close ii
Save
Save and Compile Ctr1+5
PROF'S USl1 ) DP master system [I )
- Properties...
T
tams
5
6 Import...
7- Export...
8
— Consistency Check Ctrl+Alt44(
9
1--
Check OP. Coop t.b Ctrl+Alt+F
Ctrl+P
Print Preview... Export Fie:
Page Setup...
D: \ S7_Courses S7_300_Station.cfg Browse
I SERVI_S‘S7_300_Stetion
2 My_Project‘SIMATIC 300(1)
3 LueftunglnitialsierungL57_300_Station
Options Format
4 My_ProjectLS7_300_Station
r Export default values (7 Readable
Exit Alt+F4 I✓ Export symbols r Compact
10 I7 Export subnets
11
12
Exports an extstng station. Save Cancel Help I

gir
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File SERV1_05E.27 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Exporting Open a station configuration or save the just edited station configuration (Menu
option Station 9 Save).
With the station configuration open, select the menu option Station 9 Export.
In the dialog box that then appears, enter the path and the name of the Export
File, the format and other options.
Acknowledge the settings with "Save".
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
CA01: Selection Assistant for SIMATIC
ASST
Offline Mall
SILIUMERIK 8 SIMODRIVE
aroTirne PCS7
Fid nrk
apHonfigurator
tAhn-SPSOST ART
Tree search Extended search SNIATIC ABC Industual Automation Systems - PLC
Interactive Catalog Siemens Automation and Driv
Lt....? Drive Technology SIMATIC cord' oilers
11,1[2i Automation Systems
gr SIMATIC Industrial Automation Systems From the corrnact mini controller including the high-pe
meet every demarn and every requirement, whatever
I 1 Ela.,,k[i! PLC File Name: Folder:
I I EI:Ky Distributed I/0s SIMATIC selection assistant - Project Manager
II I Programming Devices let C:1abc
[a}-f SIMATIC Industrial soh, File Edt Paste View Settings ?
Micro Automation Sets Archiv_11_2003.cs bc
Pa-14) Comment based Autor INts1 [A12411E1 I Archiv_4_2004. cry ~' a

SIMATIC selection assistant - Project
x T IA-Programmer 1
Properties
ARCHNI_BM_MELI
ARCHIV_KURVENi
_j I 0 S_U•
koordinator 54
ARCHIV_SM_MELI
[ File Edit Paste View Settings ?
ARCHIV_System0. c
Import ... Selection assistant chwinto.bd
STEP 7
shier& ET.te
IM000047.JPG
K7 Antrieb PC FW
te:r .ritation cra
Project
test_20_05_2003 02:1 c PANTZON
Project Na:
Ecited front Michael Jantzon

Deatect 1 11 , Changed:

` Automation and Industrial Solutions
Selection Assistant With the SIMATIC selection assistant, you can make the necessary preparations
for importing a STEP7 hardware configuration file (<Name>.cfg).
• Specifying a project name and defining project properties

• Selecting the appropriate configuration file
• Using the import function

SIEMENS
Parts List and Description
SIMATIC selection assistant - Project Manager ,JoI2_cf

Fte Eck Paste View Settings ?
Einks4,4_u2 gifil _m11;7

4111 A
TA-Programmer 1
Properties Pads list Descript System
ISM
Order number Designation Quantity List price Total price

6ES7307-1EA00-06A0 Load power supply PS 307; AC 120/23N, DC 1 upon request upon request
6ES7321-18L00-04A0 Digital input SM 321, isolated, 32 DI, DC 24V 1 upon request upon request
6ES7322-1BL00-O8A0 Digital output 32D0, DC 24V, 0.5A; isolated 1 upon request upon request
SES 7390-1AE804.1AA0 480 ram rag (*ogle mod width 40 mm) 1 uron request upon request
6ES 7392-14100-130.13 Front connector, 40-pole, with screw contact 2 upon request upon request
Total price: upon request

File: SERV1_05E.29 Illtr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Parts List Using the CA01 Catalog CD and the various register tabs, you can get
information about module component lists, pricing etc.

SIEMENS
Symbolic Addressing
W:Symbol Editor - [S7 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project \SIMATIC 3000Y\ .• r:']
yrnbol Table Edit Insert Mew Options Window Help
far, IA 1 4 ith 1ft I ..--) c-, I lAi Symbols .....s..9 1 k?
1 &
Status I Symbol / Address I Dab:trim I Comment •1,
1 L_Weight_hvalid Q 4.0 BOOL Indicator light - weigN invalid
2 1 L_SYSTEM 0 4.1 BOOL Indicator light System ON
3 1 L_MAN Q 42 BOOL Indicator fight MAN mode
4 L_AUTO 0 43 BOOL bcficator light Automatic mode
5 L_Restart man 0 4S BOOL Indicator light for manual wean rested —
6 L_Resteart_aut 0 4.6 BOOL Indicator fight for automatic warm rested
7 L_Conv_Faut 0 5.0 13001. Imitator fight Conveyor fault
8 L_Faull1 0 5.1 BOOL Indicator light Fault 1
9 L_Faut2 Q 52 BOOL Indicator igN Fault 2
10 L_Faut3 0 53 BOOL Indicator Nil Fault 3
11 L_S4_1411 0 5.4 BOOL Indicate. fight Wing at Bay 3
12 L_S5_3,-LB 0 5.5 BOOL Indicator light Transport Bay 3 -> Light barrier bay
13 L_S6_Final_Check 0 5.6 BOOL Indcator fight Fnal check at LB bay
14 L_Bsy1 0 8.1 BOOL Indeater fight Bay 1
15 L_Bay2 0 82 13001 Indcator light Bay 2
16 L_Bay3 0 83 BOOL Indicator light Bay 3
17 L_Bay-LB 0 8.4 BOOL Indicator tit Light barrier bay
18 K_Conv_RIGHT 0 es eax Run conveyer RIGHT
19 H_Conv_LEFT 0 8.6 8001 Run conveyor LEFT
20 Horn 0 8.7 BOOL Horn
21 QB_Simulator-LED OB 5 BYTE lower Simulator LEDs
22 QW_DigDisp GAM 6 WORD BCD cigltal display
23 Cl1N_Control 141420 GAM 42 WORD Control word for 144420
24 QW_Setp_141420 ON 44 WORD Setpoint speed for 144420
25 DEI_Instance_FB20_F... DB 2 FB 20 Instance DB for F1320, Evaluation of Fault 2
26 DB_Instance_FB20_F... 0f3 3 FB 20 Instance DB for F1320, Evaluation of Fat 3
27 DB_FB11_RurningLight DB 11 FI3 11 Instance DB for FBIl_RtrningLight
28 DB_F1317_Fault DB 17 FB 17 Instance DB for F1317 Faut evahation .1
Press F1 to get Help 1---- I— I 4

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_06E.1 lir Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
...........................................................................................................
Objectives 2
Absolute and Symbolic Addressing 3
Symbolic Addressing 4
The Symbol Table 5
Edit: Find and Replace 6
View: Filter 7
View: Sort 8
Editing Symbols in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor ......... 9
Symbol Information in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor ....... 10
Symbol Selection in LAD/FBD ....... 11
Symbol Table: Export ....... 12
Symbol Table: Import 13
Exercise 1: Creating a Symbol Table for the Conveyor Model ....... 14

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Symbolic Addressing
SIEMENS
Objectives
know the difference between absolute and symbolic addressing
know the difference between local and global symbols
know the difference betweeen leading symbols and leading

absolute addresses
be able to edit a global symbol table
be able to use the Block Editor to edit global symbols
ll
SIMATIC S7 Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.2 gi Automation and Industrial Solutions

SIEMENS
Absolute and Symbolic Addressing
Absolute Representation Symbolic Representation
A 10.0 A "SYSTEM_ON"
Q8.0 "LED ON"
A 10.4 A "M_FORW"
Q20.5 "MOTOR_FOR"
Call FC18 Call "COUNT"
Symbol Address Data Type Comment

MOTOR_FOR Q20.5 BOOL Motor moves forward
COUNT FC18 FC18 Count bottles
SYSTEM_ON 10.0 BOOL Switch system on
SYSTEM_ON Q8.0 BOOL Indicator: System is "On"
M_FORW 10.4 BOOL Pushbutton: Motor forward
.61
(max. 24 characters) (max. 80 characters)

‘tiT
Absolute In absolute addressing, you specify the address (such as input I 1.0) directly. In
Addressing this case you don't need a symbol table, but the program is harder to read.
Symbolic In symbolic addressing, you use symbols (such as MOTOR_ON) instead of the
Addressing absolute addresses.
You store the symbols for inputs, outputs, timers, counters, bit memories and
blocks in the symbol table.

SIEMENS
Symbolic Addressing
Where are symbols used? Where are they stored? With what are they created?
Global Data: Symbol Table Symbol Editor

- Inputs
- Outputs
- Bit mem., timers, counters
- Peripheral I/O
Local Block Data: Declaration part of the Program Editor

- Block parameters block
- local / temporary data
Jump Labels Code section of the Program Editor

block
Block Names: Symbol Table Symbol Editor
- OB
- FB
- FC
- DB
- VAT
- UDT
DB Components Declaration part of the DB Program Editor

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 1
‘4r Automation and Industrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_06EA
Global Symbols Global symbols are declared in the symbol table and can be used in all blocks
of a program.
The name in the symbol table must be unique, that is, a symbolic name must
appear only once in the table.
Local Symbols Local symbols are declared in the declaration part of a block. They can be used
only within that block.
The same symbolic name can be used again in the declaration part of another
block.
Notes The LAD/STL/FBD Editor always displays symbols declared in the global
symbol table in quotation marks. Local address symbols (local variables and
parameters) are always displayed with a # (hash or pound mark) in front of
them.
You don't have to include the quotation marks or the hash mark when you enter
symbolic addresses. The program editor automatically adds these for you.
Abbreviations - OB Organization blocks (administration blocks)

FC Functions (are used for program structuring)
- FB Function blocks (instantiation)
- DB Data blocks (store process data in the S7)
- VAT Variable tables (monitoring instrument for process variables)
- UDT User-defined data types (data type defined by the user)

SIEMENS
The Symbol Table
MyProtect -- D: \Courses \MyProject
E
MyPioject
0111 S7_300_Station _DJ 12
1
II
E CPU 315-2 DP Sources Blocks
E S7ptogram
al Sources
Blocks
yi
E i MICROMASTER_420
2 Touchpanel
-a,Symbol Editor - (57program (Symbols) — MyProject 57_300 Station\ ,.1.g125.1
Symbol Table Edit Insert View motions Window 2_cl
irakia a y, Symbols I WI
Statu Swift( Address ' Data type Comment
70 OB WartnRestart 013 100 013 100 Warm restart OB
71 L_SYSTEM Q 4.1 BOOL Indicator tight System ON
72 L MAN 0 4.2 BOOL hclicetor ION MAN mode
73 L_AUTO 0 4.3 BOOL Include( nigh/ Automatic nada
74 L_Restart_man 0 4.5 BOOL Indicator tight for mental warm restart
75 L_Restart_aut 0 4.6 BOOL. Indicator NM for aulanath wean restart
76 L_Conv_Faut 0 5.0 BOOL Indicator light Conveyor fault
77 X 0 5.1 BOOL Indicator light Fault 1
78 L_Faut2 0 52 BOOL Indicator WI Faut 2
79 L_Fault3 0 5.3 BOOL Indicator Ugh Fault 3
80 = L_E■avl 0 8.1 BOOL Indicator NM Bay 1
61 L_Bay2 0 82 BOOL Indicator light Bay 2
62 = L_Bayl 0 6.3 BOOL Indicator NM Bay 3
63 L_Bay-LB 0 8.4 BOOL Indicator ight Light barrier bay
84 K Cony RIGHT 0 8.5 eoo1 Run conveyor RIGHT
--
Press F1 to get Help. r
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 gee SITRAIN Training for

Opening the Every "S7 program" has its own symbol table. You can open a symbol table
Symbol Table from the SIMATIC Manager, among other ways, with a double-click on the
"Symbols" icon.
You can also open the symbol table from the LAD/STL/FBD Editor using the
Options - Symbol Table menu option.
Table Structure In the symbol table, a line is created for every variable. You then enter the
symbol name, the address, the data type and a comment for the variable in the
columns. A blank line is automatically added at the end of the table for defining
a new symbol.
"Status" Column Invalid symbol definitions are marked as follows in this column:
= The symbol name or address is identical to another entry in the symbol
table.
X The symbol is incomplete (the symbol name and/or the address is missing).
Note As soon as a symbol table has been created, the declared symbols are also
available in all other tools (such as LAD/STL/FBD Editor, HW-Config, and
Monitor/Modify Variables etc.).

SIEMENS
Edit: Find and Replace
Symbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project\SIMATIC 300(1)\CPU 315-2 DP]

a Symbol Table IEdit Insert View Options Window He
CtrI+27
Undo
r cell Ctri-i-Y
Status We type Comment
41 Cut Ctrl+X 001 Momertary contact System ON
42 Copy Ctrl+C 001 Momentary collect System OFF (NC collect)
43 001 Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact
Pa5te
44 OOL Jog conveyor LEFT, momertary collect
45 Delete Del 001 Swtch - Operating Mode Preselect '0. 41AMJAL,
46
47 Select • 001 Momertery contact, confirm operating mode
0 • Display quality, 1 - Display weight
48 Undo Selection OOL Momentary collect to acknowledge warm restart display
49 IP•
50 Ctr1+%Al
51 Oa_ Suchen neck Ersetzen dick
52
Go To Row... Ctrl-FE
OOL IA8. 1A4. 2.1 «Reduziert I
53 Add Defauk Symbols OOL
54 kener ate ',DE; 001 r Suchberei:h
55 Special Object Properties COL r Von Cursorposition r Von Cursorposition Guard r Markiltung
56 _otty.D LiOOL thwarts aufwarts
57 T_Bay-LB 8.4 BOOL
Opbonen
58
59
BAY1
BAY2
8S
8.6
BOOL
BOX r Nu genes Wort suchen ma Widcards suchen
60 BAY3 8.7 BOOL r GroB/Kleinschrerbung beachtan
61 PNThcanbw IN 2 WORD
62 AN_State_MM420 PA( 42 WORD
Looks for text or replaces text in the arrant symbol table. Suchen I Erseten I Ale ersetzen 1 Schis8en 1 Hie
_.111 SITRAIN Training for

Find and Replace A number of options are available for finding and replacing text in the current
window:
• Find what:
Enter the text you are looking for.
• Replace with:
Enter the replacement text.
• From cursor down:
Searches downwards to the last line in the symbol table.
• From cursor up:
Searches upwards to the first line in the symbol table.
• Match case:
Only searches for the specified text with identical use of uppercase and
lowercase letters.
• Find whole words only:
Searches for the specified text as a separate word, not as part of a longer
word.
• All:
Searches through the whole symbol table, starting from the cursor position.
• Selection:
Searches only the selected symbol lines.
Note When looking for addresses, you must insert a wildcard after the address
identifier (? for one character, * for several characters), otherwise the address
cannot be found.
Example: For find and replace:
for example, replace all outputs that have address 8. with address 4.:
Find what: Replace with:

Q 8. Q 4.

SIEMENS
View: Filter
'Symbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Prolort SIMAT C 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DPP 11711 J
Et, Symbol rode Eck Sleet I Hew Options Meow He
jranaleslxike - I Del
11111111111■1111111111fiffar-
Zoom In CITH-Nurn-r
Zoom Out CP1+Num-
Stem SYmb01
119 OB_Cycle Zoom Factor...
120 OES_Cycky -Fier List
1 21 081_110_FLT1
122 OB SlareFei
Na: Filter name:
Ce foe Maw
123
124
013 WarrnRe
p%' An
Ccrumns 11, 0, M, C, CC 071+K restart 013
-Pali far
lAll Symbols J (Selection in the Symbol Table
with Alt+0, ..,Alt+9)
MNAl2 Tooear
125 or-Pcri for
126 LWargrtirn 5C to 8w or Iptt - we New filter Dela, cs
127 L_SYSTEM upd.t. PS or Pare Sysl
128 L_MAN or Isrt MAP
129 L_AUTO 0 43 BOOL Incbcdce lett Auk — Display Symbol with Property...
130 L_Reatakman 0 4.5 1300L Indicator ept to r
131 L_Realart_aut 0 46 1930L becalm 1)1 to e Name. Monitoring: I' _II
.2j
'
1 18
132 L_Corn_Fati 0 5.0 DOM tectica VI Cm
133 L_Fautl 0 5.1 BOO. Indloalor Ipla Fad
Address:
_LI Op. Ctrl. + Monitoring: I' z_l
L _Fault2
.:_1
134 0 52 BOX Indicator Ibb Fad
Data Type: Message:
135 L_Fau1.3 0 5.3 SCOL Indicator NMI Feel I' _II
136
137
L S466
L_S5_3-Ple
0
0
5.4
SS
00C4.
13COL
Irdicator iptt Is
Ineacetor fpM Trar
Comment .
.:d Communication: I'
138 L_S6fInal_Cheick 5.5 DOM Indicator qt Fria Control at contact:
F—E
139 L_Bayl 0 6004 Indicator aget Bay
. -
140
Symbol Editor - [57 Prograrn(2) (Symbols) — My_Project S1MATIC Display Symbol with Status...
a
141
,
142 Symbol Table Edit Insert Vow Options Window Help
I Valid lInvalid
143
144
rai: 61 a Et) f' - I r Flared yew 2:1 (non-unique, incomplete)
Status Symbol 1 Mesas I OM* Woe I Cannon
145
LB I 8.0 I BOOL WI Pm
146 TSayl 81 5)00(.
Fiters the 3 T_Bay2 I 82 BOOL Fifer Cancel I Help I
0 8.3 8001 hlorneria
T_Bey-LB II 8.4 BOOL momectarreirmeroprourrierm--
BAY1 I 8.5 0001. Proxbray wary Bay 1
BAY2 1 86 DOOL Proyirdy mace Bay 2
BAY3 I 8.7 8001 Probriy sinew lbw 3
Mamba of symbols: 61172
L
View: Filter Only the symbols which meet the active filter criteria ("symbol properties") are
displayed in the current window.
You can apply several criteria at once. The following filter criteria can be linked
with one another:
Name, Address, Data Type, Comment, Operator Control & Monitoring,
Communication, Message.
Permissible wildcards are ? for one character and * for several characters.
Examples • Name: M*
Only the names that begin with "M" and that contain any number of
additional characters are displayed in the symbol table.
• Name: SENSOR_?
Only the names that begin with "SENSOR_" and that contain one other
character are displayed in the symbol table.
• Address: 1*.*
Only the inputs are displayed.
• Valid, Invalid
The symbols must be unique, that is, a symbol or an address must exist
only once in the symbol table. If a symbol or an address appears more than
once, the lines in which it appears are displayed in "Bold". If your symbol
table is long, and you want to find such ambiguous symbols or addresses
more quickly, you can display only these lines of the symbol table by
selecting the menu option View Filter and the attribute "Invalid".

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
View: Sort
v
a5ymbol Editor - [57 Program(2) (Symbols) -- My_Project \SIN1ATIL 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DP]
a Symbol Tat* Edit Insertr h
rool Options Wridow Help .1.2J25.1
car, 61 ! IX gla 3 la zocf"^ Ctrl+Num+
wl
ZOOM Out Ctrl+Nurn-
Status I Symbol merit
37 FC_MM420 Zoom Factor... ontrol MM420
38 .FC_Sequenc .equencer for production fne
39 FC_Cornrnark
40 I FC_Scale
41 T_System_O Columns R, 0, 14, C, CC Ctrl+K emery contact Syste
J
42 T_System_O emery contact Syste 'F (NC contact)
43 T _Jou RION' v. 1.Mbar
conveyor R101-17;r:
VI collect
44 T_Jog_LEFT Status Bar -conveyor LEFT, y coiled
45 S_WA_Mode upd,t, FS ch - Operathg
Sort
46 T_M/A_Acc ary collect
47 S_VVeight/Quantity I 0.6 13001- Display quell
Column: Address Ascending
48 T_Ackn_WarrnRestarl I 0.7 BOOL Momentary contact
T_Ackn Fault I 1.0 BOOL Momentary coiled Address 4..c.Pndina
49
Address Descending
50 S_Faut1 I 1.1 BOOL Simulate Foul 1, 0.
Data Type Ascending
51 S_FauL2 I 1.2 BOOL Simulate Fault 2, Data Type Descending
52 SFaul3 I 13 BOOL Simulate Fault 3, Os Comment Asc
53 LB I 8D BOOL Light earner
54 T_Bay1 I 8.1 BOOL Momentary contact
55 T_Elay2 I 8.2 BOOL Momentary contact OK Cancel Help
56 T_Bey3 I 8.3 BOOL Momentary coded
57 T_Bay-LB I 8.4 BOOT Momentary contact Light barrier bay
58 BAY1 I 8.5 BOOL Proximity sensor Bey 1
60 BAYS I 8.7 BOOL Proximity sensor Bev 3
Sorts the display according to specific criteria. r--r---1

Sort The entries in the symbol table can be displayed in alphabetical order. You use
the View - Sort menu option to specify the column to be used as the point of
reference for sorting in the current window.
There is an alternative way to sort:
1. Click the column heading "Symbol, Address, Data type or Comment" for
sorting in ascending order in this column. Answer "Yes" when prompted.
2. Click the column heading once more for sorting in descending order in this
column. Answer "Yes" when prompted.

SIEMENS
Editing Symbols in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor

LAD/STL/FEID - [FICI My_Project SIMATIC 300(1) CPU 315-2 DP] ...L412.Jc
CI. File Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help JJJ
❑4,-1=-1®1 I IeIfdL-LI E ICI F 9.1 I LLI Firt -IFI*1-011141-4-fl j
JJi
FC1 System
System ON/OFF
g...1 New network
E yr Bit logic
T_Syst es_ in= E Comparator
Cut Ctri+X
ON SR ESi Converter
II
Copy
0 Paste
Ctrl+C
CIAO
E -a Counter
E DB cal
•r_Systak_
On • Delete Del E Jumps
111 mInteger function
VI Insert Network Ctrl+R E Floating-point fct.
Insert Empty Box Silt+F9 E Move
Insert Symbol Cir1+3 fiA Prooram control
Go To
Edit Symbols... Alt+Return
Special Object Prq ties
— It Program e... Cal struc...
TI1141 4 11 ■1 6: Magna:bar 7: Compaiis

Shows properti Address i I Symbol Dees type I Cabbed
L SYSTEM BOOL INclocelor light System ON
Add to Sytobott I Delete Symbol Sorting I
1 Ditpley Columns R, 0. M, C, CC
The symbols an welted eali, DE a 'Apply'
A
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 l v.
File: SERV1_06E.9 ik Automation and Industrial Solutions
Edit Symbols With the menu option Edit 9 Symbols..., or a right mouse-click on the address
followed by the menu option Edit Symbols..., you can also assign symbolic
names to absolute addresses at a later point in time. These assigned names
are automatically entered into the symbol table.
If you assign a name that is already in the symbol table, it will be displayed in a
different color. Duplicate names cannot be used in the symbol table.

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Symbol Information in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor

AD STL ,FEID [Fri -- My_Project .5114/1511 300(1 )\CPU 315-2 DP]
Cl• Fie Eat Insert PLC Debug new Options Widow Hew, —12.1a1
DIr312-11:111 klitALM . 11111
. ciAji ra.
AD . STI IAD - [Ell -- My_Project.5114ATIC MOW CP11315-2Fin'
LI22.1 Eft (a Fie 644 Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help ,14.1251
'di System Dia...I:Ho Lie xiikiel c. Ian
mem System ON/OFF
LLI L.1
2 -11-1*1-01E11.1-r1 3-1 LI
?
. .
T_System_ 1,ATSTIM 7C1 System
ON. SA
------
=13E: System ON/OFF
I I S 8
:'
71System_
OFF. I0.0 04.1
1 10.1 iT System OFF / Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact)]
Momentary
contact
Indicator
light
System ON System ON
.
"T_Systes_ L_SYSTIM.
Symbol imbesmstiam: ON" SR
T_System_ON 10.0 -- Momentary contact Sy I
T_System_OFF 10.1 Momentary contact Sy
00.1
L_SYSTEM 04.1 -- Indicator light Syst
Momentary
contact
System
OFF INC
contact)
.
TSystaa_
OFF'
1 - --
1 1/1 A
1
11 14 DIM WHEW 2 Into a Croesreimences Addlets 14o
Press Fl to get Help. 0 loffIne

NI
11 4 1313 1111iLIM Info Commelemnom Arktess via rx
Press F1 to get Help.

SERV106E.10
Addressing In the LAD/STL/FBD Editor you can choose to display the addresses in one of
the following two ways when you select the View - Display with - Symbolic
Representation menu option:
• Symbolic Addressing or
• Absolute Addressing.
You can display the symbolic and absolute address assignments used in the
network along with their comments by selecting the View 9 Display with 9
Symbol Information menu option.
The assignments are found under the network in LAD/FBD and in STL they are
found in the statement line.
Symbol Information In the LAD/STL/FBD Editor settings you can select whether the symbol
information for the addresses is to be displayed directly at the address (see
right picture) or at the lower edge of the network (see left picture).
Note If you position the mouse pointer on an address, a "Tooltip" appears with the
symbol information for this address.

SIEMENS
Symbol Selection in LAD/FBD

AD 571 - 1 • "FE -- 5E1011 573(105[allon',CPt) 315-2 Din,-\ FC14]
0 He Edit Insert PLC Debug Yew Options
❑I2;11HWsJAliasj rial Lk* r:

1
0014 Title,
=gm Indicator light 8.ty 1
1C Cons_
.
•M tanv
•1_41710 . UMW "BAT1` •13.5Y2. Fault• •L_Bay-12 . •L_Bayl.•
VtVI Vi VI
.
L_AUTO . "UTZ" 1.11.• Fault' •L_Bay-LB .
K Cony
RICKY .
lash_218 .
N_Ans_Leh BOOL 14.0 Aux. mg
N_Aux_Nan_ON BOOL 16.2 Edge e.
Network 2: Indicator ligt
Njur_Systam_011 BOOL 15.1 Edge at
M_Bayl_occup BOOL 14.1 Mowry
.
R_Cono_ N_Bey2_ocony POOL 14.2 Memory
.1_1070. RIM"
1_Bay3_occup BOOL 14.3 Memory
I VI- N_Bays_occup_1242 BOOL 33.0 m11 Bory
r1
111_Cono_Yoult BOOL 17.0 Memory
.8171° N_Cono_Yoult_INCE BOOL 33.1 Neaory
vi_ eN_Cono_Jog_11... BOOL 30.3 mono,.
POOL 30.2 Memory
.1_1=0° RIGS(' IIN_Edge_Aux POOL 101.0 Ausi11]
H— kiault1 BOOL 17.1 Memory
IIN_Youle2 3001 17.3 peso,
f----I BOOL 4 10.5 Memory
Network B: Title:
Initiallgtete BOOL 101.1 Memory
Cono_ 11_3og_LIIT 3001 16.3 Memory
sremro• lain_Jeg_BICHT BOOL 16.2 Mowry
16114_11/1_Acc•pt_BNI BOOL 4 30.5 Mowry
Nissing or incorrect. Bit
itM_N/A_ModeSel... BOOL 21 30.4 timnoryyj npai.
mourn WILCII/ ■
Mery cc inconectki eddies, eess <5.2 Pee 1

Introduction To simply writing a symbolic program , you can use the View 4 Display with 4
Symbol Selection menu option to show a selection of symbols.
When you label the address and you enter the first letter of a symbol name, a
section of the symbol table pops up that starts with this letter.
All valid addresses for this block are displayed. These are all global variables
(even those declared in data blocks), local variables (temporary and static) and
the parameters of the affected block.
In the first column of the symbol selection you can either display the symbol or
the absolute address. To make the choice, select the Options 4 Settings 4
View tab menu options in the LAD / FBD / STL Editor and define how you
would like to sort the selection list.

SIEMENS
Symbol Table: Export

reel Symbol Editor -1[57 Program(2) (Symbols) — My Project \ SIMATIC 3130(1) 1, CPU 315-2 DP]
Symbol Table Edit Insert View Options Window Help
G Open... Ctrl+O
`ETo I le I
—
30
Close Ctrl+F-4
Ctrl-f5
inert
2ontrol of conveyor motor
1 -1
"aut evaluttion
Properties... 2ourt parts
:curt parts using ad;
Where do you want to store the table?
33
Import...
34
35 111311 11111
..=t,c OEMIIIIII■OIIIIM JJ
36 mt.., arhp Store Speichen 1 0 S7 Courses I I iI
7 Print Preview... -.centre
38 Segue ,, LueftunglnitialisierLeigsTest i DSERV2_L
Page Setup...
39 "ontrc „ My_Proje
40 1 fly_Project%5IMATIC 300(1)‘CPU 315-2 DPI...115ymbols for an PRO3_Loe
41 2 My_Profect \ 57_300_5tation1CPU 315-2 DPI. ../Symbols nonfat SERV1_A
42 3 SERV2_5‘57_300_Station 1, CPU 315-2 DP1... \Symbole nentar „ SERVI_L
43 4 SERV1 5‘57 300_5tation I CPU 315-2 DPV.A.Symbole cony. SER92_13
44 come
45 Exit Alt+F4 tch - e
46 I T_MfA_Accept I 0.5 BOOL , Momentar
Dateinarne: FiTbol_Table Speichern
47 S_VVeighbQuartily I 0.6 1E1001 0 ri Distal:
48 T_Ackn WeemRestart I 0.7 BOOL 1.4otnentar
DateitYP: (System Data Format l SDFI Abbrechen
49 T_Aclen_Faut I 1.0 BOOL Momenter
Copies the selected symbol table or parts of it to a file (of a different format).
A
In which format do you want to store
the table?

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 'JP Automation and Industrial Solutions
General The Symbol Table - Export menu option enables you to store symbol tables in
different file formats so that you can work on them with other programs. You
can select the following file formats:
• ASCII Format (*.ASC)
- Notepad
- Word
• Data Interchange Format (*.DIF)
- EXCEL
• System Data Format (*.SDF)
- ACCESS
• Assignment List (*.SEQ)
- STEP 5 assignment list

SIEMENS
Symbol Table: Import

Symbol Editor - [S7 Program(2) (Symbols) — My_Protert \ S1MATIC 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DP] '
kail Symbol Table Edit Insert View Options Window Help ..112.1A
open... Ctr1+0 —
E's-ri I WI
•— Close Ctrll-F4
inert
ave Ctr1+5 ontrol of conveyor motor
,
ault evaluation
32 Properties... :curt parts
33 Count parts ustig addbon
Import...
34 or evaluating faults
Export...
35 :ontrol BCD digital display
36 Print...
37 Print Preview... 111.(1
38
39
P age Setup... Suchen in: I i0 SLCoutses a Li rfik
40 1 Pity_Proyect151MATIC 300(1ACYLI 315-2 D
LuthunglnitialisierunosTest SERV2_L
41 2 My Project 57_300_5tation \ CPU 315-2 DI
42 3 5ERV2_5/57_300_5tation‘CPU 315-2 DPI.
My_Proje SymbolTable.sd Select directory path
43 4 SERVI_SA57_300_Station \ CPU 315-2 DPI. PRO3_Loe
44 SERVl_A
45 Exit
SERV1_L
46 T14/A_Accept
SERV2El
47 S VVeight /Quant y
48 T_Ackn_VvarmRestart
49 IT Ackn Fault
Inserts a copy of a saved fie (of a different format D alert-lame: Symbol_T able sdf Enter file name
C
D atertyp: I System D ata Format r.SDF) Abbrechen I
Select file format

A
General The Symbol Table 9 Import menu option enables you to import symbol tables
that were created with other user programs.
What to Do 1. Activate the Symbol Table 9 Import menu option.

2. Select the file format in the "Import" dialog window.
You will find the same formats as for Export.
3. Select the directory path in the "Look in:" list box.
4. Enter the file name in the "File Name:" box
5. Click the "Open" button.
File Types You can import the following file formats:

• ASCII Format (*.ASC)
- Notepad
- Word
• Data Interchange Format (*.DIF)
- EXCEL
• System Data Format (*.SDF)
- ACCESS
• Assignment List (*.SEQ)
- STEP 5 assignment list

SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Creating a Symbol Table for the Conveyor Model
ul
"K_Conv_R1GHT" (Q 8.5) "BAY1" "BAY2" "BAY3" "LB" : .... "Horn"
"K Cony LEFT" (Q 8.6) (I 8.5) (1 8.6) (1 8.7) (1 8.0) .... (Q 8.7)
— —
67"
! I
I
I I I
' "
/ T— Bay1" "T Bay2" 1 "T Bay3" "T_Bay-LB"
i (I 8.1) '
I
8.2) : 8.3) (1 8.4)
"L_Bay1" "L Bay2" "1j Bay3" ".L_Bay-LB"
(Q 8.1) (Q
2) 8. (Q 8.3) (Q 8.4)
A
SIMATIC S7 Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_06E.14
Task Include the symbols for the inputs and outputs of the conveyor model as seen
in the slide into the existing symbol table.
What to Do 1. In the SIMATIC Manager, select the S7 program called "My_Program"

2. Start the Symbol Editor by double-clicking on the symbol table
3. Complete the symbol table with the addresses shown in the slide.
4. Save your symbol table

SIEMENS

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_07E.1 Z"' Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Objectives 2
Commissioning Checklist 3
LEDs on the S7-300 Power Supply 4
...........................................................................................................
LEDs on the S7-300 CPU 5
LEDs on Digital Modules 6
LEDs on the S7-400 Power Supply 7
...........................................................................................................
LEDs on the S7-400 CPU 8
Performing a Memory Reset and Warm Restart .......9
Calling the "Monitor/Modify Variable" Tool .....10
Monitoring and Modifying Variables .............................................................................................. 11
Saving the Variable Table ............................................................................................................ 12
Exercise 1: Testing the Conveyor Model's Sensor (Input) Wiring 13
Exercise 2: Testing the Conveyor Model's Actuator (Output) Wiring 14

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 HW Commissioning
SIEMENS
Objectives
know the meanings of the LEDs on the S7 modules

be able to perform a CPU memory reset
with the "Monitor/Modify Variables" tool...
...be able to create and save a variable table
...be able to check the wiring of the sensors
• ... be able to check the wiring of the actuators


SIEMENS
Commissioning Checklist
• Perform a CPU memory reset.
• Carry out a CPU warm restart.
• Check the LEDs on the modules.

•
• Start the SIMATIC Manager.
• Download the hardware configuration
• Check inputs using the Monitor/Modify Variable tool.

•
• Check outputs using the Monitor/Modify Variable tool.

Checklist The checklist shows the individual preparatory steps for commissioning the
hardware. If you do not want to use the default setting, it may be necessary to
assign parameters to the modules before you check the inputs and outputs.
The individual steps are described in more detail on the following pages.

SIEMENS
LEDs on the S7-300 Power Supply
LED "DC24V" State Reaction of the Power Supply
Continuous On 24 V available 24 V available
Output circuit is overloaded:

• Voltage dip,
• up to 130% (dynamic)
voltage recovery when
Flashing overload no longer exists
• up to 130% (static)
• up to 130% (static)
voltage depression,
reduces the service life
Voltage interruption, automatic

On Short circuit in output circuit recovery when short circuit
eliminated
Overvoltage or undervoltage on the Overvoltage can cause destruction.

Off primary side With undervoltage, automatic
(permissible range: 187V to 264 VAC) interruption.

qt-
LED The power supply has a diagnostic LED "DC24V" on the front side of the
module. Use this LED to determine the state of the power supply.

SIEMENS
LEDs on the S7-300 CPU
CRJ315-2 DP _a.
Sr ? SF D:PUP-2 SF
SATS da,
u ,SAMENs
DC5v %Sv
+1 FRcE 4 FRcE
!FluN '{RIND
/stop
STO..
MR Es
S
'S -30 0
2 2
Pn 00,4.
ia
GUSa
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 (01

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_07E.5 „ Automation and Industrial Solutions
Status Displays SF System Fault: group error, programming error or fault from a
( LEDs ) diagnostics-capable module
BATF Battery fault: battery is empty or is not present
DC 5V 5V supply voltage present.
FRCE Lights up when a forcing is active.
RUN Flashes when the CPU starts up and
is steady on in the RUN mode.
STOP Is steady on in the STOP mode,
Flashes slowly when a memory reset is requested and
flashes quickly when a memory reset is carried out.
SF DP System Fault DP: group error in the Distributed Peripherals
is steady on when there is a fault in the distributed peripherals
BUSF (BF) = Bus fault, is steady on when there is an interrupted cable, for
example.
Flashes when there is a station failure, for example

SIEMENS
LEDs on Digital Modules
S7-300 S7-400
Status LEDs for every individual channel
• Signal state
at the terminals
(for digital inputs)
• Internal state,
before the opto-
coupler
(for digital outputs)
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.6
Status LEDs There are LEDs for diagnostics purposes for every input and output channel on
the module. These LEDs can be helpful in locating program errors.
The LEDs indicate:
• the process state for digital inputs
• the process state for S7-300 digital outputs
• the internal state before the optocoupler for S7-400 digital outputs.

SIEMENS
LEDs on the S7-400 Power Supply
"INTF" -> internal fault

"BAF" -> battery fault
"BATT1F"-> Battery 1 empty or missing
"BATT2F"-> Battery 2 empty or missing
"DC 5V" -> 5 V OK
"DC 24V"-> 24 V OK
"FMR" Acknowl. switch (Fault Message Reset)
On/Off switch
(Standby)
Battery compartment I U.
r-
Selection switch for battery monitoring I

"BATT INDIC"
"VOLTAGE" selector > —
3-pin power connection
A
Power Supply The power supply (PS) supplies the internal 5V voltage for the modules.
Automatic adjustment is made for line frequencies from 48 to 64 Hz.
LED "INTF" Lights up in the event of internal faults, such as

• Short circuit or overload at 5V/24V
• Standby switch on "0" and impermissible external supply
• Battery fault
LED "BAF" Battery fault. Lights up if the battery voltage on the backplane bus is too low.
Example: No batteries present or battery failure and there is no external power
supply available.
LED "BATT1F/ Lights up in the case of battery reversal, if no battery is present, or the battery
BATT2F" is half discharged. The BATT.INDIC switch for battery monitoring is set to the
1BATT position (for one battery), the 2BATT position (for 2 batteries) or OFF
(no battery monitoring).
LED "DC 5V/DC 24V" Is lit when the 5V/24V DC output voltage is within the tolerance limits and
flashes to indicate voltage recovery after a short circuit or overload.
"FMR" Ackn.Switch Acknowledgement switch for acknowledging and resetting a fault message
when the fault has been eliminated.
ON/OFF Switch Switches the output voltage (5/24 VDC) to OV and switches off the LEDs by
(Standby) interrupting the control current circuit. (The power supply is then in standby
mode because the primary line voltage cannot be switched off.)

SIEMENS
LEDs on the S7-400 CPU
INTF 71
CPU with one interface CPU with two interfaces

SITRAIN f or
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved File: SERV1_07E.8
Fault LEDs CPUs have fault LEDs that provide first information about an occurred error or
that give the CPU status:
LED "INTF" Indicates an internal fault (error in the user program ).
LED "EXTF" Indicates an external fault (fault in an I/O module).
LED "BUS1F" Indicates a bus fault of the MPI/DP interface.
LED "BUS2F" Indicates a bus fault of the DP interface.
LED "FRCE" Indicates that inputs/outputs are forced.

SIEMENS
Performing a Memory Reset and a Warm Restart

RUN-P
RUN RUN
1. Set the mode selector switch to STOP STOP
MRES*
STOP st!'
MRES
RUN-P
2. Hold (Press) the mode selector switch in the MRES RUN
RUN
position until the STOP LED has flashed twice slowly. STOP
Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to MRES
STOP CV
the STOP position.
MRES
within 1 sec
RUN-P Y
RUN 25.Turn (Press) the mode selector switch to the MRES posi-
;. RUN
tion once more until the STOP LED begins to flash quickly.
; .STOP
STOP CI) Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to MRES
the STOP position.
MRES
RUN-P
RUN 3. Set the mode selector switch to the RUN-P (RUN)
RUN
STOP
position ! (A warm restart is carried out in the transition
MRES
STOP _11.„,) from STOP to RUN/RUN-P) ,
MRES/III

File SERV1_07E.9 Or Automation and Industrial Solutions
Memory Reset When a memory reset is performed on an S7 CPU, the following happens:
• all CPU user data as well as the entire load and work memory are cleared
• the CPU interrupts all connections to other communications partners
• the CPU parameters and all modules are set to default values
• in the case that a memory card is used, the CPU copies the relevant portion
of the stored program needed for execution into the internal RAM
Warm Restart During a warm restart, the process images and the non-retentive data are
deleted. Then the cyclic program execution begins by reading in the process
image input tables (PII).

SIEMENS
Calling the "Monitor/Modify Variable" Tool
VSIMATIC Manager - [SERV I _S — IM57_Courses".SER V I _L]

a Fie Edit Insert j PLC View Options window
Access Rights
D la- 11? at I AD 5T1 I BD if C lb .
1 on,lotor" - - stavi_s.si_soo_stationNcets 26J
SERV1 S Download arkt. O Pee Ed, 1,24.L I PLC Debug New Options wad. Heb JJJ
El II S7:300_Sta Configure... Ctrl+K DIct12-11:11 & D'""*.d
El CPU 31! Compile and Download Objects... a.16el !clr!I I Es46bhCemealenteCo141eursdCP11
Ch1: Up'osd to PG
Upload Station to PG... g innertane DepleParceNkos
Copy RAM to ROM.., a re
MICROI. Download User Program to Memory Card
Q. our
g TP17013 Col
Et,3 Ch08_8 Save to Memory Card... 7016 7101o:
Kap09_binar Retrieve from Memory Card...
IE Kep10_dcite
Kap12,Rew Manage P17 System...
Efl
El a Kap13_MM4 Drive etenT•
Display Accessble Nodes V ( )—I
Change Module Identification.., r

M.E . 2: Jog Conveyor LIFT
CPU Messages...
Display Force Values 181
-ji IIAIJIMIN 1: Ewa A 2 1rdo Ciodo A 4:Meats We A a Madly A & !Novae
c
.4.12J2-i
Disignosbc/Setting IS Table Ede Wert PLC Variable New Options Werlow Help
PROFIBUS
Edit Ethernet Node...
DIGAUI X 2_1
( KiJ 1 21T-2:1_ Isk411
Address' Symbol I Display towel [ Status velool Modify velu'
Assign PG /PC •fain
83 I_Eleyr B001.
Cancel PG/PC Assignment 2 0 84 -1_ _Eley-Ur 13001. II Ids*
Update Firmware 3 0 8 5 "K _Cony jittOefr BOOL lase
Update the Operating System... 4 0 8 6 "h_Conv_LEFT .
13001. ■ leise
5 0 87 "Horn'. 1300L false
Displays selected variable values for monitaing and canging.

5ER81_5157_300_5tabon Gibs <5.2
SIMATIC S7 Date 18.09.2009

I= Automation and Industrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File SERV1_07E.10
Area of Use The "Monitor/Modify Variables" test function can be started from the SIMATIC
Manager or from the LAD/STL/FBD Editor and is used to monitor and/or modify
variables in any format you choose.
Design of the The variables you choose are entered in a VAriable Table (VAT). With the
Variable Table exception of block-local, temporary variables, you can monitor (view) and/or
modify (control and change) all variables or addresses.
You can select the columns of the variable table to be displayed in the View
menu. The columns have the following meanings:
• Address: absolute address of the variable.
• Symbol: symbolic name of the variable
• Symbol comment: comment on the variable displayed
• Display format: a data format you can choose per mouse click (such as
binary or decimal), in which the contents of the variable is displayed
• Status value: value of the variable in the selected status format
• Modify value: value to be assigned to the variable
Inputting into the Entries for the variable table can be absolute or symbolic (provided the symbol
Variable Table exists). The comments displayed in the column "Symbol comment" are from
the symbol table. The comments appear automatically and cannot be changed
here.
Note To check the input and output wiring (regardless of the user program), you can
also call the Monitor/Modify Variables tool (VAT) directly from the HWConfig
tool (see the HWConfig chapter).

SIEMENS
Monitoring and Modifying Variables
.11212_cl
td,.■ Table Edit Insert PLC Variable View Options Window He .12.1x1
Difg-1611 Al X 13t2ilial 117. 1 al67.2d 6'14411 411.1

Address' Symbol I Display format I Status value I Modify value'
1 PM 2 , "11At_Thurnbw" HEX M416$001:83
2 QiN 6 "GAPJ_DigDisp" HEX V41880003:
3
4 8.0 BOOL false
5 8.1 "TBay1" BOOL false
6 8.2 "T_Bay2" BOOL false
7 8.3 "T_Bayr BOOL false
8 • 84 "T_Bay-Ur BOOL false
9 8.5 1BAY1" BOOL false
10 8.6 "BAY? BOOL false
11 87 "BAY? BOOL false
12
13 Q 8.1 1__Bayl" BOOL false
14 Q 8.2 "L_Bay2" BOOL false
15 Q 8.3 -L_Bay3" BOOL false
16 Q 6.4 ."L_Bay-LB" BOOL false
17 Q 8.5 "K_Conv_R1GHT" BOOL false
18 Q 8.6 :K_Conv_LEFT- 5001. false
19 Q 8.7 "Horn" BOOL false
20 MINIM
SERV I _5/57_300_5tation I lAbs < 5 . 2

(16
File: SERV1_075.11 Automation and Industrial Solutions

Monitor You can monitor variables in two ways:

The (monitor) status values are updated once when you select the
Variable 4 Update Monitor Values menu option or click the icon (Update
Monitor Values).
The (monitor) status values are updated every cycle when you select the
Variable - Monitor menu option or click the icon (Monitor Variables).
Modify Procedure for modifying variables:

1. With the left mouse button, click the line in the "Modify Value" column for
the variable that you want to modify.
2. Enter the value in the correct form for the data type selected.
Led 3a. To activate the modify values once, select the Variable 4 Activate Modify
Values menu option or click the icon (Activate Modify Variables) (or item
3b).
3b. To activate the modify values every cycle, select the Variable - Modify
menu option or click the icon (Modify Variables).
4. Use the "Monitor" function to confirm that the modify value has been
entered in the variable you selected.
Modify Value Valid You can make the "Modify value" entered in a table invalid by selecting that
value and clicking on the icon. The now "invalid" value is displayed like a
4170 I comment. You can make the modify value "valid" again when you click on the
icon again. Only valid modify values can be activated.

SIEMENS
Saving the Variable Table

1: 1_
a Table Eck Insert PLC Variable Yew P s Window Help ,.112 j
New Ctrl+N
4
Ctr1+0
Cbse Ctrl+F4
Save Cb1+5
Ctr1-P
Pup Setup... Save As 2J

<
1 rey_PTOJeC1157_300_51abon1CPU Entry point: View:
2 SOIV1JUS7_300_5tationkCPU 31
'Project LI I Component view 6- Office
3 SERV1_5 57_300_5tatiarKPLI 31!
2 EaB Name: Blames path
la
3 O
•
81 1_Bayl -
82 :L_Bay2" BC
My_Project 2:I IDAS7_Courses \My_PToie Browse-
I liTtt
aa O 8.3 1._Bay3' BC
la O 84 1._13ey-LB" BC tE, My_Prolect
la O
O
8.5 1(_ConvIk101-fr
8 6 :KCcrw_LEFT
BC
tic
E
E
SIMATIC 300(1)
CPU 315-2 DP
la • 8 7 1-lom. BC E a S7 Prcgarn(51
a Blocks
E sr My_Program
SERVI_S157_300_51ation
Object name: 1 I/O Conveyor
Object type:
1.1
OK Cancel H* I
.3
% SITRAIN Training for
Saving the You can use Table 4 Save or Table 4 Save as... to save a variable table.
Variable Table You can give the variable table any name you choose. The name is inserted as
the symbolic name in the symbol table.
You can reuse saved variable tables for monitoring and modifying, making it
unnecessary to re-enter the variables.

SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Testing the Conveyor Model's Sensor (Input) Wiring

Corifig [S7_300statIon (configuration) -- SHItY1_5]
0(0) DR
: maload Module identification...
Online via assigned CPU services
",/load Module Iderticiration to PG...
2 CPU 315-2 Path: ISERV1_S S7_300_5tation\CPU 315-2 DP
If DP Faulty Modules
3 Addr ess Symbol Display format Status value Modify value
5
Ctrla-1)
If DI324/C24V MO". Worm."'
D0324)C24V., 8.0 i.e POOL
If DIS/D08x24V.
ir AI2 2ei
8 1 "T_Bay1"
8 2 "T_Elay2"
POOL
POOL
8.3 "T_Bay3" POOL
Update Firmware...
84 "T_Bay-LB" _ . POOL
411'•il (01 UR 5ave DevIce Nara_ to Mem,/ Card...
8.5 "BAY1" POOL
Slot Madrie Ethan* I ad
8.6 "BAY 2" POOL
8 7 "BAY3" POOL
O 8.0 BIN
D132,d)C24V 6E57 3211 BL0O-06A0 10 O 81 "L_Elay1" POOL

D032sDC24V7154 6ES7 322,18L00-06A0 o 8 2 "L_Bay2" POOL
19 ;an,
7 Al2a12Sit 6ES7 331.71(901-04S0 304
8 )C Row Not Effective I Update Force Symbol with F5
9
10
Run conditionally —Run immediately
11
1.7. Monitor 614 Status Value r Enable Periph. Outputs
r Modify 141 Modify Value r Display
.
1EM
E)i Trigger...
<>
afantors and modf ies the nputs/outputs of a module or process anew.

Help I

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_07E.1 3 V Automation and industrial Solutions
Task In this exercise you are to check the wiring of the conveyor model's sensors to
the digital input modules directly from "HW Config". You will check the wiring of
the actuators in the next exercise.
What to Do 1. Open the SIMATIC Station with HW-Config

SIMATIC Manager 9 select the SIMATIC Station 9 double-click on the
"Hardware" object
2. Monitor the inputs of the DI/DO module (I/O address 8) to which the
conveyor model is connected
Select the DI/DO module 9 PLC 9 Monitor/Modify 9 activate (check) the
Monitor function under Run conditionally
3. To check the input wiring, press the sensors on the conveyor model one
after the other and observe whether the associated input states are
displayed on the screen
Wiring Error? If you discovered an error in your wiring test, please let the instructor know.

SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Testing the Conveyor Model's Actuator (Output) Wiring

filiVITERUMITINTWIIIMMIPPIMMETTIM _lolx11
OE Station Edit Insert PLC weer Options %Widow Help 7174W
Ctr1+1. •i!",
=I (01 UR Online via assigned CPU services

Download Module Identification...
CPU 375-21 Upload Module Iderbfication to PG.., Path. ISERV1_5 \ 57_300_Station CPU 3152 DP
2
X2 it DP Faulty Modules...
3 Address Symbol Display format Status value Modify VOWS
Di32,0c26V Module Information...
OF I 8 5 'BAV1 BOOL false
5 If D032x1)C24V, Operating
I 8 6 "BAY2" POOL false
6 II 1)18/1)084424V. GleariRer.et.. •
7 It Al2s12134 Get Time of Day... I 8.7 "PAY3" POOL false
Mill=11111 0 8.0 BOOL false
_ ......._
Update Firmware... O 8.1 "L_Bay1" POOL false
_ ....._...
4 Q 8.2 "L_Bay? BOOL true true
01•211 (0) UR Gave Device Name to Memory Card...
Q 8.3 1_8ay3" POOL false
Slot I Module Ethernet ■ led.
O 8.4 "L Bey-LB" POOL false
2 CPU 315-2 D PROF
' Q 8.5 "K_Conv_RIGHT. BOOL false
X DR, ,
erP•ce Dora O 8.6 1(__Conv LEFT" POOL false
0 8.7 "Horn° BIN 260
4 1/132id)C24V 6ES7 32148L0:140E 0_.3 •I
8032x8C24V/0 5A 6ES7 322-1BLOO•OAA0 4
r
78 A1241 213it
1EHI
6E57 331 -710301•13ABO 304 30 X Row Not Effective
I Update Force Symbol with F5
9
-- Run conditionally — Atm immedately
10 1..7 Monitor 6i4 Status Value J Enable Periph. Outputs
Modify 41 Modify Value I r 1/0 Display

f Trigger...
Close Help
Monitors and =dies the inoutsfoutputs of e modde or process Image

_21 SITRAIN Training for
Mr
• Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task Now check the wiring of the conveyor model's actuators to the digital output
modules.
What to Do 1. Open the SIMATIC Station with HW Config

SIMATIC Manager - select the SIMATIC Station - double-click on the
"Hardware" object
2. Modify the outputs of the DI/DO module (I/O address 8) to which the
conveyor model is connected
Select the DI/DO module - PLC 4 Monitor/Modify 4 in the "Modify value"
column, specify Status 1 for the respective output 4 activate (check) the
Modify function under Run conditionally 4 observe whether the
corresponding actuator of the conveyor model is modified
3. Exit the Monitor/Modify test function and HW-Config
Wiring Error? If you discovered an error in your wiring test, please let the instructor know.

SIEMENS
Block Architecture and the LAD / STL / FBD Editor
..AD Sri RID -IFCI6 My_onaest_sh3sh8\teststabon\CM1315,20P]

LADS ..r12251
0 Fie Eck Insert MX Debug aess Crams Window Flap ..12JLI,
OB 1 InIcilt-Ilal A xikielLLiluij i Eji
2-_,I, , I il pimii,A*144-1-01-3_.1,1--1.1.1
,ca tents Of. EnVronnentlInterfme
.-_. 0 Interface
1-1. no ._11.1.-- H
TC16 t assenbly line d
Bet o : jog conveyor right
10.2 10.3 08.5

F-1 I 1/1 f )----I
FB FC Symbol infosmation:
10.2 T_Jog_R1GHT -- Pushbutton (PB) jog conveyor
10.3 I' Jog LEFT -- Pushbutton (PB) jog conveyor
08.5 CRT -- Contactor for Conveyor Bolt
.2_11
Press Tito cat Kip. — O len* WT 1 aat E—.4

SITRAIN
Automation T
enrainin for
d lnc strial Solutions
Contents Page
Objectives .......... 2
Types of Program Blocks .......... 3
Program Structuring Possibilities 4
Process Images .......... 5
Cyclic Program Execution 6
Inserting an S7 Block 7
The LAD / FBD / STL Editor .......... 8
The STEP 7 Programming Languages .......... 9
Selecting the Programming Language 10
Programming in LAD and FBD ........ 11
Programming in STL ........ 12
Saving a Block 13
Calling a Block in OB1 14
Downloading Blocks into the PLC ........ 15
Simple Program Debugging ........16
Modifying Blocks 17
Exercise 1: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16) ........ 18
Exercise 2: Calling FC 16 in OB 1 19
Editor Customization: "General" Tab 21
Editor Customization: "View" Tab ....... 22
Editor Customization: "STL" Tab ....... 23
Editor Customization: "LAD/FBD" Tab ........24
Editor Customization: "Block" Tab ....... 25
Editor Customization: "Sources/Source Text" Tab ....... 26

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Editing Blocks
SIEMENS
Objectives
know the different types of S7 blocks
understand the principle of "structured programming"
know the meaning of the process images (PII, PIQ)
be able to explain the principle of cyclic program execution
know and be able to select the LAD, FBD and STL programming
languages
be able to edit, save and download a block with the LAD/STUFBD

Editor
be able to carry out a simple program debugging with the "Monitor

Block" test function

Ir.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Types of Program Blocks
Operating System DB DB
Cycle TL
Time OB
FC FB SFC
Organization
Process Blocks
Error FB FC SFB
Legend: Maximum nesting depth:

OB = Organization Block S7-300: 8
FB = Function Block
FC = Function S7-400: 24
SFB = System Function Block
FB
SFC = System Function FB with (for each priority class,
DB = Data Block Instance DB 2 to 4 additional levels for Error OBs)
SIMATIC S7 Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.3 V
Blocks The programmable logic controller provides various types of blocks in which
the user program and the related data can be stored. Depending on the
requirements of the process, the program can be structured in different blocks.
Organization Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system
Block and the user program. The entire program can be stored in OB1 that is
OB cyclically called by the operating system (linear program) or the program can
be divided and stored in several blocks (structured program).
Function A function (FC) contains a partial functionality of the program. It is possible to

FC, SFC program functions so that they can be assigned parameters. As a result,
functions are also suited for programming recurring, complex partial
functionalities such as calculations.
System functions (SFC) are parameter-assignable functions integrated in the
CPU's operating system. Both their number and their functionality are fixed.
More information can be found in the Online Help.
Function Block Basically, function blocks offer the same possibilities as functions. In addition,
FB, SFB function blocks have their own memory area in the form of instance data
blocks. As a result, function blocks are suited for programming frequently
recurring, complex functionalities such as closed-loop control tasks.
System function blocks (SFB) are parameter-assignable functions integrated in
the CPU's operating system. Both their number and their functionality are fixed.
More information can be found in the Online Help.
Data Blocks Data blocks (DB) are data areas of the user program in which user data are
DB managed in a structured manner.
Permissible You can use the entire operation set in all blocks (FB, FC and OB).
Operations

SIEMENS
Program Structuring Possibilities
Linear Program Program Partitioned into Areas Structured Program
---- Recipe A
-----
Pump
OB 1 OB 1 ---- Recipe B OB 1 — — --
---- Mixer
Outlet
-- — — Outlet
All instructions are The instructions for the individual Reusable functions are loaded into
found in one block functions are found in individual individual blocks. OB 1 (or other
(usually in Organization blocks. OB 1 calls the individual blocks) call these blocks and pass on
Block OB 1) blocks one after the other. the pertinent data.
/
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_08EA Automation and Industrial Solutions
Linear Program The entire program is found in one continuous program block.
This model resembles a hard-wired relay control, that was replaced by a
programmable logic controller. The CPU processes the individual instructions
one after the other.
Partitioned The program is divided into blocks, whereby every block only contains the
Program program for solving a partial task. Further partitioning through networks is
possible within a block. You can generate network templates for networks of
the same type.
The OB 1 organization block contains instructions that call the other blocks in a
defined sequence.
Structured A structured program is divided into blocks. The code in OB1 is kept to a
Program minimum with calls to other blocks containing code. The blocks are parameter
assignable. These blocks can be written to pass parameters so they can be
used universally.
When a parameter assignable block is called, the programming editor lists the
local variable names of the blocks. Parameter values are assigned in the
calling block and passed to the function or function block.
Example:
• A "pump block" contains instructions for the control of a pump.
• The program blocks, which are responsible for the control of special pumps,
call the "pump block" and give it information about which pump is to be
controlled with which parameters.
• When the "pump block" has completed the execution of its instructions, the
program returns to the calling block (such as OB 1), which continues
processing the calling block's instructions.

SIEMENS
Process Images
S1 K1
I 2.0 Q 4.3
PII PIQ
Byte 0 Byte 0
Byte 1 Byte 1
Byte 2 Byte 2
•
A I 6.4
Q 4.3
CPU Memory Area CPU Memory Area
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 %IP

Introduction For the storage of all digital input and output states, the CPU has reserved
memory areas: the process-image input table (PII) and the process-image
output table (PIQ). During program execution, the CPU accesses these
memory areas exclusively. It does not access the digital input and output
modules directly.
PII The Process-Image Input table is the memory area in which the states of all
digital inputs are stored. The image is read in from the digital input modules at
the beginning of the cycle.
PIQ The Process-Image Output table is the memory area in which the states of all
digital outputs are stored. The image is output to the digital output modules at
the end of the cycle.
Outputs can be assigned as well as queried in the program.
User Program If inputs are queried in the user program (for example, A I 2.0), then the state of
this input that is stored in the PII is queried from the PII. This state cannot
change within a cycle since the PII is only updated or read in at the beginning of
a cycle. This guarantees that when there are multiple queries of the input in one
cycle, the same result is always delivered.
Double Assignment If an output is assigned a state in several locations in the program, then only the
state that was assigned last is transferred to the particular output module (see
slide):
1. Output Q 4.3 is assigned the state of the input signal I 2.0
2. In the same cycle, output Q 4.3 is assigned the state of the input signal
I 6.4. The result of this last assignment is transferred to the output
module.
As a rule, these types of double assignments are programming errors.

SIEMENS
Cyclic Program Execution

• Startup program: Call and execution of OB 100
(once, after Power ON, for example)
• Transfer PIQ to the digital output modules
Start of the cycle monitoring time digital

input
module
Reading the input states from the digital input modules

IOU
and saving the states in the process image (PII)
0
Call and execution of OB1
(possible interruption by call of other OBs

for events such as time-of-day interrupt,
hardware interrupts etc. ) digital
output
module
Writing the process-image output table
00I
(PIQ) in the digital output modules

laZ
Starting When switching on or when switching from STOP 4 RUN, the CPU carries out
a warm restart (with OB100). During a warm restart, the operating system
deletes the non-retentive bit memories, timers and counters, deletes the
interrupt stacks and block stacks, resets all stored hardware interrupts and
diagnostic interrupts and starts the scan cycle monitoring time.
Scan Cycle The cyclical operation of the CPU consists of three main sections, as shown in
the slide above:
• The CPU checks the status of the input signals and updates the process-
image input table.
• It executes the user program with the respective instructions.
• It writes the values from the process-image output table into the output
modules.

SIEMENS
Inserting an S7 Block
SIMATIC Manager - My_Project
yorax,
General Part 1 I General - Part2I Cats I Attributes I
57 Software
147 Software
I Organization Block
2 Functionio
wom Et nm
ck E' ,„,-,
Name: II
v
Symbolic Name:
Symbol Table
4 Data Block
Text Library
'5 Data Type Symbol Comment:
External Source..,
WinCC flexible RT
6 Variable Table
Created in Language: I ST L
WinCC Object
Project path:
Parameter
Storage location
External parameters... ID:\S7_Courses My_Proje
of project:
tr:My_Project - i_Lourses My_Proje
Code Interface
E My_Prosect System data
E SIMATIC 300(1) g FC16 Date created: 10/12/2006 02:25:42 PM
E II CPU 315-2 DP g FC42 Last modified: 10/12/2006 02:25:42 PM 10/12/2006 02:25:42 PM
E S7 Program(5)
cr21 Sasser Comment:
illEEG
OK Cancel I Help I
Inserts Function at the cursor position.

SIMATIC S7
Siemens AG 2008. At rights reserved.
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
Inserting a Block With the appropriate "Blocks" folder highlighted, from a specific "S7 Program",
select the Insert 4 S7 Block menu option to display a list of block types:
• Organization blocks (OB) are called by the operating system.
These blocks form the interface between operating system and user
program.
• Functions (FC) and function blocks (FB) contain the actual user program.
They enable a complex program to be divided into small, easy-to-follow
units.
• Data blocks contain user data.
After choosing the type of block you want, the "Properties" dialog box opens in
which you have to specify, among other things, the block number and the
programming language (LAD, STL or FBD).
When you have made your settings and confirmed them by clicking the "OK"
button, the new block is inserted in the current program.

SIEMENS
The LAD / STL / FBD Editor
y1i1 AD ,11 I AD [FL 1L - r _r Le.ymet or" - SERV 1 _S S7_300_5tatsm CPIS 315-2 OFM,AFC1b) .1Q.125.1
O. He ELIR Inset PLC Doisixi View Options Window Hails
,
D12;12-1611 ell x1Balel . 1_11
r ELI
" F ,,
*.161RI'll MI Id -IFI*1-01011-.1-*1 -1 le?j
3
Contents Of: .2nvironment1Interfase.

'E giratface Keen
Declaration Table 1.11TZ
2:1' OUT CP OUT
0• rx_our U. II_OTIT
1- MP iii TRW
E Q RISME da. RETURN
Pc16 : Conveyor Control

mortvo: Jog Conveyor RIGHT
•
"X_ Cony •M Coto
Jog_RICIFi_ Jog_LIYil "X_Jog_
*1_15AX. HMI' HMI" RIM"
i t VI ( )-I
Code Section El
A Network 2: Jog Conveyor UST
Jog_RIC16_ Jog.1272 'X Cony

"IOW" XXI' XXI' - art" -
I Vi I i ----I
El MI
I Address
PDL_MAN
, Mods
FC_ComWslos
Typ Locabsn
R ,
114 1 /A L
Laotian
AW 2 /A
I LosaPte
M_ConsjogjEFIFC_ConyMotor ft kW 1 /AM I VA 2 /A
MCons_Ax01G- , FC_Oxrettitor R Ifh! 1 /A ; WO 2 /An
R M lop RIGHT :FC_Comelotor R INW 4 /0 i
Detail Window
i 113111113111111=NWIIM===IIM111121===WEMW1111130=W
Press Fl to got Help. 1 --- el kifine fAbs <5.2 No I 1 --;:
4
Starting the Editor The easiest way to start the LAD / STL / FBD Editor is by double-clicking on an
S7 block in the SIMATIC Manager. The Editor has the following components:
Declaration Table The declaration table belongs to the block. This table is used for declaring
variables and parameters for the block.
The declaration table is discussed in detail in the "Functions and Function
Blocks" chapter.
Code Section The code section contains the program itself, divided into separate networks if
required.
A syntax check is made during instruction input (in STL) and in labeling
program elements or operation symbols.
Detail Window The detail window provides the following functions and information:
1: Error: lists the syntax errors found in the course of a context
check or a compilation procedure
2: Info: gives additional information such as "expected data
type of an address"
3: Cross references: a list of addresses used in the network and where they
are used in the entire program
4: Address info: enables you to monitor the addresses used in the
network
5: Modify: enables you to modify the addresses used in the
network
6: Diagnostics: display of existing data for process diagnostics (only if
configured)
7: Comparison: Navigation with the function "Compare blocks"

SIEMENS
The STEP 7 Programming Languages

Function Block Diagram
FC16 : Conveyor Control

matom: Jog Conveyor RIGHT
a
io. — Q8. 5
=
TO . 3
Ladder Diagram
FC16 Conveyor Control
?
.tetsicork 1: Jog Conveyor RIGHT
TO 2 TO . 3 08.5
71 I VI
Statement List
Network 4: Jog Conveyor RIGHT

A I 0.2
AN I 0.3
8.5
Z,
‘11 SITRAIN Training for
Er Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction There are several programming languages in STEP 7 that can be used
depending on preference and knowledge. By adhering to specific rules, the
program can be created in Statement List and later converted into another
programming language.
LAD Ladder Diagram is very similar to a circuit diagram. Symbols such as contacts
and coils are used. This programming language often appeals to those who
have a drafting or electrical background.
STL The Statement List consists of STEP 7 instructions. You can program fairly
freely with STL. This programming language is preferred by programmers who
are already familiar with other programming languages.
FBD The Function Block Diagram uses "boxes" for the individual functions. The
character in the box indicates the function (such as & 4 AND Logic Operation).
This programming language has the advantage that even a "non-programmer"
can work with it.
Other Languages In addition to the STEP 7 Basic Package languages, there is a series of
engineering tools for the most varied of applications, such as:
- GRAPH 7: Configuration of sequence control systems

HiGraph: Configuration using the State Diagram Method
- SCL: PASCAL-like text-oriented high level language for writing
algorithms
- CFC: Continuous Function Chart for graphic interconnection of S7
blocks

SIEMENS
Selecting the Programming Language
LAD/57111BD - [FC16 "FC_ConvMotor" SERV1_5 57_30O_Station \GU 315-21:11 . ,jij

o
File Edit Insert PLC Debug l— —
yoew Options Window Help ,LcA
ark-K
4_9J :Lverviews
ais•
adidd !cm it g _rj PLC Register
O LAD s..
"•\ Ctri-F1 rface . JJ
E g Inter face
a IN Ctrl+3 New network
a• OUT FB blocks
Data View
View Ctr1+4
a IN_OUT
• Declaration View Ctr1+5 .71 E FC blocks
l.ed1 SFB blocks
Display with • SFC blocks
A Multiple instances
Network 1: Jog Conveyor 3 Zoom In Ctrk-Nurn+ U Libraries
A I 0.2 Zoom Ott
AN I 0.3 Zoom Factor...
0 8.5
Toolbar
Breakpoint Bar
Network 2: Jog Conveyor L
.■ Status Bar
A Q 4.2
AN N 30.2 Column Width...
A N 30.3
0 8.6 Display Columns.- FI I
4
1 1 Update F5
Changes to the STL programming language in the current block. 0 loffhne lAbs < 5.2 I -
Inse 1;

.%;
View You choose the View menu to switch from one STEP 7 programming language
to another:
• LAD (Ladder Diagram)
• FBD (Function Block Diagram)
• STL (Statement List).
Program Language You can switch the programming language as you wish when you create as
well as later on.
LAD/FBD => STL You can always convert program sections that have been written in the
graphical programming languages (LAD/FBD) into STL. You should, however,
be aware that the result of this conversion is not always the most efficient
solution in Statement List.
STL => LAD/FBD It is not always possible to convert program sections written in STL into LAD or
FBD. The sections of the program that cannot be converted are left in STL.
Note: No sections of the program are lost on conversion.

SIEMENS
Programming in LAD and FBD

4LAD/STL/FBD - [F[15 "FC_Mode" SERV1_5 57_300_52ation CPLI 315-2 DP — FC15]
CF we Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help
D412'llal J xliblel ! , 1 !I `J: 11-1-14-1-01111,1-21H

Contents Of: Environment \ Interface'
B- Interface Name
U- IN U- IN
U. OUT Cl• OUT Overviews
IN_OUT nr_orrr
0- TEMP 411- TIED
B 0. PI TURN 4:1. ASSUAN New network
EE 173 Eit loos
-II I--
DC'S Title:
System ON/OFF --INOTI--
-(9 --( )
• E_System_ •E_Aus • L_SYSTICE• -() --(#)--
ON_HISI • System_ON• SR --(R)
(N)— s -(9 --(5)
•E_System_ C RS
OFF_ANI" C SR
-(9 --(N)-
[) --(10)-
Symbol lalormatlom:
M_System_ON_HMI 5530.0 . -0 --(SAVE) Insert
M_Aux_Systex_ON 1115.1 C NEG Or
1_SYSTIM
H_Syst•A_OFF_HEI
04.1
/130.1
J os Overwrite
r ] Comparator Mode
Network 2 Eanual Node
•
41 1 Bit logic
mJ ILID11113110121131WEM a Oc
Press F1 to get Help. - !Insert I 41-1
if Program elements I VE Call structure
• ...•••
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18 09 2009

I
Re' SERV1_08E 11 leAutomation
. and Industrial Solutions
Elements Frequently used LAD and FBD elements appear as icons in the toolbar. You
click them with the mouse to insert them at the selected position in the
program.
Toolbar icons in FBD: Toolbar icons in LAD:
Tg=5-Pcl-f AIA-W-0151L+1-11H
Overviews By clicking the "Overviews" symbol, a new window is opened with the following
contents:
Program Elements:
Shows all program elements and operation symbols.
(The contents of this window depends on the programming language -
LAD/STL/FBD selected)
Call Structure:
Shows the program structure and/or the block nesting, which block is called
from where.
Networks When you click the "New Network" icon in the toolbar, a new network is added
after the current network. You can also right mouse click and choose "insert
iu-of network".
s...1
If you want to insert a new network before Network 1, you must select the block
name before you click the "New Network" icon.
Empty Box You can use the Empty Box to insert LAD or FBD elements more quickly. You
can insert elements directly without having to select them from the Program
Elements browser. After you have selected the position in the network where
you want to insert an element, click the "Empty Box" icon in the toolbar.
When you enter the first letters of an element name, a list appears (beginning
with these letters), and you can make a selection.
Insert or Overwrite You use the "Ins" key to toggle between the "Cp" (overwrite) and "Insert"
Mode editor modes. The current mode is displayed in the status bar.

SIEMENS
Programming in STL
§LAD/STL/F8D - [FC1 -- My_Project\SIMATIC 3110(1)\ CPU 315-21)P) ' -e-a2g

0 Fie Ede Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help „ALA
E:11 1■L'Ilal Ai x *et _21:11 LIN rt= L-.J ! I !I071E g_2:J if.1*1-01511.1-2.1h1 El I
Corments Of: ' laviremmeatA Inter fac• • •LIEI
Mae
m
g IN
, it Inb
C1-1:11
face
Cl. OUT U OUT

1*;; New network
jal Fl blocks
Cl. nr_orr U. our
4ZA- SENA TEMP
lill-
73
ii
Iil iiii FC blocks
SFS blocks
W fat RETURN 4;1.• RETURN SFC blocks
A Multiple instances
+ fll Libraries
PC1 : System
nattr:System 01/017
SAAN II0 0.0
8.0
ANOP 00 0.1
8.0
Lil
—
Ptc9am elements .F. Cal structure
311
4
111313 DOI 11111111:11/WIEW a cross-teleran= rt Address Sic.. • t' 6: Diagnostizs 7: Compatison
Press Ft to get Help. 1---- 0

loffirlo <5.2 INw 1 Ln 6 Oq
SIMATIC S7 g SITRAIN Training for

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.12 1r Automation and Industrial Solutions
Statements The user needs to know the statements for writing a program in STL. You can
obtain information about the syntax and functionality from the online help:
Help 9 Help on STL.
The following information is available:
"Statement List Instructions", a description of all the statements that
exist in this programming language
141 "Working with Statement List", a description of
Statement List View and General Syntax
Entering and Viewing Constant Data
Types of Blocks
1E1 Switch Contacts and Signal States
Overviews When you are using the STL Editor, the "Overviews" window contains only the
libraries and the list of already existing blocks which can be called from the
current block.
Networks Networks are inserted in the same way as in the LAD/FBD Editor (see previous
page).
Insert or Overwrite You use the "Ins" key to toggle between the "Cp" (overwrite) and "Insert"
Mode editor modes. The current mode is displayed in the status bar.

SIEMENS
Saving a Block
_
Fie Edit cent PLC Debug View Options Widow Help ade.1251
, LAD STL - [FE I -- My_Projert \ SIMATIC 300(0 \ CPU 315-2 DPI
0
, ]*I*1-0 L141—t1h1 PA
Dlis-12-Fal gJ ,x I lell -I c-I t%Iiil F %lee' KIllaTft
________
Consents OE, .invironnems\Inserteee. I.JEI I
Cl- IN la IN Name
Al network
I.
. Inter f ace
E III BitComparator
lux
42. LOOT
- Q. OUT
42. OUT
U. IN_OUT S al
E 43. MVPS Q. Counter
E ri•ir_eA DBcal
1E-IMP E f'. Converter
E l Jumps
RETURN
Ea j
pi]Integer tint-bon
Lti S 2 Floatrig-poont fd.
FC1 - System
Program control _
EECW ShitiRotate
I
IEGd
Status Ists
1eetesork 1 . System OR/ OPP
08.0
ESal(j'rimers
a word _w_l
FE blocks
ICI. 0 SR Q 1 logic
I-5 ril
F/0.1 L
—V1----R
2? — 11111 hogTam elemen
F
41 hE Call ructure
J It Deal IlliMM 2 Iris a Cross-relerences 4: Addeo rdo.

1-- -5 !offline
5c IA • • & Diagnostics 7 Comparison
Press F1 to get Hdp. lAbS < 5.2 INw I In 6 II^Sert CI.7 I X

SIMATIC S7 Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.13
111 7
■ " Automation and Industrial Solutions
Saving a Block When you have finished editing a block, you can save it on the hard disk of the
programming device:
• By selecting the File 9 Save menu option or
LA] • By clicking the "Save" icon in the toolbar.
Note If more than one block is opened with the Editor, only the block that is visible in
the active window is saved with the action "Save" .

SIEMENS
Calling a Block in OB1
5LAD/511,4813 -1031 My_Project \SIMATIC 3011(1)11:PU 315-2 DP)

JXJ
G Fie Eck Insert PIC Debug View Options Window Help ,±8J2c1
,
DIra;12-101 J iLtiti JJ _Adi
e NT !Li Imp
031 Cyclic Program Operation
=ItCell EC1 in LAD Move
M A Program control
,,
till Shift/Rotate
1 CI
IN ENO E 'A Status dts
El A Timers
E at Word logic
FI3 blocks
Network 2 : Cell IC1 so OIL Eta FC blocks
CALL EC 1 1=1. FC14

Q FC15
ci FC16
FC17
FC18
FC19
1j. FC42
SFR hinel.c
Progeam elements = Cal structize
BLOCK—PC
null 1: Enc. 2 Info 3 Cross-references A 4: Addles: nfa 5: Moe* A fi Diagnostics A T. Contemn

Press Fl to get Help. Iofflhe iAbs < 5.2 Nw 1

41
47 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Cyclic To integrate a newly created block in the cyclic program execution of the
Execution CPU, the block must be called in OB1.
The simplest way of inserting the block call in the graphic programming
languages LAD and FBD is through the browser (see picture above). In the
STL programming language, the instruction for calling a block is CALL.

ST-SERV1
-
SIEMENS
Downloading Blocks into the PLC
-
Z=211=111.1■1111=1111111
File pit Insert PLC View Qptions window Help
ID i;Ig?ffl 1-:"..»- 11S311 < No Ref >

.176- .7_1 70 114
MyProject — D:\Courses\MyProject ,J11
:1
MyProject 0 b ect name Created in
ad S7_300 Station Systemdaten
E IN CPU-315-2 DP 0 081 OB_Cycie FED
S7program FC14 FC_S ignal FBD
Sources 411. FC15 FC Mode FED
Blocks FC ConyMotor FED
FC16
E jMICROMASTER_420
OF FC17 FC_Fault LAD
Touchpanel
FC19 FC_Count_Add FBD
FC42 FC_MM420 FBD
0 DB19 DB_Parts DB
VAT_I/0 -Conveyor VAT I/0-Conveyor
VAT_Number_form. VAT_Number_formats
Press Fl to get Help. 1----Ia,5611(pRoFieus)

SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_088.15 V Automation and Industrial Solutions
Downloading With the LAD/STL/FBD Editor, you can create or modify individual blocks and
download them directly into the CPU. Downloading several or all S7 bocks is
possible with the SIMATIC Manager.
If the configuration or parameter assignment data of a hardware station was
changed with the "HW Config" tool, the "system data" that was changed as a
result can be downloaded into the CPU directly from HW Config or you can
also do it later with the SIMATIC Manager:
1. Choose which blocks are to be downloaded:

• all blocks: select the "Blocks" object
Note: with this action, the "system data" is also downloaded into the
CPU!
• several blocks: hold down the CTRL key and select the individual
blocks
• one block: select the desired block
2. Downloading blocks into the CPU:

• by clicking on the icon shown to the left
or
• by selecting the PLC -1 Download menu option.

SIEMENS
Simple Program Debugging

2LAD ,STL , TBD - [PC I Mly_Project SIMATIC 300(I) 1. CPU 315-2 DP] Lzil2E1
ta Fie Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help
JJJ
x1Railel edill III 2.1611 El
l IT:I Ll
FC1 System
etvosk System ON/OF! .11:11LIc

La Re Edit Veer PLC Debug New OptliffS Mese Hee
.
08. 0
-
DIG;I:Ilij I AHL I Vele' ..71r. I DI1161 ,t 31 .
1.±jj _d -11-1*1-01iff11.1-113-11L?1i
SR
ICI Sysces
0
mem: Syn.,* 081/077
08 .0
10.0
X
/0.1
_J
W111:7/ Inlo
1:113[11 MUM" 2 'do Derawlerwees 4: Afton We 8U.. a
Fde/Sock saved. PressFltoptlielp. VON-<52k+.1

Requirements Before you can activate the monitoring mode, you must open the block you
want to monitor either offline or online with the LAD / STL / FBD Editor.
Note: In order to test a block in the offline mode, the block must first be
downloaded into the PLC.
Activation / There are two ways of activating/deactivating the "Monitor" test function:
Deactivation
• Click the "glasses" icon
:_d • Select the Debug 9 Monitor menu option.
View The program status is displayed in different ways depending on the

programming language selected (LAD / STL / FBD).
Note When the monitoring function is activated, you cannot change the programming
language in which the block is viewed (LAD / STL / FBD).

SIEMENS
Modifying Blocks
Open block
offline I online
Datei BearbeitEn Elnfiigen Zlelsystem Test Ansicht

Extras Fenster Hifie .0 ..._,..11121
(
Save (always offline) 61: alg •

Download (always online)
E
9-
FC1
2=3:10: Titel:
1.8.0
10..I 0 SR
S 0
80.1—
▪ SITRAIN Training for

▪ Automation and Industrial Solutions
Block Corrections Normally, block corrections are made in the following sequence:
Open Block With the LAD/STL/FBD Editor, blocks can be opened offline (from the PG's
project data storage) or online (directly from the CPU). Normally it is not
necessary to open a block online.
Modify Block Regardless of whether the block has been opened online or offline, the
changes that are made are first of all only stored in the programming device's
work memory. With that, the changes that are made are neither backed up
offline in the project data storage nor online in the CPU! If the PG is switched
off, all the changes that have been made are lost.
Save Block By using the "Save" icon, the block is always saved offline, that is, in the PG's
project data storage — regardless of whether the block was previously opened
online or offline!
Download Block By using the "Download" icon, the block is always saved online and/or
downloaded into the controller - regardless of whether the block was previously
opened online or offline!

-
SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16)
, ADr ST L FBI) - III I b -

-
I L_Convflotor" My_Project ,SIMA TIC 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DPV2,61/161
..m.11: 1
0 Fle Ed Insert PLC Debug Ylew Options Window, Kelp
...1112.1
(
,
1:1 412-.11ell Al x it la .-, -
11 1 v4all = 2.16 1 ! 111t5IN Li 11.1*1-01511-.1-1-Fil Ell
IT, ,
..:1251
P216 : Jog Conveyor
j
etspork : Jog conveyor RIGHT r:1 New network
.
aa 111111
.
.
T_Jog_ T _Jog_ H Cony_ Al -
I (-
RIGHT . LIFT . ajoa-t• -
II -M-
I VI -11 -NOR-
I )---I
.° -0
<) -(4.}
amma. 2wleawidien: <, --OR)
T_Jog_RIGHT 10.2 -- Jog conveyor RIGHT, amsentary contact -0 -(5)
T_Jog_LIFT 20.3 -- Jog conveyor LIFT, momentarycontact 9 RS
H_Conv_RIGHT 08.5 -- Run conveyor RIGHT 9 SR
.0 -(N)-
betimeek 2 : Jog conveyor LIFT <) -(P)-
-0 -(SAVE)
d_Ceow._ 9 reG
"T
IZ°g.7 "11:71- LIFT. 9 P05
1 I 0-1 El W Comparator
El al Converter
Ev
E ill Counter
Szoliel laterewties: E it De al
T_Jog_RIGHT /0.2 -- Jog conveyor RIGHT, aomentary contact 81 f limps
T_Jog_LIFT 10.3 -- Jog conveyor LIFT, momentary contact
H_Conv_LIFT 08.6 -- Run conveyor LIFT IIII0
C 1C t
_tu 2 1:1 - IIP Program elamant: F.. Cal samara
.1 14 4 a a 1' Error A 2 Into A a cm:mum= a 4: Address ado. 5: 1. rtiparieco

Ill:ck boded. 1---0 'offline lAbs <5.2 Ow 1 Jrised
Ag
I

Task Using the simulator "pushbutton" I 0.2, you should be able to jog the conveyor
motor to the RIGHT (Q 8.5). Using the simulator "pushbutton" I 0.3, you should be
able to jog the conveyor motor to the LEFT (Q 8.6). If both "pushbuttons" are
pressed simultaneously, then the conveyor motor may not start in either direction
(Lock-out!).
What to Do 1. In the SIMATIC Manager, insert a new FC16 block.

Block folder - right mouse click - insert new object - Function 9 in the
dialog set the programming language to LAD
2. Start the LAD / STL / FBD Editor by double-clicking on FC 16.
3. In the " Overviews" open the Program Elements browser
4. Edit Network 1 of the FC16 (see slide)
using drag & drop, copy the required logic symbol from the Program
Elements browser to the desired location in the network's code section.
label the addresses at the logic symbol.
Give the networks titles
5. Then insert a new, second network and program this in a similar manner as
described in Point 4
6. Save the block offline
7. Download the block into the CPU

a
Programming Also observe your block in the different programming languages. To do so select
Language LAD / STL / FBD Editor - View 4 choose either LAD, STL, or FBD.

SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Calling FC 16 in OB 1
1 ,[012_
<I
LAD/STLABD - [0131 — "OB_Cycle" -- My_Project \ SIMATIC 300(1)),CPU 31S-2 DP ,—Wen
Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Fklp _c AI
0 He Eck
-
plcal2-1 611
,
ir F %lee' ! I !I ratilt t_i -11-1-14-1-orli-1-thl2.1
Al ,t102 1e1 --)1 -IsliLd
,
Axl d
OBI : Cyclic Program Operation
ET-. .- Shift/Rotate Id '*tmork 4: Control of conveyor

E tA Status bts
E .1:1 Timers
•FC
E .., Word logic
CossolbsZac •
112 FB blocks la 120,
E ;I FC aocics
0• FC1
Q FC14 FC_Signal symbol information:
la FC15 FC_Mocle FC16 -- FC Control of conveyor motor
ta FC17 FC Fault
U FC18 FC Count
UFC19 FC_Count_Add
0 FC42 FC_M14420
is SFB blocks
la SFC docks
a 14.itiple instances
E IS Lbraries
lel Program elements hE. Cal stiuctrie I 4

I
.
,71,111141j1j1.1,1\ ±l: Eno, 2: Info 3: Cios leferences 4: Address info. A 5: Marty A 6: D.57..b. A 7: Cornmeal /
Press Fl to get Heip. 1----0 loffrme tAbs < 5.2 1 l 1-----1 4
A
lit; Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task In OB 1 program the call of the FC 16 so that this block is executed cyclically.
What to Do 1. Open the OB 1 block with the LAD / STL / FBD Editor
2. In the "View" menu, choose the LAD programming language and select the
code section of Network 1
3. In the " Overviews", open the Program Elements browser and in it the FC
Blocks folder
4. Program the call of the FC 16 by copying the block symbol into the network
using drag & drop.
a 5. Save OB1 offline and download it into the CPU
6. Test the FC 16 function, that is, whether or not the conveyor motor can be
jogged
7. Open the FC 16 block with the LAD / STL / FBD Editor and activate the
icd "
Monitor
program execution
block" test function to follow the signal sequences during the

SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 _1111 SITRAIN Training for

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_08E.20 gr, Automation and Industrial Solutions
complete a topic.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "General" Tab
OLAD/STL/FBD - [FCI My_Project SIMATIC 3111X1)\ CPU 315-2 DP] 2S1

Fie Edit Insert PLC Debug new 1- ( ptions Window Help
. .
DICA3"It -1611 4 Y, h1e1 Compare On-/Offine Partners
General I View I STL I LAD/FBD I Block I Sources I Source Text I
Reference Data Font

FCI : System
Symbol Tel* Font Font Size:
1Setmork System Off/OFF 'Cower New Saha.. I
I ! IV
.
T_ Ttem_ 88.0
Further options
SR
I 1--- S S I i r Report cross-accesses as error
"T_S1 1,
■, F Save window arrangement on exit
l
OFF" l , Set network title automatically
—Program status
Symbol information:
Momentnr
ip, r Control at Contact
r Automatic Program S tatus Change on Blocks
T Zystem_uN
T_System_OFF Moment al w Terminate ONLINE connection after program status
Tree Lag: (0.60) seconds
Mnemonics (Change SIMATIC Manager Options>Customizek Ergish
41
AlliliulthliEtror A 2: Info 3:Cross-references
Changes various individual settings of this application. OK Abbrechen I Hale

th,"
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved . SERV1_08E.21
Font Here you select using "Select" the font and the size of the text to be used for
programming blocks.
Control at Contact Inputs and bit memories that were given the attribute CC (Control at Contact) in
the symbol table, can be controlled directly from the Program Editor using
buttons (on the contact).
Report Cross Here you can specify that global accesses to instance data blocks, that were
References as Error entered as such in the symbol table, be reported as errors.
Save Window The contents and the arrangement of possibly still open windows are saved
Arrangement on Exit when you exit. The next time you start, they are reestablished.
Set Network Title Here you can specify that the symbol comment of the first output, bit memory,
Automatically timer or counter address that is assigned a state in a network ("=", "S" and "R"),
be automatically used as network title.


SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "View" Tab
CLAD/STL/FBD - [FC1 My_Project SIMATIC 300(1) \ CPU 315-2 DP] 1 ,1 Nel I

G. Pis Edit Insert PLC Debug View I Options Window Help 2S1
-
12
*-1= 1611 General View I STL I LAD/FBD Block I Sources I Source Text
Compare On-/Offline Partners
- View after Block Open
Reference Data
: System
Symbol Table Ctr1+111 17 Symbolic representation
'
Satmork 4: System ON/011,
17 Symbol information
With text color: Select...
• T_Syst.ea_ 08.0
ON' SR Automatic symbol selection (for LAD /HD)
I 0 Sorting of selection list by: Isyrnbd 14.1
F0 yst. am_
77'
17 Block/network comments
1— Address identification
17 Permanently forced addresses (FORCE)
17 Process diagnostic addresses (PDIAG)
Sfflibel islormation:
T_System_ON I0.0 -- Momentary With background coior. Select..
T_System_OFF I0.1 -- Momentary
11.11
Not faisafe addresses: Sant..
-View for Block Types

Logic Blocks: Data Blocks:
'Created in Language 2:1 I Declaration View
Program element overview

41 1 Project Libraries:
TI MaIMILII11111101111M1231/ 3 Cross-references 4 Ad
I Type and number J I Type and number J
Changes various nividual settings of tNs application.
OK I Cancel
I H.*
I
SIMATIC S7 iSITRAIN Training for

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_08E.22 gr Automation and Industrial Solutions
View after After opening with the Editor, you can display blocks as follows:
Block Open • with symbolic or absolute addressing
• with or without symbol information
• with or without symbol selection (only in LAD and FBD)
• with or without block and network comments
• with or without address identification for forced addresses and/or
addresses that are used for process diagnostics
View for Block Types:
...Logic Blocks From the selection box you can choose the programming language of the
blocks - "STL", "LAD", "FBD" or Created in Language.
...Data Blocks You can display data blocks in the following views:
• declaration view or
• data view
Program Elements - Here you can specify how logic blocks are to be sorted in the "Overviews"
Overview browser - according to type and number or according to family name (entry in a
block's Properties dialog).
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "STL" Tab

Customize
General I View STL I IAD/FBD I Block I Sources I Source Text
—Display of the Status Fields

17 Status Bit r DB Register
Result of Logic Operation r DB Register 2
Defauk Status r Indirect
r Address Register r Status Word
I— Address Register 2
r Accumulator 2
r Activate New Breakpoints Irnmediatekr
Default
OK Abbrechen I Hie
4
11
" SITRAIN Training for
MI, Automation and Industrial Solutions
Status Fields When you monitor the status of a block in STL, only the status fields you
activate in this dialog box will be displayed.
The following options are available:
• Status Bit: The status bit is displayed.

• Result of Logic Operation: The result of logic operation (RLO) is
displayed.
• Default Status: A timer word, counter word or the contents of
Accumulator 1 are displayed - depending on
the operation used.
• Address Registers: The address registers are used with indirect
addressing.
• Accumulator 2: The contents of Accumulator 2 are displayed.

• DB Registers: The contents of the relevant data block
register are displayed.
• Indirect: This display is possible only with memory-
indirect addressing.
• Status Word: The status word is displayed.
• Default: The "Default" button selects the standard
system setting for the Status field.
The status bit, RLO and standard status are
displayed.
• Activate New Breakpoints Immediately:
This option is relevant only for the
"Breakpoint" test function.

SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "LAD/FBD" Tab
General I View I STL LAD/FBD Block I Sources I Source Text I
Layout Address Field Width

!DIN A4 Portrait 11 (10 .26)
r Element
Representation: I3-dimensional
Line/Color
Reference: 'Status fulfilled
Line Weight r Narrow (;* Medium r Wide
[Color: Select.. I
17 Type Check of Addresses

I— Display symbol information at address
OK I Abbrechen I Hilfe

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_08E.24 glZ Automation and Industrial Solutions
Layout Here you select the print format:

• DIN A4 Portrait or Landscape
• maximum size.
Address Field Width You can set the limit for the maximum number of characters in an address
name to a number between 10 and 26. With symbolic representation, a line
break takes place according to the Address Field Width.
In LAD and FBD the number of representable operation symbols on the screen
or in the printout also changes with the Address Field Width.
Element The program elements can be displayed in different ways:

• 2-dimensional (without shadow)
• 3-dimensional (with shadow)
Line/Color You use this box to choose how you want the following to be displayed
• Selected Element (color)
• Contacts (line)
• Status Fulfilled (color and line)
• Status Not Fulfilled (color and line).
Type Check When you edit a block, the type of address entered in bit logic instructions is
always checked. You can deactivate the Type Check of Addresses: for
comparisons, mathematical operations etc. ( for experienced users only! ).
Symbol Information If you activate this function, the symbol information is not overlaid at the lower
at Address edge of the networks, rather is overlaid directly at the address.

SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "Block" Tab
Generate Reference Data
General I View I STL I LAD/FBD Block Sources I Source Text I

Should the reference data be
With the Creation of a Block ,

f;;. updated?
[ F Create reference data

r regenerated?
Create Logic Blocks
Language: STL LAD r FBD
Function blocks with multiple instance capability

Yes Cancel I Help
Default
OK Abbrechen I Hille

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
Create Reference When you modify blocks and save them, the reference data is automatically
Data updated if the "Create Reference Data" option in the "Block" tab is checked.
If this option is not checked, the reference data is not updated at first. But the
next time you open: Options Reference Data 9 Display, you must decide
whether you want to update the reference data and for which blocks.
Note: The topic "Reference Data" is discussed in detail in the
"Troubleshooting" chapter.
Create Logic Blocks Here you specify which programming language (LAD / STL / FBD) is to be
automatically suggested when you insert a new block.

SIEMENS
Editor Customization: "Sources/Source Text" Tab

Customize Customize
General I View I STL I LAD/FBD I Block Sources Souce Text I General) View I STL I LAD /FBD I Block I Sources Source Ted
- With Compiling a Source -Format

17 Display warnings Tab width: Charade
I- Errors before warnings r Display line number
Fr-/ Overwrite existing blocks FI Indent automatically
IV Create blocks only lot error-free completion r Key words in capital letters
With Saving a Block -Color and Style
r Generate source automaticaly P Source text display with the Wowing color and style assignment
Derive name from: Text type: I Normal text
D.:olute Idenrifier of the block
C r
!: L'I.en'ilier of r.he block Font Style: r Bold r Italic
Address-es:
Color: Select...
1
Preview t.st
Generate sources for blocks that already exist

with the settings indicated above): Execute... I Print
r With line numbers
Black and white
r Standard font
Defaue
OK Abbrechen I He I OK Abbrechen I Hille I

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_08E.26 Mr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Sources It is possible to enter a program or parts of a program as an STL source (ASCII

sources). The source file can contain the code for one, several, or all blocks.
The STL source can then be compiled into executable S7 blocks.
Creating a program using a source has the following advantages:
• You can create and edit your source with any ASCII editor and then import it
into STEP 7. The source can then be compiled into individual, executable
S7 blocks with STEP 7.
• You can program several blocks in a source, whereby you can use the
advantages of the ASCII editors (such as find and replace one operation in
all blocks).
• You can save sources even with syntax errors. This is not possible when
creating logic blocks with the incremental LAD/STL/FBD Editor because of
the integrated syntax check. As a result, blocks can be programmed with
symbolic addresses before a symbol table has even been created. This is
an advantage when the wiring of the PLC has not yet been determined, for
example.
The source is created in the syntax of the "Statement List (STL)" programming
language. The structuring within the sources as well as within the blocks
themselves (declaration table, networks etc.) takes place using keywords.
Compiling Sources In the "Sources" tab, you can select with which options executable S7 blocks
are to be generated from an STL or ASCII source. The individual options are
explained completely in the STEP 7 Online Help.
Source Text Here you select options of how the text is to be displayed in the source files.
The individual options are explained completely in the STEP 7 Online Help.
ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for Editing Blocks
•
•
SIEMENS
Binary Operations
Ze Help on Function Block Diagi-alti.flv, ,_1[1_12c]
Uij Bit logic File Ed Bookmark Opttons He
Cantatas index I Rock I E*'' I
>=1 1..e4s on ITER 7 Isittery
SR : Set_Reset Flip Flop

s
,
.. XOR Symbol
address
SR
-0
1
R —
-- -
[A
111- erieleStel.
address
MAIM
BOOL
MtdMIlLAttel
I, O. M. D. L
Qasniotiar
The address specifies Which bltwlll be
set or reset
--[R] S
•
BOOL
BOOL
I, O. M. D. L. T, C
I, M. D, L, T, C
Set Instruction enabled
Reset instruction enabled
▪ BOOL I, O, M, D, L Signal state of saddreSS•
• -[5]
-
RS Description
The Set Reset Flip Flop instruction executes Set (S) or Reset (R) instructions only when the
RLO is 1 An RLO of 0 has no effect on these instructions, the address specified in the
elm instruction remains unchanged.
--[N]-- Set Reset Flip Flop is set when the signal state at input S is 1 and the signal state at input
R 1.0 If input S is 0 and input R is 1, the flip flop is reset. If the RLO at both inputs is 1 the flip
flop is reset.
The Set Reset Flip Flop instruction is affected by the Master Control Relay (MCR) For more
detailed information ahout how the MCR functions , refer to MCR snloff.
--[SAVE]
Status Word
NEG
4..(4 89 DR 5.117 FLU SO
El- FOS writes - X X X 1

File: SERV1_09E.1 • Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Binary Logic Operations: AND, OR ..........3
Binary Logic Operations: Exclusive OR (XOR) ..........4
Sensors and Symbols .......... 5
First Check, Signal State, Result of Check and Result of Logic Operation 6
Exercise 1: Sensors and Symbols .......... 7
Assignment, Setting, Resetting .......... 8
Setting and Resetting a Flip Flop .......... 9
Midline Output Coil 10
Instructions that Affect the RLO ........ 11
Example 2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15) ...... 12
Exercise 2: "FC—Mode" (FC 15), Solution Hints ....... 13
Exercise 3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16) .......14
Exercise 3: "FC_ConvMotor" (FC 16), Solution Hints .......15
RLO — Edge Detection ........ 16
Signal — Edge Detection ........ 17
Exercise 4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16 .......18
Exercise 5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation .......19
Additional Exercise 6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15) ......21
Unconditional Jump (Regardless of the RLO) ....... 22
Conditional Jump (Dependent on RLO) ........23

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Binary Operations
SIEMENS
Objectives
understand the difference between 'real' connected NC contacts

and NO contacts, and programmed symbols
be able to explain the terms Result of Logic Operation (RLO),

Status (STAT) and First Check
be able to program basic binary logic operations
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 ird SITRAIN Training for

File: SERV1_09E.2 W Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Binary Logic Operations: AND, OR
LAD FBD STL
I 0.0 I 0.1 I 0.0 Q 8.0

A 10.0
I 0.1 A 1 0.1
Q 8.1 Q 8.0
Q 8.1
I 0.2 Q 8.2
I 0.2 Q 8.2 0 10.2
) >=1
O I 0.3
1 0.3
I 0.3 = Q 8.2

Logic Tables
AND 1 0.0 1 0.1 Q 8.0
0 0
0 1
1
1 1
OR I 0.2 I 0.3 Q 8.2
0 0
0 1
1

SIEMENS
Binary Logic Operations: Exclusive OR (XOR)
LAD FBD
A 1 0.4
I 0.4 I 0.5 Q 8.0 AN 1 0.5
) 0
AN 1 0.4
A 1 0.5
10.4 10.5 Q8.0
I 0.4 XOR Q 8.0 X 1 0.4

X 1 0.5
I 0.5 Q8.0

Logic Table
XOR I 0.4 I 0.5 Q 8.0

0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
Rule With an EXCLUSIVE OR logic operation, the signal state is "1", if the
signal state of one of the two given addresses is "1".
With XOR elements for checking more than two addresses, the result of
logic operation is:
"1" — if an uneven number
of checked addresses deliver the result of check "1"
"0" — if an even number
of checked addresses deliver the result of check "1"

SIEMENS
Sensors and Symbols
Process Interpretation in the PLC Program
The The sensor Voltage Signal Check Check

sensor is ... present state for signal state "1" for signal state "0"
is a ... at input? at
input Symbol / Result of Symbol / Result of
Instruction check Instruction check
NO activated
LAD: LAD:
contact yes 1 Yes" "No"
H I— 1
—0— 0
"NO contact--.4 "NC contact'
not no
activated 0 "No" I: "Yes"
1 0 , 1
FBD: FBD:
l&
NC activated L
( no
contact 0 "No" "Yes"
0 1
.
.11.141.11 1
not STL: STL:

activated yes 1 "Yes" "No"
1 AN I x.y 0
A I x.y

Process The use of normally open or normally closed contacts for the sensors in a
controlled process depends on the safety regulations for that process.
Normally closed contacts are always used for limit switches and safety
switches, so that dangerous conditions do not arise if a wire break occurs in the
sensor circuit.
Normally closed contacts are also used for switching off machinery for the
same reason.
Symbols In LAD, a symbol with the name "NO contact" is used for checking for signal
state "1" and a symbol with the name "NC contact" to check for signal state "0".
It makes no difference whether the process signal "1" is supplied by an
activated NO contact or a non-activated NC contact.
Example If an NC contact in the machine is not activated, the signal in the process
image table will be "1". You use the NO contact symbol in LAD to check for a
signal state of "1".
General:
The "NC contact" symbol delivers the result of check "1" when the checked
address state or status is "0".

SIEMENS
First Check, Signal State, Result of Check and Result of Logic Operation
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Result of Check
Result of Check
Result of Check
Result of Logic
Result of Logic
Result of Logic
Signal State
Signal State
Signal State
First Check
First Check
First Check
Operation
Operation
Operation
= M 3.4
A I10 0 1 1
AN I 1.1 0 1 0
A M 4.0 0 1 1
= Q 8.0
= Q 8.1
A I 2.0 0 1 0

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_09E.6 qr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Signal State A logic operation is made up of a series of instructions to check the states of
signals (inputs (I), outputs (Q), bit memories (M), timers (T), counters (C) or
data bits (D) ) and instructions to set Q,M,T,C or D.
Result of Check When the program is executed, the result of check is obtained. If the check
condition is fulfilled, the result of check is "1". If the check condition is not
fulfilled, the result of check is "0".
First Check The first check that follows an RLO limiting operation (such as S, R, CU, = ...)
or the first check in a logic string is called a First Check (FC) since the result of
this check - regardless of the last RLO - is accepted as the new RLO.
Result of Logic When the next check instructions are executed, the result of logic operation is
Operation gated with the result of check and a new RLO is obtained.
When the last check instruction in a logic operation has been executed, the
RLO remains the same. A number of instructions using the same RLO can
follow.
Note The result of the first check is stored without being subjected to a logic
operation. Therefore, it makes no difference whether you program the first
check with an AND or an OR instruction in STL. To convert your program to
one of the other programming languages, you should, however, always
program using the correct instruction.

SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Sensors and Symbols

Task: In all three examples, the light should be on when S1 is activated and S2 is not activated!
Hardware
r_>
I I
11 S1 I= \ S2 1=\ S1 14 S2 I= S1 I= S2
DU
I I I
11.0 11.1 11.0 11.1 11.0 11.1
Programmable controller Programmable controller Programmable controller
Q 4.0 Q 4.0 Q 4.0
itiLight Light
4 )Light
Software
1
H
1 1.0 I 1.1 Q 4.0 1.0 11.1 Q 4.0 11.0 11.1 Q4.0
III LAD > HI--1 ( )
-
I I I ( ) - ---
I1 HI ( )
> 11.0 - & L 11.0 - & 11.0 - &

FBD
DU 11.1 - Q4.0 I 1.1 - Q 4.0 I 1.1 - Q4.0
11.0 I 1.0 1 1.0

[I[I1.31* ..... .1.1
..1 ..I.1.1 ..I.1.1
..... Q 4.0 ..... Q 4.0 ..... Q 4.0
1
Exercise Complete the programs above to obtain the following functionality: When switch
S1 is activated and switch S2 is not activated, the light should be ON in all
three cases.
Note ! The terms "NO contact" and "NC contact" have different meanings depending
on whether they are used in the process hardware context or as symbols in the
software.

SIEMENS
Assignment, Setting, Resetting
LAD FBD
I 1.0 I 1.1 A I 1.0

I 1.0 —
110 Assignment
H
I—I
I 1.1 —
Q 8.0 A I 1.1
= Q 8.0
H I 1.2 11.3
081 I 1.2
Q 8.1
A 11.2
A I 1.3
I 1.3 S S Q 8.1
11.4 Q 8.1
(R) I 1.4 O I 1.4
>=1 Q 8.1 O 11.5
Reset I 1.5 R Q 8.1
11.5 I R
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 A SITRAIN Training for

File: SERV1_09E.8 4,Zr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Assignment An assignment passes the RLO on to the specified address (Q, M, D). When
the RLO changes, the signal state of that address also changes.
Set If RLO= "1", the specified address is set to signal state "1" and remains set until
another instruction resets the address.
Reset If RLO= "1", the specified address is reset to signal state "0" and remains in this
state until another instruction sets the address again.

SIEMENS
Setting and Resetting a Flip Flop
LAD FBD
M 5.7 M 5.7
11.2 Q 9.3 A 11.2
SR SR S M 5.7
Dominant ) 11.2 -
A 1 1.3
Reset Q9.3
11.3 R M 5.7
A M 5.7
11.3 - = Q 9.3
M 5.7 M 5.7
11.3 Q 9.3 A 1 1.3
Dominant RS R RS R M 5.7
I I -R ) 11.3 -
Set A 1 1.2
Q9.3 S M 5.7
11.2
A M 5.7
11.2 - S = Q 9.3

Flip Flop A flip flop has a Set input and a Reset input. The memory bit is set or reset,
depending on which input has an RLO=1.
If there is an RLO=1 at both inputs at the same time, the priority must be
determined.
Priority In LAD and FBD there are different symbols for Dominant Set and Dominant
Reset memory functions. In STL, the instruction that was programmed last has
priority.
Note With a warm restart of the CPU, all outputs are reset. That is, they are
overwritten with the state '0'.
If the M 5.7 in the example above has been declared retentive, it's state will be
retained even after a warm restart of the CPU. If the memory bit was set before
the warm restart, it's state remains state '1' even after the warm restart and the
output Q 5.7 would be immediately activated once again.

SIEMENS
Midline Output Coil
LAD
11.0 11.1 M 20.7 12.0 1 2.1 Q 4.0
1---(#)--I I II ( )--1
FBD
11.0 —
M 20.7
11.1 —
120 — Q 4.0
12.1 —

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_09E.10 V Automation and Industrial Solutions
Midline Output Coil The midline output coil exists only in the LAD and FBD graphic languages. It is
an intermediate assignment element with assignment function that assigns the
current RLO at a specified address (M20.7 in the slide). The midline output coil
provides this same address in the same network for subsequent gating.
In the STL language, this is equivalent to
= M 20.7
A M 20.7
In the LAD language, when connected in series with other elements, the
"midline output coil" instruction is inserted in the same way as a contact.

SIEMENS
Instructions that Affect the RLO
LAD FBD
A I 0.0
Q 8.0 A I 0.1
!IF NOT I0.0 10.1
NOT ) NOT
= Q 8.0
Examples:
STAT 0 — Bit memory
CLR
not available not available = M 0.0
STAT 1 — Bit memory,/
not available not available SET

= M 0.1

qlr
NOT The NOT instruction inverts the RLO.
CLR The CLEAR instruction sets the RLO to "0" without pre-conditions (available
only in STL).
SET The SET instruction sets the RLO to "1" without pre-conditions (available only
in STL).
Note The CLR and SET instructions limit the result of logic operation, that is, the next
programmed scan becomes a first check.
First Check The first processed check operation after a conditional operation is called a first
check. It has a particular meaning since the CPU takes over the result of check
directly as a result of logic operation (RLO). The "old" RLO is thus lost. The first
check always represents the beginning of a logic operation. The operation
(AND, OR, XOR) that comes with the first check is of no importance.

SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)
DI DO
1 0.0 T_System_ON
1 0.1 T_System_OFF L_SYSTEP Q 4.1
1 0.2 T_Jog_RIGHT L MAN Q 4.2 U U
I 0.3 T_Jog_LEFT L AUTO Q 4.3
U V
1 0.4
1 0.5
-15V...+15V -15V...+15V
Ail A01
All A02
cs
0 0
All Al2
0 0 0 I=1
0 0 0 0
0 8 1 5 All Al2 A01 A02
0 CI CI 0
0 0 0 0

gir
Task For the distribution conveyor, you are to program an operating mode section in
FC 15 and interlock the MANUAL mode (Q4.2) in FC 16 as an additional
condition for jogging the conveyor motor.
Function of the operating mode section in FC 15:
• The system (LED Q4.1) is turned "on" using the simulator momentary
contact I 0.0. It is turned "off' using the simulator momentary contact I 0.1
(NC contact).
• You can preselect "MANUAL" mode (LED Q 4.2) or "AUTO" mode
(LED Q 4.3) through switch I 0.4 as follows:
- I 0.4 switched off (= "0"): "MANUAL" mode preselected,
- I 0.4 switched on (= '1 "): "AUTO" mode preselected.
• The operating mode that you presele-ct through switch I 0.4 is confirmed or
switched on through momentary contact I 0.5
• The operating modes are switched off when you change the preselection of
the operating mode (I 0.4) or when the system is switched off (Q 4.1 = "0").
Integrating the MANUAL mode (Q 4.2):
• The "Jog Conveyor Motor" programmed in FC 16 is now only to be possible
when the "MANUAL" mode is switched on. Program the relevant lock-out in
FC 16.
What to Do 1. Insert the new FC 15 block and program the required function
2. Program the lock-out in FC 16.
3. Download all blocks into the CPU and test your program
Solution Hints You will find solution hints on the following page !

SIEMENS
Exercise 2: "FC Mode" (FC 15), Solution Hints

Network 1: Indicator Light System ON
Q 4.1
SR
ON-Condition
OFF-Condition Q —
Network 2: Indicator Light MAN Mode

Q 4.2
SR
ON-Conditions
OFF-Conditions Q ____
Network 3: Indicator Light AUTO Mode

Q 4.3
SR
ON-Conditions
OFF-Conditions Q ____
4
File: SERV1_09E.13 qr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Whole Function In FC 15, the operating modes and the indicator lights: System ON, MANUAL
of the FC 15 mode and AUTO mode are to be programmed with the functions described in
the task.
Partial Functions The whole function of FC 15 can be divided into the following partial functions,
of the FC 15 as shown in the slide above. These partial functions can be programmed in
separate networks:
• Network 1 indicator light for System ON
• Network 2 indicator light for MANUAL mode
• Network 3 indicator light for AUTO mode
Partial Functions Every network can then be logically divided into two sections which can be
of the Networks programmed independent of one another:
• ON conditions (Set condition)
• OFF conditions (Reset condition)
Example:
- The conditions for the ON state of the MANUAL mode:
System switched on ( Q 4.1 = '1 ') AND MANUAL mode preselected
("ModeSelect" switch I 0.4 = '0') AND "Accept" switch pressed (M.C.Switch
I 0.5 = '1 ')
- The conditions for the OFF state of the MANUAL mode:
System switched off ( Q 4.1 = '0') OR AUTO mode preselected
("ModeSelect" switch I 0.4 = '1')
Programming By structuring the whole functionality of the FC 15 into partial functions

(networks and network sections) you have created function units that can
relatively easily be turned into a program. The simplest way to implement the
necessary functions is with memory functions, since the switching on and
switching off of the system and the operating modes takes place with
momentary contact switches.

SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16)
Cony Start Transport Phase Cony. Stop
Prox.Sens.Bay 1
I 8.5
Mom.Cont.Bay 1
I 8.1
Prox.Sens.Bay 2
I 8.6
Mom.Cont.Bay 2
I 8.2
Light Barrier
I 8.0
Run Conveyor
RIGHT
Q8.5

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_09E.14 Mr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Function In AUTO mode, parts are to be transported from Bay 1 or Bay 2 to the "Final
Check" (light barrier).
Run Conveyor RIGHT starts when
• Bay 1 proximity sensor is occupied AND NOT Bay 2 proximity sensor is
occupied
AND
Bay 1 momentary contact is pressed
OR
• Bay 2 proximity sensor is occupied AND NOT Bay 1 proximity sensor is
occupied
AND
Bay 2 momentary contact is pressed
Run Conveyor RIGHT is stopped when
• the part has reached the Final Check (the light barrier)
OR
• AUTO mode is switched off
What to Do 1. Expand FC 16 with the desired function.

2. Make sure that the conveyor stops immediately when the automatic mode is
switched off (Q 4.3= "0").
3. Test to see whether the function "Jog left" or "Jog right" still works in the
manual mode (M/A_Man).
Solution Hints You will find solution hints on the following page !

SIEMENS
Exercise 3: "FC ConvMotor" (FC 16), Solution Hints

Network x Jog RIGHT in MANUAL mode
Conditions for JOGGING

M 16.2 Memory bit for
RIGHT
Jog RIGHT
in MANUAL mode In MANUAL mode
Network v Run Conveyor RIGHT in AUTO mode
M 16.4
Conditions for
Memory bit for
Run Conveyor RIGHT S
Run Conveyor RIGHT
in AUTO mode R in AUTO mode
Network z Control Run Conveyor RIGHT
M 16.2 >=1
Q 8.5 Run Conveyor RIGHT
M 16.4 ---

V. Automation and Industrial Solutions
Problem The Run Conveyor RIGHT (0 8.5) must be controlled under two conditions:
• In the MANUAL mode while jogging RIGHT (in the slide - Network x)
OR
in the AUTO mode under the conditions described in the task (in the slide -
Network y)
If the result of logic operations in both network x and y were assigned the
output Run Conveyor RIGHT (Q8.5), an error in the form of a double
assignment would occur. The jogging RIGHT of the motor in manual mode
(Network x) would no longer function, since the state assigned to the output
would be overwritten in Network y.
Solution The problem can be solved by programming a memory bit for each condition or
by first assigning the results of the logic operations to a memory bit in both
networks x and y. These are then used in Network z to control the conveyor
motor.

SIEMENS
RLO — Edge Detection

LAD FBD
11.0 I 1.1 M1.0 M8.0 A 1 1.0

I 1.0 —
M1.0 M8.0 A I 1.1
H H (p) 0 I I 1.1 — P
FP M1.0
M8.0
11.0 I 1.1 M1.1 M8.1 11.0 — A I 1.0

M1.1 M8.1 A I 1.1
H I (N) () I I 1.1 — N
FN M1.1
M8.1

Mr
,
' SITRAIN Training for
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_098.16 Automation and Industrial Solutions
RLO Edge Detection An "RLO edge" detection is when the result of a logic operation changes from
"0" to "1" or from "1" to "0".
Positive Edge (Positive RLO Edge Detection) detects a signal change in the address from "0"
to "1", and displays it as RLO = "1" after the instruction (such as at M 8.0) for
one cycle.
To enable the system to detect the edge change, the RLO must be saved in an
FP bit memory (such as M 1.0), or a data bit.
Negative Edge (Negative RLO Edge Detection) detects a signal change in the address from
"1" to "0" and displays it as RLO = "1" after the instruction (such as at M 8.1) for
one cycle.
To enable the system to detect the edge change, the RLO must be saved in an
FN bit memory (such as M 1.1), or a data bit.

SIEMENS
Signal — Edge Detection

LAD FBD
1 1.0 A 1 1.0
1 1.1
M8.0 1 1.1 A (
POS POS M8.0 A 1 1.1
FP M1.0
MB1T M1.0— M_B1T
M8.0
A 1 1.0
1 1.1 11.0
M8.1 A (
1 1.1
NEG M8.1 A 1 1.1
NEG FN M1.1
M_B1T M1.1- M_B1T
M8.1
SIMATIC S7 l SITRAIN Training for

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.17 ge Automation and Industrial Solutions
Signal Edge A "signal edge" is when a signal changes its state.
Example Input 11.0 acts as a static enable. Input 1 1.1 is to be monitored dynamically
and every signal change is to be detected.
Positive Edge When the signal state at 11.1 changes from "0" to "1", the "POS" check
instruction results in signal state "1" at output Q for one cycle, provided input
11.0 also has signal state "1" (as in the example above).
To enable the system to detect the edge change, the signal state of I 1.1 must
also be saved in an M_BIT (bit memory or data bit) (such as M 1.0).
Negative Edge When the signal state at 1 1.1 changes from "1" to "0", the "NEG" check
instruction results in signal state "1" at output Q for one cycle, provided input
1 1.0 has signal state "1" (as in the example above).
To enable the system to detect the edge change, the signal state of I 1.1 must
also be saved in an M_BIT (bit memory or data bit) (such as M 1.1).

SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16
Cony. Start Transport Phase Cony. Stop
Part at
Light barrier
Start condition
in AUTO mode
Light Barrier
(I 8.0) I
F)
Run Conveyor
RIGHT
(Q8.5)
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_09E.18 Mr1 SITRAIN Training for
FC 16 Up Till Now In MANUAL mode (Q 4.2 = "1"), you can jog the conveyor motor direction to
the RIGHT and LEFT using the simulator momentary contacts I 0.2 and I 0.3.
In AUTO mode (Q 4.3 = "1"), the Run Conveyor RIGHT is switched on when a
part is laid on the conveyor exactly in front of a proximity sensor of Bay 1 or
Bay 2, (EXOR -logic operation) and the occupied Bay's momentary contact is
pressed.
The conveyor motor is stopped when the part has reached the Final Check
(the light barrier) OR the AUTO mode is switched off.
Task The function of the FC 16 to control the conveyor motor in AUTO mode is to
remain fundamentally unchanged. However, the conveyor motor is to be
stopped as soon as the part has passed through the light barrier (4 edge
detection necessary, see slide).
What to Do: 1. Program the necessary changes in FC 16, by interlocking the result of the
edge detection as the reset condition for M 16.4 (bit memory for Run
conveyor RIGHT in AUTO mode) instead of the light barrier signal itself
(I 8.0 ).
For the necessary edge detection of the light barrier signal use the bit
memory M 16.0 as an edge memory bit.
2. Save the modified FC 16 block and download it into the CPU.
3. Check whether your program fulfills the desired function.

•
SIEMENS
Exercise 5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation
in MANUAL mode:
2Hz pulsed honking
while conveyor jogging
"BAY1" "BAY2"
"Horn"
(Q 8.7)
"L_Bay1" "L_Bay
2"
(Q 8.1) (Q 8.2)
in AUTO mode:
Constant light at both bays when a new part can be placed (both bays empty)
1Hz flashing light at the bay where the part is placed and the conveyor has not yet been started
- 2Hz flashing light at both bays during conveyor movement
A
_11 SITRAIN Training tor
File: SERV1_09E.19 gr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Function The indicator lights at Bay 1 and Bay 2 as well as the horn are to be controlled
as follows:
When AUTO mode (Q4.3) is switched on, the indicator lights show ...
• constant light when a new part can be placed on the conveyor
(conveyor motor is standing and both proximity sensors are free)
1Hz flashing light at the bay where the associated proximity sensor detects
a part, and only so long as the conveyor has not yet been started
• 2Hz flashing light as long as the conveyor motor is moving
The horn sounds with a 2Hz pulsed tone as long as the conveyor motor is
jogged to the right or to the left in MANUAL mode.
What to Do 1. Copy the block "FC_Signal" (FC 14) from the project "SERV1_B" in the S7
program "Chap9_binary_Op" into your S7 program called "My Program"
2. Put the block into operation
3. Correct the block so that it fulfills the required functions.

SIEMENS

File: SERV1_09E.20 g. Automation and Industrial Solutions
complete a topic.

SIEMENS
Additional Exercise 6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)

OLD: without edge detection
T_System_ON
(I 0.0) I I
I
T_System_OFF
(I 0.1, NC contact)
i
L_SYSTEM
(Q4.1)
I
NEW: with edge detection

1
T_System_ON I :....
0 0.0) , I I c+1
..i.:
I
T_System_OFF
(I 0.1, NC contact)
I
L_SYSTEM I
(Q 4.1) I

Rkr Automation and Industrial Solutions
FC 15 Up Till Now The system (Q 4.1) is switched on with the simulator momentary contact I 0.0,
and switched off with the simulator momentary contact I 0.1 (NC).
If you press both contacts simultaneously, the system remains switched off or
is switched off if currently on. However, if both contacts are pressed and you let
go of the OFF contact, the system switches on again without having to first
press the ON contact once more (see slide, upper function diagram "OLD:
without edge detection").
Task (1) Expand the functionality of FC 15 using edge detection so that the ON contact
must be pressed every time the system is switched on (see slide, lower
function diagram "NEW: with edge detection").
The criteria for switching on the system is no longer to be the pressed ON
contact or its '1' signal, but the function of pressing or the "positive edge" of
the ON contact signal.
What to Do: 1. In the set condition for "L_SYSTEM", insert an edge detection of the
momentary contact "T_System_ON". For the edge detection, use the
memory bit "M_Aux_System_ON" (M 15.1) as edge memory bit.
2. Save the modified FC 15 block and download it into the CPU.
3. Check whether your program fulfills the desired function!
Task (2) Just as with switching on the system, accepting and/or switching on "L_MAN"
(Q 4.2) and "L_AUTO" (Q 4.3) is also to happen using "S_M/A_ModeSelect"
(I 0.4).
Every time there is a mode change, the momentary contact "T_ M/A _Accept"
(I 0.5) must be pressed once more.
Use the bit memories "M_Aux_Man_ON" (M 15.2) and "M_Aux_Auto_ON"
(M 15.3) for the required edge detections.

SIEMENS
Unconditional Jump (Regardless of the RLO)
LAD FBD
Network 1 Network 1 Network 1

NEW1 NEW1
( JMP ) JMP JU NEW1
Network 2 Network 2 Network 2
•
Network x Network x Network x
NEW1 • NEW1 4
M5.5 I 4.7 M69.0 NEW1: AN M5.54

M5.5 M69.0 AN 14.7
I/ I )
1 4.7 = M69.0

Jump Instruction With jump instructions, you can jump individual instructions or even whole
networks so that these are not executed.
Jumps can be made both forwards and backwards. The jump instruction and
the jump destination must both be in the same block (max. jump length =
64kbyte). The jump destination must be unique within this block, that is, it may
only exist once.
Jump instructions can be used in FBs, FCs and OBs.
Jump Label A jump label (also called a "Label") marks the location in the block where
program execution is to continue from after a successful jump. In STL, the jump
label is located to the left of an instruction; in FBD and LAD, it is always at the
beginning of a network.
You will find the jump label symbol in LAD and FBD in the Program Elements
browser:
Program Elements 9 Jumps 9 LABEL.
The name of the jump label can consist of up to 4 characters of which the first
must be a letter (in STL the special character "_" is also permitted).
JMP / JU An unconditional jump instruction causes a program jump to a label regardless

of the RLO.

SIEMENS
Conditional Jump (Dependent on RLO)
LAD FBD
I 0.0 1 0.1 1 0.0 A 1 0.0

NEW1
Jump if NEW1 A 1 0.1
RLO=1 JMP) 1 0.1 — JMP JC NEW1
-I
Jump if I 0.2 1 0.3 1 0.2 A 1 0.2
NEW2 NEW2
RLO=0 A 1 0.3
(JMPN) 1 0.3 — JMPN JCN NEW2

21
g SITRAIN Training for
Filer SERV109E.23 gr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserve:
JC The "JC" conditional jump is only executed if the RLO is "1".

If the RLO is "0", the jump is not executed, the RLO is set to "1" and program
execution continues with the next instruction.
JCN The "JON" conditional jump is only executed if the RLO is "0".
If the RLO is "1", the jump is not executed and program execution continues
with the next instruction.
Note STL provides additional jump operations, which are discussed in an advanced
programming course.

SIEMENS
Digital Operations
S_CUD 9 ADD _I Ed Bookmark Op

fled, I Env I
C S_CU 9 SUB _I ;were, I Index
ReEl on STEP 71 5lossay
9 S_CD 9 MUL
--[SC] Cornparato 9 DIV J ADD_R Add Real
9 --[CU) C EQ ADD_DI
9 --[co]
Converter NE_I SUB_DI
d
C BCD_I *:-. 9 GT J Symbol
9 MUL_DI
9 I_BCD if LT _I C DIV_DI
9 I_DI C GE _I 9 MOD DI ADD_R
C BCD_DI C LE _I
— EN
—1N1 OUT —
C DI_BCD 9 EQ_D —1N2 ENO --
DI_R NE_D
0 INV I C GT_D Palm Maws Neundeked Desci Minh
C INV_DI C LT_D Floating-port frt. EN BOOL I, 0, K D, L., T. C Enable input
C NEC. _I GE_D C ADD_R 1N1 REAL 1. 0, M. D. L or
constant
First number to be added
0 NEG_DI C LE_D SUB_R 1N2 REAL 1, 0, D, L or Second number to be added

NEG_R EQ_R MUL_R constant
Result of addition
0 ROUND NE_R C DIV_R
OUT REAL I, 0, M, D. L
ENO BOOL 1, O. M. D, L Enable output
C TRUNC C GT_R 9 ABS
9 S_PULE C CEIL C LT_R SQRT Description
S_PEX- C FLOOR C GE_R SQR A signal state of 1 at the Enable input (EN) actuates the Add Real instruction.
... 9 SOOT C LE_R C LN This Instruction adds inputs IN1 and IN2 The result can be scanned at output OUT
tf either of the inputs or the result is not a floating-point number, the OV bit and OS
5_007S EXP bit are set to 1 and ENO is set to O.
9 S_OFFDT 0 SIN
--[SP]
See also Evalualma the Bits of the Status Word voth Floating Point Instruction.
9 COS
--[SE] 0 TAN Status Word
- c --[5D]
--[SS]
C ASIN
ACOS RR f..C.1 CU Shi ES 48 EIA 8L4 EL
writes X X X X X 0 x x 1 .
C --[SF] ATAN

SERV1_10E.1
.1
.; Automation and Industrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved.
Contents Page 10
Objectives ....................................................................................................................................................... 2
Acquiring, Processing and Outputting Data 3
Integer (INT, 16-Bit Integer) Data Type ....... 4
Double Integer (DINT, 32-Bit Integer) Data Type ....... 5
REAL (Floating-point Number, 32 Bit) Data Type ....... 6
The BCD Code for Inputting and Outputting Integers 7
Loading and Transferring Data 8
Data Storage in Accumulator 1 ....... 9
Exercise 1: Number Formats ...................................................................................................................... 10
S5 Counter Functions 11
Counters: Function Diagram ........................................................................................................................ 12
Exercise 2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18) ................................................................... 13
S5 Timer Functions 14
Timers: ON Delay (SD) ................................................................................................................................. 15
Exercise 3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17) 16
Conversion Operations BCD <-> Integer ................................................................................................... 17
Comparison Operations ................................................................................................................................ 18
Basic Mathematical Functions 19
Exercise 4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19) ............................................................................. 20
If You Want to Know More 21
Additional Exercise 5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17) ...................................... 22
Additional Exercise 6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging ............................................. 23
Counters: Bit Instructions ............................................................................................................................. 24
Timers: Stored ON Delay (SS) .................................................................................................................. 25
Timers: Pulse (SP) ......................................................................................................................................... 26
Timers: Extended Pulse (SE) 27
Timers: OFF Delay (SF) 28
Time Formats for Traditional S5 Timers in STEP 7 ................................................................................. 29
Timers: Bit Instructions 30
Conversion Operations I -> DI -> REAL 31
Digital Logic Operations ............................................................................................................................... 32
Application Example: Digital Edge Detection 33
Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Objectives
Upon completion of the chapter the participant will
be familiar with the INT, DINT, REAL data types and the
BCD display
be able to apply the selectable display formats in the

"Monitor / Modify Variable" test function
understand the "Load" and "Transfer" instructions
be able to apply and program the S5 counter and timer

functions
understand conversion operations for number formats
be able to apply and program the comparison

operations
understand basic mathematical functions
A
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 SITRAIN Training tor
ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for Digital Operations
SIEMENS
Acquiring, Processing and Outputting Data

MEM
Operating Thumbwheel
1
0■248
0 buttons,
•• •
+ monitoring
Potentiometer,
processes 7-segment
01 81 11 5
IN IN IN MI
display
Operator Panel
Control such as MPI Processing

unit the values
DI/ All
DO AO
such as PROFIBUS
Field devices
Process
controller

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 I
ttr Automation and Industrial Solutions
10
Binary/Digital True logic control systems are recognizable in the fact that they exclusively
Processing process binary data.
The performance of today's control computer, as well as tasks in the data
processing, quality control areas, among others, has increased the importance
of digital data processing using PLCs.
Digital process variables can be found in all areas of open-loop control - such
as in connected devices for process operating and monitoring or in the control
of field devices.
Operating and The goal of process monitoring is to provide the operator with up-to-the-minute
Monitoring information about the working machine or system quickly, concisely and clearly
as well as the opportunity to intervene and control and influence the process.
While in the past mostly simple, that is, "dumb" input and output devices, such
as 7-segment displays and thumbwheel buttons were used to display and enter
digital values, today "intelligent" operating and monitoring devices are
frequently connected to a PLC.
Field Devices Today as well, field devices that acquire process data or that control the
process are supplied directly with digital variables through field bus systems.
The connection of field devices, such as drives or weighing systems, using
analog input and output modules is becoming more and more a thing of the
past.
Formats Depending on the type of device connected, different number formats for the
coding of data are used to transmit data between device and PLC, as well as
for storing and processing data in the PLC.

SIEMENS
Integer (INT, 16-Bit Integer) Data Type

Value range -32768 to +32767 Arithmetic
(without sign: 0 to 65535) operations: such as + I, * I, <I, ==I
Display Formats:
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DEC: +.662 BIN.: 2# 0000001010010110 HEX: W#16#0 2 9 6

without
429
,' Sign s, +2° sign
positive ............. +24 6 x 162 = 6
numbers; +2 2
9 x 16' = 144
+2' 2 x 162 = 512
+ 662 662
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DEC: 662 BIN.: 2# 11 1 1 1 0 01 01010 HEX: W#16#F D6 A

without
+214 sign
,/ Sign ‘‘,
negative +2'3
+212 10 x 16° =10
numbers/ +21 6 x16'= 96
+210 +25 13 x 163 = 3328
+25
Representation as +25 +23 +2' 5 x 163 = 61440
Twos Gomplement - 662 64874
A
Integer Data Type An Integer data type value is a whole number value, that is, a value without a
(16-bit Integer) decimal point.
SIMATIC S7 stores Integer data type values with sign in 16 bit code. This
results in the value range shown in the slide above. As well, SIMATIC S7
provides arithmetic operations for processing Integer values.
Decimal STEP7 uses the Decimal (not BCD!) display format to specify the constants of
the Integer data type with sign and without explicit format description. The use
of constant Integer values in the Binary and Hexadecimal display formats is
possible in principle, but because of the poor legibility, they are more or less
not suitable. For this reason, the syntax of STEP7 provides the specification of
Integer values only in the decimal display format.
Binary In a digital computer system, all values are stored in a binary-coded form. Only
the digits 0 and 1 are available in the binary number system. Base 2 of this
numbers system results from the number of available digits. Accordingly, the
value of every position of a binary number results from a power of Base 2. This
is also expressed in the format specification 2#.... .
Negative values are represented as binary numbers in twos complement. In
this representation, the most significant bit (bit no. 15 for the Integer data type)
has the value - 215. Since this value is greater than the sum of all residual
values, this bit also has the sign information. That is, if this bit = 0, then the
value is positive; if the bit is = 1, then the value is negative. The conversion of a
binary number into a decimal number is made by adding the values of the
positions that have a 1 (see slide).

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Double Integer (DINT, 32-Bit Integer) Data Type
Value range L# -2147483648 to L#+2147483647 Operations: such as + D, * D, <D, ==D

(without sign: 0 to 4294967295)
Display Formats:
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DEC: L# +540809 BIN.: 2# 0 0 0 010 0 0 010 0 0 011 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 00 0 o o 011 o o 1
,' Sign s,
positive
`, numbers;
HEX: DW#16# 0 0 0 8 4 0 8 9
(without sign)
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
DEC: L# -540809 BIN.: 2# 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 11
F Roiresentation 84 HEX: DW#16# F F F 7 BF 7 7

4
L . t 11111t1A-: (without sign)
SIMATIC S7 18.09.2009
Date:
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_10E.5 Nr Automation and Industrial Solutions
10
Double Integer SIMATIC S7 stores Double Integer data type values with sign as 32 bit code.
(32-Bit Integer) This results in the value range shown in the slide above. As well, SIMATIC S7
provides arithmetic operations for processing DINT values.
Decimal STEP7 uses a decimal number (not BCD!) to specify a constant of the Double
Integer data type with sign and the format L# for "long" (double word, 32 bit).
When a value smaller than -32768 or greater than 32767 is specified, the
format L# is automatically added. For negative numbers smaller than -32768,
the user must specify the format as L# - (for example: L# -32769). This is
imperative if the value is to be further processed arithmetically as a double
integer since you would otherwise work with false values (value + sign)!
Hexadecimal The hexadecimal numbers system provides 16 different digits (0 to 9 and

A to F). This results in Base 16 of this numbers system. Accordingly, the value
of every position of a hexadecimal number results from a power of Base 16.
Hexadecimal numbers are specified with the format W# for the dimension
(W = word = 16 bit) or DW# (DW = double word = 32 bit) and 16# for identifying
the basic numbering system. The number of specifiable bits is variable from 1
to 8 whereby missing (unspecified) bits are filled with leading zero digits.
The digits A to F correspond to the decimal values 10 to 15. The value 15 is the
last value that can be binary-coded - without sign - with 4 bits. Out of this
correlation, the simple conversion of a binary number into a hexadecimal
number and vice versa can be obtained. In this way, four binary bits each can
easily make up one digit of a hexadecimal number.

SIEMENS
REAL (Floating-point Number, 32 Bit) Data Type
Value range -3.402823.10+38 to -1.175495.10-38 , 0.0, +1.175495.10-38 to +3.402823.10+38
Operations: such as + R, * R, <R, ==R

sin, acos, In, exp, SQR
General format of a Real number = (Sign) • (to • (2e-127)
Example: 0.75
Sign of
Real no. e = Exponent (8 Bit) f = Mantissa (23 Bit)
I I I
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
11111
10 1 0 1 0000000000000000000000
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 2-12-22-32_4 2-23
Real no. = +1.5 * 2 126-127 = 0.75

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_10E.6 gig' Automation and Industrial Solutions
Real The previously described INT and DINT data types are used to store whole
number values with sign. Accordingly, only operations that supply a whole
number value as the result can be performed with these data types.
In cases where analog process variables such as voltage, current, and
temperature have to be processed, it becomes necessary to use Real values
(real numbers, "decimal numbers"). In order to be able to represent such
values, binary digits have to be defined whose value is less than 1 (power of
base 2 with negative exponent).
Real Format In order to be able to form the greatest possible value range within a defined
memory capacity (for SIMATIC S7: double word, 32 bit) (see slide), you must
be able to select the decimal point position. Early on, IEEE defined a format for
floating-point numbers. This format was laid down in IEC 61131 and was
included in STEP 7. This format makes it easy to process a variable decimal
point position.
In a binary coded floating-point number, a portion of the binary digits contain
the mantissa (23 Bit) and the rest contain the exponent (8 Bit) and the sign of
the floating-point number.
When you specify real values, you do so without specifying the format. After
you enter a constant real value (for example: 0.75), the Editor automatically
makes a conversion to scientific notation (for example: 7.5000e-001).
Application Floating-point numbers are used for "analog value processing", among others.
A great advantage of floating-point numbers is in the number of operations
possible with such numbers. These include, in addition to the standard
operations such as: +, * , / also instructions such as sin, cos, exp, In, etc, that
are used mainly in closed-loop control algorithms.

SIEMENS
The BCD Code for Inputting and Outputting Integers
Value range 16 Bit: - 999 to + 999 Conversion

32 Bit: -9999999 to + 9999999 operations: BTI, BTD, ITB, DTB
(no arithmetic!)
r r r
■ ■ ■ NEI
0 2 9 6
••••••••••••••••
16 Bit: I BIN.: 2# 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0
Sign (+) 2 9 6
HEX: W#16# 0 2 9 6 DEC: + 662
Sign (+) 0 0 0 0 2 9 6
I
III II II—I—II—I—II I
II I
II
32 Bit: BIN.: 2# Oxxx 0000000000000000001010010110
HEX: DW#16# 0 0 0 0 2 9 6 DEC: + 662

SIMATIC S7
V
Date: 18.09.2009
10
Origin In the past, the specification and visualization of whole numbers was done
exclusively using simple, mechanical thumbwheel buttons and digital displays.
These thumbwheel buttons and digital displays were connected to the PLC's
digital input and output modules through parallel wiring.
BCD Code Each digit of a decimal number is encoded in four bit positions (a nibble). Four
bits are used because the highest decimal digit, 9, requires at least four bit
positions in binary code.
Decimal No. BCD Code Decimal No. BCD Code

0 0000 6 0110
1 0001 7 0111
2 0010 8 1000
3 0011 9 1001
4 0100 10 to 15 not allowed
5 0101
Negative Numbers So that negative numbers can also be specified using a BCD thumbwheel
button, STEP 7 codes the sign in the most significant bit of the most significant
digit (see slide). A sign bit = 0 indicates a positive number. A sign bit = 1
indicates a negative number.
STEP 7 recognizes 16-bit-coded (sign + 3 digits) and 32-bit-coded (sign + 7
digits) BCD numbers.
Data Formats There is no data format for specifying BCD-coded values in STEP 7. You can,
however, specify the decimal number whose BCD code is to be given, as a
HEX number. The binary code of the HEX number and that of the BCD-coded
decimal number is identical.
As you can see in the slide, the DEC data format is not suitable for specifying
BCD coded numbers!

SIEMENS
Loading and Transferring Data
1:1111•11111111111■11M111111110m.alusi
FC1 : loading and transferring Data PC1 loading and transferring Data
'
network 4: in view LAD network 4: in view !HD
MOVE INNS/Wall
MOW IN OUT 30
IN ISO
1464111111Scsato INNSINNOneN 11#160CAll IN INC
— IN OUT —NI130
41 I
MMENIM MIMEMW
IrC1 : loading and transferring Data (ACCU 1)
'
network 4: in view STL 12345678 AlB2C3D4
L li016SCAFI oats 12345678
30 oafs 12345671
NOP 0 cats 12345ST•
41 I
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 __241 SITRAIN Training for

File: SERV1_10E.8 Mr Automation and Industrial Solutions
MOVE (LAD/FBD) If the EN input is active, the value at input "IN" is copied to the address
specified at output "OUT". "ENO" has the same signal state as "EN".
L and T (STL) Load and transfer instructions are executed regardless of the RLO. Data is
exchanged through the accumulator ACCU1.
Standard / ACCU1 Accumulator 1 (ACCU1) is the main register in the CPU. The load instruction
writes the value from the source address right-justified into the (standard)
accumulator 1 and pads the remaining bits (32 bits in all) with "0"s.
The transfer instruction copies some or all of the contents of accumulator 1 to
the specified memory address without clearing the contents of accumulator 1
(see next page). All arithmetic and digital operations store their result in
accumulator 1.
ACCU2 When a load instruction is executed, the old contents of accumulator 1 are first
shifted to accumulator 2 and accumulator 1 is cleared (reset to "0") before the
new value is written into accumulator 1.

SIEMENS
Data Storage in Accumulator 1

Contents of Accumulator 1
Program
31 23 15 7
L MB 0 000 00 00 OIO 00 00 00 OIO 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 MBO
31 23 15 7 0
Load
L MW 0 000 00 00 oie 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 MBO I MB1
31 23 15 7 0
L MD 0 MBO I MB1 I MB2 I MB3
T QD 4
QD 4
II/Transfer T QW 4 411
QW 4
T QB 4 41
QB 4

File: SERV1_10E.9 IsZ Automation and Industrial Solutions
10
General Accumulators are auxiliary memories in the CPU for data exchange between
various addresses as well as for comparison and mathematical operations.
The S7-300 usually has two accumulators with 32 bits each and the CPU 318-2
and the S7-400 each have four accumulators also with 32 bits each.
Load The load instruction loads the contents of the specified byte, word or double
word into accumulator (ACCU) 1.
Transfer When a transfer instruction is executed, the contents of ACCU 1 are retained.
Consequently, the same information can be transferred to different
destinations. If only one byte is transferred, the eight bits farthest to the right
are used (see slide).

SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Number Formats

IiirMEM
,. 111/111 1ate! JoJXJ
Tade Edt Insert PLC Variabb View Options Wmdow Help jts_j2ii
DIcallal _Arr 6
Afil z,Lf
_ DEC
EN 0 BIN
I 0 7 "T_AcknVVermRestart" BOOL
I 0.0 _"T_Systern_04s# BOOL
I 1.0 "TAcknFeur BOOL
W 2 _"WThumbw" HEX
WV 2 "W_Thurnbw" BIN
W 2 "W_Thurnbw" DEC
OVV 6 "OVV_DicrOlsp" I-EX

OW 6 _"OVV_DigDisp" BIN
OW 6 "GiVV_DigDisp" DEC 10
WV 20 "MW_ACT" DEC 132

WV 20 "MW_ACT" HEX V416/0084
MVV 20 9,1W ACT" BIN 2#0000_0000_1000_0100
V
MB 20 BIN 2/00000000
MB 21 201000_0100 4—
MD 80 DEC L0132 L#1 32

MD 80 HEX DVV/1 6/00000084
. • • -• •
ON 83 Accessed in betW40- -31677
Invalid value '
•.....
MD 84 FLOATING_POINT 132.0 132 0
MD 84 DEC L#1124335616
SERVI _A157_300_5tatIon ...\My_Prodram O Abs <5.2
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 ".

"1 SITRAIN Training for
r. Automation and Industrial Solutions
Display Formats Different display formats can be selected in both the "Monitor / Modify Variables" and the
"Monitor (Block)" test function to display variables or register contents.
Every variable can be monitored with several display format options. Depending on the
variable's data type, it becomes apparent that monitoring with the appropriate display
format makes more sense.
BOOL: Display a single bit
(only possible for a variable of the BOOL data type)
BIN: Display the individual bits of a variable
(makes sense for variables of the BYTE, WORD, DWORD data types)
HEX: Display the contents of a variable as hexadecimal number (BCD)
(makes sense for variables of the BYTE, WORD, DWORD data types)
DEC: Display the contents of a variable as decimal number (not BCD!) with sign
(makes sense for variables of the INT, DINT data types)
FLOATING_ Display the contents of a variable as floating-point number
POINT (makes sense for variables of the REAL data type)
Addressing The SIMATIC S7 memory is universally byte-oriented. Accordingly, memory word

MW 20, for example, contains the memory bytes MB 20 (high byte) and MB 21 (low byte,
see slide), the memory double-word MD 80, the memory bytes MB 80, 81, 82 and 83.
With absolute accesses to variables (such as, with L MD 80), you must make sure that
the dimension of the access (here MD...) as well as the address (always equal to the
address of the high byte, here 80) is correct. Through an inadvertent "accessing in
between", an invalid value would be loaded (such as, with L MW 83, see slide). Such
errors can be avoided with the symbolic addressing of variables (here L "MD_DINT").
What to Do Open the given variable table "VAT_NumberFormats" and specify various values for the
output and memory words with "Monitor Variables" or set the different values on the BCD
thumbwheel button IW 2. In the process, monitor the values in the different number
formats.
ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for -
SIEMENS
S5 Counter Functions
LAD FBD
A 10.4
C5
CU C5
S_CUD A 10.5
10.4 Q 8.3
CU CD C5
Q
A 10.3
10.5 L C#5
CD CV — MW 4
S C5
10.3 A 10.7
S CV_BCD — QW 12 R C5
L C5
C#5 PV T MW4
LC C5
10.7
T QW12
A C5
Q8.3

n SITRAIN Training for
mi
1
File: SERV1_10E.11 ,17 Automation and Industrial Solutions
10
Counter Value A 16-bit word is reserved for each counter in the system data memory. This
word is used for storing the counter's value (0 to 999) in binary code.
Count Up When the RLO at the "CU" input changes from "0" to "1", the counter's current
value is incremented by 1 (upper limit = 999).
Count Down When the RLO at the "CD" input changes from "0" to "1", the counter's current
value is decremented by 1 (lower limit = 0).
Set Counter When the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1", the counter is set to the
value at the "PV" input.
Reset Counter When the RLO at the Reset changes from "0" to "1", the counter's value is set
to zero. If the reset condition is fulfilled (stays "high"), the counter cannot be set
and counting in either direction is not possible.
PV The preset value (0 to 999) is specified in BCD format at the "PV" input as:
• as a constant (C#...)
• a BCD format through a data interface.
CV / CV_BCD The counter value can be loaded into the accumulator at the binary output as
an Integer value (CV) or at the decimal output as a BCD number (CV_BCD)
and then transferred from there to other addresses.
Q The signal state of the counter can be checked at output "Q":

• Counter value n: =0 -› Q = 0
• Counter value n: 1<= n <= 999 -› Q = 1

SIEMENS
SI MATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 SITRAIN Training for

Notes When the counter reaches the value 999 during count up, the counter value
stays at 999 with subsequent count up signals. Likewise, when the counter
reaches the value 0, the counter value stays at 0 with subsequent count down
signals.
If an up count and a down count signal occurs at the same time, the count
remains the same.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18)
DI DO
I 0.0 T_System_ON
Act Quantity
I 0.1 T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM a Q 4.1
I 0.2 L_MAN Q 4.2 7 U
Log
T_Jog_RIGHT
I 0.3 T_Jog_LEFT L_AUTO Q 4.3
U
I 0.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect
I 0.5 T_M/A_Accept "QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)
-15V...+15V
Ail A01
All A02
a 0 0
All Al2
a
I= CI
0 0 0
0 0
0
a 0 8 1 5 All Al2 A01 A02
• 0 0 0 0
0 0 I=1 I=1
z
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 IA1 SiT R AlN T rainin for
Automation and lnclstrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. File: SERV1_108.13
Function Up Till Now In AUTO mode, parts are transported from Bay 1 or Bay 2 to the Light Barrier
10
Bay until they pass through the light barrier. The transportation function starts
as soon as a part is placed on Bay 1 or Bay 2 and the associated bay's
momentary contact is pressed and it ends as soon as the part has passed the
light barrier.
Task • The parts transported in AUTO mode are to be counted as soon as they
have passed through the "LB" (I 8.0) light barrier ("LB" 0 4 1).
• The number of transported parts (ACTUAL quantity) is to be recorded with
the S5 counter C 18 and displayed on the BCD digital display.
• The counter is to be reset when the system is switched off (Q 4.1 = "0").
What to Do 1. Program the counting of the transported parts in the block "FC_Count"
(FC18). Use the S5 counter C 18.
2. Program the call of FC 18 in OB 1.

SIEMENS
S5 Timer Functions
Pulse Timer (SP) Extended Pulse (SE)
T44 T44
S_PULSE S_PEXT
1 0.7 — S BI — MWO 1 0.7 — S BI — MWO
S5T#35s — QW12 S5T#35s — TV BC QW12
TV BC
M8.5 M8.5
10.5 — R Q I 0.5 — R Q H=
ON Delay (SD)
T44
S_ODT
I 0.7 — S B1 — MWO
S5T#35s Tv BCE QW12
M8.5
10.5 — R
Stored ON Delay (SS) OFF Delay (SF)
T44 T44
S_ODTS S_OFFDT
1 0.7 — S BI — MWO 1 0.7 — S BI — MWO
S5T#35s — TV BC QW12 S5T#35s — TV
M8.5 QW512
BCD— m8
10.5 — R Q 10.5 — R
Q =
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.14
A
V.
General In control engineering, the following traditional timer functions (S5 timer
functions) have long since established themselves:
• Pulse Timer (S_PULSE or SP),
• Extended Pulse (S_PEXT or SE),
• ON Delay (S_ODT or SD),
• Stored ON Delay (S_ODTS or SS),
• OFF Delay (S_OFFDT or SF)
Memory Timers have their own reserved memory area in the CPU in which each timer
function occupies one word. To find out how many timer words and thus timer
functions are available in a CPU, please check the CPU's technical data.
Time Value The time value can be specified via a variable (such as MW50) or - as shown in
the slide - via a constant. The syntax for specifying a constant time value is
(can be entered with or without underscore):
S5T#aH_bM_cS_dMS e.g. S5T#1h_20m_10s
Minimum Time Value S5T#10ms
Maximum Time Value S5T#2h_46m_30s

SIEMENS
Timers: ON Delay (SD)

LAD FBD
T4 T4
I 0.7 S_ODT S_EVERZ A 10.7
Q8.5
I I BI MWO L S5T#35s
) I 0.7 — S
S5T#35s -TV B1 — MWO SD T4
S5T#35s — Tv BCD
—
QW12
1 0.5 Q8.5 A 10.5
R BCD — QW12 I 0.5 — R T4
1 1
L T4
T MWO
RLO at S LC T4
RLO at R T QW12
A T4
Time = Q8.5
operation
>Example
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Data type 0.01s <— 0 0
0.1s <-- 0
"S5T1ME" 1s <- 0 Units of time: 0 to 999 (BCD-coded)
10s

gr
10
Start The timer starts when the RLO at the Start input "S" changes from "0" to "1".
The timer starts with the time value specified at the Time Value "TV" for as long
as the signal state at input "S" =1.
Reset When the RLO at the Reset input "R" changes from "0" to "1", the current time
value and the time base are deleted and the output "Q" is reset.
Digital Outputs The current time value can be read as a binary number at the "BI" output and
as a BCD number at the "BCD" output.
The current time value is the initial value of "TV" minus the value for the time
that has elapsed since the timer was started.
Binary Output The signal at the "0" output changes to "1" when the timer has expired without
error and input "S" has signal state "1".
If the signal state at the "S" input changes from "1" to "0" before the timer has
expired, the timer stops running and output "Q" has a signal state "0".
Note In STEP 7, you can replace the traditional timer and counter functions with IEC
—conforming system function blocks (SFB). The use of system function blocks
is dealt with in an advanced programming course.

SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17)
DI DO
I 0.0 \
O T_System_ON
I 0.1 T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM Q 4.1
I 0.2 N
O T_Jog_RIGHT L_MAN Q 4.2
I 0.3 \g T_Jog_LEFT L_AUTO Q 4.3
I 0.4 \gi S_M/A_ModeSelect
I 0.5 T_M/A_Accept
N
O
N
O
T_Ackn L_Conv
1 1.0 \
CI Q 5.0
_Fault Fault
\
O
\
O
\
Ig
\
CI
\
O
N
O

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_10E.1 6 .
V: Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task The transport functions while in AUTO mode are to be monitored. The
monitoring is to function as follows:
• If the transport function takes longer than the 6 second monitoring time (if a
part does not pass through the light barrier within 6 seconds of its start
time), then there is a fault in the system and the conveyor motor is
automatically switched off (logic in FC 16).
• A fault is displayed with a 2Hz flashing light (bit no. 3 of the CPU clock
memory byte MB 10) on the simulator LED "L_Conv_Fault" (Q 5.0)
• A fault can be acknowledged via the simulator momentary contact
"T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0)
• The indicator lights at Bays 1 and 2 only once more show a constant light (=
place a new part), when the fault has been acknowledged (lock-out in
FC 14)
What to Do: 1. Program the described monitoring function in FC 17

- For the (timely) monitoring, use the S5 timer T 17 as ON Delay (SD)
- When a fault exists, set the memory bit M 17.0 in order to be able to
further interlock it in FC 14 and FC 16
2. Program the call of FC 17 in OB 1
3. Program the required lock-outs in FC 14 and the switching off of the
conveyor motor in FC16
4. Download the modified blocks into the CPU and test the function

SIEMENS
Conversion Operations BCD Integer
I= MI MI NI
Number Conversion
entered in BCD
0 81 5 BCD->Integer
OM
User program
> Task
1.......,
with Integer
math operations
Number
displayed
Conversion
BCD<-Integer <=1
in BCD
LAD FBD
BCD_I BCD_I L IW4

EN ENO EN OUT — MW20 BTI
T MW20
IW4 — IN OUT MW20 IW4 — IN ENO
I_BCD I_BCD L MW10

EN ENO EN OUT — QW12 ITB
T QW12
MW10 IN OUT — QW12 MW10— IN ENO
1
SIMATIC S7 1.SITRAIN Training for
.4
Date:
File
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.17
4
,1kr Automation and Industrial Solutions
10
Application Since there are no arithmetic operations for the direct processing of BCD-
coded values, these have to be converted into arithmetic data types (I, DI or R)
through format conversions.
Conversion S7-300 / 400 has a series of conversion operations available– here a few
Operations examples:
BCD_I (in STL: BTI)

converts a 3-digit BCD number (+/- 999) into a 16-bit integer
I_BCD (in STL: ITB)
converts a 16-bit integer (+/- 999) ) into a 3-digit BCD number
Inputs and Outputs of the LAD/FBD Elements:

EN The execution of the conversion operation can be determined as follows via the
EN input:
EN is not connected: the conversion is always (regardless of the RLO)
executed
Logic operation at EN is fulfilled (RLO = 1): the conversion is executed
Logic operation at EN is not fulfilled (RLO = 0): the conversion is not
executed
IN The value delivered to IN is converted and the result is output to OUT.
ENO / OUT ENO = 0 because RLO=0 at EN input - OUT not written

The variable delivered to OUT is not written, that is, it keeps its original value
ENO = 0 because error occurred 4 OUT contains invalid value
The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with an invalid value
ENO = 1 (instruction was executed without error): OUT contains result
The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with the result

SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 n SITRAIN Training for

An
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_10E.18 Ir Automation and Industrial Solutions
CMP You can use comparison instructions to compare the following pairs of
numerical values:
Compare integers (on the basis of 16 bit fixed-point number)
D Compare integers (on the basis of 32 bit fixed-point number)
R Compare floating-point numbers (on 32 bit real number basis =
IEEE floating-point numbers).
If the result of the comparison is "true", then the RLO of the operation is "1",
otherwise it is "0".
The values at inputs IN1 and IN2 are compared for conformity with the
specified condition:
.. IN1 is equal to IN2

<> IN1 is not equal to IN2
> IN1 is greater than IN2
< IN1 is less than IN2
>= IN1 is greater than or equal to IN2
<= IN1 is less than or equal to IN2.

SIEMENS
Basic Mathematical Functions

LAD FBD
ADD _I ADD _I L MW4

Addition EN ENO EN OUT — MW6 L MW10
MW4 - IN1 MW4 1N1 +I
MW10 1N2 OUT MW6 MW10 1N2 ENO — T MW6
SUB _I SUB _I L MW8

Subtrac- MW6
EN ENO EN OUT L MW12
tion
MW8 - 1 Ni MW8 - 1 Ni -I
MW12 1N2 OUT —MW6 MW12 1N2 ENO — T MW6
MULDI MUL_DI L MD6

Multipli- MD66 L MD12
EN ENO EN OUT
cation
MD6 - IN1 *D
MD6 IN1
T MD66
MD12 1N2 MD66 MD12 1N2 ENO —
DIV_R DIV_R L MD40

OUT MD32
Division EN ENO - EN L MD4
MD40 -IN1 MD40 - 1 Ni /R
MD4 1N2 OUT — MD32 MD4 1N2 ENO — T MD32
SIMATIC S7 Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.19 gr
10
Arithmetic S7-300 / 400 has a series of arithmetic operations for the processing of
Operations variables of the integer (I), double integer (DI) and real (R) arithmetic data
types.
Inputs and Outputs of the LAD/FBD Elements:

EN The execution of the operation can be determined as follows via the EN input:
EN is not connected: the operation is always (regardless of the RLO)
executed
Logic operation at EN is fulfilled (RLO = 1): the operation is executed
Logic operation at EN is not fulfilled (RLO = 0): the operation is not
executed
IN1 / IN2 The arithmetic calculation is applied to the values delivered to IN1 and IN2 (in
STL, the value loaded first with the value loaded second, in general: ACCU2
with ACCU1) and the result is output to OUT.
ENO / OUT ENO = 0 because RLO=0 at EN input 4 OUT not written

The variable delivered to OUT is not written, that is, it keeps its original value
ENO = 0 because error occurred 4 OUT contains invalid value
The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with an invalid value
ENO = 1 (instruction was executed without error): OUT contains result
The variable delivered to OUT is overwritten with the result

SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19)
DI DO SETPOINT Quantity ACTUAL Quantity

0 0
I 0.0 \
O T_System_ON a I=1
I 0.1 \
O T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM • Q 4.1
0 8 1 5 7
I 0.2 T_Jog_RIGHT L MAN Q 4.2
1 0.3 0 0 0 0
\
O T_Jog_LEFT L AUTO 0 Q 4.3
I 0.4 \
O S_M/A_ModeSelect • "IW_Thumbw" (IW 2) "QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)
I 0.5 \
O T_M/A_Accept •
\
O •
\
O
I 1.0 T_Ackn_Fault L_Conv_Fault • Q 5.0

\
O I
\
O •
•
\
O •
\
O •
\
O
\
O • ACT=SET ** Acknowledgement
"L_Bay-LB" (Q 8.4) "T_Bay-LB" (I 8.4)

Function Up Till Now • The parts transported in AUTO mode are counted (with the S5 counter C18)
in FC 18 as soon as they have passed through the light barrier "LB" ("LB": 0 4 1)
• The number of transported parts (ACT quantity) is displayed on the BCD
digital display.
• The counter is reset when the system is switched off (Q 4.1 = "0").
New Function FC19 • The counting of the transported parts is no longer to be done with the counter C 18,
but rather by addition using MW 20.
• The SETPOINT Quantity of how many parts are to be transported can be set
using the BCD thumbwheel. When the given SETPOINT Quantity is reached, it is
displayed with the message "ACT=SET' on the conveyor model LED "L_Bay-LB"
(Q 8.4).
• As long as the message "ACT=SET' (Q 8.4) exists, the indicator lights at Bay 1 and
Bay 2 are dark (= no new part can be place on the conveyor - lock-out in FC 14)
and no new transport function can be started (- lock-out in FC 16).
• The message "ACT=SET' can be acknowledged using the conveyor's momentary
contact "T Bay-LB" (I 8.4) by resetting the actual quantity (MW 20). Also, when the
system is switched off, the ACT Quantity (MW 20) is reset to "0".
What to Do 1. Copy the block "FC_Count_Add" (FC 19) from the S7 program "Chap10_digital_Op"
of the project "SERV1_B" into your S7 program called "My_Program" of your project
called "My_Project"
2. In OB1, call the new FC 19 instead of the old FC 18
3. In the blocks "FC_Signal" (FC 14) and "FC_ConvMotor" (FC 16), program the
appropriate lock-outs
Note When you set the SETPOINT Quantity, the CPU occasionally goes into the STOP
state because the BCD thumbwheel "bounces" when you change the numbers or it
delivers invalid BCD values.

SIEMENS

complete a topic.

SIEMENS
Additional Exercise 5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault

Conditions (FC17)
Cony
Fault
M 17.0
3—
Cony
Fault 2—
Counter C 17 l-
e
M/A AUTO
Q 4.3
A
Function Up Till Now The transport functions in AUTO mode are monitored. If the transport function
takes longer than the 6 second monitoring time (if a part does not pass through
the light barrier within 6 seconds of its start time), then there is a conveyor belt
fault condition in the system and the conveyor motor is automatically switched
off (logic in FC 16).
Task: The conveyor belt fault conditions in AUTO mode are to be counted. After 3
conveyor belt fault conditions have occurred, the AUTO mode is to be switched
off for safety reasons. To start a new transport function, the fault condition must
be acknowledged (as already programmed) and the AUTO mode must be
switched on once more.
What to Do: 1. In FC 17, in a new network, program the counting of the conveyor belt fault
conditions using the S5 counter C 17 as the count down counter.
- When the "Auto" mode is switched on, the counter is set to 3 (number of
conveyor belt fault conditions until the AUTO mode is switched off)
- The counter counts down 1 every time a conveyor belt fault condition
occurs (M 17.0 = "1").
2. In FC 15 (operator mode section), program the switching off (reset) of the
AUTO mode after three conveyor belt fault conditions.
The AUTO mode must switch off when the counter C 17 has counted down
from 3 to 0 or when its binary state changes from 1 4 0. In FC 15
"FC_Mode", use the bit memory M 15.7 as auxiliary bit memory to record
the negative edge of C 17.

SIEMENS
Additional Exercise 6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor

Jogging
Lock-out
—> time LEFT
Jog RIGHT
I 0.2
Cony motor
RIGHT
(Q8.5)
Lock-out
RIGHT -
T 15 (SF)
Jog LEFT
I 0.3 <—
lock-out
time RIGHT
Cony motor
LEFT
(Q8.6)
Lock-out
LEFT
T 16 (SF)
SIMATIC S7 Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.23
A
r
,
41
10
The Function Jogging In MANUAL mode (Q 4.2 = '), you can jog the conveyor motor to the RIGHT
in FC 16 Up Till Now: and to the LEFT using the simulator momentary contacts I 0.2 and I 0.3.
Task: In order to avoid too great a load change, it should only be possible to jog the
conveyor motor in the opposite direction after it has been jogged to the RIGHT
or to the LEFT after a lock-out time of 2 seconds (see slide). If, for example, the
motor has been jogged to the RIGHT, then it can only be jogged back to the
LEFT after the lock-out time of 2 seconds has expired.
What to Do: 1. In FC 16 program the S5 timers T 15 and T 16 as the lock-out timers

RIGHT and LEFT as OFF Delay (SF). Start T 15 when the jog condition
RIGHT is fulfilled and T 16 when the jog condition LEFT is fulfilled.
2. Interlock the timer states to the jog conditions. The jog condition RIGHT
may only be fulfilled when the lock-out time LEFT is no longer running
(T 16 = '0') and vice versa.
3. Save the modified FC 16 and download it in the CPU
4. Check the modified function "Jog Conveyor" on the conveyor model
Solution Hint: By using a "branch", you can integrate the timers in the two networks Jog
Conveyor RIGHT and Jog Conveyor LEFT as follows:
Editing a branch: "K_C ony_

LEFT"
1. Select the connection where Jog condition
the branch is to be place LEFT
....* T 16
2. click on L* in the Editor toolbar
(Branch) SF
S5T#2s- TV

SIEMENS
Counters: Bit Instructions
LAD FBD
Network 1: C5
0.0 I 0.0 SC
I C5
A 1 0.0
II SC
( ) C#20 CV L C#20
C#20 S C5
Network 2:
I 0.1 C5 C5
I 0.1 CU A 1 0.1
(CU) I
CU C5
Network 3:
I 0.2 C5 C5
A 10.2
(CD) I 10.2 —I CD I CD C5
Network 4:
C5 Q 4.0 Q 4.0
A C5
C5 = Q 4.0
) I I

File: SERV1_10E.24 NtT Automation and Industrial Solutions
Bit Instructions All counter functions can also operate with simple bit instructions. The
similarities and differences between this method and the counter functions
discussed so far are as follows:
• Similarities:
Setting conditions at the "SC" input
- Specification of the counter value
- RLO change at the "CU" input
- RLO change at the "CD" input
• Differences:
- It is not possible to check the current counter value since
there are no Binary (CV) or BCD (CV_BCD) outputs.
- There is no binary output Q in the graphical representation.
Note IEC-compliant counters can also be implemented in STEP 7. The use of

system function blocks for implementing IEC counters is dealt with in an
advanced programming course.

SIEMENS
Timers: Stored ON Delay (SS)

LAD FBD
T4 T4 A 1 0.7
I 0.7 S_ODTS Q8.5 S_ODTS L S5T#35s
II S Q ( ) I 0.7 — S BI MWO SS T4
S5T#35s — TV BI — MW0 S5T#35s — A 1 0.5
TV BCD QW12
Q8.5 R T4
10.5
R BCD — QW12 I 0.5 — R L T4
I I T MWO
LC T4
T QW12
A T4
Q8.5
RLO at S L
RLO at R
Timer
operation
> Example

10
Start The stored-on-delay timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from
"0" to "1". The timer runs, starting with the time value specified at input "TV",
and continues to run even if the signal at input "S" changes back to "0" during
that time.
If the signal at the start input changes from "0" to "1" again while the timer is
still timing down, the timer starts again from the beginning.
Reset When the RLO at reset input "R" changes from "0" to "1", the current time value
and the time base are deleted and output "Q" is reset.
Binary Output The signal state at output "0" changes to "1" when the timer has expired
without error, regardless of whether the signal state at input "S" is still "1".

SIEMENS
Timers: Pulse (SP)

LAD FBD
Els
T4 T4 A 10.7
I 0.7 S_PULSE Q S_PULSE L S5T#35s
(8.5
)
I I 10.7 S BI MWO SP T4
S5T#35s BI — A I 0.5
TV S5T#35s — TV BCD QW12
I 0.5 Q8.5 R T4
R BCD — QW12 I 0.5 — L T4
I I
T MWO
LC T4
T QW12
A T4
Q8.5
RLO at S
RLO at R
Timer
operation
> Example
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 A

‘r
Start The pulse timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1".
Output "Q" is also set to "1".
Reset Output "0" is reset when:

• the timer has expired, or
• the start "S" signal changes from "1" to "0", or
• the reset input "R" has a signal state of "1".

SIEMENS
Timers: Extended Pulse (SE)

LAD FBD
T4 T4 A 1 0.7
10.7
S_PEXT Q8.5 S_PEXT L S5T#35s
SH Q ( ) I 0.7 — S BI MWO SE T4
S5T#35s — Tv BI — MW0 A I 0.5
S5T#35s — TV BCD — QW12
10.5 Q8.5 R T4
R BCD — QW12 I 0.5 R L T4
I I
T MWO
LC T4
T QW12
A T4
Q8.5
RLO at S
RLO at R
Timer
operation
> Example

10
Start The extended pulse timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from
"0" to "1". Output "Q" is also set to "1".
The signal state at output "Q" remains at "1" even if the signal at the "S" input
changes back to "0".
If the signal at the start input changes from "0" to "1" again while the timer is
running, the timer is restarted.
Reset Output "Q" is reset when:

• the timer has expired, or
• the reset input "R" has a signal state of "1".

SIEMENS
Timers: OFF Delay (SF)

LAD FBD
T4 T4
A 1 0.7
I 0.7
S_OFFDT S_OFFDT L S5T#35s
Q8.5
I I S Q ) I 0.7 — S BI —MWO SF T4
S5T#35s - TV BI — mwo A 1 0.5
S5T#35s — TV BCD —QW12
10.5 Q8.5 R T4
R BCD — QW12 I 0.5 — R Q L T4
I I
T MWO
LC T4
T QW12
A T4
Q8.5
RLO at S J
RLO at R
Timer
operation
> Example
7 I-
Start The off-delay timer starts when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "1" to
"0". When the timer has expired, the signal state at output "0" changes to "0".
If the signal state at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1" while the timer is
running, the timer stops. The next time the signal state at the "S" input changes
from "1" to "0", it starts again from the beginning.
Reset When the RLO at reset input "R" is "1", the current time value and the time
base are deleted and output "Q" is reset.
If both inputs (S and R) have signal states of "1", output "Q" is not set until the
dominant reset is deactivated.
Binary Output Output "Q" is activated when the RLO at the "S" input changes from "0" to "1". If
input "S" is deactivated, output "Q" continues to have signal state of "1" until the
programmed time has expired.

SIEMENS
Time Formats for Traditional S5-Timers in STEP 7
S5T#35s200ms
Time specifications as constants
(Time base: 01 (100ms), Number of units of time: 352)
01 3 5 2
Time specifications per variable x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Time base Units of time (BCD-coded)
29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 2°
Accu 1 contents after "L T..." exec x x x x x x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Residual units of time (Integer)
01 3 5 2
Accu 1 cont. after "LC T..." exec. x x 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
I
I
Time base Residual units of time (BCD-coded)

File: SERV1_10E.29 IV Automation and Industrial Solutions
10
Time Specification Time values can be fixed and are specified as time constants. The permissible
range in which the time values are found ranges from S5T#10ms to
S5T#2h46m30sOms.
Variable times can be specified using variables (such as memory words or data
words) containing the S5TIME data type. The user must make sure that the
appropriate time base and the number of units of time, as shown in the slide,
are stored in the variable in his program.
Time Base The time base defines the interval at which the number of units of time is to be
decremented by one unit when the timer runs. Bits 12 and 13 of the variable
must contain the time base as a binary-coded number:
Time base 0 (bit 13 = 0, bit 12 = 0) = 10 ms

Time base 1 (bit 13 = 0, bit 12 = 1) = 100ms
Time base 2 (bit 13 = 1, bit 12 = 0) = 1s
Time base 3 (bit 13 = 1, bit 12 = 1) = 10s
Units of Time The number of units of time must be specified as a BCD-coded number. When
the number of units of time are multiplied by the time base, this results in the
desired time value. The range from 1 to 999 is possible. When there is a time
specification using a constant (S5T#...), the system automatically uses the
smallest possible time base and the number of units of time.
L / B1 At output "BI" or with the instruction "L T..." , the residual time value (number
of units of time) of the timer is queried as an integer without time base.
LC / BCD At output "BCD" or with the instruction "LC T..." , the residual time value
(number of units of time) of the timer is queried as a BCD-coded number with
the time base in Bit 12 and 13.

SIEMENS
Timers: Bit Instructions

LAD FBD
Network 1:
I 0.0 T4
A 10.0
(SD) L S5T#5s
S5T#5s SD T4
Network 2:
T4 8.0
A T4
= Q 8.0
Network 3:
I 0.1 A I 0.1
R T4
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 111

.,Z
Bit Instructions All timer functions can also be started with simple bit instructions. The
similarities and differences between this method and the timer functions
discussed so far are as follows:
• Similarities:
- Start conditions at the "S" input
- Specification of the time value
- Reset conditions at the "R" input
Signal response at output "Q"
• Differences for LAD and FBD:
- It is not possible to check the current time value (there are no "BI" and
"BCD" outputs).

SIEMENS
Conversion Operations 14 DI 4 REAL
Data in integer format

(16-bit integer)
> Task
11> Conversion from
integer to
double integer
i=>
Conversion from
double integer
to real number
Math
program
with
real numbers
B
EN
I Dl
OUT — MD14
EP
D DI R
MW12 ENO EN OUT — MD26

IN
LAD MD14 IN ENO
---
4.,5—
11)1 DIR
EN ENO EN ENO —
MW12 — IN OUT — MD14 MD14— IN OUT — MD26
11 SITRAIN
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_10E.31 qv Training for
Application Basically, arithmetic operations can only process values of the same data type.
Therefore, there are operations with which integer values (I or DI) can be
converted into real values (R) and vice versa.
I_DI (in STL: ITD) converts a 16-bit integer (I) into a 32-bit double integer (DI)
DI_R (in STL: DTR) converts a 32-bit double integer (DI) into a floating-point number (R)
Other Conversion
Operations are discussed in one of the advanced programming courses:
INV _I (INVI) Inverts an integer (I)
(formation of the ones complement)
NEG _I (NEGI) Negates (sign reversal) an integer (I)
(formation of the twos complement)
TRUNC (TRUNC) Conversion R - DI: cut off after decimal positions
ROUND (RND) Conversion R - Dl: round
CEIL (RND+) Conversion R 4 DI: general rounding up
FLOOR (RND-) Conversion R - DI: general rounding down
INV_DI (INVD) Inverts a double integer (DI)
(formation of the ones complement)
NEG_DI (NEGD) Negates (sign reversal) a double integer (DI)
(formation of the twos complement)
NEG_R / NEGR Negates (sign reversal) a floating-point number (R)

SIEMENS
Digital Logic Operations
WX0R_W L IW 0
WORW
L W#16#5F2A
WAN D_W
AW / OW / XOW
EN ENO-
T MW10
IWO IN1
OUT MW10 15 0
W#16#5F2A IN2
IWO = 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
W#16#5F2A = 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
AND OR XOR
MW10 after "AW" ex. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
MW10 after "OW" ex. 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
MW10 after "XOW" 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

El

File: SERV1_10E.32 gtr Automation and Industrial Solutions
WAND_W The "AND Word" operation gates the two digital values at inputs IN1 and IN2
bit by bit in accordance with the AND truth table. The result of the AND
operation is stored at the address at output OUT.
The instruction is executed when EN = 1.
Example: Masking out the 4th decade of the thumbwheel buttons :
IW4= = 0100 0100 1100 0100
W#16#OFFF =0000 1111 1111 1111
MW30 = 0000 0100 1100 0100
WOR_W The "OR Word" operation gates the two digital values at inputs IN1 and IN2 bit
by bit in accordance with the OR truth table. The result of the OR operation is
stored at the address at output OUT.
The instruction is executed when EN = 1.
Example: Setting bit 0 in MW32 :
MW32 =0100 0010 0110 1010
W#16#0001 = 0000 0000 0000 0001
MW32 = 0100 0010 0110 1011
WXOR_W The "Exclusive OR Word" operation gates the two digital values at inputs IN1
and IN2 bit by bit in accordance with the XOR truth table. The result of the OR
operation is stored at the address at output OUT. The result of the XOR
operation is stored at the address at output OUT.
The instruction is executed when EN=1.
Example: detecting signal changes in IWO :
IWO = 0100 0100 1100 1010
MW28 = 0110 0010 1011 1001
MW24 =0010 0110 0111 0011

SIEMENS
Application Example: Digital Edge Detection

LAD STL HID - [FC28 -- Myproject_C3S8\Cfl_digital_operek„ ,jizg25.1
J. Fie Edit Insert PLC Debug Options Window Help __Jinja'
D*1:1-11:11 Pi A IiiblIMI ''''Ll ''- Lkiliii 2al
-
''' I 1 I !I IrlIggl _rj *Iii-i-oriL P1----1 A I
Contents Of: tnvironmentUnterface'
E 0 Interface I _ ti*" H
FC28 : Application ExesTle: Digital Edge Detection fl
Network 1: positive edge detection (16 Bit(
L TW 0
L MW 220
%OW
L TW 0
AW
T MW 222
Network 2: negatiw edge detection (16 Bit(
L MW 220
L 1W 0
XCW
L MW 220
AW
T MA 224
Network 3: raving
L 1W 0
T MW 220
211 2.f.:1
Press Fl to get Help. E431--
0 keine iAbs <5.2 'W3 in 1 4
4
SIMATIC S7
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: 18.09.2009
Date: SERV1_10E.33 Automati on and Industrial Solutions
10
General The program example displayed in the slide implements a logic for detecting a
signal change of 16 binary digits (edge detection for 16 bit) using digital word
instructions.
Network 1 For the detection of a positive edge detection, that is, the detection of a signal
change from 0 4 1, it suffices to carry out a digital AND operation of the
change pattern (MW 220) with the new signal states (IW 0).
Network 2 If only the 1 4 changes are to be detected, a digital AND operation of the
change pattern with the old signal states is to be carried out.
Network 3 Save the old states so that the signal state change can be detected.

SIEMENS
Introduction to PROFIBUS DP and HMI (1)
SNAIL-. PANEL
TA
PROFIBUS DP
r
"" S TRAIN
1 Training for
CPI
-.T., Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Objectives ........................................................................................................................................ 2
Structure of a PROFIBUS DP System ...... 3
Configuring a PROFIBUS DP Master System ...... 4 11
Configuring Compact and Modular DP Slaves 5
Exercise 1: Configuring the DP System (ET 200S) ...... 6
Control and Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI ...... 7
Communication between SIMATIC S7 and the HMI System ...... 8
Configuring Phase, Downloading Phase and Process Control Phase ...... 9
WinCC flexible 10
Touchpanel: Setting the Interface for the Project Transfer 11
HW Config: Setting the Runtime Interface 12
WinCC flexible — Configuration Tool 13
Input and Output Fields .................................................................................................................. 14
Buttons ............................................................................................................................................ 15
Defining the Connection to the Controller ....................................................................................... 16
Transfer Settings in WinCC flexible 17
Exercise 2: Setting the Touchpanel Interface for Transfer 18
Exercise 3: Switching the PG Interface to PROFIBUS DP ............................................................. 19
Exercise 4: Checking the PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................ 20
Exercise 5: Checking the RT Interface of the WinCC flexible Station 21
Exercise 6: Checking the Connection to the Controller ................................................................... 22
Exercise 7: Transferring the WinCC flexible Project into the Touchpanel ....................................... 23
Exercise 8: Testing the WinCC flexible Project ................................................................................ 24
Exercise 9: Testing the WinCC flexible Buttons .............................................................................. 25
If You Want to Know More .............................................................................................................. 26
PROFIBUS - DP Terminating Resistor .......................................................................................... 27
Segment Length Depending on the Baud Rate ............................................................................. 28
PROFIBUS Connector ..................................................................................................................... 29
Preparing a Fast Connect Cable ................................................................................................... 30
Installing PROFIBUS-DP Slaves Later On 31

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Introduction to HMI and PROFIBUS DP (1)
SIEMENS
Objectives
be familiar with the use of PROFIBUS DP
be familiar with the WinCC flexible software
be able to set the interface of the TP 170B touch panel
be able to download a project to the TP170B touch panel
be familiar with the principle of interfacing the touch panel via tags

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.2 44! Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Structure of a PROFIBUS DP System
Master
PS S7 S7
10A PS S7-300 S7-300 S7
S7-400 S7-300
CPU CP
314 342-
5 DP
PROFIBUS -DP
ET 200M
SIMATIC S7-300
P S7 S7 ST S7
S7
SI
Slaves CP STAND.
DP
342-
SLAVE
5 DP
Compact Slaves Modular Slave

Intelligent Slave
STAND.
DP
SLAVE

Overview The units installed in the field for automating technical processes, such as
sensors, actuators, transducers and drives more and more make use of field
bus systems for exchanging information with the higher-level controller units.
PROFIBUS is an established fieldbus system which can be used by all 11
automation equipment, such as PLCs, PCs, Human-Machine Interfaces as well
as actuators and sensors, for exchanging data.
PROFIBUS-DP PROFIBUS-DP is a protocol optimized for speed which was specially designed
for communication between PLCs (DP masters) and distributed I/Os (DP
slaves).
PROFIBUS-DP is a low-cost, flexible substitute for transmission of signals on
cumbersome parallel 24V and 20mA lines.
PROFIBUS-DP is based on DIN 19245 Part 1 and the user-specific extensions
in DIN 19245 Part 3. In the course of the European fieldbus standardization
process, PROFIBUS-DP was integrated into the European fieldbus standard
EN 50170.
Master Devices PROFIBUS makes a distinction between master and slave devices. The
PROFIBUS masters are in charge of data traffic on the bus. A master can send
messages without being requested to do so, provided it is in possession of the
token that entitles it to access the bus. Masters are also referred to as active
nodes in the PROFIBUS protocol.
Slave Devices PROFIBUS slaves are simple I/O devices, such as actuators, sensors,
transducers, etc. They do not receive the token, that is, they can only
acknowledge the receipt of messages or send messages (data) to a master on
request. Slaves are also referred to as passive nodes.

SIEMENS
Configuring a PROFIBUS DP Master System

Properties - PROFIBUS interface DP (R0/52.1)
Ration 0dlt I insert PLC View Options Window He
D rer 2 , Insert Oblect...,

Replace object..
61 Mimi I in' lel Gennd Parameters
:: Address:
1 57_300_
Master System
Highest address.. 126
Transmission rate 1.5 Mbps

CPU 315-2 DP
r DP Subnet:
DI3240C24V
5 D0321rDC24V/0.54
6 DIEVDO8k24V/0.5A
7 Al2x12Bit
8
9
Gonad Network Salligs

J (0) UR
♦
Nana IPROFIDUS_TikSERV1
Slot Module 0. Fi M. 0 Comment
0
OK 57 subret 00 .-0013
173r
tal Project path IMy_Prciact \PROFIDULTIILSEFIV1
HW Eonfig - S7_300_5E/Rion
Stowe location
Stature Edt Insert PLC Options Window Help — al Ms pined IDA57_CournisM4y_Prop
Dc32- 11 %I& -
TP- i8I It It? &Atm
:.157_300_SIatoon (Configuration) SERVI _L Data croaked 113/12/2006 0121146N

Last ramified 10/12/21336 0121146PM
Comment Sorple OP-Master:yawn will DP-Staves f T2005 and Mms,nuoter
MI4420
A
2 CPU 315-2 DP
PROFIBUS_T1ASERV1• DP roaster :yawn

0
DIINDC24V
c24V/0.54 Result
D113/D09r24V/115A OK I
7 Al2s1261
_Z
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 'SITRAIN Training for
Distributed I/O All master systems consisting of a DP master and DP slaves that are connected
using a bus cable and that communicate via the PROFIBUS-DP protocol are
designated as distributed I/Os.
DP Master As DP master you can install:

• S7-CPU with integrated DP master interface (such as CPU 414-2, etc.)
• CP in connection with a CPU (such as CP 443-5, etc.)
Setting Up DP Master To configure a master system, proceed as follows:

1. Select the PROFIBUS interface X2 of your CPU and insert a master system
(Menu Insert - Master System)
2. The dialog box "Properties - PROFIBUS interface DP" is opened. In this
dialog you can define the following properties:
• set up a new PROFIBUS subnet or open an existing one
• set the properties of the PROFIBUS subnet (baud rate, etc.).
• define the PROFIBUS address of the DP master.
3. Acknowledge the settings with "OK". The following symbol appears:
-■= 1=b1. for the DP master system. This symbol is used as a
"hanger " for the DP slaves.

HW Config - [S7_300_5tation (Configuration) -- SUM _L] .=_11312E.I
011 Station Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help JJJ
,
I Cirg" 1-u
elfalillIMIIIIIII■111111■111111111
End
2 CPU
1 315
Bode: 'Standard
- PROFIBUS_TIA SERVI DP master system DI
3
El {_j ET 2005P
4 DI32xDC24V
2 c3 ET 2011
5 D032.0C24V/0.5A
E a1 ET 200M
6 D18/008x24V/0.54
7 Al2:42Bit
p-[] ET 200mo
E {23 ET 2008
ET 2005
E ET 2005 Compact 16DI/16DC
10
E ET 200S Compact 32DI
11
Ifi to IM151-1 Basic
E 84151-1 FO Standard
E 11.1151-1 FO Standaid
*1.1(0) UR E 114151-1 FO Standard
E 114151-1 HE
sid 3 Rolle -41
' 111111 E 114151.1 HF
1
2 II CPU 315-2 DP SES7V1.2 2
.
,1/4..7 3 DP 1023 ern Oa Not we VW 0.••• *NY. .1020
3 octs.• r • apt alb CMS It?
4 D132x C24V 6Es7
5 D032xDC24V/0.54 6ES7 DP Slave
6 D18/D0&24V/0 54 6E57 88 88 41
I
••••Cvl,
7 Al2x1213it 6E57 t•
6E57 151-1 oonottwxiie
8 Interface ne I 0.90•4.,113.
9 I electrorec n 7 At.W#A.
10 communica

1111
j.:.OJPI 111150 5.100
led.. please.
'71
los.• 0.16•••
Configure rack like central hardware 1,1y sr

• -•■ WV ST
Ri571714117030. •0 113
.7
wotw sew
e coowon t sr 3s(m•wo 40 e 3
0 I
.0'1 wren*.

likr Automation and Industrial Solutions
DP Slaves • Modules with integrated digital/analog inputs and outputs

(compact DP slaves, such as ET200B).
• Interface modules with assigned S5 or S7 modules
(modular DP slaves, such as ET200M, ET 200S). 11
• S7-200/300 stations with modules that support the "Intelligent Slave"
function (such as CPU 215-DP, CPU 315-2).
Selecting DP Slaves To configure a DP slave, proceed as follows:

1. From the "Hardware Catalog" select the desired compact DP slave (such as
ET200B) or the interface module (such as IM151-1 Standard for ET200S) for
a modular slave.
2. Drag the symbol (such as IM151-1 Standard for ET200S) onto the symbol for
the master system: .■= .1=1.h
The dialog box "Properties — PROFIBUS interface DP" is opened. Here you
can set the following properties:
• properties of the PROFIBUS subnet (baud rate, etc.).
• the PROFIBUS address of the DP slave.
3. Acknowledge the settings with "OK". A configuration table is attached to
the symbol (icon) that represents the I/O configuration of the compact
slave or the rack of the modular slave.
4. For a modular DP slave, you now insert the desired modules from the
"Hardware Catalog" into the configuration table.
The addressing and parameter assignment of the modules is then handled
similar to the configuration of the centrally inserted modules.

SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Configuring the DP System (ET 200S)

Config - [S7_300_Station (Configuration) — SERVO _U ,_111
:1 2cJ
WI Station Edit (Insert PLC View Options Window Help
. 2,
D lair Insert Object...
Replace Object
led I ID Oe I
PROFIIJET 10 System Find:

CPU
PROFIBUS(1) I
- Profile: I Standard
I
4 D132)0 C24V iIM151 -1 FO Standard . -1
'
5 0032xDC24V/0.5A 1 IM151-1 HF
6 D18/1)08a4V/0.5A F 1 IM151 -1 HF
7 Al2x12Bit IM151-1 Standard
8 E TN 1M151 -1 Standard < .......1
9 1 +, AI
10 El 0 AO
.
41 El a cP
q-ca DI
3..0 DO
110±.1 (4) IM151-1 Standard
. Pack Addresses 1 F-R0 24V..2301/5A
200 AC24..230V/1A
Slot f Module Order Number I Address 0 Address '
200 DC24V/0,54 HF
1 PM-E DC24V 6E S7 138-4CAOCI-CIAA0
MO DC24V/0.5A HF
4D1 DC24V ST 6E57 131-413D00-0AA0 eH 23
200 DC24V/0,5A ST
401 DC24V ST BEST 131-413000-00AD e4 87 I 200 DC24V/0,5A ST
4 400 DC241//01,54 ST 6E97 132-413ND-045J) 8.0...8.3 ,nn nriavoe wr
5 4D0 D124V/0,54 ST 6ES7 132-Q000-0AM 8.4...8.7 41 ■
6
7
6E S7 151-1AAG2-0ABO tS
Interface module IM151-1 for ET 2005
li
r electronic modules, send capability for diect
data exchange

File: SERV1_11E.6 'IT Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task You are to commission the DP system for your training unit so that the conveyor
model can be controlled using the ET 200 S when you have the same
functionality, without having to modify the S7 program.
What to Do 1. Expand the existing configuration to include the distributed (remote) station
ET 200S (additional connection possibility for the conveyor model).
Notes: Insert the PROFIBUS DP master system as follows:
OFF ON Select the DP interface of the CPU - Menu Insert - Master System -
New...
64
32 To connect the ET200S, use the mouse to drag the interface module IM151
from the module catalog to the master system (see slide)
16
8 2. On the IM 151-1's address switches, set the Slave Address to 4
4 (see slide left) and check the PROFIBUS cabling
2 Note: Changes to the slave address only take effect after Power ON/OFF!
3. Change the addresses of the mixed DI/DO module in the URO Universal
Rack to IB 88 and QB 88.
4. For the input and output addresses in the ET200 S, configure the addresses
IB 8 and QB 8.
Note: So that the 8 channels of a module are located in one byte, you have to
pack the addresses. To do so, select both modules and then click on "Pack
Addresses" (see slide)
4. Connect the conveyor model to the interface of the ET200S.
5. After "Save and Compile" download the configuration into the CPU.
6. Verify that the configuration is error-free. The error LEDs — Group error (SF)
and bus error (BUSF) must be dark on the CPU.
7. Test the program you have created up until now. Everything should work as
before.

SIEMENS
Control and Monitoring with SIMATIC HMI
Process
Visualization System
SIMATIC WinCC
SIMATIC Panels
WinCC flexible 2005 or •'
ProTool I Pro
ZUr. '...z.111 E.,

WinCC
SIEMENS
200. 5moms...A lighrtt men.
c.1wIndowIllssern•A0actsysem astall 0.5000.0 b7755c5619315089•malsall

File: SERV1 11E.7 RV.' Automation and Industrial Solutions
Overview With SIMATIC HMI, there is a field-proven HMI system for user-friendly process
control and monitoring available for the SIMATIC S7. The products range from
simple text display to the process visualization system.
SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI are completely harmonized and integrated. This 11
greatly simplifies the use of the SIMATIC HMI control and monitoring system.
• The SIMATIC S7 has already integrated HMI services. The HMI system
requests process data from the SIMATIC S7. Data transmission between
SIMATIC S7 and SIMATIC HMI is handled by the two operating systems
and does not have to be taken care of by the user.
SIMATIC HMI systems can be connected directly to PPI (S7-200) and MPI,
i.e., PROFIBUS (S7-300 and S7-400) and Industrial Ethernet, i.e.,
PROFINET. A networking via PROFIBUS or Industrial Ethernet, i.e.,
PROFINET makes the process control and monitoring possible even over
greater distances and to several controllers.
• Numerous features from the uniform data base and symbols to the same
user-friendly Windows-oriented user interface make it easy to use HMI
systems.

SIEMENS
Communication between SIMATIC S7 and the HMI System
-dom isno._
wopro • MPI
SIEMENS SIMATIC PANEL
• PROFIBUS DP
fr4N/ • Industrial Ethernet
Trahrig for
Automata" and Crives
Update n
Press key "set bit"

Man 008000
Let go of key "reset bit"

Confirm "Wens.ledge
• •••
Fault
Re screen

a
gltr
i SITRAIN Training for
Tag Process tags are used to make the data exchange between SIMATIC S7 and the
HMI system. Tags are created in the configuration with WinCC flexible and are
assigned to a CPU data area for this. The HMI system cyclically reads out the
tag values and displays them in an output field, for example.
Data Areas In the configuration of tags, the following CPU data areas - global tags - can be
used:
• Data blocks (DB)
• Bit memories (M)
Inputs (I) and Outputs (Q)
Peripheral input (PI) and Peripheral output (PQ)
• Timers (T) and Counters (C)
HMI systems also recognize local tags without process connection. That is, these
tags are processed exclusively internally and do not require any communication
resources.
Communication The operator panels can communicate with the PLC using the MPI or
PROFIBUS DP or Industrial Ethernet bus systems. The S7 protocol is used here.
Communication is organized through the S7 CPU and HMI system operating
systems. User programming on the S7 is therefore not necessary.
An operator panel can exchange data with several PLCs simultaneously.
Updating Data transfer between SIMATIC S7 and the HMI system takes place cyclically.
That is, process tags are cyclically read and written depending on the configured
update times.

SIEMENS
Configuring Phase, Downloading Phase and Process Control Phase
Configuring phase Transfer Process control phase

(Offline)
PC/PG
WinCC flexible
PC/OP/TP
Configuration Configuration
data data
Flash Flash
Source file
<Name>.hmi
Ethernet I MPI
DP
1111 PROJECT]..hmi PLC

PROJECT_i_log.LDF
A
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_118.9
4,1 SITRAIN Training for
Introduction You configure your project on a PC or programming device (PG). You then
generate the configuration under WinCC flexible and download it to the
PC/OP/TP.
If the PC/OP/TP is connected to the PLC, the PC/OP/TP displays the current 11
values in the tags and graphics. The three phases of working with the
configuration data are shown in the slide.
Configuring The configuring process consists of various partial steps:
1. Defining the PLC and the type of connection (MPI, PROFIBUS DP,
Industrial Ethernet etc.)
2. Making general settings for the PC/OP/TP (defining the current
connections etc.)
3. Generating objects such as tags, screens, messages etc.
4. Downloading (transferring) the generated database to the HMI system via
MPI, PROFIBUS DP, or Industrial Ethernet
The configuration is stored in source files in your S7 project (Directory

...\HmiEs). In the compiling phase, a file of the type fwx is created which is later
transferred to the target device
• <Name>.fwx for Windows-based HMI systems
Editors WinCC flexible includes a set of editors (tools) for configuring the different types
of objects. You create each object under a symbolic name. You must specify
this symbolic name time and again, for example, when creating, editing,
referencing or deleting the object.

SIEMENS
WinCC flexible
Advanced
Advanced Demo
- Complete functional scope
Standard - Limited to a max. 30 days
Compact
*) Options *) Options *) Options
Micro
• R PIM
. .......
SIMATIC PANEL SIMATIC PANEL SIMATIC PANEL PC - based

Micro 70 / 170 270 / 370 Windows 2000
Windows XP

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_11E.10 'IC Automation and Industrial Solutions
WinCC flexible The Engineering System (ES) is the software with which you carry out all the
Engineering System necessary configuring tasks in order to create an interface for controlling and monitoring
machines and systems.
Editions The Engineering System of WinCC flexible is modularly graded into different editions.
The edition determines which operator panels of the SIMATIC HMI spectrum can be
configured.
With each higher edition, a wider range of target devices and functions is supported. The
configuration data is compatible.
Micro: Configuring the micro panels
Compact: Configuring the micro panels and panels of the 70 and 170 series
Standard: Configuring all panels (micro panels, panels of the 70/170/270 and 370
series)
Advanced: Configuring the PC-based and all other panels (micro panels, panels of the
70/170/270/370 series and PC Runtime)
Advanced Demo:Test version limited to 30 days
Changing the With the WinCC flexible Compact edition and above, you can change to a higher
WinCC flexible Edition WinCC flexible edition with a "Powerpack".
Runtime WinCC flexible Runtime (RT) is the software for process visualization on the operator
panel. With Runtime, you execute the project during process operation.
The various panels already come delivered with operating system and the appropriate
Rutime version. Possible, additionally required Runtime components are loaded along
with the project onto the panel.
Options Both components can be expanded through Options (licenses).

The options depend on the target system used. An operator panel that doesn't support a
specific functionality also cannot use the associated option.

SIEMENS
Touchpanel: Setting the Interface for the Project Transfer

Loader V07.01.01.00_01.34
Transfer PROFIBUS •K X
Panel is the only master on bus
Language Ccrweycr M+420

1=1 Start
Control
— Station Parameters
Address:
( Panel Time-out: 1 s
Eft Yew NetworkParameters

61
1.5 Mbits/s
Transmission Rate:
Cigira.nc. Ls ikftrrik
a Highest Station: 126
Profile: DP
Pe2knal 57-Trrnir., Screw&wet
Settrcs Sett,C5
Bus Parameters...
Transfer Settings
Channel I Directories 1
Channel 1:
S7-Transfer Settings MEI
Serial:via R5232 /Zero Modern Cable MPI
,
F.Enable Channel Remote Control Profibus
Channel 2:
I MFVProtibus Properties...
Enable Channel F.; Remote Control advanced

It"
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_11E. 1 1
Transfer Settings The interface of the TP170B must be set up for the project transfer.
These settings are only relevant for downloading the project, not for later
communication between panel and controller during the process control phase.
The interface parameters necessary for this are defined with WinCC flexible 11
within the project.
Channel: In addition to the serial transfer channel (Channel 1), a

second channel (Channel 2) can be selected for
downloading the project onto the operator panel.
Remote Control: The loading of the WinCC flexible project can be triggered
without first having to manually exit Runtime. The panel
automatically exits Runtime and switches to the Transfer
mode.
Advanced: Setting of transmission parameters for MPI or PROFIBUS
DP.

SIEMENS
HW Config: Setting the Runtime Interface

jI
31JJ
I
Y
SIMATIC Manager-[My_Project-- D:\S7_Kurse\SERV1 _L]
JJxJ
O My_Projett Object name Symbolic name Type
E S7300_Station Ilk Configuration MR" &ion ntiguration
E g TP170B_Color flexible RT
HW Config - [TPI70B_Color (Configuration) -- My_Projeitt
Mk Station Edit Insert PLC View Options Wndow Help JJJ
k% a gAermiligm annisav
03 (0) HMI
General I AssignmeM I Reserve LSAPs Diegrosties I

I
Shen Description: HMI MPI/DP
Satraute fa any PROF1BUS nodule, S7 coroebsint. DP mast.. DP A

tsve. PG functions, SIMATIC NET CD 7/2001 SP4
Order No.:
*1011(0) HMI Name:
Interface
Index Module Order numb
Type IPROFIBUS
Addis=
Netweiked Yes
Comment

rcei
Ca Help

•,lh0
1 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_11E.12 a
Communication For a WinCC flexible project that is integrated in STEP7, the interface
Settings parameters (address and network) are set up with the HW Config tool — as
shown in the slide. With the parameters set here, the panel will later
communicate with the controller or controllers during Runtime or during the
process control phase.
For WinCC flexible projects not integrated in STEP7, these parameters are
defined with WinCC flexible in the configuration of the "Connections" (see
following pages).
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
WinCC flexible - Configuration Tool

_,..D212s1
En•Kt tAt IP. PPP Fp•P PAPP*. 4own, PIndo• niece
-
• 111 le7 - 1:,0 ti n:. I 4
704 70
II • fi, • •
•
•
• 11=2_ COP:- •
i•eiC4 •
l
SIEMENS
It *•
E s TP17CEL.Colot(TP 1708 mice/ Simple Objects
E 17=3 Samna
4 Add Screen SIMATIC PANEL] / Line
Template PolylMe
Conveys,
HM420 Cis Polygon
Training tor Ellipse
0 Stan
Automation and Drives
▪ !rst Communication 3 Circle
Tops ▪ Rectangle
Cennetrions ........ si[B1111M•11111 111 •••11gr i,
Sae Cycler
El Text Field
▪ Aisne hlamgement
•
........ Editor.SeCtion ............ff Ei 10 Field
P IR
1/4 Analog Akins
Discrete Alum
w (Work Area) ............ K
..................
Date-Time Field
.""""" 11 :11 • 11 - 1.0 WWI! •- : El Graphic 10Field
E Seaga
• Recipes
Symbolic 10 Field
• Teri and Graphics Ltels Q Graphic. Mee
• Airtime Wet Admevreation NI Button
Deese Seems ▪ Switch
-
S ti Language Settings
S Inroad Languages EU I .
Graphics
Propel Teets
• •Direonaner
Shretures
g Varian Managernent
; Properties *
General "" "" . .....
la Properties
..... nhanced Objects
—
• _it Tim • • t•gop I Derajitien

L!) 11:242107 Gerold The device TP170B_Cobi Lsdated
Y ebrecthereto
elete it.

Activating For projects integrated in STEP7, WinCC flexible can be started directly from
the SIMATIC Manager.
After software installation, the engineering tool starts with an initial start screen. 11
The most important windows are opened.
Project Window The project window is the central switching position for configuration. All
components and all available configuration editors of a project are displayed in
the project window in the form of a tree structure and can be opened from
there. Each Editor has an icon assigned to it through which you can identify the
associated objects. Only elements that are supported by the selected operator
panel are displayed in the project window. In this window, you have access to
the operator panel's device settings, the language support and the version
administration.
Work Area The work area is the central configuring area in which the objects of the
operator panel are edited using the editor that has been started. Several editors
can be open at the same time.
Properties Window In the Properties window, you edit the properties of selected objects (such as,
the properties of screens, screen objects, tags). The Properties window is only
available in those editors where object properties have to be set.
Tool Window The Tool window contains all configurable objects that can be configured in
screens and it also enables the access to libraries.
Task Window The Task window displays all engineering system messages that are created
when generating a project, for example.

SIEMENS
Input and Output Fields
eroject Ede View Insert Format Faceplates gicitions Window Help

New ■ ■?" (4 1
^ $.;; . .Uri ‘i•
English (United States) Tahoma •••• 8 v / U
6-f (cc _Conveyor

PRO1 SIEMENS SIMATIC PAL,
El es Touchpanel(TP 1778 6" R _
Screens Simple Objects
a Add Screen A
0 Template A TextField
0 Conveyor I Jog ±-tatiodl:_ctatiod2 Stait:on IO Field
❑ MM420 left
Date-Time Field
0 Start
- Communication
Tags Enhanced Objects
Connections Man ,- 000000
Cycles LI PRO1 7
7,177.191F7
Alarm Management • Touchpanel _ M_MM420_0n_HMI M 40.0
.
UAnalog Alarms Communicatior - M_System_OFF_HMI M 30.1
Enter — ackn
k',.1 Discrete Alarms -e:t Tags - M_System_ON_HMI M 30.0
Settings • 81, My Project MW_ACT MW 20
E - Recipes _5ETP MW 22
it 1/4 Reports • General
ft rt.' Text and Graphics L Properties New
10. Animations Mode [Outpu
Et Runtime User Admin
ff) V" Device Settings Format pattern
mm mmm .....
ki Language Settings 4■4
Project Languages Tag MW_ACT !999999
m m
T: Graphics • mmmmmmmm
Output i.

RC
I/O Field Mode Tag values are displayed through output fields. The values of tags can also be
specified through input/output fields using a screen keyboard. The mode can be
set in the Properties window as shown in the slide.
Format Type With Format Type you define in which format the value of the tag is to be
displayed.
Tag In the field Tag you define from which WinCC flexible tag the value in the I/O
Field is to be displayed or specified.
The WinCC flexible tag is, as a rule, linked to a variable of the S7 controller.
However, it can also be an internal tag that is not linked to a variable of the S7
controller and that merely serves to store values within the HMI device.

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Buttons
WinCC flexible Advanced - My_Project - Touchpanel
erem of mew Insert Format Faceplates Qptions Mnclow
New rat .
English (Unked States) v Tahoma No 1 8 No
( (Cc oaveyor
ler PRO1
Touchpanel(TP 1776 6"
e
.... Simple Objects
Screens
A
-11 Add Screen Jog Graphics View
Template right
0 Conveyor Button
MM420 switch
0 Start
...-
Enhanced Objects
Communication
Tags Graphics
Connections
- jud PRO1
Cycles ack
IS Touchpanel M_Conv_Fault M 17.0
Alarm Management Lau
1E1 /3. Communicatior M_Conv Jog_LEFT_HMI M 30.3
RA Analog Alarms
Tags M_Conv Jog_RIGHT_HMI M 30.2
EA Discrete Alarms
My_Project _MiA_Accept_HMI M 30.5
• r Settings MIA_Mode5elect_HMI M 30.4
Recipes
+ , Reports
Or Events 7>>
> New
r_ Text and Graphics L I CI
ak, ail• •
+ 2 Runtime User Admin
It Press ti=>SetBit
+ Device Settings
• *MA&
,= 4 Language Settings
• Tag I InOutj Conv3og_RIGHT,EIMI t
• Activate w.
Project Languages
2 crio function>
Fif Graphics
output

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1 ji1E.15
Buttons The operator can use buttons to initiate system functions such as the selection
of a screen or the setting of a tag as shown in the slide.
Through the "Events" of a button, you define in which event which system
function is to be executed. 11
Variable If the selected system function is executed with a WinCC flexible tag, this tag
must be specified.
The WinCC flexible tag is, as a rule, linked to an S7 controller variable. It could,
however, also be an internal tag that is not linked to an S7 controller variable,
but is simply used to store values within the HMI device.

SIEMENS
Defining the Connection to the Controller

fi'VrAnCE flexible 2005 Advanced - My_Project - TP170B_Color ,j11
:1 <I
_.
erniect Lclit Yew Insert Dern& Fapeplates gptions Jndow Help
:)-- New • kW ig In • - la ' 1 ■., 1) “ Y:. 1 4 1 In . 1 Iii 43. H. IC.-, J . i se ?.. 7:,..
i iEnosh (United States) J.
I.PRO
oip 0 start 0 m,-;:: .sy.......... ci o e
TP171:8_Colagl. 1708
i J J ''-', r_.:i'l rj _1 _1_7j
-
C
r:1 J
tt Screens
-2 Add Screen FIE. ornmunication driver artner
zjMIMI
1....1:1 Template =111.=;
PEI Conveyor
II .....Uun_I On :ISIMA17C 57 3001400 L•illiy_Project15... •• CPU 315-2 DP DP °n
:1 :1
1.... In MM420
, ,..-1:1 Stan
al!Communication I 4I I I.1
I ,.-- tle Tags
Comadions 2xL miet"s Area pointer
I ,*--S--110 Cycles
1
8 NI Mem Management
VI Analog Alan= TP 1708 color Babe)
EA Discrete Alarms "—,...
.„-.-.—
Interface
* v. Settings
= 'HMI 11.1iDmi
Fr.: .. Recipes ........■
Ir- Text and Graphics Li
B ti4 Rtmline User Admini
E tz Devkits Settings HMI device Network PLC device
B Language Settings
Type Baud rate
O Languages Profie I, Address
! it Graphics 0 TTY A
1500000 •
'. r - e Project
i 01.4 Dictionaries
Terns 0 R5232
Address F -
Highest station acldress (RSA) Expansion slot
r----
EP % Sbuptuies 0 R5422 77, Rack
Eli ro Version Management 0 R5485 Access Pant CitaINE
C) %nett El Orly master on the bus Hurter of masters 7 0 Cyck operation
II ■
-
1
7 A Objects

,,r Automation and Industrial Solutions
Creating Connections With the configuring of the connection(s), the communication partners of the
operating panel are defined with which the Runtime exchanges data in the later
process control phase.
For WinCC flexible projects integrated in STEP7, connections to partners
(controllers) are merely created here. The addresses of the operator panel and
the S7 controller as well as the associated network (MPI, PROFIBUS, Ethernet)
have already been determined in the hardware configuration of the operator
panel and the S7 controller.
For a WinCC flexible project not integrated in STEP7, the connections must be
configured completely here (address of the operator panel and the controller,
network).

SIEMENS
Transfer Settings in WinCC flexible

fif WinCC flexible 2005 Advanced - My_Project - TP1796 Caw
Project Edit View Insert Format Faceplates 2oborts Window Help
Ell Nevi lquSelect devices for transfer x
New Project with Projec riettings for TP17013_Color (IP 17133 color)
Close
Mode IMPI/OP
save
Station add.= 11
Save As Version...
Change device Type...
Import Tag;...
Integrate in STEP 7 .
Copy from STEP 7... Iran le,
I rr* Project Docurnenta.—....
Z\
■
• Print Selection Ctrl+W )
1708 color SIMATIC PANEL
PROFINET CBA . _ lilted
Co5pler 7,7
1-1 Dv
kansfer Transfer kettings7-1
Recent Proiects Backtransfer
j czit Lockup...
mcsecr Languages Restore... ems
sf Graphics TTY
Project Texts License keys... nsion
i
R5232
EEI - 4 Dctionaries R5922 Qptions...
Structures
C) R5985 05 Update
Version Management
Slinatic 2 Only master on the b sclic of
.1
I I
Objects 1111

Transfer Settings Transfer is the transmission of the project onto the operator panel that is to
execute the project. The transfer settings necessary for this are only relevant for
the project transfer, not for the data exchange with the controller later on during
the process control phase. 11
Transfer Mode For the transfer, the operator panel must be in "Transfer Mode". Depending on
the current interface parameterization, the operator panel must be switched to
the Transfer mode manually or it switches automatically.

SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Setting the Touchpanel Interface for Transfer

Loader V07.01.01.00_01.34
Transfer PROFIBUS K x
Panel is the only master on bus
Start
Station Parameters
Language Conveyor Mk+120
Address:
Control
Panel
Time-out: 1 s
Elle loner I
— NetworkParameters
4 .5 10 40 iiii si eCi) ii Transmission Rate: 1.5 Mbits/s

....,,,.... corr. ...
LAWTrfu. .1fq. -
0P.s-ei t.r!J;ad tAJ.64 Network CP Ra:.,. - .;
...•• 126
Highest Station:
moult
111 • tS
Peoknu 07-Trareftr System •• -Iran sta • Profile: DP
Selags Set rce • a • •
Bus Parameters...
Transfer Settings
Channel Directories
Channel 1.
S7-Transfer Settings MEI
Serial:via RS232 Zero Modem Cable
MPI
,
IT Enable Channel F.; Remote Control
Profibus
Channel 2.
tbus
Properties...
F Enable Channel F Remote Control Advanced
1 A

File: SERV1_11E.18 . Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task The interface of the touchpanel is to be set up as in the slide, so that the WinCC
flexible project can then be downloaded from the PG to the panel.
Before you can parameterize the interface, you must exit Runtime. For this,
there is, as a rule, a button in the Start screen for doing so. After exiting
Runtime, the "Loader" appears through which the "Control Panel" (see slide)
can be activated. The Loader also appears after every voltage recovery.
What to Do 1. Exit the touch panel's Runtime

2. Activate the "Control Panel"
3. Double-click on "Transfer" to select
4. Make the settings as shown in the slide and accept these by pressing the
"OK' button until the "Control Panel" reappears
5. Double-click on the icon "OP"
6. Press the "Save Registry" button
7. Go back to the Loader by closing the Control Panel.
8. Via "Transfer", activate the "Transfer Mode". In this mode, the touchpanel
waits for a connection set up through the PG.
9. Check the PROFIBUS cabling.
Notes Channel: In addition to the serial transfer channel (Channel 1), a

second channel (Channel 2) can be selected for
downloading the project onto the operator panel.
Remote Control: The loading of the WinCC flexible project can be triggered
without first having to manually exit Runtime. The panel
automatically exits Runtime and switches to the Transfer
mode.
Advanced: Setting of transmission parameters for MPI or PROFIBUS
DP.

SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Switching the PG Interface to PROFIBUS DP

SIMATIC Manager
Options
Properties -CP.9611(PROFIBUO' ?"`
Set PG/PC Interface
PROFIBUS
023==ailmv —Station Parameters

r PG/PC is the only master on the bus
Access Path 1
Address: 10
Access Point of the Application: IT Check address
I S7ONLINE (STEP 71 CP5611(PROFIBUS) 1_1 Tirneout. s
—Network Parameters—
Interface Parameter Assignment Used
Properties. Transmission Rate: 11 5 Mbps
ICP5611(PRO FIB U S) <Active> I - --
J Diagnostics.. Highest Station Address: 126 :_
'1
if4 CP5611 tiell
CP5611(PPI) Profile:
CP5611(PROFIBUS DP Slave) Copy... Standard
Universal (DP/FMS)
CP5611(PROFIBUS) <Active>
User-Defined
Bus Parameters...
(User parameter assignment of your
communications processor CP5611 for
SOFTNET DP Master) Network Configuration
Interfaces
r Include network configuration belsrs
[ Add/Remove: Select
Master: 11 Slaves 1
OK Default 1 Cancel I Help

OK Cancel I He I

IV
Task So that the WinCC flexible project can be downloaded from the PG onto the
touch panel, the PG's interface parameters and the transfer settings of the
touch panel must both be parameterized to PROFIBUS DP.
11
What to Do 1. Change the PG's interface to PROFIBUS DP. Use the parameters shown in
the slide.
Important:
For "Interface Parameter Assignment Used" DO NOT select
"PROFIBUS-DP Slave", since the PG is not used as a PROFIBUS slave.
2. Connect the online cable of the PG with a PROFIBUS DP interface.

SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Checking the PROFIBUS DP

SIMATIC Manager
n->Options SIMATIC NET diagnostics - CP5611(PROFIBUS)
1
> Set PG/PC Interface PROFIBUS/MPI Network Diagnostics Hardware I
— Status/Network Diagnostics -
Test 10K
Access Path
Station address:
Access Point of the Application:
Bus parameters:
I _ NLINE (STEP 7) --> CP5611(PROFIBUS) Baudrate: 1500.00 Kbps
(Standard for STEP 7) Highest station address (HSA): 126
Minimum station delay Time (Min Tsdr): 11 tBit
zi
Interface Parameter Assignment Used Maximum station delay Time (Max T sal 150 tBit
Properties...
Setup time (tsetj: 1 te it
ICP5611(PROFIBUS) <Active>
_N Bus Nodes
1r-4 CP5611fMPlj Diagnostics...
11 --v> 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1'4 CP5611(PPI) o irirrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr
- ------
CP5611(PROFIBLIS DP Slave] J Copy ri rrEFFEEFF1 1 1 1 1 1 Fr
20 I—
14 CP5611(PROFIBUS) <Active> 4C EFFErrr- rr-- 1-1-1-1-1-Fri- Frr
60 rrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrr
80 FrrEFFErri- r- rEFFI-1-1-1-1-
User parameter assignment of your
communications processor CP5611 for looFFEEFFErrrrrrrrrrrrr
- - -- -
SOFTNET DP Master) nor r r r rr r Key
E Station passive
- Interfaces I 17 Station active
F Station active ready
Read
j
Add/Remove: Select..
OK I Cancel I Help
OK Cancel I Help

Siemens AG 2008. AM rights reserved.
Task Now connected to the PROFIBUS are:

the PG (address 0, active)
- the touchpanel (address 1, active)
the S7 controller (address 2, active)
- the ET200S (address 4, passive)
Using the function "SIMATIC NET Diagnostics" (see slide), check whether all
nodes are accessible via the PROFIBUS DP.
What to Do 1. Start the diagnostic function

SIMATIC Manager - Options - Set PG/PC Interface - Diagnostics...
2. Check the PROFIBUS network using the "Test" button
3. Using the "React' button, determine which nodes are accessible via the
PROFIBUS.
Note The "active" and "passive" node properties indicate whether a node can (active)
or cannot (passive) initiate communication to another node.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 5: Checking the RT Interface of the WinCC flexible Station
❑ ri-k* l 1? gl ei I Irti 161 la EERVII ci II< No Filter > J 4p

MyProject 0: \Courses \MyProject
x
MyProject Object name Syrnteic Typ
E S7_300_Station /I L crt General P.,..met.
CPU 315-2 DP
7 -
E sr S7progran rl•' HW Con ig - Tourhpant
Address: I
Highest address, 126
.12E1 Scrum Saban Edit Insert PLC View General I Assignment I F
Transmission rale: 1.5 M bps
Block:
Touchpanel D rit'• 511 1
$1 a I I Short Description:
Subnet
not networked New
Touchpanel (Configuration) PROFIBUS 1 15M I
Pro:tartlet I
Press Fl to get Help. Delete I
Order No:
Name:
Interface
Type: 7
1: I OK I CarrlorM
sI
Address: 1
4,116± (0) HMI Networked Yes Properties...
Index Module Comment
OK I Cancel Help

SERV1_11E.21 q.t.;
Task So that the panel's Runtime can communicate with the S7 station during the
process control phase, the panel's interface must be parameterized with the
HW Config tool.
11
What to Do Using the HW Config tool, check the parmeterization of the panel's interface. If
necessary (see slide) make the appropriate corrections.

SIEMENS
Exercise 6: Checking the Connection to the Controller

,d_cuLci
MyProject 0•ect name Info
▪ S7_300_Station
• :=4 Touchpanel
eoiect Edit Dew Insert Fefe,ef Peceeletes Qvtsons Endow tielp

WinCC flexible R T
,
e Screens
17 5- Communication New • I& A rn • x <Undelned>
-ej Tags Engfnh Weed Knedom)
6?.1x, 0 Ran I .Stonnea■ons
,,s a Connections
Cycles
PRO
Flik Alarm Managemen vx
Touollaare(TP 1778 6" J DJ
El Recipes
IE-1 1 Saws
Reports ▪ Communication .ML.i221
4- - 0. 1 . 1 -44i===9=.1111111 Partner
▪ Text and Graphics Tags Cornectionl .15111111C 57 300/400 ViyProjectk57... :
1CPU 315-2 DP : 11
1CF ,0n
iar 4-11-111-11 1
Runtime User Adm
MI Cedes
▪ Device Settings
• ilk Alen Menegerren Open editor
•-41 Reeiees
Reports Add Connection
at Tex and Graphics generate

® Manama User Adm
BEI r- Devine Settings Lind° Ctrl+Z
▪ Language Settiigs
at &mimes Cuh Ctrl+X
E -Ws Vend, Mannerneni ra Spy
NI device
Ctri+C
Cp Fiat Copy
Netot,'
ProNe I: o
Paste Ctrl+V
Highest stens address (HSA)
Replace... Ctrl+E
Delete Delete ALINE
Print Selection Ctrl+W e bus Number of matters
tf
Cross-References
7 Output R econnect...

IlithiT Automation and Industrial Solutions
File: SERV1_11E.22
Date: 18.09.2009
Task Make a connection so that the panel's Runtime communicates with your training
unit.
What to Do 1. Start WinCC flexible by opening the WinCC flexible station Touchpanel in
the SIMATIC Manager (see left slide)
2. Open the object "Connections" and check whether your S7 station is
specified as connection partner.
3. Connect the WinCC flexible tags with the controller's variables
right mouse button on "Connections" -4 Reconnect...
4. Complete the dialog that appears as follows:
FR Options for Reconnecting Symbols
—
Connect STEP7/SIMOTION symbols with WinCC flexible tags if
C symbol name, address and data type match
a one or more of the following conditions are true:
symbol name matches (address and data type are not relevant)
17 address and data type match (symbol name is not relevant)
l Replace tag name with symbol name
OK Cancel
4

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 7: Transferring the WinCC flexible Project into the Touchpanel
"l' WinCC flexible Advanced - MyProject - Touchpanel JJJ

Project Edit Dew Insert Format Ptceplates Qptlons Endow deb
- 0 "n.
r • •- -•
S.- New • par 11..g it, '<Undefined>
English (United Kingdom) Ld •
I& PRO • .................................

Touchpanela
Screens
11-
%'' Commune Touchpanel [TP 1778 6 c... —Settings for Touchpanel (TP 1778 (i color PN/DP)
Tags
1"".5.11111.
ES- -%Alarm Mari:. Mode IMPI/DP • r Enable back transfer

! f Recipes !! r Overwrite user administration
$ Reports
E8 Text and' Station address 11 r Overwrite recipe data records
IT] -4 Runtime I.
p. Y Device Sr
.
Language Se
p r5 Structures
111--%Version Mane
• Transfer APPIY
• 4
*rums sabot access trDA)
Arirlrecc

Tr
Task The given WinCC flexible project "Touchpanel" is to be downloaded into the
panel.
What to Do 1. Activate the Transfer function and make the settings as shown in the slide 11
2. Start the data transfer to the panel using "Transfer"

SIEMENS
Exercise 8: Testing the WinCC flexible Project

DI DO SETPOINT Quantity ACTUAL Quantity
I 0.0 O
\
T_System_ON 11 r 1 1=1 1=1
I 0.1 T_System_OFF L_SYSTEry Q 4.1

0815 7
I 0.2 )9 T_Jog_RIGHT L MAN • Q 4.2
I 0.3 N
O T_Jog_LEFT L AUTO • Q 4.3 1=1 =I 1=1 1=1
1 0.4 N
O S_M/A_ModeSelectl "IW_Thumbw" (IW 2) "QW_DigDisp" (QW 6)
I 0.5 T_M/A_Accept •
•
• SIEMENS SIMATC PiOJEL
\
GI T_Ackn_Fault L_Conv_Fault Training for
Automation and Drive
)1D •
N
O •
•
•

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_11E.24 A• Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task The functioning of the WinCC flexible project "Touchpanel" is to be checked:
What to Do Select the screen "Conveyor" and check whether the following information is
correctly displayed via the output fields:
• States of the proximity sensors of Bays 1 — 3 and the light barrier
• Display of conveyor faults
• Operating states (System ON, Manual and Auto modes)
• ACT quantity
Note What doesn't yet work:

Operating the system or the conveyor (System ON/OFF, mode selection,
specifying the SETPOINT Quantity, Jogging RIGHT/LEFT, Acknowledging
conveyor faults) via the input fields is not possible at the moment since your S7
program in the controller has not yet been adapted accordingly. You will do this
in the next chapter with the function "Rewiring".

SIEMENS
Exercise 9: Testing the WinCC flexible Buttons
Operand' Symbol Symbolkommentar Stahtswert

M 30.0 "M_Anlage_EIN_HMI" Merker Anlage EIN (TP170) ■take
M 30 1 "M_Anlage_.AUS_HMI" Merker Anlage AUS (TP170) IlltrUe
SIMATIC S7 18.09.2009
Date:
File: SERV1_11E.25 1c Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task In the WinCC flexible project, find out with which S7 variables the buttons
"System on", "System off', "Jog left", "Jog right", "Mode select", "Enter Mode"
and "ackn fault" are connected and enter the variables in a Variable Table (see
slide). 11
In the "Conveyor" screen, press the buttons and with the STEP7 test function
"Monitor/Modify Variables" observe how the touchpanel sets and resets the
associated variables in the S7-CPU.
What to Do 1. On the touchpanel, select the screen "Conveyor".

2. Through the "Properties" of the buttons, determine with which S7 variables
the buttons are connected.
3. Enter all the variables that you find out in a Variable Table.
4. One after the other, press all buttons and with the STEP7 test function
"Monitor/Modify Variables" observe how the touchpanel influences the
variables.

SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_11E.26 „Xi SITRAIN Training for
complete a topic.

SIEMENS
PROFIBUS - DP Terminating Resistor
ii..l
Master Slave Slave
,,,,""..1
t i
ft i E
0 M9I
1
0
of
. iii i , NI
The terminating resistor must

Slave Slave
be switched on at the beginning
and at the end of the segment m II :
0 i 1 Ei
m ' 0 .1 • i
MI Elf
. I Mf
19 Resistor On
e Resistor Off

2.1 SITRAIN Training for
Setting the Switch on the terminating resistor on the first and last nodes of a segment.
Terminating To do this, you open the cover of the bus connector and set the switch to the
Resistor ON position.
11
The PROFIBUS is only correctly terminated if the power supply of the node in
which the terminating resistor is inserted is actually switched on. If this is not
always the case, the PROFIBUS can also be terminated with an active RS485
terminating resistor (6ES7972-0DA00-0AA0). The terminating resistor is then
either permanently supplied with power separately from the other modules or is
supplied with voltage from the peripheral modules.
Termination of the bus system enables the nodes (for example ET 200L) to be
connected and disconnected at will, without causing malfunctions.

SIEMENS
Segment Length Depending on the Baud Rate
Baud Rate Segment Length

9.6 to 187.5 kBaud 1,000 meters
500 kBaud 400 meters
1.5 MBaud 200 meters

3 to 12 MBaud 100 meters
Master Slave Slave Slave

.0 iii E 1
. . .. .
`o — I II I f
o
li I t i
0
1 I i
' IMI I IM M I I•1 t IMI I I■1 i
. .
0 0
I
1
t
t:
I t I i
0
i
Segment Length

Files SERV1_11E.28 RIZ" Automation and Industrial Solutions
Segment Length In the slide you can see the cable lengths of a segment without a repeater
depending on the transmission speed.
RS 485 Repeater An RS 485 repeater boosts the data signals on the bus cables and connects
bus segments. You will require an RS 485 repeater, if:
• more than 32 stations are connected to the bus,
• bus segments are to be operated ungrounded on the bus or
• the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded.
If you set up the bus with RS 485 repeaters, only a maximum of 9 RS 485
repeaters may be switched in series. The maximum cable length between two
nodes is 10,000 meters at 9.6 to 187.5 kBaud.

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Standard connector
with screw terminal
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 n

An
gOr
PROFIBUS Connectorin the slide you can see two different versions of the PROFIBUS connectors.
The incoming cable is connected to the terminals Al and Bl.
If a connection to a further PROFIBUS partner is required, the connection is
then made to terminals A2 and B2. 11

SIEMENS

General PROFIBUS cables can be produced quickly and error-free with Fast Connect.
You require a special stripping tool, cable and connector for Fast Connect.
What to Do 1. Measure the cable length by placing the cable on the template.
2. Place the measured cable ends in the stripping tool. Limit for the
placement depth is the pointer finger of the left hand. Fasten the cable in
the stripping tool. Turn the stripping tool clockwise four times to strip the
cable.
3. Pull the closed stripping tool from the cable end. The residual cable parts
remain in the tool. After opening the tool you can remove the residual parts.
If the white filling did not come off during stripping, you can remove it by
hand. To make it easier to remove the protective foil cut it carefully between
the wires using a screwdriver. Remove the protective foil from the wires.

SIEMENS
Installing PROFIBUS-DP Slaves Later On
HW Config - IS7_300_Station (Configuration) -- My_Project] P117113

Example of a Type File
1.1 atation edit Insert El-C view Option Window Help
1 11 Customize CtrkAlt*E ; GSD-Datei for produkt 6F)0001-xxxxx, SIEMENS

Dita:1:'1 1%1 dif ; Version : (V2.0)-(Contact person Mr. Rechinger
'L pecu +49 9131 913 3955)
Configure Network ; Copyright (C) SIEMENS AG 1999
; All Rights Reserved.
'Lyrnbol Table
Remit ,zrern Eiro:
Eck Catalog Prone flProfibus_DP

Update Catalog
PrmText=1
Instal HW Updates ... Text(D)= Increasing clockwise (0).
Text(1 -Increasing counter clockwise (1)*
Instal New GSD...
EndPrmText
Import Station GSD... PrmText=2
Text(0"Disable -
Text(1 -Enable-
Updates the catalog contents by checking al GSD and type Pies. EndPrmText
PrmText=3
4
1

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_11E.31 Tr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Type Files STEP 7 requires a GSD or a type file for every DP slave, so that you can select
the DP slave from the Hardware Catalog in the HW-Configuration tool.

All properties of a DP slave are stored in a GSD file and they conform to the
PROFIBUS standard. Type files conform to the Siemens specification.
11
For SIEMENS AG DP slaves, there is a type file for every DP slave type.
DP slaves from other manufacturers are supplied with a GSD or a type file.
Integrating DP Slaves A new DP slave can be integrated into the Hardware Catalog as follows:
1. Select the menu options Options 4 Install New GSD
2. In the dialog field that then appears open the drive/directory with the
appropriate GSD file.
The slave is entered in the window "Hardware Catalog" (only in the catalog
profile "Standard"!) under "Additional Field Devices" and is then available
for the configuration.

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Rewiring a User Program
DI DO
.0 T_System_ON • .0
1 ‘0 T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM • 1
.2 s
e T_Jog_RIGHT L MAN • .2
.3 s
0 T_Jog_LEFT L AUTO • .3
.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect • .4
Set_Quantity
.5 s
e T_M/A_Accept • .5 NI
.6 • 6
7 • .7 0 0 1 5
.0 s
0 T_Ackn_Fault L_Conv_Fault • .0
.1 • .1
.2 s
e • .2
.3 s
e • .3 SIEMENS SIMATIC PANEL
4 • .4
.5 s
0 • .5
6 s
0 • .6
.7 • .7
Ell C)
• • • . start screen

=• Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Objectives ..................................... 2
Areas of Use .................................. 3
Rewiring using Absolute Addresses 4
Rewiring Results 5
Leading Symbols .......................... 6 12
Rewiring using "Leading Symbols" ................................. 7
Rewiring with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor ......................... 8
Rewiring with the "Check Block Consistency... " Function 9
Comparing Blocks (1) ....................................................... 10
Comparing Blocks (2) 11
Exercise 1: Creating a Backup Copy of the S7 Program 12
Exercise 2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses .......... 13
Exercise 3: Comparing Blocks ......................................... 14

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Rewiring a User Program
SIEMENS
Objectives
know how rewiring functions and how to apply it

be able to carry out a rewiring using the SIMATIC Manager
be able to carry out a rewiring using the symbol table
("Leading Symbols")
be able to compare S7 blocks online-offline and offline-offline
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009

SIEMENS
Areas of Use
program program
Operation via Operation via
simulator TP177B
04.1 04.1
10.0 SR SR
---
II s 0 S 0
10.1
R
Rewiring
Symbol information: • absolute addresse Symbol information:
I0.0 T_System_ON 130.0 H_System_OH_HMI
I0.1 T_System_OFF 130.1 H_System_OFF_HHI
04.1 L_SYSTEM 04.1 L sysnim
"S_N/ "M_M/
A_ "H M/ A_
"T H/ ModeSelect "LHAN A_Accept_ ModeSelect MAN"
A_Accept" SR HMI" HMI" SR
II s Rewiring using 1I s
"l_STSTIHT"
symbolic addresses "L_SYSTEM"
IA IA
Symbol information: Symbol information:

T_M/A_Accept 10.S M_M/AAccept_HMI M30.5
S_M/A_NodeSelect 10.4 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI M30.4
L_SYSTEH Q4.1 L_SYSTEM 04.1
LMAN Q4.2 LMAN 04.2

gler Automation and Industrial Solutions
Areas of Use • In all blocks, one address is to be exchanged for another.

• In one module, a defective channel (input or output) is determined. If, on the
same module or another module, not all channels are occupied, the sensor
or actuator in question can be reconnected to the free channel.
• The program is to be adapted to another process in which the sensors or
actuators are wired to other addresses.
12
Rewiring The program must be adapted to the new situation by rewiring (inserting the
new addresses in the program).
There are three ways to rewire a user program:

• Rewire using absolute addresses
(independent of the symbol table, Address Priority Absolute Value)
• Rewire using symbolic addresses
(Address Priority "leading symbols")
- in the LAD/STL/FBD Editor
- with the Check Block Consistency function
• Rewire using a source program

SIEMENS
Rewiring using absolute Adresses

!SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project — DA57_Courses \My_Proje].
File Eck Insert PLC View Options Window Help
g? IF. Customize... Ctrl+Alt+E Filter > Y.# I Th MI I k?
Access Protection
Change Log Size in the work me...
S7_300_Station
SDB
CPU 315-2 DP Text Libraries FBD 134 Organization
E Ch13_1.114420 Language for Display Devices... FBD 124 Function
a Sources Manage Multilingual Texts FBD 104 Function
100 Function
a MICRO
E 2 TP1708_ 76 Function
64 Function
Compare Blocks... 112 Function
Blocks: FC14:FC15fC16.FC175C18;FC195C42;0111 Blocks: FC14;FC155016507501850195C42;0131

Replacements: Replacements:
Ord address flew address Old add, ess NOW addr ..
M30.0
2 M301 2
3 M30.2 3 •
4 0.430 3
5 M30.4 5
6 M3OS 6 •
7 131.0 7
- —
1 ET 7
Note. I
Insert Row Delete Row pred Row Delete Row

4 O
r All accesses withrn the specined addresses [not lot peripherals] ..V141accesses hin the specified addresses (not for peripherals)
OK Cancel I Help OK Cancel I Help
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 (

C
Rewiring... Independent of the symbol table, the old addresses (in the example, bits of the
IW 0) are replaced with the new addresses (in the example, bits of the MW 30)
in the existing user program. The original blocks are overwritten with the new,
rewired blocks.
When you rewire using absolute addresses, you must select "Address priority:
Absolute value" in the Blocks folder's Object Properties.
...in Specific If you are only going to replace the addresses in one or several blocks, you
Blocks have to select these blocks before you start the function.
...in All Blocks If you are going to rewire or replace the addresses in all blocks, you have to
select the Blocks folder of the S7 program before you start the function.
...All Accesses If you check (activate) this option, the individual bits of the specified byte, word
Within the Specified or doubleword addresses are also rewired. In the example shown, all bits of the
"old address" IWO are rewired to the bits of the "new address" MW30.
What to Do 1. In the SIMATIC Manager select the Blocks folder or the blocks to be rewired
2. Choose the setting "Address priority: Absolute value"
SIMATIC Manager - Edit 9 Object Properties 4 Address Priority tab
3. Start the rewiring
SIMATIC Manager 9 Options 4 Rewire...
4. In the Rewire screen, enter the old and the new addresses and, if
necessary, activate "All accesses within the specified addresses"
5. Acknowledge with "OK"

SIEMENS
Wiring Results
• FC15 — "FC_Mode" -- SERV 1_5 57_300_5tationt,CPU 315-2 DP \—\FC15
FC15 Title: jj
Ilet.mork 4: System alum
..... 04.1
: • N1S.1 SR
•.
4
.
4 -'
Symbol informmtlma:
T_System_ON • FC15 "FC_Mode" SERV I _5 57_300_Station \ CPU 315-2 DP
M_Aux_System_ON
T_Systea_OFF
L_SYSTEM PCIS : Title:
41 I Zttttla: System ON/OFF
..... 04.1
M15.1
aI
SR
'
Tr
Symbol information:
M30.0 M_System_ONFRII -- Memory bit System ON (TP170)
MI5.1 M_Aux_System_ON -- Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON
M30.1 M_System_OFF_HMI -- Memory bit System OFF (TP170)
04.1 l_SYSTEM -- Indicator light System ON
41 I 11

File: SERV1_12E.5 Mg Automation and Industrial Solutions
Result In the rewired blocks and/or in the entire user program, the old addresses (in
the example, I 0.0 and I 0.1) have been replaced with the new addresses (in
the example, M 30.0 and M 30.1). The old blocks (FC 15 in the example) have
been overwritten with the new ones.
Rewiring Protocol After rewiring, you can print out a protocol which shows how many
replacements were made in which blocks:
12
r chwinlo.txt - Editor
Datei Bearbeiten Format Ansicht ?
Address list:
Old address: New address:
Iwo MW30
Block list:
FC14: Number of replacements:2
B1: Number of replacements:0

SIEMENS
Leading Symbols
6i LAD ,'511 .FEID - [FC15 --"FC_Mode"-- SERVI_S S7_300_Stritto
Hn. ...11:11A1
Cl. File Edlt Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help ..1.2121
1:11 41-.1121 ell b
ji F
Ned !‹1›,!1 o_jr
gg
7C15 Title:
System OM/011,
•T_System- "N Aux _SYSTEM

oN"t System SR
P Q8.0/ L_SYSTEM j Indicator ight System
ea_
'4 Symbol Table:

Address Priority: Address Priority:
Old Entry:
Absolute Value Symbols
1: Etta A ; 4: Address rim
L_SYSTEM = Q8.0
LAD , STL ,F1313 - [FC15 "FC Mode -- SERVLSV 9tetion \CPU MEDI=
Cl• Ile &It Insert PLC Debug Vow OptionsV PLC Deism Window Het.
New Entry:
D102-1 611 A1 f2LJ ill sk
.11 -11-1+1-1-01EIL, -11}-t1 L_SYSTEM = 04.0 J® 41-1{
mtmixis System ON/OFP =tom System ON/OCT
•T System_ •N
ON" System ON"
•T_Sys.A._
077 •
vi
thj er FI
14 4 P 14 1: Eno A 2 1r4o A 3 Cseeteletences Adams iJo. A 5: M. 211111111.e ter A 21NO 3Gesaelemnces _A Address into.
Press Fl to got Help. loffline bs Press Fl SCO Help. IthIn. Oh. "

nr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction If you want to change the assignments in the symbol table of an already
existing program, you can also decide whether the absolute address or the
symbolic address has priority.
Selection In the SIMATIC Manager, right mouse click the "Blocks" object of an S7
program. Select the Object Properties menu option and then the "Blocks" tab.
You can choose between "Absolute Value" or "Symbol" in the "Address priority"
field.
Address Priority: With this setting, the absolute address of an operand does not change if you
Absolute Value change the address assignment in the symbol table later on.
In the example above, the output Q8.0 (symbol name "L_SYSTEM") was
changed to output Q4.0 in the symbol table. With the "Address Priority:
Absolute Value" setting, the program continues to use the output Q8.0.
Address Priority: With this setting, the absolute address of the operand is changed to the
Symbol new entry in the symbol table (functionality: "Rewire with Address Priority:
Symbol").
In the example above, the output Q8.0 (symbol name "L_SYSTEM") was
changed to output Q4.0 in the symbol table.
Note When you change the address priority later on, you must recompile all blocks
with the function
"Check Block Consistency... 4 Program 4 Compile All"
Without this compilation, the changed address priority is only valid for blocks
that are created after the address priority change.

SIEMENS
Rewiring using "Leading Symbols"

Syr SIMATIC Manager - [My_Project ER,57_Cour jij
m 2si
80 Fie Edlt beat PLC VIew Options Wmdow Help
❑ re.irl' el c [47111,161[i 2E1 2g --- ET-- VIVI<"'"" LI7o ' MIA?
lily_Ptoject 111MTMIIIMPIMMEIIMIETT- 101111=511 T.•
Ell SIMATIC 300I1) di/System data SDB
a
6 II CPU 315-2 OP Ck OB1 OB_Cycle LAD 54 Organization Bk
B S7 Pim:m.151 0 FC1 LAD 48 Function
Sauces ,
PC Mode FBD 104 Function
CI FC15
i5l 111" otor LAD 50 Function
cut Ctrl+X
conveys Venable Table
Cagy Ctrl+C
posts arl+V
Delete Cal
Insert New Object General) Blocks I Checksums Address priority:

PLC
Behavior as in Recommended for symbolic
Rewire... STEP? < V5.2 programming
CompareWas...
Reference Data Absolute r Symbols are applied from C Exception: symbol accesses
Check Block Consistency... value the symbol table and the on the DB remain as they
has DB for all accesses were programmed in the
Print priority (I,Q.M,T,C and DB) code block
Rename F2
Object Properties— Ak+Return
Special Object Properties
Displays properties of the
Symbol C Exception: for accesses in V" Fa aU accesses (I,Q,M,T,C
has structurally unchanged data and DB)
priority types, the current symbols
will be applied
OK Cancel I Help
After every change activate the "Check Block Consistency ..." function!

lk
I
General You can also rewire an S7 program using "Leading Symbols" with the
LAD/STL/FBD Editor or the function "Check Block Consistency...".
Prerequisites are
• an existing symbol table
• in the Block Folder's Object Properties, select the setting "Symbol has
priority.... For all accesses (I, Q, M, T, C, and DB)"
Adapting the Before you rewire with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor or with the "Check Block
Absolute Addresses Consistency..." function, you have to enter the absolute addresses of the new
operands in the symbol table. The symbols of the operands must not be
changed.
Note The property "leading symbols" offers considerable benefits when data block
variables are frequently used especially in connection with the function "Check
Block Consistency...". If variables are deleted or inserted later on within
already existing data blocks, the necessary address correction of the remaining
data block variables can automatically be undertaken with the function "Check
Block Consistency...".
The easiest way to replace the traditional PLC operands (I, Q, M, T, C) is to
use the previously described function "Rewiring with the SIMATIC Manager".

SIEMENS
Rewiring with the LAD/STL/FBD Editor

SIMATIC Manager - [ SERV I _325 C: 57_Courses Servl __Lq12_(1
Fie Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help ,Lai2sj
< No Filter >
oluki ELT' F5_117- NI
6.-9 SE RV1_325 0. OB1 .,-, no'', Cr.IC
E My_Station O FC16
El -;SA chapt09
E chaptl0 Whig At least one symbol assignment changed
E ,21] Rewiringl
al Sources CLAD; STL'FBD - [FC99 SERV1_3251.Ftewiringl
1.0 Blocks
OK
Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window _LejJ
lei L-± Lioul rk7)
• Rewiring2
Elia Upload
---
6
221 !<<I -Al rig 1!:11 *1-14-1-01D11.1-tk-:I
Press Fl to get Help. r
FC99 : Title:
Xietwork 11: Title:
"Inputl" "Input2" 120.0

0-1
F
II VI
'Inputl" "Input2"
I I
111:11111131 MiLOMMECIW a Cross-references 4: Address ido.

Press Fl to get Help. I-loffine Ifiym as C
A
SIMATIC S7
1
Date: 18.09.2009 SITRAIN Training for
File: SERV1_12E.8 k Automation and Industrial Solutions
Rewiring After you have set "Symbol" as the address priority in the Object Properties of
the Blocks folder and then adapted the absolute addresses in the symbol table,
you can proceed to rewire with the LAD/STL/FBD by opening the block. After
you acknowledge the message "At least one symbol assignment changed", the
modified addresses are automatically inserted by the Editor.
Attention Rewiring is only made in the blocks that are explicitly opened with the Editor!
As well, rewiring of a block is only effective when the block is then saved.
If one or more addresses in several or all blocks of an S7 program are to be
rewired or exchanged, all blocks must be opened one after the other with the
Editor and then saved.

SIEMENS
Rewiring with the "Check Block Consistency... " Function
:lc block consestency. [Demo_5 kly_Peoeecl]

& view Hob
Triv !‹1›!! Jen) yj I d4 objects>
1
Object Hierarchy.
S7 program Call Tree [References I
• FC15 "FC_Mode" [FBD]
• FC16 "FC_Conveyor" IFBDI
• FC17 'TC_Faults" [FBI)]
Cut COW • FC19 ''FC_Math" [FBD]
• FC42 "FC_MM420" [FBI)]
Copy
• OB1 "Main_progiam" [FBI)]
FC15 "FC_Mode" [FBD]
Delete Del FC16 "FC_Conveyor" [F131/]
57 ptoryam Cal Tree (References
FC17 "FC_Faults" [FBD[
"FC_Math" [FBI)] FC15 "FC_M ode" [FBD]
Insert New Object FC19
FC42 "FC_MM420" [RD] FC16 "FC_Conveyor" [FBD]
PLC
o FC17 "FC_Faults" [FBD]
Rewiring.. FC19 "FC_Math" [FBD]
Compare Blocks... FC42 "FC_MM420" [FBD]
Reference Data STEP7 Project: D: \ S7_coueses \My_Proje 0 081 "M am_program" [FBD]
Check Block Consistency... program' My_Prolect1Demo_5 Bausteme o FC15 "FC_M ode" [HD]
program setting address alio* Symbol. O FC16 "FC_Conveyor" [FBD]
Pont
Number of Blocks: 6 o FC17 "FCFaulte [FBD]
Rename F2 The 57 program contains blocks of the folovang editors. o FC19 "FC_M ath" [HD]
Object Properties... Att+Return FBD o FC42 "FC_MM420" [RD]
Special Object Properties ► 2Into
less F1 for help.

gr
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved . File: SERV112E.9
Rewiring After you have set "Symbol" as the address priority in the Object Properties of
the Blocks folder and then adapted the absolute addresses in the symbol table,
you can proceed to rewire with the function "Check Block Consistency... ".
This is a good method when addresses are used in several blocks, since the
blocks affected do not have to be opened.
What to Do 1. In the SIMATIC Manager, right click with the mouse on "Blocks" and
select the menu option Check Block Consistency...
2. If there are blocks that are displayed in red, a compilation is necessary. You
IP I can trigger this compilation with the icon.

SIEMENS
Comparing Blocks (1)

Compare Blocks - Results
Compare Blocics
The block comparison resulted in the following differences:
Type of comparison: t"; ONLINE/Offline r Path 1/F
Path 1: ISERV2_32S1Chapter6\Blocks
P Including SDBs
Storage Location: ICAS7_Courses1Sery2_32
Pr Execute code comparison
r Including blocks created it different programming langi. Path 2: ONLINE ISERV2_32S \Chapter6 \Blocks
Selected Storage Location I

Path 1: SERV2_32S■Chapter6 Block List:
Blocks Block Result of compartson

FC1 xJ only exists in Path 2 ONLINE
Compere with.
Path 2:
OK starts the ONLINE/0in
I OK Canc r Hide instance data blocks of the same length
e:
lemesetless ! Path I Path 2 OMNI „bki,Vciclgs are different.
I Lag radars chow s woop

IM Sloo cheas,rn Oxf138.4
051039 PM. 1110712000 OSM:511P1
OxA743
II.Created In bronco LAD LAD Details Go To
Tad length of block 410 bytes 410 bytes
-
go Length et bed data 6 bytes 6 bytes —
0 Length of eK7 code 310 bytes
lock yenta
.11Name (Header)
2
310 bytes
2 Close Update I Pant I Help
0.1 mi
Clew I Mate
...see next page4
SIMATIC S7
ge
Date: 18n9.2009 l SITRAIN Training for
Introduction You can compare blocks between online and offline data management or
between two user programs on the hard disk of the PG.
With this function, you can determine whether, for example, program
corrections were made in the CPU later on and in which network the blocks
differ.
What To Do 1. With the right mouse button, select the Blocks folder of an S7 program.
2. Select the Compare Blocks menu option.
3. Choose whether you want to compare online/offline or between 2 offline
programs and acknowledge with the "OK" button.
4. In the follow-up screen, the blocks that differ are listed.
5. Select the line in which a difference was determined and then select the
"Details" button.
6. In the "Compare Blocks - Details" window you can ascertain when the block
was modified and if the block length was changed.
7. After you select the "Go To..." button, the differing block is opened online
and offline in two windows, for example, and the network, in which the first
difference was determined is displayed.
Note Program corrections can only be made in the offline window.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Go To... --. Comparing Blocks (2)
-._ ,..Lcij id
He Edt Insert PLC Debug View options Window 11*,
❑Ir1-1®I ell x Nei .L-1-_j Lkkii F ezj thl nrit Li' -H-144-1-nr771 14-I .1211
• FCI7 — SERY2_325 \ • ,_1P_125.1 • Ilk•i::E.•..
-
• .s.al,I. - _IIoJ al
"N_Feul tl" —Repot t_Dersory "M_Feultl" —Freport_liessory
_Fault.l. Edge _Edge_rieaory_B

i,, eul tl_Edge Edgefienory_13
—it
Network 11: Eveluetton Disturbance 2 Net e 2
"DBInstance_F "DB_Instence F
sal t2" eult2"
"FBFaults"
_ "FEI_Faults"
EN EN ENO
A _J
Disturbence_I Disturbance _I
"4_Fault2" —nput Display-89.4 "4Fault2" —zPut Display -89.2
"T_Feult_Ret" —Acknowledge "T_Ferul t_Itst^ —Acknowledge
Flesh_f re quen Flash_f re guen

"2 Hz" —c1` "2 Hz" — cY
4
1 1 2
Al
A Le-..: I 0,1 : I Next ,,pdare I
1u ?: Cros eferencas 4 Address info. 7: Coe arson J
,
1.4 4 ijj\
1. ii.i 1:Effo ,10 ,,...
Press Fl to get Help. I 0111111.111.11 Abs < 52 144 4 P----
SITRAIN
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.092009 g
tr
Training for
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. File: SERV112E.11
Differences After you select the "Go To..." button (see previous page), the Program Editor
is opened with two windows side-by-side, in which the network with the first
difference is displayed.
You can navigate between the differing networks or program locations using
the "Previous" and "Next" buttons.
Example In the example shown above, the blocks of two different S7 programs are
compared in an offline - offline comparison. Both S7 programs contain an FC16
12
block, but each have a different program code. You can read out which of the
two blocks was the last one saved or which has the newer date from the time
stamps in the "Compare Blocks - Results" screen.

SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Creating a Backup Copy of the S7 Program
VSIMATIC Manager - [My_Project D:\ST_Courses \My_Projej

gp File Edit Insert PLC
JJJ
View Options Window He =LJ XI
Rkeltal 2
-41227:-EElint No Filter 1_1 70 ig I %Fl
E My_Project Object name Symbofic name Type Size Author La
E SIMATIC 300(1 Source Folder 10
111 CPU 315-2 DP Block Folder Offline 09
E F,
53198 10
CID Source
Blocks 1. Make a backup
E sr My_Program copy as a
hardware-independent
S7 program
--/
2. Rename the original

program
Press Fl to get Help. lussigrom

‘1r
„
Task Before you rewire your S7 program, you are make a backup copy. This backup
copy is to be created as a hardware-independent S7 program in the project.
What to Do 1. With the mouse, drag your S7 program called "My_Program" directly onto
the project symbol so that the copy is assigned to the project as a
hardware-independent S7 program (see slide).
2. Rename the original S7 program assigned to the CPU "Rewire".
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses

DI Simulator DO SIMATCPANEL
I 0.0 \ID T_System_ON •

C:)
I 0.1 \D • Q 4.1
T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM
El C -
3
I 0.2 \c, T_Jog_RIGHT L_MAN • Q 4.2 -
- -
7
I 0.3 T_Jog_LEFT L_AUTO • Q 4.3 ©0 =

I 0.4 \D S_M/A_ModeSelect •
I 0.5 O \ T_M/A_Accept • • •••
N
O •
O
\
, 20
1=111111■1111■11■1111Matak ....
Blecke FC145C155C165C175C185C19fC42.GB1
RadxenaMx
Old address I New addroos
3
04.1 4 04.1
10.0 H15.1 SR 5 3130.0 1115.1 OR
P I 0
Rewire
.1 30.1
E VI Effi El I r
Notes
S3441m43. lasfmertion:
Spiel tagesatioa:
I0.0 T_System_ON il
medRom Delft Row H30.0 H_Syscem_ON_HHI
015.1 M_Aux_Systea_OH •• H1S.1 H_Aux_Systes_OH
I0.1 T_Systa._OFF P /8 acmees within the spec:tied addresses (not fee Petherals1 H30.1 M_System_OFF_HKI
04.1 1_SYSTIM
04.1 L_SYSTEN
OK

SERV1_12E.13 IC Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task 1 The S7 program is to be adapted in such a way that operating the system or the
conveyor model (System ON/OFF, operating mode selection, specifying the
SETPOINT quantity, jogging RIGHT/LEFT) is no longer done via the simulator
but is done via the touchpanel. You are now to make the appropriate adjustments
to the S7 program with the function "Rewire".
What to Do 1. In the S7 program called "Rewire" select the property "Address priority:
Absolute value".
12
SIMATIC Manager 4 select the Blocks folder of the S7 program 4 Edit 4
Object Properties 4 Address priority tab
2. Activate the "Rewire" function.
SIMATIC Manager 4 select the Blocks folder of the S7 program 9 Options 4
Rewire...
3. In the table of the Rewire dialog, enter the old and the new addresses and
activate (check) the option "All accesses within the specified addresses" (see
slide).
4. In FC 17, the input "T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0) has been replaced with the memory
bit M 31.0. Modify the block in such a way that you can acknowledge a
conveyor fault (M17.0) either via the touchpanel (M 31.0) or, as before, via the
simulator momentary contact "T_Ackn_Fault" (I 1.0).
5. Download all blocks into the CPU and test the functions
6. The (hardware) NC contact "T_System_OFF" (I 0.1) has been replaced with
the (NO contact) memory bit "M_System_OFF_HMI" (M 30.1). Modify FC 15
so that the system can be switched on again
Result With the exception of specifying the setpoint quantity, you can operate the system
completely via the touchpanel.
Task 2 Modify the program of the FC 19 block in such a way that the setpoint quantity no
longer has to be specified via the BCD thumbwheel buttons on the simulator but
can be made via the corresponding input field on the touchpanel.
Solution tip: The touchpanel transfers the setpoint quantity specified in the
"Parts Setpoint" input field into the variable "MW_SETP" (MW 22).

SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Comparing Blocks
.. 511 (BD FT 15 -- "I I moth,

C1■LAD
JQJJ
Insert PLC Debug Mew Options Verde" Help
plum -
ofra;12-lial J x nlryl coo + .J 11-141-1-01ff'11.1-1.1 -1
n FCIS -
FC_Plode- - mael _5 \57_3003tation\CPU 315-2 ...121z1 ff FC15 "FC.Iiode — SER1/1_S 57 3003tatimo \ CPU 315-2 DP \ FC1 5
PcIS Title: FC1S : Title:

MUM: system 01/011 MOM System ON/OFF
.. .
.
54.1 04.1
IO.o 011.1 SR
Q1 :M30.0 % 015.1 SR
:50.1 1
I •
4
e T.
1--‘7l a!
lafeammtion: Symbol lateaantioa:
/0.0 T_System_ON -- Momentary cont■ 5500.0 M_System_ON_HMI -- Memory bit
010.1 M_Aux_Systea_ON -- 14g. auxiliary 5515.1 M_Aux_System_ON -- Edge auxil
$0.1 T_Systam_011, -- Momentary COD, 5510.1 M_System_OFF_HM/ -- Memory bit
04.1 L_V/STIN -- Indicator ligt
:tr ml 04.1 L_TYSTIff -- Indicator
■ 11
[EI DC111111111=1/WEEW a Cross-references 4 Adders info 5: M MIELL" 7:
Press II to pet E . F-0 loots lIME I A

File: SERV1_12E.14 Vir Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task With the "Compare Blocks" function, check the changes you made during
rewiring. To do so, compare the rewired S7 program called "Rewire" with the
backup copy of the original program called "My_Program".
What to Do 1. In the SIMATIC Manager select the Blocks folder of the program "Rewire"
and start the "Compare Blocks" function
SIMATIC Manager - Options 4 Compare Blocks
2. In the follow-up dialog box choose "Type of comparison: Path 1/ Path 2".
Then, in the SIMATIC Manager window, click on the Blocks folder of the S7
program called "My_Program" and start the function via "Compare".
3. The box "Compare Blocks — Results" appears. Use "Go To..." to display the
different versions of the FC 15 block
Task Expansion Also compare the program stored online with the current program called
"Rewire".
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Introduction to Micromaster MM420

• Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Principle of an Inverter .......... 3
Overview: Standard Drives .......... 4
Communication: PROFIBUS DP ..........5
Main Tasks of the Master — Slave Communication ........ 6
Structure of the Control Word .......... 7
Integrating a Drive in the HW-Config .......... 8
BOP (Basic Operator Panel) Standard Operator Panels .........9 13
Keys on the Operator Panel ........10
PROFIBUS Communications Module: Setting the Address ...... 11
Exercise 1: Reset to Factory Default ....... 12
Exercise 2: Controlling the Micromaster via the BOP .......13
Exercise 3: Setting the MM420 Parameters with the BOP ...... 14
Exercise 4: Integrating a Drive in HW-Config ....... 15
Exercise 5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel ....... 16

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Introduction to Micromaster (1)
SIEMENS
Objectives
understand the principle of an inverter
be able to reset the inverter to factory defaults
be able to operate the BOP standard operating panel
be able to set basic parameters using the Basic Operator Panel

(BOP)
be able to integrate the Micromaster into the hardware configuration
be able to monitor and control the Micromaster
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.2 41 SITRAIN Training for
ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for Introduction to Micromaster (1)
SIEMENS
Principle of an Inverter
Infeed DC Power module

(Rectifier) link (Inverter)
zs
Three-phase mains system

such as 3 AC, 400V, 50 Hz AA
Induction
mo Or
Inverter Variable
speed
Voltage Voltage Voltage
,111,1111111,
41111•11110-
11•111107- -
WNW
gir Automation and Industrial Solutions
Direct On-line Three-phase AC motors (here: induction motors) can be operated directly on
Operation the three-phase mains system. They are switched on and off by means of a
contactor (= relay for high currents). For example: a pump for a water storage
tank.
Motor Starter To achieve a smooth start-up, a reduced voltage starter (= motor starter) is
frequently used. After start-up, the motor is then operated directly on the mains.
For example: the drive of an escalator.
Inverter If the motor speed is to be variable, an inverter is used.
For example: the drive of a container crane.
Some applications require a precise adherence to a predefined speed. This is
frequently connected to positioning tasks. These are then servo drives. In 13
simple terms, servo drives are used everywhere where movement used to be
carried out manually.
For example: machine tools, packaging machines, robots.
The Way it Works With a rectifier circuit, the three-phase current of the public supply system is
rectified. This results in a DC voltage that is buffered by capacitors (DC link). A
power module with transistors generates a three-phase current with variable
frequency and voltage from this DC voltage.
Variable voltage? The motor represents an inductive resistance for the current
flow. With rising frequency the inductive resistance increases. For that reason,
the inverter must also increase the output voltage proportional to the output
frequency.
Configuration It is possible to connect several power modules for several motors to a rectifier
(such as SIMODRIVE 611, MASTERDRIVES).
Rectifier If a rectifier circuit with transistors instead of diodes is used then electrical
energy can be fed back into the system during ramping down.

SIEMENS
Overview: Standard Drives
4.
c7=
Application example:
Controlled pumps and
fans in an air
conditioner
MICROMASTER 4 Inverter
(here the different sizes with a Application example:
performance of about 0.1 to 250 kW) Conveyor belt

Categorization Standard drives are used for applications that only require a low to medium
dynamic as far as speed control is concerned. Many applications in the past
used to be driven with three-phase motors connected directly to the mains. In
the 90s, inverters became so economical that the advantages of a speed-
controlled drive could be utilized in many areas (energy savings in the partial-
load operation, smooth ramp-up and controlled ramping down, quality
improvement in production).
Design The MICROMASTER inverters are now in the fourth generation. They are
"Stand-Alone" devices. That is, the inverter is complete and is connected
between the mains and the motor.
The MICROMASTER 4 inverter family comprises several versions:
MICROMASTER 420: for simple control requirements such as pumps and
430: fans.
MICROMASTER 440: for demanding control requirements (dynamic and
precise speed control).
MICROMASTER 410: for the simplest requirements with only a limited ability
to parameterize.
MICROMASTER 411: the integration of motor and converter
(= COMBIMASTER). The inverter is located in a
special housing piggy-backed on the motor.
Applications • Pumps and fans (for heating, air conditioning, ventilation, chemistry,
foodstuffs ...)
• Conveyor belt systems (for packages, baggage, mail)
• Automatic doors ([house] entrances, elevator doors, garages)
• Washing machines, dryers and ironing machines (industrial field)
• Car washes ...
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
• SITRAIN Training for

SERV1_13E.5
l
ittT Automation and Industrial Solutions
Field Bus A field bus connects distributed sensors and actuators (such as, valves, light
barriers, measuring devices, drives, operator control panels) with the central
PLC. PROFIBUS DP is a manufacturer-independent, open field bus.
PROFIBUS has been standardized and continuously further developed by the
PNO (Profibus User Organization) since 1990.
Master-Slave The master (usually a PLC with a PROFIBUS interface module, such as,
S7-315-2 DP) controls the data communication on the bus. Slaves only send
data when they are prompted by the master. That way, no collision results
between two senders.
13
Cyclical Range The slaves are cyclically (= one after the other) supplied with process data by
the master and their process data is scanned. In Drives, process data are, for
example,
• speed setpoint, switch-on signals from the master or
• actual speeds, error signals from the drive.
The data telegrams consist of 2 to 16 words (a 16 bit).
Cycle times lie between about 2 to 20 ms.
Event-driven Range As well, there is often the need to read or change the parameters of a drive.
This occurs (in today's applications) only when prompted. The cyclic operation
is then briefly interrupted and a longer data telegram with up to 117 words is
sent.
Master Class 2 The "normal" master is called Master Class 1. For commissioning, you can also
connect a PC or PG (= SIMATIC programming device) as a Master Class 2.
Independent of the actual data communication, the Master Class 2 can access
the drives.
PROFIBUS Address The minimum requirement for commissioning the PROFIBUS option module is
the setting of the PROFIBUS address.

SIEMENS
Main Tasks of the Master — Slave Communication
Master-Slave Communication
Reading and writing of parameters Controlling the drive process
Reading out of fault and diagnostic values Permanent setting of control bits and setpoints
Reading and modifying function values Constant reading of status bits and actual values
Parameter index value (PKW) Process data (PCD)
Panama_ Size of the main setpoint

Source of the main setpoint
}to the inverter
Level of the control bit
Source of the control bit
Size of the main actual value
}from inverter
Level of the status bit
How does data transmission take place?

• Only triggered if required • Fast and permanently triggered
• Freely accessible to all parameters • With fixed "wiring" to the process

Process Control Fast data transmission of short data telegrams to all participating stations with
the maximum speed available on the bus. In drive systems these are typically
setpoints, control commands, status replies and actual values (measured
values).
Operating Control In addition to this permanently available data, there is data that is only needed
in particular cases. It would therefore be senseless to permanently put load on
the bus if this data is only needed once per hour or per day, for example, when
starting up the machine (Class 1 Master). Another reason for an expanded
communication need could be the commissioning, optimization or diagnosis of
machine components from a central location. In this case, (such as a fault) a
detailed access of an Engineering Tool to the system components or the drive
is enabled. Since, as a rule, only one affected device/component is directly
addressed, this window is only made available once per bus cycle for one bus
station and not simultaneously for every station.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Structure of the Control Word
W # 16 # 0 4 7 F = Motor ON
:
. .....
Rising edge for switching on !
W # 16 # 0 4 7 E
: :13 = Motor OFF
15 14 13 12 9 8I7 6 5 4
L
ON/OFF 1
OFF 2
- OFF 3
- Pulse-Enable
Ramp-function Generator-Enable
Ramp-function Generator-Startup
Setpoint-Enable
Fault-Acknowledge
JOG right
- JOG left
- Control from PLC
- Reverse
---
- Motor-Poti up
- Motor-Poti down
Command Data Set Bit 0

glkT
Control Word The control word (bits 0 to 10) conforms to the Standard PROFldrive Profile.
Bits 11 to 15 are MICROMASTER-specific.
ON/OFF1 To switch on the inverter, a rising edge of this bit is necessary, and the bits
OFF2 and OFF3 must have the state = 1. When switching off via this bit, the
motor is braked on the braking ramp of the ramp-function generator (P1121)
and the inverter then switches off.
OFF2 The inverter switches off immediately and as a result the motor ramps down
without braking (coasts to a standstill). To switch the inverter on again, this bit 13
must be set to 1 once more and a rising edge at ON/OFF1 is necessary.
OFF3 The motor is braked on the OFF3 braking ramp and the inverter remains
switched on. This function is often used as EMERGENCY STOP.
Note For reasons of wirebreak safety, the inverter is always switched off if the signal
state of the associated OFF bit is = 0.

SIEMENS
Integrating a Drive in the HW-Config

=0A
station Edit Insert izi.c Dew Qptkins Window be
iai; :-I5g
s7_300_5tation (Configuration) -- MyProject
II
CPU 315-2 DP
np
Properties - PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PR
L PROFIBUSI11. DP master system (1) End
froliec IDriyeES
General Parameters I E d SIMOREG

E dSIMOVERT
Address. E al LARGE DRIVES CBP2
MASTERDRIVES CBP
MASTERDRIVES CBP2
General Dove Unit / Bus Address
Transmission ra
al 1
' ► 0-/MIDI-/COMBIMA
E ASTER 4
Zevice type: I' "- r General Crnfifit.elim I Dala Etc:honor Broadcast • Overview I
Subset: • BIMASTER 411
Device version HMI= Qefralt PPO type 3. PZD-2/2
• MICROMASTER 430
mirRnmAqun tidy!
0111221:11 1
MIIMIM111111111111111
8
1PBOO-C1 A0 (4M4B)
ASTER 420 wilh
US Interface (see Ord&
ES / SIMOTION
Delete slot
Mastatislave configuration 1
OK Mester. 121DP
Stat., S7 Staten
Corrrrent
OK Cancel
I 'I*
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 S lN

Training for
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_13E.8 A iT
utomation and Industrial
al Solutions
General The cyclic data exchange between CPU and MM4420 via PROFIBUS must be
configured in HW Config.
Properties
Dialogs The following properties are defined in the dialogs:
PROFIBUS interface: PROFIBUS address and subnet
SINAMICS: Firmware version of the Micromaster (to be found on the
nameplate of the MM420 such as, "Issue: A06/1.17")
DP Slave: In addition to the I/O addresses for data exchange between CPU
and Micromaster, the type of communication must be defined here:
PPO Types: (Parameter Process data Object)

The structure of the user data for the cyclic data exchange is identified as the
PPO Type in the PROFIBUS profile for Variable-speed drives.
The PPO types 1 to 5 have a defined number of PKW (Parameter Index Value)
and PCD (Process Data):
PPO Type 3 permits a simple data transmission with which the controlling of
the Micromaster is possible as well as the specification of the speed setpoint
and the reading out of the speed actual value.
With PPO Type 1, you can also change all drive parameters per CPU program.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
BOP (Basic Operator Panel) Standard Operator Panels

BOP (= Basic
SDP (= Status Setting parameters (changeable parameters):
Operator Panel)
Display Panel)
Index of a parameter (sub-parameters):
Parameter keypad
As delivered from factory
for easy
LED Status display
commissioning
Monitoring parameters:
or changing
individual parameters

SDP The MICROMASTER is fitted with the SDP (= Status Display Panel). The
MICROMASTER is already parameterized in such a way that it can be
operated through the terminal strip.
The SDP has a status indicator with a green and yellow LED (16 different
messages).
BOP The BOP (= Basic Operator Panel) can be ordered as an option. It is inserted
instead of the SDP — temporarily for commissioning or long-term. Available
functions are:
• LCD display with 5-digit 7-segment display and unit symbols 13

(Hz, min-1, V, A, kWh)
• Access to all parameters up to Access Level 3 (Expert)
Parameter List Unlike a PLC controller (SIMATIC), drives are not programmed. No program is
written.
Settings are made in parameters. The basic program in the digital drive is fixed
and is called firmware. By assigning parameters, the inverter is adapted to the
task.
Indexed Parameter Many parameters contain sub-parameters. Parameters with similar functions
are often grouped there.
Monitoring Some parameters are only used to display values.

Parameters So that you can differentiate them from the others at first glance, an "r" (= read
only) is placed in front of them instead of a "P".
Trigger Parameters Some parameters can only be changed from 0 to 1. An internal action in the
MICROMASTER is usually triggered with this, for example, Reset to Factory
Default.

SIEMENS
Keys on the Operator Panel
0 Start the converter with parameterized ramp-up time

Bring the converter to a standstill with parameterized ramp
,. 1
iI rj u.0
nnn
0 standstill.
down rate. Press twice and the converter coasts to a
. u 0 Changes the direction of rotation

(r r Fri A e) Motor starts and rotates at the preset jog frequency. Motor
rotates as long as the button remains pressed
log P 1
MICROMASTER 420
C s Parameter access. Is used to select the parameter number
and to accept the value
.. .•• 4....
• ,.....,f
iii .......—
'
,
PC.A.54 .11 Ble
1, “
CI Increase parameter number or value
0 Decrease parameter number or value
0 This key has a series of functions:

- Roll function to display the 5 most important values
- More exact setting of parameters, e.g. decimal places
- Jump to Parameter 0000. The display shows r0000
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 A

NZ
Access Levels For simple applications, only a few parameters have to be changed. For
complex applications, an "exotic" parameter may be needed from time to time.
For that reason, access levels were established in parameter P003:
• Level 1 = Standard: Only the 17 most important parameters are
displayed
• Level 2 = Extended: In this level, additional parameters are visible for the
input and output terminals, as well as for
communication through field bus or for example, for
the setpoint channel
• Level 3 = Expert: Here you have access to all necessary parameters.
For the MICROMASTER, this is about 600
parameters
• Level 4 = Service: Some specific parameters are only meant for
authorized service personnel. The level is protected
by codeword.
Command Source Commands are: on signal, off signal, jog, and acknowledge fault messages, for
example. On the training unit, you can select the following sources using
parameter P0700:
• P0700= 1 BOP operator panel
• P0700 = 2 Switches S1-S3 on the demo case
• P0700 = 6 From the CPU through PROFIBUS
Setpoint Source Setpoint is, the inverter frequency, for example. On the training unit, you can
select the following sources using parameter P1000:
• P1000 = 1 BOP operator panel with the higher/lower
buttons (only with r0000)
• P1000 = 2 Potentiometer on the demo case
• P1000 = 6 From the CPU through PROFIBUS
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
PROFIBUS Communications Module: Setting the Address
Switch number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Add to address 1 2 4 8 16 32 64
Example 1: Address = 6 off on on off off off off
Example 1: Address = 88 off off off on on off on
Some addresses have a "particular meaning
Address Meaning
PROFIBUS address is specified
0 by Parameter P0918
1 to 125 valid PROFIBUS address
126, 127 invalid PROFIBUS address
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 ‘ 1 SITRAIN Training for

1
17
Attention The minimum requirement for commissioning the PROFIBUS communications

module is the setting of the PROFIBUS address.
Setting You can set the PROFIBUS address in two ways:

- through the 7 DIP switches on the module or
- through Parameter P0918
Note To change the DIP switch, the inverter must be in a switched off state (no voltage)
(for already mounted communications module). A change to the DIP switch only
takes effect after the PROFIBUS module is restarted.
13
The restart must be triggered by a Power OFF / Power ON. This is true for an
inverter supply as well as through a separate 24V supply.

SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Reset to Factory Default
Parameter Value Comment

P0010 30 Reset to
Factory Default
1111101111
P0970 1 End
11111/141.1111.1
S1 = Drive On/Off LI
P0010 = Commissioning filter
S2 = Reverse direction of rotation
P0970 = Reset to factory defaults
S3 = Acknowledge fault
P3900 = End of quick commissioning
H1 = Fault (is lit when there is no fault)
P1 = Potentiometer for the frequency/speed

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_13E.12 , Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task First of all, carry out a Reset to Factory Default to establish a defined initial
state.
Factory Default In the factory default, the inverter is already functional. It is parameterized for a
4-pole Siemens motor with the same power rating as the MM420 and can be
controlled via the binary inputs (see slide).
What to Do 1. Change the parameter P0010 to the value 30

2. Change the parameter P0970 to the value 1
3. Wait until the P---- indicator "disappears" on the display
4. Test the inverter using the switches and potentiometer on the demo case
(see slide)
Quick If Parameter P0010 is set to the value 1, the quick commissioning mode of the
Commissioning inverter is activated. Only the most important or the most frequently required
parameters are displayed.
The quick commissioning mode is always required when motor (characteristic)
data are to be changed. With the end of the quick commissioning via
Parameter P3900, additional parameter data are recalculated out of the
changed motor data:
• P3900 = 1 4 Reset to factory default and motor data calculation
• P3900 = 2 - Only motor data calculation
• P3900 = 3 4 Reset the parameter assignments of inputs and outputs
This procedure is also described in the "Getting Started" Guide that is included
with every unit. We will not practice the quick commissioning in this exercise.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Controlling the Micromaster via the BOP
Parameter number Value Comment
P0700 1 Control signals from BOP
P1000 1 Frequency setpoint from BOP
•• 11 • •
Reverse direction
• ••
With selected
Parameter r0000:
ON—.
ncrease frequency
OFF1—. Decrease frequency
Jog operation
(set-up operation)
SIMATIC S7 _27 SITRAIN Training for

Date
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_13E.13 Nt; Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task Switching on and off as well as the specification of the drive's speed is to be
done via the BOP operator panel.
What to Do 1. On the BOP, set the parameters shown in the slide to the specified values
2. Switch on the motor using the ON key
3. Select the parameter r0000 using the arrow keys and press the P key so
that the current frequency is displayed
4. Change the frequency and with that the motor speed using the arrow
keys.
13
Note: Arrow Keys Pressing the higher/lower (arrow) keys only affects the speed when the
parameter r0000 is selected and the parameterization mode has been exited
via the P key. Otherwise the arrow keys continue to used for assigning
parameters.
Changing the frequency or the speed using the arrow keys is also called motor
potentiometer (MOP).
Jog Key: The drive or motor can be jogged using the Jog key.
By default, the control signals and the setpoint come from a SIMATIC S7-CPU.
When setting up the drive or in the case of service, it can become necessary to
control the MM420 "by hand" using the Jog key.
The Jog key only functions in the ready state. That is, the signal OFF1 = 1.
The frequency is 5 Hz in the factory default.
Fn Key With the "Fn" (Function key) key, you can carry out the following actions:
• acknowledge alarm and fault messages when the error no longer exists
• jump between decimal positions in parameter changes
• display important inverter data, such as, voltage of DC current link
(Roll function when "Fn" key is pressed for 2 seconds).

SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Setting the MM420 Parameters with the BOP
If the PROFIBUS Parameter number Value Comment

address was set from the
hardware side, P0003 2 Expanded parameter access
P0918 can only display
P0700 6 Control signals from PROFIBUS
.__ P0918 6 PROFIBUS address of the MM420
P1000 2 Frequency setpoint from Potentiometer
P1120 2.00 Ramp-up time 2 seconds
P1121 2.00 Ramp-down time 2 seconds
Setpoint before ramp-function generator: Setpoint after ramp-function generator:
Internally generated
Setpoint frequency Setpoilt frequency ramp-fu
/ ction
50 Hz
50 Hz
AIL
P1120 P1121
1
SIMATIC S7
Date:
File:
18.09.2009
Task The drive is to be assigned parameters in such a way that it receives the
control signals from the CPU via the PROFIBUS.
What to Do Use the BOP to set the parameters as shown in the slide.
Diagnosis An LED is located on the front of the PROFIBUS-DP interface of the MM420.
The following table explains possible LED displays and error causes and helps
you with the following exercise:
Off no power
Red flashing invalid PROFIBUS address (126/127 is invalid) or hardware / software error
Red on temporary state during startup or new communication configuration; if constant
state, then PROFIBUS interface or inverter defective
Orange flashing communication to inverter built-up; no connection to PROFIBUS, or PROFIBUS
connector not inserted or faulty or PROFIBUS master is switched off.
Orange on communication is established, but no cyclic data exchange is taking place.
Green flashing cyclic process data exchange exists, but setpoints are invalid (control word = 0,
because S7 master is in the "STOP" state, for example.
Green on cyclic process data exchange is established.
Ramp-up Time Internally, the setpoint value changes according to a step function. To achieve
a controlled ramp-up transition, a ramp-function generator is integrated that
generates a ramp-type setpoint for the controller.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Integrating a Drive in HW-Config

:HW Coring - S7_300_5tation
aCation Edit Insert eLC Dew Qptions Window help
J o ci:1-ez wu a R2Ielimilimitolialtel
LZS7_300_Station (Configuration) -- MyProject JJ
OP
CPU 315-2 DP
Properties - PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PROFIBUS

L PROFIBUS(1) DP master system (1)
General Parameters El 0 SIMOREG

0 SIMOVERT
Address: ID 0 LARGE DRIVES CBP2
■ MASTERDRrVES CBP
MASTERDRIVES CBP2
Transmission ra Genetel Drive Ur / Bus Addle. 0-/MIDI-/COMBIMA
ASTER 4
5ubnet:
Qeace type BIMASTER 411
r-
Des,ice yeeson ilei" I PPO type 3 F Tt 2/2 MI"!
MICROMASTER 430
Slat t Nero PROFBUS partner
mirP MASTFP
Type A. Type PR... 4/0 e._ Pro... Length 1 L0 Conaste
4 WON
6 Actusiviss/... 2D1 Inratoeut .2 1=1- - • 2
— 1Nerel UMW! 1P800-0AAO(MM4B)
TER 420 with
US Interface (see Order
e ES / SIMOTION
10
Cl I -
Merle-sieve conlIguation 1 — —
OK Menem 121 DP
Stelon S7_300_Station
I OK I Comment
_J
OK Cancel I Hein

gr
General The cyclic data exchange between CPU and MM420 via PROFIBUS must be
configured in HW Config. Proceed as follows:
What to Do 1. Activate the HW Config tool.

2. Open the HW Catalog and set the Profile "DriveES".
3. From the SIMOVERT 4 MICROMASTER4 directory, select the
Micromaster 420 and drag this onto the PROFIBUS DP mastersystem using
drag and drop.
4. In the "Properties — PROFIBUS interface MICROMASTER_4_PROFIBUS"
screen, enter the PROFIBUS address 6, select the subnet and confirm with
13
"OK"
5. In the "Properties — SINAMICS" screen, choose the device version "1.0x" or
"1.1x" that fits for your training unit. You will find this version on the
MM420's nameplate (such as, "Issue: A06/1.17")
6. In the "DP Slave Properties" screen, in the "Configuration" tab, select PPO
Type 3 and assign the I/O address 42 for data exchange with the CPU (see
slide).
7. Save, compile and download the configuration into the CPU.
Result When the MM420 has been successfully parameterized and integrated in the
hardware configuration of the S7 Station, the LED of the MM420 PROFIBUS
interface shows a green flashing or constant light.

•
SIEMENS
Exercise 5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel

SIMATIC PANEL I 4C.42 z
•latemor• Meter as CPU
.•••••
I
- “gm.
'1•F—e. am ..•••
0111•11•71
.• ti Control_•
om je.zo-
P • • .•
R 40.0m1 lageenatlanz
11 14 4:0_0,12.11 M40. 0 Jyttch On Mulors tat M430 .1,1701
,4_70ntat.12121430 .3t4J -- Control word tor 1115.1j0
0
Mlmenr. z 1•41.t. Motor Ogg
F ILM420 •
•.
014_11110 •_ •
yjp.'=ew so
111161143I —xx
B ••00 *
Con;rel_ .
114214120• •
tr.....
U
1171.40 1:014•44441.gaz
S =
On 102 M40 0
OW42
Stmtch On genory Olt MM430 17,1701
-- Control word for M430
11111110111: Jo g Motor flat
D 044;'''''' 1114 '''' ' • 4.

JogIIIM_ Jog_14/7. 'X 111420
• MS' On 1017- 4 ...,
P * 1---/1-0—;70=M X110
.............. 141:1167-IM
Control_ .
20' .
................................... 1••••
111•1•01 1•01440.04.04:
MM5430_J g CMMI 1140. -- :Unary tat M420 Jog IS M 111.170.
MJ143_Jo g _IFT__01 M40.3 -- Nemo, hat M11430 Jop 1Mt 111.1707
_M11430_0n_1171:3 M40.0 Sto.tth On gentry bat M11430 170170.
OV_Contr ol101430 10,12 -- Control word for MM400
A
Task You should be able to switch the drive on and off from the touchpanel. During
switched off continuous operation, the MM420 can be jogged to the right and to
the left via the appropriate keys; during switched on continuous operation, it
turns at the speed that is set on the potentiometer of the MM420 training unit.
What to Do 1. Copy the "FC_MM420" (FC 42) block from the project called "SERV1_B"
located in the S7 program called "Chap13_MM420" into your S7 program.
2. Put the block into operation
3. On the touchpanel, activate the screen "MM420"
4. Test the functions described.
Notes on the The QW42 output word declared by you in the Hardware Configuration serves
Program as so-called "control word" for the MM420. Per program you can control the
MM420 by transferring defined values.
The values (HEX constants) specified in our example have the following
meanings:
in NW1: W#!16#47F = switch on the drive

in NW2: W#16#47E = switch off the drive
in NW3: W#16#57E = jog the drive to the right
in NW4: W#16#67E = jog the drive to the left
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Documenting, Saving, Archiving

gir Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Objectives ......... 2
Other Documentation Tools ............ 3
Block Documentation ............ 4
Page Setup ............. 5
Print Preview ............................ 6
Managing Multilingual Project Documentation ........... 7
Overview: Saving User Data ............8
Uploading an S7 Program from the CPU to the PG ............9
Uploading a Hardware Station to the PG (PLC Copy) ........... 10
Transferring a Program onto a Memory Module ........11
Saving a Project onto a Memory Card ......... 12
Loading a Project from the Micro Memory Card (MMC) ........13
Archiving a Project .......................................................14
Memory Concept of the S7-300 until Oct. 2002 ......... 15
Memory Concept of the S7-300 after Oct. 2002 ..........16
Memory Concept of the S7-400 ......... 17
Exercise 1: Documenting a Block and Printing It Out ........ 18
Exercise 2: Saving the Program and Hardware Configuration (PLC Copy) ........ 19
Exercise 3: Archiving "My Project" .............................................................................................................20
If You Want to Know More ......... 21
MMC - as Additional Data Memory on the CPU ........ 22
PLC: Storing Data on the Memory Card .......... 23
PLC: Getting Data from the Memory Card ..........24

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIEMENS
Objectives
be familiar with the documentation possibilities of blocks
understand the "Managing multilingual project" function
be able to print out programs
understand the memory concept of the SIMATIC S7-300/400
be able to make a "PLC Copy" (online data storage)
be able to load/read a program to/from a Memory Card
be able to archive/retrieve a project

ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Other Documentation Tools
Reference Program structure

data
Cross references
Assignment of Unused addresses

I/Q/M/T/C
Checklists Addresses without

symbols
Symbol table
Configuration
Network
configuration

File: SERV1_14E.3 r Automation and Industrial Solutions
Reference Data If you print out the reference data it makes troubleshooting, in particular, easier.
You will find more information in the "Troubleshooting" chapter.
Symbol Table The symbol table contains the association between absolute address, symbol
names and symbol comments. See the "Symbols" chapter for more
information.
Configuration Configuration data generated with the "Hardware Configuration" tool. The
printout is in text form. If you want a graphic printout, you can copy the graphics
onto the clipboard and then paste them in another program such as Winword
and print it out.
Network Displays in graphic form the stations of a networked system with the relevant
Configuration configuration data such as the MPI address.
14
Printer The printer used for documentation is the one installed under Windows. If you
want to use a different printer, you must set it up with the Windows Control
Panel.
DOCPRO The DOCPRO optional software is also available for superior documentation
and for writing wiring manuals.

SIEMENS
Block Documentation
pLAD/STL/FBD - [FC4 -- My_Project \My_Station\CPU 314] ,i_ol ,i

,
Ck He Edit Insert PLC Debug View Options Window Help .119
._12_
<1
, -11-
,.
DI ;[ I-1611 AI xltilal -1 -1 Eldhl F _J 1 1 nig 1-1d 0
1 4 1 D1 -01- 1 1 1 -
1 k?I
FC4 : Block Title up to 64 characters

.fd
_J
Block comment: To enter a comment, select menu options "View -> Display with ->
Comment". You have up to 64 kBytes per Block for block and network comments.
=aleiNetwork Title up to 64 characters
Network comment: To enter a comment, select menu options "View -> Display with
-> Comment". You have up to 64 kBytes per Block for block and network comments.
A "T_System_ON" // Statement comment up to 160 characters
// Comment can also be inserted between the lines
S "L_System" // LED for System ON
AN "T_System_OFF" // System OFF
R "L_System" // LED for System ON
_Li
Ell <Li ■ ■I 1: Errs 2:14o a Cross-references _A 4: Address MM. ) 5: Modify A___ 6: Diaprrostics A 7: Cowen=
Press Fl to get Help. 1---- Cr ickfline lAbs <5.2 INvii 1 In 6 triert {Cho A
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 A SITRAIN Training for

File: SERV1_14E.4 qr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Block Comments The slide above shows the different comment facilities available for a program
block (OB, FC, FB).
Printing To start the Print function:

• Click the printer icon or
• Select the menu option File 4 Print.
Print Setup You can change the printer settings by selecting the File Print Setup... menu
option.
El HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS Document Properties BEI

Print Setup Setup Advanced
r Printer Paper Size: A Letter

Name: HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS rties i
et0pe_
> Paper Source I Automatically Select
Status: Ready
Type: HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS Copy Count: Copy
Where: LPT 1: 999)
Comment - Orientation
-Paper Orientation
r Landscape I -V"1 r Rotatild
Size: I Letter ( Portrait
A Print on troth Sides (Duplex Printing)
Source: !Automatically Select r Landscape
EI 6 None r Short Side [:0(- LongSile
A
Network... I OK Cancel I
Color Appearance
6' Gray Scale r Color

as -
OK I Cancel
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Page Setup
Seite einrichten
Papierformat I Schrittfeldet Pa terformat Schalk's,
Layouts. Kopfze4e
A4 Fend Links: Koplzeile LINKS .. ... d

1.
A3
A3 Rand
A4 Mite: I {Objekt}
AS H
A5 Rand
Legal 8,5" x 12" Recite: I (Datum) {Uhrzeit) zLI
Legal 8,5" x 12" Rand ..LI 1
Letts 8,5' x 11"
Lena 8,5" x 11" Rand
Ausrichturg —Fuezeie
I Al Hochfonnat r Querformat Links-. IFullzeile LINKS I_d

-.. .
Meta I FuBzeile AMITE ...ji....d

Rechtz I Sei!, {Seite} von (Seitenaneah) ...1
_
.2LI
Votgabe
MAIO 11; 111011111■z_J Gultig Ur. I Protelkt Z_I
OK Abbrechen I Hale I OK Abbrechen Hie

Date: 18.09.2009 Ita.
*1 Automation and Industrial Solutions
Page Setup When you select the File 4 Page Setup... menu option, a dialog box in which
you can select the print format (such as A4 Margin) appears.
Paper Format Selection of the paper format that is used for printing.
Labeling Fields The header and footer edited in the "Labeling fields" later appears on each
page of the printout regardless of with which tool (for example, HW Config or
LAD/STL/FBD Editor) the printout was undertaken.
Fields for printing out the current date of the printout, the page number, or the
name of the object are provided in the headers and footers (such as {Date}
{Time}, Page {Page}, {Object}).
14

SIEMENS
Print Preview
SINATIC By Prolect\ My Station1CPII 314\ —11,020 - <offline> 01/22/2003 9:20:24
FC20 - <offline>
•1C ?malt" Evaluation of Faults no memory
rte: Vanily:
Autbor: WardLan: 0.1.
Aim* varsina: 2
00 stamp Cada: 10.01.2002 09:17:22
Istarfaca: 1.2.07.2000 14:24:45
Idadtbs (blackflafFinidnta): 00152 00048 00000
Name Data lype Address Initial Value Comment

PI 0.0
Disturbance Input Boo! 0.0 FALSE
AcknoWedge 8001 0.1 FALSE
Flash frequency :Soul 0.2 FALSE
OUT I 2.0
'
Display Soul 2.0 ;FALSE
IN OUT I 4.0
Report_Memory 'Boni 4.0 FALSE
Edge Memory Bit Bool 4.1 FALSE
TEMP 0.0
RETURN 0.0
RET VAL I 0.0 i
Ia.*. ocn
ftwork: 1 Disturboca *valuation
*Disturbance 2 Sldpa_Saaory 13 Siteport_llanory Illub_frequan

EP= - it SA 01-7
. 1
SESaplay
I 1---,.....-..-....--1( 0--3 I (5----I
Sacknoaltdge -A
99isturbance_I
Sltaportilaaorp mina.
-IA H
Page 1 of 1

26 .
Print Preview For a preview of what your printout will look like, select the File 4 Print
Preview... menu option.
Note The appearance of LAD program printouts depends on the settings made under
the Options 4 Customize 4 LAD/FBD menu option in the LAD/STL/FBD
editor.
Example: The setting for the length of the address field affects the number of
contacts that can appear side by side in the printout and the number of
characters of the symbol name that fit on a line above the contacts.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Managing Multilingual Project Documentation
SIMATIC Manager - [TIA-PROI-Solution_en D:\ S7-Kurse TIA-PROI \TIA-PRD .];; ;

FIe Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Kelp
.3
DI I 1?lel Customize...
Ctri+Ak-FE o Fiter > J vg 9
111*1
Text libraries
2 titil TIA-PRO1-Solutton_en I Symbolic name I Created in langur
My project_C9_HMI Display language...
My_prolect_CI O_MM420 Manage h9ultiLnqual Te.. Export...
E
E II test station Rewiring...
E. I CPU 315-2 DP Change Language...
Run-Time Properties...
E. 0 CI OMy_Proi Delete Language...
al Sources Compare Blocks... Reorganize
MEI Reference Data
MICROMASTER. Define Global Dote
■ Settings for Comment Management...
FC_Faults FBD
My_project_C11_C14 Configure Network
FC Count FBD
• test station
Simulate Modules FC_Edge_Detection STL
E. a C12 FC_FB_E1
E C12_FC_FB_E2 FC_MM420 LAD
SIMATIC PDM FC_Scaing STL
IE Cl2_FC_FB_E3
III 0 Cl 2 FC_FB_E4 Configure Process Monitoring Control Micromaster
E C13_organisat_block
ad Sources Charts
fill Blocks Import objects
F C14_analog_value_E
PLC-OS Connection Data
E a Chapter12_FC_FB_ei
Manages user texts
Set PG/PC Interface...

Raz Automation and Industrial Solutions
Function STEP 7 lets you multilingually manage the documentation (texts and
comments) created in a project. These can be exported from the project for
translation purposes and then later be reimported in the language in which they
were translated. The opportunity then exists to choose between different
languages for the documentation.
The following types of texts can be managed multilingually.
• Block titles and block comments
• Network titles and network comments
• Line comments from STL programs
• Comments from symbol tables, variable declaration tables, user-defined
data types and data blocks
• Comments, status names and so on, of blocks that were created with
engineering tools such as S7-GRAPH or S7-PDIAG.
14
Export The Export is carried out for all blocks and symbol tables that are located in the
selected object folder. For every text type (see above), an export file is
generated that can then be edited with EXCEL. This file contains a column with
the source text in the original language and a column in which the translated
text can be written.
Import During Import, the translated text is accepted into the selected project. The
translated text is only accepted if the original source text still exists.
Change Language For Change Language, all languages can be selected that were imported into
the project. The change is carried out for all selected object folders.
Delete Language When you delete a language, all text in that language is deleted from the
internal data management.

SIEMENS
Overview: Saving User Data

Uploading program 1. Create a new S7 program in the SIMATIC Manager
from the CPU to PG 2. Switch to the online view
3. Open the new S7 program and select Blocks folder
4. SIMATIC Manager 4 PLC 4 Upload
Upload station in PG • SIMATIC Manager 4 PLC 4 Upload Station
Load program from PG 1. Open two windows in the SIMATIC Manager:
to Memory Card... "Blocks folder of the S7 program" and "S7 Memory Card"
(Flash EPROM or MMC)
... inserted in PG/PC 2a. Use drag & drop to copy blocks to the "S7 Memory Card"
or
... inserted in CPU 2b. PLC - Download user program to Memory Card
Copy program from CPU • SIMATIC Manager - PLC - Copy RAM to ROM...
to Memory Card
(only with S7-300 with Flash EPROM))
Project archiving 1. Select the CPU on whose Memory Card the project data
on Memory Card / MMC are to be saved
(S7-400, S7-300 with MMC) 2. SIMATIC Manager - PLC 4 Save Project on Memory Card
Project archiving 1. SIMATIC Manager - File 4 Archive
2. Select project to be archived
3. Specify name and storage path of the archive file and start function
4. In the Windows Explorer, copy archive file (e.g. onto USB stick)
/
Mr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved . File: SERV1_14E.8
Uploading a Program With this function, you copy all blocks and the system data without
from CPU into PG/PC documentation (symbol table, variable and parameter names, comments) from
the CPU into the selected program folder. The selected program folder then
contains a "PLC copy" with the current online program.
Upload Station With this function, you load the complete hardware station as a new
in PG/PC station in the project. It is not possible to overwrite an already existing station.
Load Program You can load the blocks and system data from the blocks folder of an S7
from PG/PC to program onto a memory card. You can insert the memory card in the interface
Memory Card of the PG/PC or in the slot provided by the CPU if the CPU supports this service.
Copy Program If a user program is stored on a memory card, you can still make program
from CPU to changes online. The modified blocks are stored in the internal RAM of the CPU,
Memory Card while the unchanged block remains stored on the memory card. You can store
the modified blocks on the memory card with the Copy RAM to ROM function.
Archiving Project You save the entire data of the project (such as user programs with all
on Memory Card comments, symbol tables, and hardware configurations from all hardware
stations) on the memory card with the "Save Project on Memory Card" function.
Archiving Project With the "Archive Project" function, you save the complete data of the project
(such as user programs with all comments, symbol tables, and hardware
configurations from all hardware stations) in an archive file in compressed format
(*.zip, *.arj etc.). The archive file is much smaller than the non-archived project
and you can move or copy the archive as often as you like with the Windows
Explorer.
ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIEMENS
Uploading an S7 Program from the CPU to the PG

,11:112(.1
File Edit nsert
I Qptions Window Help
D ! g? X, fib Access Rights .:_17.17 I Pd*

Downloyi Ctrl+L x
MYRoiect and
Configure... Ctrl+K FC1
E 1111 S7_300 Station Compile Download Objects... FC16
CPU 315-2 DP Pi] FC19
S7program ••• SFB2
El II
Upload Station to PG...
Blocks SFB5
ID 0
Copy RAM to ROM...
a MICROMASTp.420 Download User Program to Memory Card SFC1
et3 S7
ffl SFC4
Program
Save to Memory Card...
SFC7
Retrieve from Memory Card...
SFC13
Manage M7 System... SFC17
Drive SFC20
SFC23
Oise* Accessible Nodes
SFC29
Change Module Identification... SFC32
CPU Messages... SFC36
Display Force Values SFC39
Monitor/Modify Variables SFC42
• SFC46
Diagnostic/ Setting
SFC50
PROFIBUS SFC54
Edit Ethernet Node... SFC57
Ass's p,rPC SFC64
Cancel PG/PC Assignment SFC67
Update Firmware SFC72
Update the OPeret/MISYstem.-
Press Ft to get Help. FIBUS)
Save Service Data.
SIMATIC S7 Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.9
1 1 SITRAIN Training for
11.1
Copying a CPU Before you make changes to an existing program, you should at least make a
Program onto a PG backup copy of the CPU's S7 program.
What to Do 1. In the SIMATIC Manager, create a new, hardware-independent S7 program

(in the slide "PLC Copy")
2. Select the Blocks folder of the new S7 program and activate the ONLINE
view so that all blocks stored in the CPU are visible in the right window.
3. Load all blocks from the CPU into the new Blocks folder
PLC 4 Upload.
Note: Only the complete S7 program is "uploaded" into the project, not the complete
hardware station. Even though the CPU's "system data" are also copied during
upload it is not possible to retrieve the configuration and parameterization data
of the complete hardware station,
As well, the uploaded S7 program has no documentation whatsoever. That is,
there are no comments such as network titles, no symbols and also no variable
and parameter names.

SIEMENS
Uploading a Hardware Station in the PG (PLC Copy)

VSIMATIC Manager - MyProject
Fib Edit insert Window Help
0 a; I I? RP X, 13a Access Rights
-2'.. MyProject D: Courses'; MyProject Ctrl+L

Ctrl+K
B t1 Fr
IE §1,399JBleilori. Compile and Download Objects...
MATIC 300 St
VIIII.SIMATIC 390(1) . "*.
Upload Station to PG... MAT IC 300 St
a. CPU 315-2 DP %.• •
Copy RAM to ROM. MATIC HMI S
• Eva 57 Program A° t Program
'al Sources •• Download User Program to Memory Card
• PI
el*,•* * Save to Memory Card...
TOMOkr •- OFIBUS
Retrieve from Memory Card... OFIBUS
E sr 57 Program
Manage M7 System...
Drive
Display Accessible Nodes
Change Module Identification...

CPU Messages,..
MonitorlModify Variables
Diagnostic/Setting
PROFIBUS
Edit Ethernet Node...
Assign PG/PC
Cancel PG/PC Assignment
Update Firmware
Update the Operating System...
SIMATIC S7 Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.10
A
Mr
PLC Copy Before you make changes to an existing program, you should make a backup
copy of the entire hardware station (PLC copy) in the offline project.
What to Do The uploaded station is always stored as a new hardware station in a new or
already existing project (as in the slide).
PLC - Upload Station to PG...
Note: The uploaded hardware station contains all configuration and parameterization
data of the station (including networks and components) as well as the
complete user program. The uploaded S7 program, however, has no
documentation, that is, there are no comments such as network titles, no
symbols and also no variable and parameter names.
ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIEMENS
Transferring a Program onto a Memory Module
04====11M111=111111111L
view delp
He EdIt riser. 41,C Qptions Window
12
:fop e Er= Ill
< No Filter >
LptlyProject — DA,Co_rses \MyProject _jai X
MyRroiect • Ob eel name Symbolic name Created in Ian, a. .•

= II S7_300 Station 2,..) Systemdaten --- .._
- IN CPU 315.2DP 0 081 06_Cycle LAD
al S7program 0 FC1 STL
za Sources
a Blocks
0 FC14
0 FC15
FC_S ignal
FC_M ode
LAD
LAD
+ 1 MICROMASTER_420 .•
- • 0 FC16 FC_ConvM otor LAD
c -:. Touchpanel
• 0 FC17 FC_F ault LAD
0 FC18 FC_Count LAD
.•• 0 FC19 FC_Count_Add LAD
.• 'q
.-
_ VAT_I/0 -Conveyor VAT I/0-Conveyor
/ it I 2.11
7/,1
n S7 memory card ,jinjal
57 memory card 21 System data 0 OB1 0. OB100

C} FBI 0. FB20 0. FC1
Cl. F Cl 4 ci. FC15 0. FC16
0. FC17 0 FC18 0. FC19
0. FC20 0 FC42 o 0131
0. DB2 0. DB3 oDB19
(This window can only be selected

if the Memory Card is inserted in the PG )
Press Fl to get Help. ICP5611(PROFIBUS)

itt-
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserve,' File: SERV1_14E.11
Prerequisite The memory module (Memory Card or MMC) must be inserted in the PG.
As well, the Memory Card driver must be loaded in the STEP 7 software. If this
is not the case, you can install the driver via
"Start" 4 Simatic STEP 7 Memory Card Parameter Assignment"
Then, the "Memory Card" icon exists in the SIMATIC Manager's toolbar.
Erasing the Before you can transfer the program onto the memory module, the memory
Memory Module module must be erased.
The Memory Card can always only be erased completely. That is, individual
blocks can not be erased or overwritten.
Transferring the 1. In addition to the project window, open the Memory Card in a further
Program window in the SIMATIC Manager ( File 9 S7 Memory Card 9 Open)
2. Arrange the Project window and the Memory Card window one below the 14
other as shown in the slide.
3. In the Project window, in the appropriate Blocks folder, select the desired
blocks and drag them with the mouse into the Memory Card window.
Note With most of the CPUs, the Memory Card can also be written in the CPU using
PLC Download User Program to Memory Card

SIEMENS
Saving a Project onto a Memory Card

Manager - Nyproject (Component view) -- si-Courses My_proje)
_,L51.1 c1
et) Fie Edit Insert rPtc View Options Varelow Nab ,12.111
c
D114:I ail, Acce" RCit' I < No Flue > J Yo '13141
E Dowrioad
MV_Porocl I Created in Anoxia, _I Sin in the wok
E SIMATIC 3( Compie/Downbiel Proyams...
E • CPU 31
El a cam upload FBD
FBD
Ibload Station
OIL
tiI2! Copy RAM to ROM...
08
EIC.343 Downbad user program to memory card
91 test station
ED LI Chacter12
Retrieve from Maxey Card...
ManageC17 S, itern...
Drive
STEP 7Daa
Display Force Values Caaulawaw aaa
Ma ma wawa* Taraawavlbe waradaial Varna
McmitorlModfy Variables POWarawkaad
P Cieeipreo
Diagnostic/Setting
PROFIBUS
area
Assim Monet Address...
Assign PGIPC Soechit
:J
41 fEM
i
Cancel PGIPC assignmer mix OP tr NC pa
Update Operating System... mix a.m.*. x aiX re
Pao/MIX aw
1
Saves desired data to the Memory Card. J
SUM.loWatta PLC
May Led
_J

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_14E.12 'lltr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Function With the functions "Save to Memory Card..."and "Retrieve from Memory
Card...", you can save and retrieve the complete data of a project (user
programs with all comments, symbol tables, hardware configurations etc. from
all hardware stations) on a memory card. The memory card can be located in a
CPU or in the memory card programming slot of a PG or PC.
The project data are compressed before they are saved on the memory card
and are extracted when retrieved. The size of the project data to be saved
corresponds to the archive file size of the project. If the memory capacity of the
memory card is not sufficient a message will appear indicating so.
Project Data Similar to the archive of a project - the project data contains all data
with / without belonging to the project and all user programs of the CPUs.
User Program The user programs contained in the project data can not be read by the CPUs
and thus cannot be executed. With the option "Load the user program also", the
executable user program is also stored in addition to the project data. This user
program is the one assigned to the CPU on which the memory card is inserted.
Area of Use If several co-workers in the service and maintenance area have the job of
maintaining the SIMATIC S7 PLC, it is difficult to quickly provide every worker
with the current project data for a service assignment. When the project data
are available locally in one of the CPUs to be maintained, every worker can
access the current project data and make changes, if necessary, which in turn
are current and available to all other workers.
Note The functions Save to Memory Card and Retrieve from Memory Card are
unrestricted in the S7-400 system. They are available for the S7-300 system
after Oct. 2002.
ST-SERV1
▪
SIEMENS
Loading a Project from the Micro Memory Card (MMC)
a File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window I1 Al

olad 1?1,1 Access Rights !keine system... Ia' MILO 'IN
Doe.inioad Ctrl+L
PROFINET 10 is name KNOW HOW protec... Load mem
Configure...
111 SIMATIC 3C EPROM
CPU 31 Compile/Download Programs...
E
E CJ Tes Compile and Download Obje:ts.
EPROM
E Upload to PG
Upload Station to PG...
RE C7 Testprosran Copy RAM to ROM...
Download user program to memory card Modified
Adobe Acrob... 06.02.2001 ...
Manage M7 System...
Drive

I7 Li /Referent Michael lemon
CPU Messages... V tSofivare
Display Force Values • STIA_PRO123_v55
Monitor/Modify Variables o abc
AX NF ZZ
Diagnostic/Setting P Documents and Settings
PROFIBUS
File type: F f.D DOTS_SWP
RECYCLER
Edit Ethernet Node,.. N
Asnon PG/PC OK
i SIMATIC 57 - Projekte
Cancel PG/PC As5i:,,,,r[v.
L-I SIMATIC 57 Archrve
Update Fume
Retrieves desired Nes se 0,th.; 157 COUSeS
Update the Operating System...
OS I Mauer ordneri

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 P
• .Automation and Industrial Solutions
Introduction With the PLC 4 "Save to Memory Card" and PLC 4 "Retrieve from Memory
Card" functions, you can save all project data and any files you wish for a later
application on a Memory Card and then you can retrieve it later on. The
functions for saving project data and retrieving from the Memory Card are,
however, only available for newer CPUs (after Oct. 2002).
The project data is compressed (zipped) before it is saved on the Memory Card
and is unzipped when it is retrieved. The size of the project data to be stored
corresponds to the archive file size of this project.
Application If several employees in the service and maintenance department are

responsible for maintaining the SIMATIC automation system, it is difficult to
quickly provide each employee with the current project data and possible
service instructions that exist in file form.
If, however, the project data of a CPU is available locally in one of the CPUs to
be serviced, every employee can access the current project data and, if
necessary, make modifications, which in are then available for all other
employees.
Operating If the project data does not exist on the programming device used (PG/PC),
you can select the source CPU in the window "Accessible Nodes". Open the
window "Accessible Nodes" with the menu options PLC - Display Accessible
Nodes and select the desired Connection/CPU with the Data on the Memory
Card. Now select the menu options PLC 9 Retrieve from Memory Card. In the
follow-up dialog, choose the data to be transmitted and the project path.
Note You can protect CPUs against unauthorized access by using a Password. See
the Hardware Configuration chapter for more information.

SIEMENS
Archiving a Project
IA=1===11111M1011111M111=1111V
File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help
New... Ctrl+N
EI- *I d II<NoFiker> 1_179 113
Open... Archiving
111111111•11112k
Close
User projects I Libraries I Sample projects I Multiprojects I
Multiproject
Name Storage path
57 Memory Card MyProject D: \Courses WyProject
Memory Card File
Save As...
Archiving - Select an archive -:
Delete...
Archive That Goes across Diskettes:
Reorganize...
Manage... I N°
r Incremental Archiving
EMEZI >
Retrieve... r Reset Archive Bit
Print r Check Consistency
User projects:
Page Setup...
Libraries:
1 57 memory card OK Cancel I Help
Sample projects:
2 Loesungsprojekt_PRO 14 I
Multiprojects:
3 SERV1 5 (Project) — File name: IMyprojec zip Save I
4 SERV1_13 (Project) —
OK Save as lype: I PKZip 12.0-Archive('.zip) Cancel ell)
Exit
Lit
Saves project or library (compressed) h an archive. A
SIMATIC S7 Date: SITRAIN Training for

18.09.2009
Introduction Since the data in a project can take up a lot of memory space and might not fit
completely onto a disk, an archive function is provided.
This archive function compresses the data so that it only takes up
approximately 1/8 of its original amount of memory. It uses the normal file
compression utilities, such as PKZIP, ARJ, LHARC, RAR or WINZIP. One of
these programs must first be installed on the PG/PC. If you want to use long file
names for the projects, you will need PKZIP, WinZip or RAR.
The ARJ and PKZIP file compression utilities are supplied with STEP 7.
You set the path for the archive program by selecting the Options - Customize
4 Archive menu options in the SIMATIC Manager.
Archiving 1. The project to be archived must be closed in the SIMATIC Manager.

2. Select the File 4 Archive... menu option.
3. Select the project to be archived in the dialog window and press "OK".
4. Select the "Save in:" path and "File name" in the next dialog box.
5. In the last dialog box, you can choose between the following options:
- Archive That Goes across Diskettes = Can split the archive file
onto several diskettes
- Incremental Archiving = Only the files with the ACR
attribute (STEP7 files) are
archived.
- Reset Archive Bit = Archive only the files that have
been changed since the last
archive.
- Check Consistency = Compare the files to be archived
(only for ARJ)
Retrieving 1. Select the File 9 Retrieve... menu option.

2. Select the "Look in: " location where the archived file is stored and select
the "File name" of the archived file and "Open".
3. In the next dialog box, select the destination directory and "OK".
4. Use the last dialog box to select options for overwriting and restoring the
storage path
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Memory Concept of the S7-300 until Oct. 2002 =
Load memory:
Blocks:
> • Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB) -a-rn
• Data blocks
(DB) RAM Flash
Additional info EPROM
Comments
Symbols Working memory:

• OB,FC,FB
Blocks:
DB
• Logic blocks n. reten.I reten.
(OB,FC,FB)
• Data blocks
(DB) With Power System memory:
ON without • PII,PIQ
battery • M, T, C
backup n. relent reten.
With Power
Blocks: OFF without
• Logic blocks battery
11111 Retentive memor backup
7
(OB,FC,FB)
• Data blocks Flash EPROM • Retentive
(DB) Memory Card in PG M, T, C
Additional info (inserted later in the • Retent. Data blocks
CPU) z
SIMATIC S7 Date
File
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.15
l
ikiT Automation and Industrial Solutions
Load Memory The load memory is a component of a programmable module. It contains load
objects (logic blocks, data blocks, and additional information) created on the
programming device.
The load memory can either be a plug-in memory card (EPROM) or an
integrated RAM.
Work Memory The work memory (integrated RAM) contains the parts of the S7 program
relevant for running your program.
The RAM work memory is integrated in the CPU and is backed up by the
battery.
System Memory The system memory contains the memory areas for:
• Process image input and output tables (PII, PIQ)
• Timers (T)
• Counters (C)
• L stack (L).
Retentive Memory The retentive memory is a non-volatile RAM used for backing up bit memories,
timers, counters and data blocks even if there is no backup battery. A Flash
EPROM Memory Card must be used to do this. You specify the areas to be
backed up when assigning the CPU's object parameters.
Inserting a When you insert a memory card, the operating system requests a memory
Memory Card reset. (STOP LED flashes slowly). You perform the memory reset by turning
the mode selector to the "MRES" position. The sections of the program relevant
for execution are then transferred from the memory card (with load memory
function) to the work memory.
You must leave the memory card inserted while the program is being
executed..
Memory Reset During a memory reset, all user data - with the exception of the diagnostic
buffer and the MPI parameters - are deleted.

SIEMENS
Memory Concept of the S7-300 after Oct. 2002

L
Micro Memory Card
(CPU load memory)
Blocks:
• Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
Comments • Data blocks
(DB) .
Symbols • System data
Blocks:
4j Load
• Logic blocks Working memory: Warm

(OB,FC,FB) Sections of the Power restart
• Data blocks • logic blocks OFF after
-
(DB) Power
• data blocks ON
relevant for execution
Blocks:
• Logic blocks
System memory:
(OB,FC,FB)
• Data blocks • PII, PIQ Power
(DB) • Local data OFF
• complete Micro Memory Card retentive
project, if in the PG • M, T, C
desired (inserted later in the n. retent.
CPU)

File: SERV1_14E.16 W. Automation and Industrial Solutions
Load Memory The Micro Memory Card (MMC) is used as the load memory of the CPU. It is
Micro Memory Card used to store logic and data blocks as well as the system data (hardware
(MMC) configuration, communication connections etc.). If you like, the complete project
can be stored. That way, you have the symbols, comments and configuration
data, for example, for HMI or drives, available.
The MMC contents are retentive.
If a block or the entire user program is downloaded into the CPU from the PG,
the information is stored on the MMC. All block sections relevant for execution
are automatically copied into the work memory (RAM).
It is only possible to load a block or the user program as well as operate
the CPU when the MMC is inserted!
A memory reset is required every time the MMC is pulled or inserted!
Work Memory The work memory (RAM) is integrated on the CPU and only contains the parts
of the S7 program relevant for running your program (such as, only the current
values of the data blocks, not the initial values).
• Timers (T)
• Counters (C)
• Local data (L)
Retentive All data that are saved in a power failure and/or which don't lose their contents
are considered retentive. This is all the work memory data as well as the bit
memories, timers and counters declared as retentive in the hardware
configuration.
Retentiveness is achieved in that the above-mentioned data are stored on the
MMC in a power failure and are written back to the RAM after a warm restart
when the power comes back on.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Memory Concept of the S7-400

Load memory:
Blocks:
• Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
• Data blocks
(DB) RAM Flash
Comments Additional info EPROM
Symbols Working memory:

• OB,FC,FB Backup
Blocks: via
• DB battery
• Logic blocks
(OB,FC,FB)
• Data blocks
(DB) System memory:
• PII,PIQ
• M, T, C
Blocks:
• Logic blocks
rm.
-111
(OB,FC,FB)
• Data blocks Flash EPROM
(DB) Memory Card in PG
Additonal info (inserted later in the
CPU)
Rtr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Load Memory The load memory can either be a plug-in memory card or integrated RAM. In
the S7-400, the memory card (RAM or Flash EPROM) expands the internal
load memory. A memory card is always required for the S7-400, since the
internal load memory only has a limited size.
Work Memory The work memory contains only the data relevant at runtime. The RAM work
memory is integrated in the CPU and is backed up by the battery.
• Timers (T)
• Counters (C)
• L stack (L).
14
Memory Card When a RAM memory card is used, the system must be operated with a
battery. The battery backs up the data on the memory card and any internal
RAM in case of a power failure.
When a Flash EPROM memory card is used, the user program is stored in the
memory card making it power failure safe. The data found in the internal RAM
are backed up by the battery.
The "Hot Restart" mode is possible only in a backed up system.
Inserting a When you insert a memory card, the operating system requests a memory
Memory Card reset (STOP LED flashes slowly). You perform the memory reset by turning the
mode selector to the "MRES" position. The sections of the program relevant for
execution are then transferred from the memory card (load memory) to the
work memory.
You must leave the memory card inserted while the program is being executed.

SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Documenting a Block and Printing It Out

3121TIC NV Dcoicc‘NY NC-etion■ CD13 314 \ • -A MIN - <off1112.› 01 22 20 3
/ / 0 10:05150
Rea/or. 2 IDDIAL Dodo
DoeleS21
'1' NM Accept - is WV Z. occ• 191
-
:C Disoulemee SETSSE -IV
CD -
2
.S2/ANodmEel
eet .
SMILE
::D ConveyorE
S_POL111
-
TV
-
B BCO

‘Vir
Task 1 Provide the networks of a block with network comments and network titles.
Then take a look at a print preview of the block with headers and footers.
What to Do 1. Edit the headers and footers for the printouts

SIMATIC Manager - File - Page Setup... - Labeling fields...
2. In a block, edit the network titles and network comments
LAD / STL / FBD Editor 4 View 4 Display with 9 Comment
3. Take a look at the block in the print preview
LAD / STL / FBD Editor 4 File 4 Print Preview...
Task 2 Also take a look at the symbol table as a printout.

Open the Symbol Editor and select Symbol table 9 Print Preview
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Ex.2: Saving the Program and Hardware Configuration (PLC Copy)
File Edit Insert PLC lAew Options Window Help

Which module do you want to reach?
M11
❑D Access Rights
MyProject Download Ctrl+L
E F
Configure... ttrl+K
S Back r6 E.
E MI S7_30
Compile and Download Objects...
71
E0 Slot: ..,
,
Upload tc PG
Touch
d Sr.ahrri to PS
Copy RAM to ROM... Target Station: 6 Local
Download User Program to Memory Card
r Can be reached by means of gateway
Retrieve from Memory Card... Enter core ection to target station:
PROFD3U5 address 1 Module type I Station name I Module name I Plant designation
Manage M7 System... 2 CPU 315-... S7 300 S... CPU 315-2...
Drive
Display Accessible Nodes Accessible Nodes
Change Module Identification...

57 300 St...
CPU Messages...
4 IM151•1
,_1_11125.1
pe EcIA Insert KC Dew captions Niindow bslip
gib e
IL3; MyProject -- D: \ Courses \ MyProject ,igjiLci UPdate
E z., MyProject Hardware i CPU 315 DP
E II F LC_■ ■_. ,,
-
E ffii S7_300_Stalion Cancel I Help

II D Touchpanel
—J I
Press F1 to get help. 05611(1 4

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_14E.19 I Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task You are to make a data backup (a so-called "PLC Copy") that includes the
hardware configuration and parameter assignment data and the complete S7
program as well as the current production data (quantities etc.).
What to Do 1. Load your complete hardware station into your current project
SIMATIC Manager PLC 9 Upload Station to PG...
2. In the dialog "Select node address" that then appears, activate the button
"View" to display all the accessible nodes.
3. Select your CPU and start the upload by pressing "OK".
4. Rename the newly created station "PLC Copy".
Result A new hardware station has been created in your project (in the slide "PLC
Copy") whose CPU contains the current S7 program with the current
production data, such as, quantities etc. The "uploaded" S7 program, however,
does not contain any comments, any variable and parameter names and also
no symbols!

SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Archiving "My Project"
VSIMATIC Manager
Fie PLC View Options Window Help
Archiving 2
New...
New Project' Wizard. , .
User projects I Libraries Sample projects Mukiprojects
Open...
Open Version 1 Project... Name I Storage path
GD_Cornmunication CAS7_Kurse1GD_Kommu
S7 Memory Card Mein_Nojekt C: S7_Kurse Mein_Pro
Memory Card Fie ojec 7_Lourses My_Proje
SERV1_32S C. S7_Courses S ervl _32
Delete... SERV2_32S C: S7_Courses Serv2_32
Reorgaize...
Manage...
Archiving - Select an archive

User Projects:
Print Setup...
Save in: S7_Courses cn,
Libraries:
My_Proje
1 My_Project (Project) - CA57_Courseskley_Proje Sample Projects:
....1 5erv132s
2 Accessible Nodes - MPI Multiprojects:
5erv2
3 SERV2_325 (Project) - CA,57_Courses1.5erv2_32
J5erv2_32
4 SERV1 325 (Project) CA57_Courses Serv1_32 OK
Exit Ak+r-4
Saves project or Itcary (compressed) in an archive. Filename I HY_Proie. zip Save
Save as type: IPrZip 0-Aidwive zip) -

Cancel

gr
Task Archive your project called "My_Project" for data backup.
What to Do 1. Start the archive function

File 4 Archive... - Project
2. In the following dialogs, select the settings displayed in the slide
3. Using the Windows Explorer, check the success of your archive and
compare the size (memory requirement) of the original project with that of
the archive created.
Windows Explorer 4 right mouse click on Archive or Project - Properties
- Size
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
If You Want to Know More

complete a topic.
14

SIEMENS
MMC - as Additional Data Memory on the CPU

Ilcr!SIMATIC Manager -1**PROFINET-IO (Component view ) -- U....Siemens \ StepTks7proj \##PROFIN) .,_1=21
a He Ed[ Insert Pic View Options Window Help ,ItyjLci
D Ical .1?16,1 Access Rights 1. d I < No Fite; > In_d VI*I AIMIrl t lj
E '', tIPROFINET-I D°wri°ad Crl+L
E II SIMATIC 3( c `-' 1 f' g u' e • - rtrk-K. Symboic name I Created in language I Size in the work me.. I T. ,
-- — SI
a III CPU 31 Compile/Downbad Programs- FBD 86 0
E, Compile and Download °Inlets „ . 0:1 38 0
Upload to PG
a s71
:hi! Upload Station to PG.. FBD Load Memory 3838 00

Copy RAM to ROM.. FBD
FBD 38 0
Download user program to memory card FEI D 48 Ft
Save to Memory Card..
Retrieve from Memory Card.. Data Memory
lana e (17 S,;ten...

Drive g
r
►

CPU Messages..
Monitor/Modify Variables
Diagnostic /Setting ►
PROFIBUS ►
Edk Ethernet Node..
Assi n PG /PC
Cancelg PG/PC Assi nment
Update Firmware g
Update the Operating System..
141
Downloading and controlfrig blocks and programs, modifying and monitoring modulI es.
A
4
Date: TrainIndustri
ing for al Solutions
File: 18.09.2009
SIMATIC S7 111 SITRAIN
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. SERV1_14E.22 mc Automation and
General The Micro Memory Card (MMC) is used by the CPU operating system as a
load memory and can also be used by the user for any data storage.
The loading procedure is the known procedure for integrated load memories:
Menu option: PLC - Download or the appropriate icon in the toolbar.
Load Memory The load memory is used in the CPU to store:

• Logic blocks (FC, FB, OB),
• Data blocks,
• System data (hardware configuration, communication connections etc.)
The load memory as an additional data storage area can be used, by the user,
to store:
• S7 project data (complete S7 project, that is, user programs with all
comments, symbol tables, hardware configurations etc., of all hardware
stations). The data storage is realized as a compressed archive.
• any other non-compressed files, such as, *.doc or *.pdf project
documentation and device descriptions
Commands Menu options: PLC - Save / Retrieve to / from Memory Card
Note It is not necessary to compress the MMC. Deleted areas (pages) are
completely reused the next time information is saved. During CPU startup,
there is also an MMC Check in which "lost pages" are "recaptured".
The loading times vary depending on the operating mode of the CPU:
Operating mode RUN - slow, since the user program has priority in
processing. Operating mode STOP 4 fast, since the user program doesn't
have to be processed.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
PLC: Storing Data on the Memory Card

Save to Memory Card in the PLC
Corresponds to
—STEP 7 Data
"Load user program
/7 Current user program Caution!
on MC" The memory card will be completely deleted if avant user
C find HW configuration)
program' is selected
Currently open project
is compressed and t3fies in cu I rn,Piproject
copied
All individual files except Other ties

archives (e.g. *.zip) and
directories
each MM420_Manuals_englisch sfi
DA1ITIA_PRO123_V551Entivi
DAV IA_PRO123_VS5 \Entwi
MM420_0perating Instruction.pd1 D 18TIA_PRO123_V55LEnhvi
MM420 Parameter Listpci
Current Selection List !!

No current MMC content
Dateien laden in EPROM Memory Card our CPU
Deleien Ubeitragen ins Zietsyslem

Sunk D: \S7_SERV1 \Ubtrgen \MM420_Pmerroteriste.pd1
Storage location on PLC Zost CPU
■•• Memory Card Detenialsombegung rn Zielsystem lault
IF14,1,11
Geschatzte Dauer 4 me 23 sec
Geserries Derenvoiumen. 1 396 MB
Bemis ubereagen. 1.396 MB
OK Help I
Starts transmission
.•**

41 SlT RAl
: N T rai n
Automa t ion and 1 inni
t for
a l Solutions
What to Do 1. An S7 project must be open, otherwise the function

"PLC - Save to Memory Card..." is inactive !!
2. Configured S7 CPU with Micro Memory Card (MMC) must be selected.
3. The target CPU must be in the STOP mode.
Note The transmission is finished when the blue bar has reached the end and the
message "Data transmission to the memory card is finished" appears.
Download files to EPROM Memory Card on the CP
Transfer files to target system

Source C:tS iemensIS tep71s7proj11#13PR 0 Fl N=PR 0 Fl N s7p
14
Target: CPU
The data transmission to the memory card is finished.
Innummilemmommmummounnommo
Total duration: 35 s
Total data volume: 981 kB
Total transmitted: 981 kB
Close it

SIEMENS
PLC: Getting Data from the Memory Card

=2=1:1=11=NIMIIINIMIMPwr.'
Contents are displayed File name Size Type I Modified
Attention! File type by SOPROFILIET-I0... 1009840 STEP Pry in 10.2005
default only "S7 Mr44 PPOFIBUS... 525792 Adobe Acrob. 06.02.20
Projects"; if necessary,
set to "all files"
I
Fie name:
Fie bee. Res C m)

STEP7 wee: r.srpj
STEP 7 Lbseies
OK Help
Select + highlight STEP 7 Lie projects r.k7p)
STEP 7 Lie smolt lies t'.k7e
particular files
111=111=12•MEML Deteien holm eon Memory
Oderert von Perlsystern oolen Save where ? Deleien ibertragen on PG

Om* MM420_Psameterkte pu (CPO)
I ease I Typ keendert Zet D \ T
03 0 aretsteise
57-Proples7p fReferent %Owl )ant= Datenobernagung is PG laud
1209696 STEP ... 23.01.2004 13:36:20
E43 •Software
Et3 {Z) rrIA_PRO123_‘,55
Gezehatze Daue, 3 rrn 54 one
Er; abc
Geserntes Detenvoiurnen 1 396 MB
0AXPFZZ
Bemis ti:ertiven 1 396 MB
E 0 Documents and Settngs
I O DOTS_swp
n RECYaER
Datenstna IMM420_Pererroderiste prE
Da 400 Vie Deleon( 1 E sEmAric S7 - ProJekte
OK 6e_j
Ab eken Mee
Ordner lit piles • ems
Starts transmission
I...
4

gr,
What to Do 1. An S7 project must be open, otherwise the function

"PLC - Retrieve from Memory Card..." is inactive !!
2. Configured S7 CPU with Micro Memory Card (MMC) must be selected.
3. The target CPU must be in the STOP mode.
Note The transmission is completed when the blue bar has reached the end and the
message "Data transmission to the programming device (PG) is finished"
appears.
- When S7 projects are "gotten", they are copied, unzipped and, if necessary,
opened (after being prompted).
- When other files are "gotten", they are only copied in the target directory.
Get files from memory card
Transfer files to PG
Source IIIIPROFINET -10 (CPU)
Target: D: \S7 courses
The data transmission to the programming device (PG) is finished.
Total duration: 27 s
Total data volume: 358 kB
Total transmitted: 358 kB
Close I
ST-SERV1
Page 24 Documenting, Saving, Archiving
SIEMENS

SIMATIC S7
Date.
File:
18.09.2009
SERV115E.1 N'41
. Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Objectives 2
Task ... 3
Exercise 1: Performing a CPU Memory Reset and a Warm Restart .......... 4
Exercise 2: Setting the PG Interface to MPI .......... 5
Exercise 3: Deleting an Old Project and Retrieving a New Project .......... 6
Exercise 4: Hardware Commissioning .......... 7
Exercise 5: Software Commissioning 8
Exercise 6: Software Expansion .......... 9
15

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Objectives
be able to perform a CPU memory reset

be able to adapt a given HW station to a real HW station
be able to debug simple program errors
be able to program simple program expansions

ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Task
DO
T_System_ON • SIEMENS SIMATIC PANEL
T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM •
T_Jog_RIGHT L_MAN •
T_Jog_LEFT L_AUTO •
S_M/A_ModeSelect •
T_M/A_Accept •
•
•
T_Ackn_Fault L_Conv_Fault

File: SERV1_15E.3 %Er Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task The TIA project that is now to be commissioned is to fulfill exactly the same
functions as the project you have already created during the course. As well, it is
also to be expanded by some smaller functions.
Commissioning Hardware Commissioning:

For this, the automation components of the TIA project have to be adapted to
the actual components in your training station by ...
replacing the components (CPU, IM151, I/O modules...) that are not the
same as the existing exercise components
setting the addresses (PROFIBUS addresses, addresses of the I/O modules)
Software Commissioning:
The logic errors in the given S7 program have to be eliminated.
Expansion Small function expansions have to be programmed.
15

SIEMENS
Exercise 1: Performing a CPU Memory Reset and a Warm Restart

Until Oct. 2002 After Oct. 2002
RUN-P
RUN 1. Set the mode selector switch to STOP RUN
STOP
STOP V!! MRES
MRES
RUN-P
2. Hold (Press) the mode selector switch in the MRES
RUN position until the STOP LED has flashed twice slowly. tIN
S TOEs
P
Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to mR
STOP (V the STOP position.
if
MRES
within 1 sec
RUN-P
RUN 3. Turn (press) the mode selector switch to the MRES posi-
I1RUN
tion once more until the STOP LED begins to flash quickly.
STOP
STOP Cl. Release the mode selector switch so that it returns to MRES
the STOP position.
MRES
RUN-P
RUN
— RUN
4. Set the mode selector switch to the RUN-P (RUN)
STOP
STOP CI)
position. (A warm restart is carried out in the transition
MRES
from STOP to RUN/RUN-P)
MRES

Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_15E.4 qr' Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task You are to perform a CPU memory reset and check whether the memory reset
was successful.
What to Do 1. If a CPU with MMC is used at your training area, the MMC must first be
explicitly erased.
For example, SIMATIC Manager 9 Accessible Nodes 9 in the Blocks
folder select all blocks 9 Delete
2. Carry out the memory reset according to the steps in the slide above
(manually and from the PG).
3. Check if the memory reset was successful. It was successful if only system
blocks (SDBs, SFCs, SFBs) are left in the CPU
SIMATIC Manager 9 Accessible Nodes 9 Double-click on MPI=2
9 Click on Blocks
Notes To make sure that no "old" blocks are left in the CPU, a memory reset of the
CPU should be performed. The following steps are carried out during a
memory reset:
• All user data is deleted (Exception: MPI parameter assignments and the
contents of the diagnostic buffer are retained).
• Hardware test and initialization
• If an Eprom memory card or a Micro Memory Card (MMC) is installed, the
CPU copies all data on the cards that is relevant for execution back into the
internal RAM after the memory reset.
• If no memory card or Micro Memory Card is installed, the preset MPI
address on the CPU is retained. If, however, a memory card is installed, the
MPI address stored on it is loaded.
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 2: Setting the PG Interface to MPI

SIMATIC Manager
Q>Options >=1=1.111.11
Access Path 1
Access Point of the Appkation
Interface Parameter Assignment Used

1CP5611(M PI) Properties
CP5611(MPI) Diagnostics
CP5611(PPI)
CP5611(PROFIBUS - DP Slave) _J Copy..
CP5611(PROFIB US) <Active> zi Delete MPI
— Station Parameter-.
Parameter assignment of your
communications processor CP5611 for an r PG/PC is the only master on the bus
MPI network)
— Interfaces -
Address: ID
Add/Remove: Select... Timeout 11 s
Network Parameters -
OK Cancel 1 He
Transmission Rate: 1187 5 Kbps
Highest Station Address. 131
OK Default I Cancel I He I

Task Depending on the type of CPU used, it could be that after the CPU memory
reset the PROFIBUS interface is no longer parameterized and so the PG can
no longer access the CPU. If this is the case, the PG's interface has to be
switched to MPI and connected to the MPI interface of the CPU.
What to Do 1. Using the "Accessible Nodes" function, check whether you can set up a
connection to the CPU.
SIMATIC Manager 4 PLC 4 Display Accessible Nodes
If you can not set up a connection to the CPU:
2. Activate the "Set PG/PC Interface" function

SIMATIC Manager 4 Options 4 Set PG/PC Interface
3. In the Properties dialog, change the properties so that they appear as those
shown in the slide

SIEMENS
Exercise 3: Deleting an Old Project and Retrieving a New Project
V5IMATIC Manager - MeinProjekt

File Edit Insert PLC View Options Window Help
New... Ctrl+N Retrieving - Select an archive JJ
Open... Ctrl+O
Look jn: t;:_) Archive Li 4- C(3 de El'
Close SERV l_A. zip
SERV I _B. zip
Multiproject
4
11 SERV I JtartUp.zip
57 Memory Card
Memory Card File
Save As... Ctrl+S
Reorganize...
File name: I SERVl_StartU p. zip 2pen
Files of lype: I PI(.74. 1 2.0-Archive (".zip)
Pitt
Page Setup.
SERVI_Startlip D: Courses SERV1_StartUp _1J xl
1 Loesungsprojeld_PRO1 V59
Object name Symbolic
2 SERV1_5 (Project) — D:\Courses\5ERV1. E S7_300_Station S7_300_Station SIMATIC 300
3 5IZRVI_B (Project) — DACoursesliSIERVI. E CPU 315-2 DP Touchpanel SIMATIC HMI
4 SERVl_A (Project) — DACcurseASERVI ID 0 Chap15_StartUp
VMPI(1) MPI
al Sources
Exit VPROFIBUS(1) PROFIBUS
Blocks
E aMICROMASTER_420
Touchpanel 4l

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_15E.6 r, Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task Delete — insofar as it exists — the old project "SERV1_StatUp" and then retrieve
the project archive "SERV1_StatUp.zip"
What to Do 1. Delete the old project "SERV1_StatUp"

SIMATIC Manager - File - Delete... - User Projects
2. Retrieve the project archive "SERV1_StatUp.zip"
SIMATIC Manager - File - Retrieve...
3. As the destination directory in the dialog, select the directory in which your
project "My_Project" has already been stored
Result ...is the retrieved project "SERV1_StatUp" that you are now to commission.
ST-SERV1
Closing Exercise
SIEMENS
Exercise 4: Hardware Commissioning

LS7.1iW Con - f57_300_Station (Configuration) SERVI_Stardip] ji_1
:1 2<j
gation Ot Insert PLC View Qptions Window deli, LJJ
Dcairt-ta
(0) UR
PROFIBUS(1): DP master system (1)

PROFIBUS address OK?
3
4 DI32xDC24V I/O addresses OK?
5 D 0 32xD C24V/0.5A
6 DI8/D08x24V/0.5A
7 Al2x1264
8
9
10
PROFIBUS address OK?
CPU type OK? Module types OK?
Clock Memory MB10 OK? I/O addresses OK?
. ..,...\ Module Order number Firmware MPI ... I address Q add... Comment
2 V CPU 315-2 DP 6657 31 5-2AF01-0ABO 2

A.,17 PP 7C47..;'•
3
]
4 r DI 32xD C24V 6E57 321-113L00-0AA0 0 ..3
5 D 0 32xDC24V/0.5A 6E S7 322-1 BLOO-OAA0
6 D18/D08x24V/0.54 6E S7 323-1BH 00-QoA0 88 88
7 Al2x1213it 6E S 7 331-7KB 01.0AB 0 304...307 4 .7 —
8 •
R11,...1111,
CJUU
-. F•trsetc
y fJG rat.,
Press Fl to get Help. n A
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 4 .1 SITRAIN Training for

File: SERV1_15E.7 %I" Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task The hardware configuration and parameter assignments given in the project
"SERV1_StartUp" must be adapted accordingly to your actual training unit.
What to Do Check the parameterization data highlighted in the slide and make — as far as
necessary — the appropriate corrections.
15

SIEMENS
Exercise 5: Software Commissioning

DI
I 0.0 T_System_ON
I 0.1 T_System_OFF LSYSTEM
I 0.2 T_Jog_RIGHT L_MAN
I 0.3 T_Jog_LEFT L_AUTO
10.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect
I 0.5 T_M/A_Accept
11.0 T_Ackn_Fault L_Conv_Fault
"L_Bay1" "LBay2" "L_Bay_LB"

(Q 8.1) (Q 8.2) (Q 8.4)
"T_Bay1" "T_Bay2" "T_Bay_LB"
(I 8.1) (I 8.2) (I 8.4)

vg- Automation and Industrial Solutions
Task The given program is to fulfill exactly the same functions as the program that
you have created during the course.
The given S7 program is to be corrected by you and commissioned.
Note: The touchpanel program is error-free !
What to Do Check the following functions and — as far as necessary — correct the program:
1. Can you switch the operating modes "L_SYSTEM" (Q4.1), "L_MAN" (Q4.2)
and "L_AUTO" (Q4.3) on and off via the touchpanel?
2. Can you jog the conveyor motor to the right and to the left in the
MAN (Q4.2 = '1') operating mode?
3. While in AUTO mode (Q4.3 = '1'), are the parts placed at Bay 1 or Bay 2
transported through the light barrier?
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Exercise 6: Software Expansion

DI DO
1 0.0 T_System_ON a
1 0.1 T_System_OFF L_SYSTEM a 4.1
1 0.2 T_Jog_R1GHT L_MAN a Q 4.2
1 0.3 T_Jog_LEFT L_AUTO a Q 4.3
1 0.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect a
1 0.5 T_M/A_Accept a
a
a
1 1.0 T_Ackn_Fault L_Conv_Fault a Q 5.0
a left Jog right
"L_Bay1" "L_Bay2" "L_Bay3" "L_Bay_LB"

(Q 8.1) (Q 8.2) (Q 8.3) (C) 8.4)
"T_Bay1" "T_Bay2" "T_Bay3" "T_Bay_LB"
(1 8.1) (1 8.2) 8.3) (I 8.4)

Task The S7 program commissioned by you is now to be expanded in its functional

scope as follows:
1. MANUAL mode expansion:

The range in which a part placed on the conveyor can be moved by jogging
the conveyor motor is to be limited for safety reasons:
When jogging to the LEFT, the conveyor is to stop as soon as the part
reaches the proximity sensor "BAY1" (I 8.5) of Bay 1 (even when the "Jog
left" button is still pressed on the touchpanel).
When jogging to the RIGHT, the conveyor is to stop as soon as the part
reaches the light barrier "LB" (I 8.0) (even when the "Jog right" button is
still pressed on the touchpanel).
2. AUTO mode expansion:

Up until now, the transport functions could only be started from Bay 1 and
Bay 2. Expand the program so that transport can also be started from Bay 3.
Just as before, you should only be able to start a transport function from
where the part lies on the conveyor via that Bay's momentary contact.
As well, you must ensure that exactly only one part lies on the conveyor, that
is, is detected by the proximity sensors of Bays 1 to 3.
Furthermore, the indicator light at Bay 3 (Q8.3) is to perform the same as the
already configured lights at Bays 1 and 2:
- Continuous light at all bays when a new part can be laid on the conveyor
(all bays free)
- 1Hz flashing light at the bay where the part was placed and the conveyor
has not yet started
- 2Hz flashing light at all bays during conveyor movement

SIEMENS

Contents Page
Exercise Solutions ......... 2
Symbol List ......... 3
Symbol List ......... 4
Ch3 Ex1: Using the S7-300 Manuals ......... 5
Ch3, Ex2: Wiring the Signal Modules ......... 6
Ch8, Ex1 + 2: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16) / Calling FC 16 in OB 1 ......... 7
Ch9, Ex1 : Sensors and Symbols ......... 8
Ch9, Ex2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15) ......... 9
Ch9, Ex3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16) ....... 10
Ch9, Ex4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16 ....... 11
Ch9, Ex5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation ....... 12
Ch9, Ex6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15) ....... 13
Ch10, Ex2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18) ....... 14
Ch10, Ex3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17) ....... 15
Ch10, Ex4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19) ....... 16
Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 14 ....... 17
Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 16 ....... 18
•
Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17) ....... 19
Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Lock-out in FC15 ....... 20
Ch10, Add.-Ex6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging (FC16) ....... 21
Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC15) ....... 22
Ch13, Ex5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel (FC 42) ....... 26
Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Exercise Solutions
SIEMENS

•
Siemens AG 2008 All rights reserved. File: SERV1_16E.2 gam Automation and Industrial Solutions
Contents Page
Ch15: Closing Exercise: Overview ........ 27
Ch15: Software Commissioning (0B1) ........ 28
Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC14) ........ 29
Ch15: Software Expansions (FC14) ........ 36
ST-SERV1
Symbol List
Symbol Address Data type Comment

C_Conv Fault C 17 COUNTER Counter Conveyor faults
2 C Parts C 18 COUNTER Counter transported parts
3 DB Instance_F620_Fauft2 DB 2 FB 20 Instance DB for FB20, Evaluation of Fault 2
4 DB_Instance_FB20_Fault3 DB 3 FB 20 Instance DB for FB20, Evaluation of Fault 3
5 DB Parts DB 19 DB 19 DB with parts data
6 FB FaultEvaluation FB 20 FB 20 FB for evaluating faults
7 FC_Signal FC 14 FC 14 -FC Indicator lights + Horn
8 FC Mode FC 15 FC 15 FC Set operating modes
9 FC ConvMotor FC 16 FC 16 FC Control of conveyor motor
10 FC_Fautt FC 17 FC 17 FC Fault evaluation
11 FC_Count FC 18 FC 18 FC Count parts
12 FC Count Add FC 19 FC 19 FC Count parts using addition
13 FC_FauttEvaluation FC 20 FC 20 FC for evaluating faults
14 FC MM420 FC 42 FC 42 FC Control MM420
15 T System ON I 0.0 BOOL Momentary contact System ON
16 T_System_OFF I 0.1 BOOL Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact)
17 T_Jog_RIGHT I 0.2 BOOL Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact
18 T_Jog_LEFT I 0.3 BOOL Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact
19 S_M/A_ModeSelect I 0.4 BOOL Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MAN, '1'=AUTO
20 T_M/A_Accept I 0.5 BOOL Momentary contact, confirm operating mode
21 T_Ackn Fault I 1.0 BOOL Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement
22 S_Fault1 I 1.1 BOOL Simulate Fault 1, 0=OFF/1=ON
23 S Fautt2 I 1.2 BOOL Simulate Fault 2, 0=OFF/1=ON
24 S_Fault3 I 1.3 BOOL Simulate Fault 3, 0=OFF/1=ON
25 LB I 8.0 BOOL Light barrier
27 T Bay2 I 8.2 BOOL Momentary contact Bay 2
29 T_Bay-LB I 8.4 BOOL Momentary contact Light barrier bay
33 IVV Thumbw WV 2 WORD BCD thumbwheel
34 rIN State MM420 NV 42 WORD State word of MM420
35 WV Act MM420 NV 44 INT Actual speed of MM420
36 M_Flash_2Hz M 10.3 BOOL Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz
37 M_Flash_1 Hz M 10.5 BOOL Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz
38 M_Aux_System_ON M 15.1 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON
39 M_Aux_Man_ON M 15.2 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON
40 M_Aux_Auto ON M 15.3 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON
41 M_Aux_C17 M 15.7 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Counter-Conveyor faults
42 M_Aux_LB M 16.0 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier
43 M_Jog_RIGHT M 16.2 BOOL Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT
44 M_Auto RIGHT M 16.4 BOOL Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT
45 M_Conv Fault M 17.0 BOOL Memory bit Conveyor fault
50 M_Aux Auto M 18.0 BOOL Auxiliary memory bit Edge AUTO on
51 M_Aux_Count M 19.0 BOOL Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier
52 M_System ON_HMI M 30.0 BOOL Memory bit System ON (HMI)
53 M_System OFF HMI M 30.1 BOOL Memory bit System OFF (HMI)
54 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M 30.2 BOOL Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI)

Symbol List

55 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI M 30.3 BOOL Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI)
56 M_MIA_ModeSelect_HMI M 30.4 BOOL Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, '1'...
57 M_MiA_Acceist_HMI M 30.5 BOOL Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI)
58 M_Ackn_Fault_HMI M 31 .0 BOOL Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (HMI)
59 M_Bays_occup_HMI M 33.0 BOOL all Bays 1 to 3 occupied
60 M_Conv_Fault_HMI M 33.1 BOOL Memory bit Conveyor fault
61 M_MM420_0n_HMI M 40.0 BOOL Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI)
62 M_MM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI M 40.2 BOOL Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (HMI)
63 M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI M 40.3 BOOL Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (HMI)
64 M_SlaveFailure M 86.0 BOOL Memory bit DP Slave has failed
65 MB_SlaveAddress MB 87 BYTE DP address of failed slave
66 MW_ACT MW 20 INT Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
67 ki1W_SETP NW 22 INT Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp.
68 OB_Cycle OB 1 OB 1 OB for cyclic program
69 OB_SlaveFailure OB 86 OB 86 Error OB for slave failure
70 OB WarmRestart OB 100 OB 100 Warm restart OB
71 L_SYSTEM Q 4.1 BOOL Indicator light System ON
72 L_MAN Q 4.2 BOOL Indicator light MAN mode
73 L_AUTO Q 4.3 BOOL Indicator light Automatic mode
74 L_Restart_man Q 4.5 BOOL Indicator light for manual warm restart
75 L_Restart_aut Q 4.6 BOOL Indicator light for automatic warm restart
76 L_Conv_Fault Q 5.0 BOOL Indicator light Conveyor fault
79 L_Fautt3 Q 5.3 BOOL Indicator light Fault 3
80 L_Bayl Q 8.1 BOOL Indicator light Bay 1
83 L_Bay-LB Q 8.4 BOOL Indicator light Light barrier bay
84 K_Conv_RIGHT Q 8.5 BOOL Run conveyor RIGHT
85 K_Conv_LEFT Q 8.6 BOOL Run conveyor LEFT
86 Horn Q 8.7 BOOL Horn
87 QW_DigDisp OW 6 WORD BCD digital display
88 QW_Control_MM420 QW 42 WORD Control word for MM420
89 QW_Setp_MM420 GAN 44 INT Setpoint speed for MM420
90 OD_Conv_Monitoring T 17 TIMER Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode
91 VATI/O-Conveyor VAT 1
92 VAT_Numberformats VAT 2
ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for Exercise Solutions
Ch3, Exl: Using the S7-300 Manuals
1. How many racks with how many modules each can be installed in the
S7-300?
max. ..... 4 ........ racks with ...... 8 ....... modules each
2. The PS 307 power supply module, 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0 (5A output) is
designed for an input voltage of ...... 120 ........ VAC or ...... 230 ............ VAC
3. An S7-300 and its various modules rated at 24 VDC have a voltage
Tolerance Range of ...... 20.4 ........... VDC to ...... 28.8 ......... VDC
4. How many digital inputs and outputs can the CPU 314 address and how
large is the process-image input table (PII) and the process-image output table (PIQ)?
Process-image input table: ...128 ..... bytes = ....1024 ....... digital inputs
Process-image output table: 128 ...... bytes = ....1024 ....... digital outputs
5. At which voltage levels does the digital input module SM321; DI32/24V deliver
signal state "0": ...-30... V to .+5 .... V
signal state "'I': ...+15...V to ....+30 .. V
6. What is the maximum output current that the digital output module SM322;
D032; DC24V/0.5A delivers at
signal state "0": ....0.5.mA (residual current)
signal state '1 ": ....0.6...A
7. What is the maximum operating frequency of this output module?

for resistive load: ...100... Hz
for inductive load: ...0.5.. Hz
8. Is the output module short-circuit proof?

........ yes (electronically) ....................................................

SIEMENS
Ch3, Ex2: Wiring the Signal Modules
Mom. Contact 1 Mom. Contact 2 LED Power Supply
L+ L
00 0 0 17-
20
0 13-
16
00
DI/
DO
323
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_16E.6 qr Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1
Ch8, Ex1-2: Jogging the Conveyor Motor (FC 16) / Calling FC 16 in OB 1
OBI : cyclic Program

: Control the Conveyor
FC16
EN ENO
Symbol information:
FC16 FCConvMotor -- FC Control of conveyor motor
FC16 : Control Conveyor Motor

I
tietmork 1j: Jog to the right
10.2 10.3 Q8.5
Symbol information:
10_2 T_Jog_RIGHT -- Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact
10.3 T_Jog_LEFT -- Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact
Q8.5 K Conv RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
Nettiork 2 : Jog to the le ft
I0.2 10.3 Q8.6

I/I II 0
Symbol information:
Q8.6 K_Conv_LEFT -- Run conveyor LEFT

SIEMENS
Ch9, Exl : Sensors and Symbols

Task: In all three examples, the light should be on when S1 is activated and S2 is not activated!
Hardware
I I
OU 11 S1 I-‘ 2 I=‘ S1 I= S2 1=-- S1 I=1 S2
I I I I
I 1.0 I 1.1 I 1.0 I 1.1 I 1.0 I 1.1
Programmable Controller Programmable Controller Programmable Controller
Q 4.0 Q 4.0 Q 4.0
Software
4 )Light (1) Light
1 )Light
I 1.0 I 1.1 Q 4.0 1 1.0 1 1.1 Q 4.0 1 1.0 1 1.1 Q 4.0

OU LAD
) I -
I I ( ) -H- I C)
I 1.0 & 11.0 & 1 1.0 • &

[111 FBD
I 1.1 • Q 4.0 I 1.1 - - Q 4.0 1 1.1 Q4.0
A 11.0 A I 1.0 AN 11.0

MEI* AN I 1.1 A I 1.1 A I 1.1
= Q 4.0 = Q 4.0 = Q 4.0

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_16E.8 Ric Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1
Ch9, Ex2: Programming the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)
maw
FC15 : Mode Section
Indicator Light System On/Off
Q4.1
I0.0 SR
Q
I0.1
Symbol information:
I0.0 T_System_ON -- Momentary contact System ON
I0.1 T_System_OFF -- Momentary contact System OFF (NC contact)
Q4.1 L_SYSTEM -- Indicator light System ON
Q4.2
IO.S 10.4 SR
II IA Q-
Q4.1
IA
10.4
Symbol information:
I0.5 T_M/A_Accept -- Momentary contact, confirm operating mode
10.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect -- Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL
Q4.2 LMAN -- Indicator light MAN mode
04.3
10.5 10.4 SR
Q-
Q4.1
I/I
10.4
I/I
Symbol information:
I0.5 T_M/A_Accept -- Momentary contact, confirm operating mode •
10.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect -- Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL
Q4_3 LAUTO -- Indicator light Automatic mode

Ch9, Ex3: Conveyor in AUTO Mode (Expanding FC 16)
FC16 : Title:
Network 1: Jog to the right
Q4.2 10.2 10.3 M16.2

I I
Symbol information:
Q4.2 L_MAN -- Indicator light MAN mode
10.2 T_Jog_RIGHT -- Jog conveyor RIGHT, momentary contact
10_3 T_Jog_LEFT -- Jog conveyor LEFT, momentary contact
M16.2 M_Jog_RIGHT -- Memory bit Jog conveyor RIGHT
Network 2: Jog to the left
04.2 10.2 10.3 08.6

I I I/I
Symbol information:
Q4_2 L_MAN -- Indicator light MAN mode
Q8.6 KConvLEFT -- Run conveyor LEFT
Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor Motor in AUTO Mode
M16.4
18.5 18.6 18.1 SR
I I I/I 0-
18.5 18.6 18.2
04.3
I/1
18.0
I/1
Symbol information:
18.5 BAY1 -- Proximity sensor Bay 1
18.6 BAYZ -- Proximity sensor Bay 2
18.1 T_Bayl -- Momentary contact Bay 1
18.2 T_Bay2 -- Momentary contact Bay 2
Q4.3 L_AUTO -- Indicator light Automatic mode
18.0 LB -- Light barrier
M16.4 M_Auto_RIGHT -- Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT
Network 4: Control the Conveyor Motor to the right
M16.2 08.5
II
M16.4
Symbol information:
Q8.5 K_Conv_RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
ST-SERV1
Ch9, Ex4: Integrating the Edge Detection in FC 16
FC16 : Title:
04.2 10.2 10.3 M16.2

I I II I/1 1)-1
Symbol information:
Network 2: Jog to the le ft
04.2 10.2 10.3 08.6

I I I/1 I (
Symbol information:
08.6 XConvLEFT -- Run conveyor LEFT
P116.4
18.5 18.6 18.1 SR
II '1/I I 0-
18.5 18.6 18.2

I/I
04.3
I/I
18.0 M16.0
(P)
Symbol information:
18.6 BAYZ -- Proximity sensor Bay 2
18_1 T_Bayl -- Momentary contact Bay 1
M16.0 M_Aux_LB -- Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier
1116.2 08.5
II
M16.4
Symbol information:
Q8.5 KConvRIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT

Ch9, Ex5: Putting Indicator Lights + Horn (FC 14) into Operation
FC14 : Indicator Lights + Horn

Network 1: Indicator Light Bay 1
Q4.3 Q8.5 18.5 18.6 soo ppor.....

I/I
II I/I
Q4.3 18.5 18.6 H10.5
H II H Logic Error:
04.3 Q8.5 H10.3 Q 8.2 -> Q 8.1
II I I
Symbol information:
M10.5 M_Flash_lHz -- Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz
M10.3 M_Flash_2Hz -- Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz
Q8.2 L_Bay2 -- Indicator light Bay 2
04.3 Q8.5 18.5 18.6 08.2
Q4.3 18.5 18.6 H10.5
Q4.3 08.5 H10.3

II II II
Symbol information:
Network 3: Horn
Q8.5 M10.3 Q8.7

11
08.6
I Logic Error:
Remove negation
Symbol information:
08.6 K_Conv_LEFT -- Run conveyor LEFT
Q8.7 Horn -- Horn
ST-SERV1
Ch9, Ex6: Optimizing the Operating Mode Section (FC 15)
FC15 : Title:
Network 1: Indicator Light System On/Off
Q4.1
M15.1 SR
S Q-
Symbol information:
10.0 T_System_ON -- Momentary contact System ON
MI5.1 M_Aux_System_ON -- Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON
Q4.2
10.5 MI5.2 10.4 SR
(P) I/I Q-
Q4.1
Symbol information:
10.5 T_M/A_Accept -- Momentary contact, confirm operating mode
M15.2 M_Aux_Man_ON -- Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON
10.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect -- Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0. =MANUAL
Q4.3
10.5 M15.3 10.4 SR
II (P) Q-
04.1
I/I
10.4
I/I
Symbol information:
I0.5 T_M/A_Accept -- Momentary contact, confirm operating mode
M15.3 M_Aux_Auto_ON -- Edge auxiliary memory bit Auto mode ON
10.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect -- Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL,
Q4.3 LAUTO -- Indicator light Automatic mode

Ch10, Ex2: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 18, C 18)
FC18 : FC-Count using S5-Counter

Network 1: Count parts
C18
18.0 M18.0 04.3 S_CU
CU
PV CV BCD —0W6
Q4.1
I/I
Symbol information:
M18.0 M_Aux_Auto -- Auxiliary memory bit Edge AUTO on
04.1 L_SYSTEM -- Indicator light System ON
QW6 QW_DigDisp -- BCD digital display
ST-SERV1
Ch10, Ex3: Monitoring the Transport Functions (FC 17)
FC17 : Title:
Network Conveyor fault (time monitoring)
T17
Q4.3 Q8.5 S_ODT
S Q
S5T116S- TV BI
BCD
Symbol information:
Q8_5 K_Conv_RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
T17 OD_Conv_Monitoring -- Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode
Network 2: display Conveyor fault
H17.0
T17 SR M10.3 Q5.0
Il. 0 —
Symbol information:
M17.0 M_Conv_Fault -- Memory bit Conveyor fault
I1.0 T_Ackn_Fault -- Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement
M10.3 H_Flash_2Hz -- Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz
Q5.0 LConv_Fault -- Indicator light Conveyor fault

Ch10, Ex4: Counting the Transported Parts (FC 19)
FC19 : Count parts
Network 1: reset the counter to 0
04.1 MOVE
I/1 EN ENO
08.4 18.4 0— IN OUT —NWZO
I I
Symbol information:
Q8.4 L_Bay-LB -- Indicator light Light barrier bay
18.4 T_Bay-LB -- Momentary contact Light barrier bay
MW20 MW_ACT -- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
Network 2: count the parts in AUTO node
18.0 M19.0 04.3 ADDJ

(P) EN ENO
MW2O — IN1 OUT —NWZO
1— INZ
Symbol information:
18.0 LB -- Light. barrier
M19.0 M_Aux_Count -- Edge auxiliary memory bit Light barrier
Network 3: read in Setpoint and convert
BCD!
EN ENO
IW2 — IN OUT —11W22
Symbol information:
11E2 IWThumbw -- BCD thumbwheel
MWEZ MW_SETP -- Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp.
Network 4: Indicator Light ACTUAL=SETPOINT
CMP > I 04_3 08.4
MW20 — IN1
MWZ2 — INZ
Symbol information:
MW22 MW_SETP -- Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp.
Network 5: Display the actual no. of parts
L8CD
EN ENO
MWZO — IN OUT —QW6
Symbol information:
truzo MW_ACT -- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
0.16 QW_DigDisp -- BCD digital display
ST-SERV1
Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 14
FC14 : Indicator Lights Horn

Q4.3 08.5 18.5 18.6 M17.0 Q8.4

I I IA VI IA I/I VI
Q4.3 18.5 18.6 M10.5 M17.0 Q8.4
II I I IA II III VI
Q4.3 08.5 110.3
.1 I
Symbol imformatioa:
Q4.3 L_AUTO Indicator light Automatic mode
Q8.5 R_Conv_RIGHT Run conveyor RIGHT
18.5 BAY1 Proximity sensor Bay 1
M17.0 MConv_Fault Memory bit Conveyor fault
08.4 LBay-LB Indicator light Light barrier bay
M10.5 M_Flash_lHz Memory bit - flashing frequency 1Hz
110.3 /1 Flash_ZHz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz
08.1 L_Bayl Indicator light Bay 1
Q4.3 08.5 18.5 18.6 117.0 Q8.4 08.2

II IA IA IA VI IA
04.3 18.5 18.6 110.5 117.0 08.4
I1 VI 11 II VI VI
Q4.3 08.5 110.3
I I
Symbol iaformatioa:
04.3 LAUTO -- Indicator light Automatic mode
08.5 RConv_RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
M17.0 MConvFault -- Memory bit Conveyor fault
110.3 MFlash_2Hz -- Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz
08.2 LBay2 -- Indicator light Bay 2
Net-work 8:Horn
Q8.5 04.2 I110.3 Q8.7

1 I 1 I
08.6
I 1
Symbol information:
08.5 K_Conv_RIGHT Run conveyor RIGHT
Q8_6 K_Conv_LEFT Run conveyor LEFT
04.2 L_MAN Indicator light MAN mode
M10.3 M_Flash_2Hz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz
Q8_7 Horn Horn

Ch10, Ex3 - 4: Lock-out in FC 16
NW 1 and NW 2 are not modyfied
1116.4
18.5 18.6 18.1 SR
1 I 1/1 Q—
18.5 18.6
Q4.3
I/I
18.0 M16.0
1 1 (P)
1117.0
1 1
08.4
Symbol information:
M16.2 Q8.5
1 1 0-1
M16.4
Symbol information:
ST-SERV1
Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Counting the Conveyor Belt Fault Conditions (FC17)
FC17 : Title:
atellat : Conveyor fault (time monitoring)
117
Q4.3 08.5 S_0 DT
I I I S 0
SST#6S — TV BI
R BCD
Symbol information:
Q4_3 L_AUTO -- Indicator light Automatic mode
Network 2: display Conveyor fault
H17. 0
T17 SR M10.3 QS.0
- —______i
I I
11.0—
Symbol information:
117 OD_Conv_Monitoring -- Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode
I1.0 T_Ackn_Fault -- Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement
Q5.0 LConv_Fault -- Indicator light Conveyor fault
Network 3: count Conveyor faults
C17
M17.0 S_CD
I1------- CD
04.3 — S CV—...
Cf 3 — PV CV BCD
... —
Symbol information:
C17 C_Conv_Fault -- Counter Conveyor faults
Q4.3 L_AUTO -- Indicator light Automatic mode •
1111:

Ch10, Add.-Ex5: Lock-out in FC15
FC15 : Mode Section

04.1
I0.0 M15.1 SR
II
I0.1
I/I
Symbol information:
I0.0 T_System_ON -- Momentary contact System ON
M15.1 M_Aux_System_ON -- Edge auxiliary memory bit System ON
04.2
I0.5 M15.2 10.4 SR
II (P) S Q
Q4.1
I/I
10.4
Symbol information:
IO.S T_M/A_Accept -- Momentary contact, confirm operating mode
M1S.2 M_Aux_Man_ON -- Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON
10.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect -- Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: .0'=MANUAL,
04.2 L_MAN -- Indicator light MAN mode
Network 3j: Indicator Light AUTO Mode
Q4.3
10.5 H15.3 10.4 SR
1 (P) 1 1--S 0-
C17 M15.7
-1I (N)--
Q4.1
IA
10.4
VI
Symbol information:
10.5 T_M/A_Accept -- Momentary contact, confirm operating mode
10.4 S_M/A_ModeSelect -- Switch - Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL, .1'=AUTO
M15.7 M_Aux_C17 -- Edge auxiliary memory bit Counter-Conveyor faults

Ch10, Add.-Ex6: Timely Lock-out of the Conveyor Motor Jogging (FC16)
FC16 : Title:
Q4.2 10.2 10.3 T16 M16.2

IA IA 0-1
T1S
S_OFFDT
0—
SST#25— TV BI
BCD
Symbol information:
04.2 10.2 10.3 T15 Q8.6
T16
S_OFFDT
Q -
S5T#2S — TV BI
BCD
Symbol information:
ti

Ch12, Ex2: Rewiring using Absolute Addresses (FC 15)
FC15 : Mode Section

1
4fetmork 4: Indicator Light System On/Off
Q4.1
M30.0 SR
M30.1— R
Symbol information:
M30.0 M_System_ON_HMI -- Memory bit System ON (TP170)
M30.1 M_SystemOFFHMI -- Memory bit System OFF (TP170)
Q4.2
M30.5 M15.2 M30.4 SR
I I (p) 1/ Q-
Q4.1
IA
M30.4
Symbol information:
M30.5 M_M/A_Accept_HMI -- Memory bit, confirm operating mode (TP170)
M15.2 M_Aux_Man_ON -- Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON
M30.4 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI -- Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: .0..MANUAL
Q4_1 L_SYSTEM -- Indicator light System ON
04.3
M30.5 M15.3 M30.4 SR
I1 (p) Q-
04.1
N30.4
SyMbol information:
M30.5 M_M/A_Accept_HMI -- Memory bit, confirm operating mode (TP170)
M30.4 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI -- Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'=MANUAL
ST-SERV1
FC16 : Title:
Q4.2 M30.2 M30.3 M16.2
Symbol information:
M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI -- Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (TP170)
M30.3 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI -- Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (TP170)
04.2 1130.2 M30.3 Q8.6

I I I/I II
Symbol information:
M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI -- Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (TP170)
M30.3 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI -- Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (TP170)
NW 3 and NW 4 are not modyfied

FC17 : Title:
network 1: Conveyor fault (time monitoring)
T17
Q4.3 Q8.5 S_ODT
S 0
S5T#6S — TV BI
BCD — . .
Symbol information:
Q8.5 H_Conv_RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
Network 2: Title:
M17.0
T17 SR M10.3 05.0
0
I I 0-1
11.0
I I
M31.0
I I
Symbol information:
T17 OD_Conv_Monitoring Timer, Conveyor monitoring in Auto mode
I1.0 T_Ackn_Fault Momentary contact Fault acknowledgement
M31.0 M_Ackn_Fault_HMI Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (TP170)
M17.0 M_Conv_Fault Memory bit Conveyor fault
M10.3 M_Flash_ZHz Memory bit - flashing frequency 2 Hz
Q5.0 L_Conv_Fault Indicator light Conveyor fault
ST-SERV1
-
FC19 : Count parts
Q4.1 MOVE
IA EN ENO
Q8.4 18.4 0 — IN OUT MW20
Symbol information:
Q4.1 L_SYSTEM - - Indicator light System ON
Q8.4 L_Bay-LB - - Indicator light Light barrier bay
18.4 T_Bay-LB - - Momentary contact Light barrier bay
MW20 MILACT - - Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
Network 2: count the parts in AUTO mode
18.0 M19.0 04.3 AUDI

(P) EN ENO
MW20— IN1 OUT —111120
1— IN2
Symbol information:
18.0 LB - - Light barrier
Q4.3 L_AUTO - - Indicator light Automatic mode
MW20 MW ACT - - Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
CMP)=1 Q4.3 08.4

()-1
NW20— IN1
NW22— INZ
Symbol information:
MW20 MILACT Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
MW22 MW_SETP Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to be transp
Q4.3 L_AUTO - - Indicator light Automatic mode
Q8.4 LBay-LB - - Indicator light Light barrier bay
LBCD
EN ENO
MW20 — IN OUT —QW6
Symbol information:
MY20 MILACT - - Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported parts
QW_Dignsp - - BCD digital display

Ch13, Ex5: Controlling a Drive via the Touchpanel (FC 42)
FC42 : Control MM420

Motor ON
M40.0 MOVE
I 1------ EN ENO
1416:47F—IN OUT —QW42
Symbol information:
M40_0 M_ME420_0n_HMI -- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (TP170)
QW42 QWControlMM420 -- Control word for MM420
Network 2 : Motor OFF
M40.0 MOVE
EN ENO
W#16#47E — IN OUT —QW42
Symbol information:
M40.0 M_MM420_0n_HMI -- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (TP170)
Network 3: Jog Right
M40.2 M40.3 M40.0 MOVE

IA EN ENO
11#16#57E- IN OUT —QW42
Symbol information:
M40.2 M_MM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (TP170)
M40.3 M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (TP170)
M40.0 M_MM420_0n_HKI Switch On Memory bit MM420 (TP170)
QW42 QW_Control_MM420 Control word for MM420
Network 4: Jog Left
M40.3 M40.2 M40.0 MOVE

I/1 EN ENO
W#16#67E — IN OUT —QW42
Symbol information:
M40.3 M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI -- Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (TP170)
M40.2 M_MR420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI -- Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (TP170)
M40.0 M_MM420_0n_HMI -- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (TP170)
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Ch15: Closing Exercise: Overview

Hardware Commissioning:
Error What doesn't fit in the given HW Config? Correction in the given HW Config
1 CPU type and I/O module types ...replace with CPU actually used
." set accordingly to the actually used

2 PROFIBUS addresses of ET200 and MM420
ET200 and MM420
ET200: ...set to I/O address 8 according to the

3
Module types and I/O addresses given S7 program
Software Startup
Error Malfunction Error Location Correction
System (Q4.1) can not CALL FC 15 insert

1 OB 1, Network 1
be switched on
Jog Cony. Right = M 16.2

2 FC 16. Network 1 = Q 8.5 M.
doesn't work
Cony. doesn't transport

3 FC 16, Network 3 FN 18.0 11111. FP 18.0
the parts through the LB
SIMATIC S7 Date. 18.09.2009

File: SERV1_16E.27 gir Automation and Industrial Solutions

Ch15: Software Commissioning (0B1)
OBI : "Main Program Sweep {Cycle)"

Network 1: Mode section
insert
Network 2: Control the Conveyor Motor
CALL FC15
FC16
EN ENO
Symbol information:
FC16; FCCorfollot or - FC Control of conveyor motor
Network 3: Indicator Lights + Horn
FC14
EN ENO
Symbol information:
FC14 FC_Signal FC Indicator lights + Horn
Network 4 : Count parts
FC19
EN ENO
Symbol information:
FC19 FC_Count_Add -- FC Count parts using addition
Network 5: Conveyor monitoring
FC17
EN ENO
Network 6: Control 121420
FC42
EN ENO
Symbol information:
FC42 FC 241420 - FC Control 11/1420
ST-SERV1
Exercise Solutions
Ch15: Software Commissioning (FC14)
FC14 : Indicator lights + Horn
Network 1: Indicator Light bay 1
Q4.3 08.5 18.5 18.6 M17.0 Q8.4 Q 8.1

-
II I/I I/I I/I I/I lid 0 1
Q4.3 Ie.s 18.6 H10.5 M17.0 Q8.4

II II VI II I/I I/I
Q4.3 Q8.5 M10.3
1 I
Symbol information:
04.3 L_AUTO -- Indicator light Automatic mode
Q8.4 L_Bay -LB -- Indicator light Light barrier bay
Q8.1 L_Bayl -- Indicator light Bay 1
04.3 Q8.5 18.5 18.6 M17.0 Q8.4 08.2

I/I I/I I/I
Q4.3 18.5 18.6 H10.5 M17.0 Q8.4
II II II III I/1
04.3 Q8.5 H10.3
Symbol information:
Network 3: Horn
Q8.5 04.2 1110.3 Q8.7

II 1 1 ()-
1
Q8.6
Symbol information:
08.5 K_Conv_RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
Q8.7 Horn -- Horn

FC15 : Mode Section

Q4.1
M30.0 M15.1 SR
Symbol information:
M30.0 M_System_ON_HMI -- Memory bit System ON (HMI)
M30.1 M_SystemOFFHMI -- Memory bit System OFF (HMI)
Q4.2
M30.5 M15.2 M30.4 SR
II (P) 1/1— S
Q4.1
I/1 QL
M30.4
Symbol information:
M30.5 M_M/A_Accept_HMI -- Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI)
M1S.2 M_Aux_Man_ON -- Edge auxiliary memory bit Manual mode ON
M30.4 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI -- Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'..4LU
Q4.3
M30.5 M15.3 M30.4 SR
—
0
Q4.1
I/1
M30.4
I/I
Symbol information:
M30.5 M_M/A_Accept_HMI -- Memory bit, confirm operating mode (HMI)
M30_4 M_M/A_ModeSelect_HMI -- Memory bit Operating Mode Preselect: '0'.=MA/
ST-SERV1
FC16 : Title:
Network 1: Jog conveyor motor to the Right Q8.5 -> M 16.2
Q4.2 M30.2 M30.3 T16

If
TIS
S_OFFDT
0—
SST#2S — TV BI
BCD —...
Symbol information:
M30.2 M_Conv_Jog_RIGHT_HMI -- Memory bit Jog Conveyor RIGHT (HMI)
M30.3 M_Conv_Jog_LEFT_HMI -- Memory bit Jog Conveyor LEFT (HMI)
Network 2: Jog conveyor motor to the Left
Q4.2 M30.2 M30.3 TiS Q8.6

1 /1 IA }-
1
T16
S_OFFDT
Q —
SST#28— TV BI
R BCD
Symbol information:
08.6 K_ConvLEFT -- Run conveyor LEFT

Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor motor in AUTO mode
M16.4
18.5 18.1 SR
I I
18.6 18.2
04.3
1/1
18.0 M16.0
II
M17.0
II ->
08.4
I
Symbol information:
M16.4 MAuto_RIGHT -- Memory bit Conveyor AUTO RIGHT
Network 4: Control the conveyor motor to the Right
H16.2 Q8.5
II
N16.4
SyMbol information:
ST-SERV1
FC17 : Title:
etuark : Conveyor fault (time monitoring)
T17 M17.0
Q4.3 Q8.5 S_ODT SR M10.3 Q5.0
------
II I ------ S
1 Q S Q 1
S5T#6S — TV BI M31.0 — It
BCD
Symbol information:
Q8.5 H_Conv_RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
M31.0 M_Ackn_Fault_HMI -- Memory bit, acknowledge conveyor fault (HMI)
Q5.0 L_Conv_Fault -- Indicator light Conveyor fault
Network 2: Count Conveyor faults
C17
M17.0 S_CD
I I------ CD
Q4.3 — S CV —...
C#3 PV CV BCD
Symbol information:

FC19 : Count parts

Q4.1 MOVE
I/I EN ENO
08.4 18.4 0- IN OUT —MWZO
I I
Symbol information:
Q4.1 L_SYSTEM Indicator light System ON
Q8.4 L_Bay-LB Indicator light Light barrier bay
18.4 T_Bay-LB Momentary contact Light barrier bay
MW20 MW_ACT Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported
Network 2: count the parts in AUTO mode
18.0 M19.0 Q4.3 AD DI

(P) I I------ EN ENO
MATZO- IN1 OUT —111120
INZ
Symbol information:
MI620 MW ACT -- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported
CMP>=I 04.3 08.4

------
I I C)
131120— IN1
MWZZ-,INZ
Symbol information:
MW20 MW_ACT -- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported
MW22 MW_SETP -- Memory word, SETPOINT quantity of parts to
Q8.4 LBay-LB -- Indicator light Light barrier bay
LIMO
EN ENO
TIWZO- IN OUT —0116
Symbol information:
MW20 MW_ACT -- Memory word, ACTUAL quantity of transported
QW6 QW_DigDisp -- BCD digital display
ST-SERV1
FC42 : Title:
Network 1: Motor ON
M40.0 MOVE
I I------ EN ENO
W#16#47F — IN OUT —QW42
Symbol information:
M40.0 M_MM420_0n_HMI -- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI)
Network 2: Motor OFF
M40.0 MOVE
1/1 — EN ENO
W#16#47E- IN OUT —QW42
Symbol information:
M40.0 M_MM420_0n_HMI -- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI)
Network 3: Jog to the Right
M40.2 M40.3 M40.0 MOVE

EN ENO
W#16#57E- IN OUT —Q11142
Symbol information:
M40.2 M_MM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI -- Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (HMI)
M40.3 M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI -- Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (HMI)
M40.0 M_HM420_0n_HMI -- Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI)
QW42 QW_Control_HM420 -- Control word for HM420
Network 4: Jog to the Left
M40.3 M40.2 M40.0 MOVE

II I/I EN ENO
W#16#67E- IN OUT
•
Symbol information:
M40.3 M_MM420_Jog_LEFT_HMI Memory bit MM420 Jog LEFT (HMI)
M40.2 M_HM420_Jog_RIGHT_HMI Memory bit MM420 Jog RIGHT (HMI)
M40.0 M_MM420_0n_HMI Switch On Memory bit MM420 (HMI)
QW42 QWControlHM420 Control word for MM420

Ch15: Software Expansions (FC14)
All bay indicator lights
show the same behavior:
FC14 : Indicator lights + Horn -> query all bay proximity
Network 1: Indicator Light bay 1 switches
Q4.3 Q8.5 18.5 18.6 18.7 M17.0 Q8.4 Q8.1

1 1 1/1 ... : 0-1
04.3 18.5 18.6 18.7 M10.5 M17.0 Q8_4
II I/I ICI
Q4.3 1671.......... Af675 ..............
1
Symbol information:
18_7 BAY3 Proximity sensor Bay 3
Q8_4 L_Bay-LB Indicator light Light barrier bay
Q8.1 L_Bayl Indicator light Bay 1
04.3 08.5 I8.5 18.6 M17.0 08.4 Q8.3

II I/I --
: VI IA /1 0-1
Q4.3 18.5 18.6 18.7 M10.5 M17.0 08.4
1 1 I/I 1 1 I/I 1
04.3 'dirt ...... Wiry ................
II II
Symbol information:
Q8.3 L_Bay3 Indicator light Bay 3
ST-SERV1
new NW for
indicator light
Bay 3
04.3 Q8.5 18.6 18.7 M17.0 08.4 Q8.3
s I/I I/I
04.3 18.5 18.6 • 18.7 18.7 M10.5 M17.0 Q8.4
/I II I/I II I/I ICI
Q4.3 08.5 2110.3
I I
Symbol information: All bay indicator lights

Q4.3 L_AUTO Indicator show the same behavior:
08.5 K_Conv_RIGHT Run convey
18.5 BAY1 Proximity -> query all bay proximity
18.6
18.7
BAY2
BAYS
Proximity
Proximity se
___ switches
Th.„ T
Q8.3 L_Bay3 Indicator light Bay 3
Network 4: Horn
Q8.5 04.2 1110.3 08.7

II II
08.6
I I
Symbol information:
08.5 K_Conv_RIGHT -- Run conveyor RIGHT
Q8.6 KConv_LEFT -- Run conveyor LEFT
Q8.7 Horn -- Horn

FC16 : Title:
Network 1: Jog conveyor motor to the Right
Q4.2 M30.2 M30.3 T16 I8.0 .•. M16.2

I I I I III
•• ........
T15
S OFFDT
Q —
Jog RIGHT
only up to LB S5TO2S- TV BI
R BCD —...
Symbol information:
18_0 LB -- Light barrier
Network 2j: Jog conveyor motor to the Left

•.........•
04.2 H30.2 H30.3 T15 • 18.5 Q8.6
I I III -I I III I/I •
........ • 116
S_OFFDT
0
Jog LEFT
only up to Bay1 S5T/12S- TV BI
BCD
Symbol information:
ST-SERV1
Network 3: Memory bit Conveyor motor in AUTO mode
.... ti..... M16.4

18.7 18.6 18.5 Is.1 ; SR
1-H-S
18.7 18.5 18.6 18.2
18.6 18.5 18.7 18.3 •

I/I
•
Q4.3
1/
18.0 M16.0
I (p) Conveyor Start
M17.0 possible from
1 1 all bays
08.4
Symbol information:
18_7 BAY3 -- Proximity sensor Bay 3
18_6 BAY2 -- Proximity sensor Bay 2
Q8_4 L_Bay-LB -- Indicator light Light barrier bay
Network 4: Control the conveyor motor to the Right
M16.2 08.5
-I 1 C)-1
M16.4
Symbol information:

SIEMENS
Training and Support
SIEMENS 1011111001
• 11•11•0111•0110•1 7/110,01
• Mr...V. c■ Ome•Hia•
•••••••••■
• •••••■■ ••■■•
.1••••• ■••••■••
lirmemelgessen•weneare
.••■•.• ••■■•••■• •■•■

Rtr Automation and Industrial Solutions
Siemens AG 2008. AS rights reserved. File: SERV1_17E.1
Contents Page
Do You Still have Questions about our Learning Offers? ..........2

www.siemens.com/sitrain or sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld ..........3
SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation 4
SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation 5
Do You Need Service & Support ? 6
Know-How in the Service & Support Portal 7
Communication in the Service & Support Portal 8
... just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 1/2 9
... just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 2/2 ........10

Automation and Industrial Solutions Page 1 Training and Support
SIEMENS
Do You Still have Questions about our Learning Offers?
We'll help you!
... With the Infoline:

Tel 01805 23 56 11
Fax 01805 23 56 12
he Intern t:
siemens /sitrain
4
Siemens AG 2008. All rights reserved. File: SERV1_178.2 %■T Automation and Industrial Solutions
ST-SERV1
SITRAIN Training for Training and Support
SIEMENS
www.siemens.com/sitrain or sitrain.automation.siemens.com/sitrainworld
Acrotess http://streineutomatron.semax.cornistrernworkdi LI fi7 G°
Lairs
re
SIEMENS
SITRAINTM - Training Courses

by Siemens for Automation and
Industrial Solutions
Getting directly applicable know-how fast -
practical tralning courses from the
manufacturer!
In over 200 locations in 62 countries, Strain oilers tramp
courses for Siemens Industry products and the interplay of
the products 0 systems. Thts worldwide presence makes t
possible tot vailo build up know-how on site—wherever
you wish your training curse.
•
In addrtron to traditional classroom trainng courses, you can
acquire your krrwlevige wth the help of rrinovalive
and communications media such as Learning with Web Based,'
Tiering.
Training Topics Worldwide > New Training front SITRARI'.?

You ere looking for a Paring °arse on a specific product and would like to know where n
-
the world this course is offered, Here you wil Ind an overview of the worldwide tree wog Gal In Contact
courses on offer.
> SITRAIW. worldmap
> Arnomation Systems > Low Voltage Controls and DiSll ibution > SITRA111`. contacts worldwide
> Communication Ilet works > More Ti Miring Courses by Siemens
> throes Technology > Process Automation I SITRAIN'. Worlehencie z.1 CI
0 Electrical Installation Technology > Sensor s. Test and Measurement
1
_1
File: SERV1_17E.3 NIT. Automation and Industrial Solutions
The complete course selections are accessible through the following links:
www.siemens.de/sitrain or
www.siemens.com/sitrain
Course Search With Course Search it is possible, through various search filters, such as,
keyword, target group etc., to find your desired course selections. The filters
can also be combined.
Top Links With Top Links, various course selections can be accessed directly, such as,
SIMATIC S7, SINUMERIK solution line ...
Training News Here, new SITRAIN course selections and actions are presented at a glance.
Course Catalog The Course Catalog enables you to find the desired course through learning
paths or through the structure of the Siemens Mall.

SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation
Service personnel, Operators, Users, Programmers, Commissioning Decision makers, Sales

Maintenance personnel engineers, Project engineers personnel, Project managers,
Project members,
W8 2) wATZ Programmers, Commissioning
engineers, Project engineers,
PLC's for Beginners (WBT) PLC's for Beginners (WBT)
Service personnel,
Maintenance personnel
Micromaster 420 (WBT) PROFIBUS (WBT)
SIMATIC S7 SIMATIC S7
TIA Service Training 1 TIA Programming 1
SIMATIC TIA for
Non-Technicians
wAT4
WinCC flexible (WBT) WinCC flexible (WBT)
PROFIBUS (WBT) MICROMASTER 420 (WBT)
TIA Service Training 2 TIA Programming 2 Production Automation
with TIA
WRIO) wRT2)
Industrial Ethernet (WBT) Industrial Ethernet (WBT)
Siemens Certified Service
WinCC flexible (WBT) Technician Level 1 WinCC flexible (WBT)
TIA Service Training 3 TIA Programming 3
Exam for Siemens certified Exam for Siemens Certified

Service Technician Level 2 Programmer
Learning path ST 2 ST 4

ST-SERV1
Page 4
SIEMENS
SIMATIC S7 Courses on Totally Integrated Automation
Service personnel, Operators, Users, Programmers, Commissioning Decision makers, Sales

Maintenance personnel engineers, Project engineers personnel, Project managers,
Project members,
Programmers, Commissioning
engineers, Project engineers,
Service personnel,
Maintenance personnel
Mtcroma star 420 t WI3TY:3 4
SIMATIC 57 SIMATIC 57
TIA Programming 1
tfdlik,
TIA Service Training 1
it
Non Technicians
wIrrn
MICRoMASTER 420 (WEl"
SIMATIC S7
TIA Programming 2 Produ lion Automation
with TIA
mat ethernet *' ra

Siemens Certified Service
.inCC flexible IWET)
Technician Level 1
SIMATIC S7
TIC 57
IA Service Training 3 TIA Programming 3
Exam for Siemens Certified Exam for Siemens Certified

Service Technician Level 2 Programmer
Learning path ST 2 ST 4
SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 1111

,r;
Sitrain Certified Program
• The SITRAIN Certification Program is the new international certification

program from SITRAIN
• The SITRAIN Certification Program consists of different modules in which

you can participate
• After passing the examination of a module, the participant receives an

international diploma and certificate

SIEMENS
Do You Need Service & Support ?

Adrenal IC Ittpollsupport.eutoination.samens.can/WW/Isap.dtMuncacslissosinfoautadwoseus
Li El endow, w I two ' fp sow Di
SIEMENS siemans.com Intranet
International -s Automation and Drives E q3anoll Contact I Semen
Automation and Drives I Product Support I Applications & 1 oohs Services !Firm glaring I For um
Service & Support
I. tigri 1 Register [Advanced] Se artti
Supp Subwribe to our newsletter now

4 world wide support
Release for delaery, SIMOTION C240
7 Pon, T-Tap PRO Cornedor Released fa Deivery
SalesfDekvery Release Basic Versions of the Model IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7 V5.20 SP4
I Cheese a rout
APPlicatun sample Mir degnosis end set up of ETXOS FC via Too:Peened TPI 708
nrySupport -s re, as
led-help
Ertee your specific ;sabot Int median Wow to Welty go to our globe Menne we webs** enact specr -0 to personal:cabal
extract the IMP related entries from ea globel dateesse FAGS, menial& downbede and approvelskertil cations
Protect Nese or Pan Wenner 4 Product Support

For automaton system nteraction end connectally
Wenn.. old Woe to nantaban examples, samples.
Search Teed (hay wads) demonstration systems and more'
4 Application & Tools
Support by experts worldwide
l
le= Ones Help
en Weal Toe
View eesong careeredions
-
and talk to other users sboal Send your question drectir to a Siemens !anneal ni t
specific scaliest applications and issues. Please note the expert Ws our aerie Support Request
you we reed to Login to actively partcpate
-8 Support Request
A Now start your discussion math other users
Our service offer

SWAMI
• HM0111011 CM Vs
Our Service products are designed to meet yap support needs to Its Mire We cycle or your nelallatat entomb:in LMT cad
4 Spare parts and repairs 4 Technical consulting

User wee
Service on-see 4 Configuring and Software engineering
4 Optimization and modernization 4 Technical Support kennel

Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.6
W Automation and Industrial Solutions
Under www.siemens.com/automation/service&support the Service &

Support portal offers online access to the wide range of information and
services regarding the Automation & Drives portfolio whenever required.
Online support is divided into two principle topics:
Know-How • Product support:

Technical information and downloads for products
(manuals, FAQs, software updates, etc.)
• Applications & Tools:
Automation solutions
(solution examples, system descriptions, demo versions, calculators, tools
etc.)
• Services:
Information on wide range of services offered
by Service & Support (contacts, repairs etc.)
Communication • Forum:
Direct customer - customer communications in case of technical questions
• Support Request:
Technical requests are answered by experts
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
Know-How in the Service & Support Portal

Adnue htti 1 survort seutornabon ml Wectaaln to I Unks
.cornIww *tic drf unc a.cs.f
Snap ty
1,-.4111L4i.z,
SIEMENS sinntfins.com Intranet
International )Automation and Drives Itslianta paooll rf.:Z Contact i nfamy
Automation and Drives I Product Support I Applications & Tools I Services Information I Forum
Service • Support !ogint Register [Afwara-mf]
Delivery
IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7 V524 SP/
S FC vie Touchpenel TP17013
Product Support
Services & Infos
Techn. information and Information on range of
btormalion below to quid* to Our glabal dobbin. and explore the
downloads for products s trom our global database FACts, mammas, dovenloads and approvals
services offered
4 Product Support
Prock.rct None or Part
or sttornabon system internam and c
cbcii below 10, erbecatIon examPle7 . 7.7007.
4 field Semite
Search Text (key words) aeon systems and more
Tnni
4 Sweepers
-1J■nnhr.
Applications & Tools

Support by experts world,
Information on
specific prodixt
View exestrog carwersations end let
aorsceccs and
you we need to Login to actively pa
automation solutions
A Now start your discussion and er users
Our service offer

SIEMENS
4 Wormetion maw
One Service products are dessgned to meet your support needs la the elite lie cycle or Your ttStalabbn- Automation Value Card
-t Spare parts and repairs Technical consulting
Warfel
w User stew
- Service on-site -a Configuring and Software engineering
-a Optimization and modernization • Technical Support

SIMATIC S7 Date:
File:
18.09.2009
SERV1_17E.7 kV Automation and Industrial Solutions
General The online support with its comprehensive information system and many types
of services is available around the clock. From product support over service
information to interactive services, online support is always your first step you
need to take for obtaining a quick solution.
Product Support Profound expertise in our products and systems and up-to-date information are
the Product Support's support know-how basis in form of FAQs, downloads of,
for example, updates / upgrades, up-to-date product information from
Marketing & Sales, manuals in electronic form in PDF format, test certificates
and characteristics
Applications & Tools Applications & Tools is the new platform for solutions and system overviews in
the Service & Support portal. Applications & Tools help you solve your
automation tasks. This support is provided in the form of programming
examples and tools, background knowledge, functional descriptions,
recommendations on possible actions, performance data etc. The focus is not
on the individual product but rather on the individual products working together.
Services Here you can find our complete range of services and detailed information on
our Service & Support processes and a database containing the contact
persons.
Information Are you looking for the latest Service & Support brochures - or do you want to
know at which trade show you can meet us personally? All of this and much
more can be found under "Information".

SIEMENS
Communication in the Service & Support Portal
SIEMENS 4 siemens.com I ntranet
International Automation and Drives Genteel I Stamp
Automation and Drives Home I Product Support I Applications & Tools I Services I Information I Forum
Service & Support
Loon I RecKler
bscrIbe to our
4
Release for delivery, SIMOTION C240
4
7/Er Power T-Tap PRO Connector Released for Delivery Choose a country
4
Sales/Delivery Release, Basic Versions of the Model IPC 840 P4 for SIMATIC PCS 7
4
Application sample for diagnosis and set up of ET2005 FC via Touchpanel TP170B
Technical Forum
Self-help
Discussion platform for
Search Product Support Documents Browse Support Docu
customers
melon below to quickly Go to our global database
om our global database. FAQs, manuals, clownloa, and appro s ce ic Ions
-0 Product Support Contact
Online requests to the A&D
For automation system interaction and connectivity Contacts worldwide
hotline questions, click below for application examples, samples,
-0 Field Service
demonstration systems and more
Go 4 Application & Tools Spare parts
Help
Support by experts worldwide
Onins risc
lechnical Forum the Siemens expert
Guided Tour
View existing conversations and talc to other users about Send your question directly to a Siemens technical support
specific product applications and Issues Please note that expert via our online Support Request
-
you will need to Login to actively participate.

4121 Support Request
es Now start your discussion with other users
Our service offer

SIEMENS
IIIPMEMILIMPLIMIPPAPPARIk

File: SERV1_17E.8 %Or Automation and Industrial Solutions
Technical Forum In addition to the comprehensive scope of services, we support the direct dialog
among experts with the help of modern web technology. The new Technical
Forum is an attractive discussion platform (English and German) where users
and experts can exchange information.
Support Request With the online Support Request you will always find direct answers to your
questions. In the online screens you can describe your requests. Through the
knowledge base you will immediately be informed about possible solutions. If
the suggested solution does not resolve your problem, you can send the web
form directly to your team of experts in Technical Support (Hotline).
ST-SERV1
SIEMENS
..• just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 1/2
SIEMENS 4, siemens.com I ntranet
International ->Automation and Drives Deutsch I Francais] Itahanoi EsparlelI °PIZ Contact I Siternap
Automation and Drives Home Product Support Applications & Tools I Services I Information I Forum
Service & Support Login I Register
-4Subscribe to our newsletter now.

A clearly structured, user-friendly navigation in a
"Product tree" or an Index SIMATIC PCS 7 V5.2 0 SP4
-ral el TP1708
Automation and Drives Automation and Drives

Service & Support Service & Support
Product tree Index (A-Z) Product tree Index (A-Z) _

database and explore the product s
downloads and approvelskertificat
An intelligent,
Product Information ABCDEFGHI J L ft rduct Support
comprehensive
• Drive Technology HOP ORSTUVW X Y s,,,-,terri inter action and connectivity Search function
below for application examples, sermls-_____
Automation systems Search in the Index
yrterri, and more
Go
9 J Communication/Networls -
n Spare parts
alication & Tools
9 Lov.Voltage Controls
Help
9 Electrical Installation Technology
-
f-=2 Online Help
• Process automation
Notes:
Guided Tour
9 J Sensor technology, measuring and t ion directly to a Siemens technical support
The Index is the fast access to our
• Poorer supplies Product Support. Support Request
9 _j Safety systems - Safety Integrated port Request
9 J Industries Select a letter from the above

overview of make use of our Index
9J Service search.
SIEMENS

To find the required information, you can use the intelligent Search function and
a the user-friendly navigation:
Search An intelligent and comprehensive search function provides you with the relevant
results.
• Automatic recognition of key words

• Automatic spell-check
• Automatic sorting of the hitlist based on topicality
Navigation You can also do a targeted search in the product tree to obtain
the required information. Use the index for easy selection of the product.

SIEMENS
... just a few mouse clicks away from the required information 2/2
SIEMENS -) siernens.corn Intranet
International Automation and Drives Deutsch' Franca1A Itall no/ Espanol

-
Carted! StaMag
Automation and Drives Horne 1 Product Support Applications & Tools I Services I htforrnation I Forum
Service & Support
Loge; I Register (Advanced) Search
Functions:
Forum: Experts exchange in forum contributions
Newsletter: Always up-to-date thanks to daily news on pre-selected

topics
Support Request
-
Jechnischeoeien L2 INN trimidw Mon Login
myTree: Define your personal,

transparent product tree
'llachaairee vans
IMutterrnann 'Michael
Personal data is automatically filled Imintermennall•enline.de

'Telefon
1.49 123 45678
in forms, e.g. in the • Finto Abtellung
ITestcompieve 'Quaid&
Support Request Aare* 'PLZ 'Sue
"Musterstrasse 3 1 4- 1Musterstildt
73

Registration After registering with our service "mySupport", you can utilize our complete
range of online services after entering your data only once.
You will then have exclusive access to the following functions:
Your personal newsletter

Through the Automation and Drives Newsletter system you receive daily, up-
to-date news on selected topics - sent direct to your mailbox. As a mySupport
user, you can individually adjust the mailing options.
myTree Your personal product tree. As a mySupport user, you can adjust the product
tree so that it only shows those products and services from the comprehensive
A&D range that are important to you.
Thus you can always maintain an overview and find the required information
faster.
Online Support Request

You need to enter your personal data only once and they will be automatically
entered in the Support Request forms. You don't have to repeatedly enter the
same information in every form which saves you time for more important
things.
myForum Direct access to our Technical Forum. As mySupport user you also
automatically have direct access to our Technical Forum
ST-SERV1
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Gleiwitzer Str. 555
90475, NURNBERG
DEUTSCHLAND
www.siemens.corn/automation

TIA Service Training 1 S PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

TIA Service Training 1 S PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TIA Service Training 1 S PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SN3lA1315 •A•usnpu!

suo s Tinsnpui pup

SIEMENS 2. Training Units and Addressing

Information and Training 3. Installation/Maintenance of the

SIMATIC S7 6. Hardware Configuration

TIA-Service Training 1 7. Hardware Commissioning

8. Block Architecture and Block Editor

10. Digital Operations

This document was produced for training purpose.

Infoline Tel: 01805 23 56 11

Version V5.9.1 20.

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 2.1 SITRAIN Training for

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

Upon completion of the chapter the participant will ...

have an overview of the SIMATIC S7 system family

be familiar with the S7-300 and S7-400 automation systems

have an overview of the modules available for these automation

understand the concept of "Totally Integrated Automation" (T.I.A.)

be familiar with the programming devices

be familiar with the PC requirements for working with STEP7

be familiar with the tools of the STEP7 basic programming package

have an overview of the most important tools used in the T.I.A.

SIMATIC S7 li SITRAIN Training for

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

SIMATIC PG SIMATIC Software

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 SITRAIN Training for

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

What does "Totally Integrated Automation" Mean

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 111 SITRAIN Training for

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

The SIMATIC S7/C7 and WinAC Controllers

Lower and complete

SIMATIC S7 - 200 Logo

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 SITRAIN Training for

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

S7-200 Micro Controller

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009

Mode Selector For manual mode selection of the CPU:

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

S7-200: Modules / Expansion Modules (EM)

I / 0 Modules Function Modules (FM) Communications

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 SITRAIN Training for

Expansion • Digital input modules:

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 1 SITRAIN Training for

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 21 SITRAIN Training for

Signal Modules • Digital input modules: 24VDC, 120/230VAC

Function Modules Perform "special functions":

Communications Provide the following networking facilities:

Accessories Bus connectors and front connectors

SITRAIN Training for ST-SERV1

S7-300: CPU Design

SIMATIC S7 Date: 18.09.2009 SITRAIN Training for

Mode Selector MRES = Memory reset function (Module Reset)